AI Tipiṭaka Translations

Hide English Translation

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Vinayapiṭake

In the Vinaya Piṭaka

Parivāra-aṭṭhakathā

Parivāra Aṭṭhakathā

Soḷasamahāvāro

The Sixteen Great Vāras

Paññattivāravaṇṇanā
Description of the Paññatti Vāra

Visuddhaparivārassa, parivāroti sāsane;

Of the Visuddha Parivāra, the Parivāra in the Sāsana;
Of the Dhammakkhandha's body, after the Khandhakas.

Saṅgahaṃ yo samāruḷho, tassa pubbāgataṃ nayaṃ;

That which has ascended to the Saṅgaha, its previously arrived method;
Having abandoned that, now I will do, a description of the not-obvious meaning.

1.Tatthayaṃ tena bhagavatā…pe… paññattanti ādinayappavattāya tāva pucchāya ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – yo so bhagavā sāsanassa ciraṭṭhitikatthaṃ dhammasenāpatinā saddhammagāravabahumānavegasamussitaṃ añjaliṃ sirasmiṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā yācito dasa atthavase paṭicca vinayapaññattiṃ paññapesi, tena bhagavatā tassa tassa sikkhāpadassa paññattikālaṃ jānatā, tassā tassā sikkhāpadapaññattiyā dasa atthavase passatā; apica pubbenivāsādīhi jānatā, dibbena cakkhunā passatā, tīhi vijjāhi chahi vā pana abhiññāhi jānatā, sabbattha appaṭihatena samantacakkhunā passatā, sabbadhammajānanasamatthāya paññāya jānatā, sabbasattānaṃ cakkhuvisayātītāni tirokuṭṭādigatāni cāpi rūpāni ativisuddhena maṃsacakkhunā ca passatā, attahitasādhikāya samādhipadaṭṭhānāya paṭivedhapaññāya jānatā, parahitasādhikāya karuṇāpadaṭṭhānāya desanāpaññāya passatā, arahatā sammāsambuddhena ‘‘yaṃ paṭhamaṃ pārājikaṃ paññattaṃ, taṃ kattha paññattaṃ, kaṃ ārabbha paññattaṃ, kismiṃ vatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, atthi tattha paññatti…pe… kenābhata’’nti.

1. There, "That which by the Blessed One...pe... was prescribed"—to begin with that manner of question, this is the meaning in brief: that Blessed One, for the long standing of the Sāsana, having established on his head the añjali, which was surged with the enthusiasm of great reverence and respect for the Dhamma-senāpati, and having been requested, in regard to ten benefits, prescribed the Vinaya-paññatti; that Blessed One, knowing the time of prescription of each and every sikkhāpada, seeing the ten benefits of that prescription of each and every sikkhāpada; and moreover, knowing by means of previous abodes and so on, seeing with the divine eye, knowing with the three vijjas or even with the six abhiññās, seeing with the unobstructed all-around eye everywhere, knowing with the paññā capable of knowing all dhammas, and seeing even forms beyond the range of vision of all beings and gone behind walls etc., with the exceedingly pure fleshly eye, and knowing with the paṭivedha-paññā based on the attainment of benefit for oneself, seeing with the desanā-paññā based on the attainment of benefit for others, the Arahant, the Sammāsambuddha, [asked,] "That first pārājika which was prescribed, where was it prescribed, concerning whom was it prescribed, in what matter was it prescribed, is there a paññatti there…pe…by whom was it brought?"

2.Pucchāvissajjane pana‘‘yaṃ tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena paṭhamaṃ pārājika’’nti idaṃ kevalaṃ pucchāya āgatassa ādipadassa paccuddharaṇamattameva,‘‘kattha paññattanti vesāliyā paññattaṃ; kaṃ ārabbhāti sudinnaṃ kalandaputtaṃ ārabbhā’’ti evamādinā pana nayena punapi ettha ekekaṃ padaṃ pucchitvāva vissajjitaṃ.Ekā paññattīti ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭiseveyya pārājiko hoti asaṃvāso’’ti ayaṃ ekā paññatti.Dve anupaññattiyoti ‘‘antamaso tiracchānagatāyapī’’ti ca, ‘‘sikkhaṃ apaccakkhāyā’’ti ca makkaṭivajjiputtakavatthūnaṃ vasena vuttā – imā dve anupaññattiyo. Ettāvatā ‘‘atthi tattha paññatti anupaññatti anuppannapaññattī’’ti imissā pucchāya dve koṭṭhāsā vissajjitā honti. Tatiyaṃ vissajjetuṃ pana‘‘anuppannapaññatti tasmiṃ natthī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ayañhianuppannapaññattināma anuppanne dose paññattā; sā aṭṭhagarudhammavasena bhikkhunīnaṃyeva āgatā, aññatra natthi. Tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘anuppannapaññatti tasmiṃ natthī’’ti.Sabbatthapaññattīti majjhimadese ceva paccantimajanapadesu ca sabbatthapaññatti. Vinayadharapañcamena gaṇena ‘‘upasampadā, guṇaṅguṇūpāhanā, dhuvanahānaṃ, cammattharaṇa’’nti imāni hi cattāri sikkhāpadāni majjhimadeseyeva paññatti. Ettheva etehi āpatti hoti, na paccantimajanapadesu. Sesāni sabbāneva sabbatthapaññatti nāma.

2. However, in the answering of the question, "That which by the Blessed One, knowing, seeing, the Arahant, the Sammāsambuddha, the first pārājika"—this is merely a repetition of the initial word that came in the question; "Where was it prescribed? It was prescribed in Vesālī; concerning whom? Concerning Sudinna Kalandaputta"—but in this way, with this method and so on, again here each single word was answered only after being asked. One paññatti: "Yo pana bhikkhu methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭiseveyya pārājiko hoti asaṃvāso"—this is one paññatti. Two anupaññattis: "antamaso tiracchānagatāyapi" and "sikkhaṃ apaccakkhāyā"—said in connection with the Makkati and Vajjiputtaka stories—these are two anupaññattis. Thus, so far, two sections of this question, "Is there a paññatti, an anupaññatti, an anuppannapaññatti there?" are answered. However, to answer the third, "An anuppannapaññatti is not there in that" is said. This anuppannapaññatti is prescribed for a fault that has not arisen; that has come only in connection with the eight garudhammas for bhikkhunīs, it is not elsewhere. Therefore, it is said, "An anuppannapaññatti is not there in that." Sabbatthapaññatti: Paññatti everywhere, both in the Middle Country and in the border regions. With a gaṇa of five Vinayadharas [there are:] "upasampadā, guṇaṅguṇūpāhanā, dhuvanahānaṃ, cammattharaṇa"—these four sikkhāpadas were prescribed only in the Middle Country. An āpatti occurs in regard to these only here, not in the border regions. All the rest are called sabbatthapaññatti.

Sādhāraṇapaññattīti bhikkhūnañceva bhikkhunīnañca sādhāraṇapaññatti; suddhabhikkhūnameva hi suddhabhikkhunīnaṃ vā paññattaṃ sikkhāpadaṃasādhāraṇapaññattināma hoti. Idaṃ pana bhikkhuṃ ārabbha uppanne vatthusmiṃ ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī chandaso methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭiseveyya, antamaso tiracchānagatenapi pārājikā hoti asaṃvāsā’’ti bhikkhunīnampi paññattaṃ, vinītakathāmattameva hi tāsaṃ natthi, sikkhāpadaṃ pana atthi, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sādhāraṇapaññattī’’ti.Ubhatopaññattiyampi eseva nayo. Byañjanamattameva hi ettha nānaṃ, bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīnampi sādhāraṇattāsādhāraṇapaññatti,ubhinnampi paññattattāubhatopaññattīti. Atthe pana bhedo natthi.

Sādhāraṇapaññatti: Paññatti common to both bhikkhus and bhikkhunīs; a sikkhāpada prescribed only for pure bhikkhus or only for pure bhikkhunīs is called asādhāraṇapaññatti. But this, in a matter that arose concerning a bhikkhu, "Yā pana bhikkhunī chandaso methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭiseveyya, antamaso tiracchānagatenapi pārājikā hoti asaṃvāsā"—was prescribed even for bhikkhunīs; only the Vinīta-kathā is not for them, but the sikkhāpada exists, therefore it is said "sādhāraṇapaññatti." The same method is in ubhatopaññatti too. Only the wording is different here, because it is common to both bhikkhus and bhikkhunīs, [it is called] sādhāraṇapaññatti, because it is prescribed for both, [it is called] ubhatopaññatti. But there is no difference in meaning.

Nidānogadhanti ‘‘yassa siyā āpatti so āvikareyyā’’ti ettha sabbāpattīnaṃ anupaviṭṭhattānidānogadhaṃ;nidāne anupaviṭṭhanti attho.Dutiyena uddesenāti nidānogadhaṃ nidānapariyāpannampi samānaṃ ‘‘tatrime cattāro pārājikā dhammā’’tiādinā dutiyeneva uddesena uddesaṃ āgacchati.Catunnaṃ vipattīnanti sīlavipattiādīnaṃ. Paṭhamā hi dve āpattikkhandhā sīlavipatti nāma, avasesā pañca ācāravipatti nāma. Micchādiṭṭhi ca antaggāhikadiṭṭhi ca diṭṭhivipatti nāma, ājīvahetu paññattāni cha sikkhāpadāni ājīvavipatti nāma. Iti imāsaṃ catunnaṃ vipattīnaṃ idaṃ pārājikaṃ sīlavipatti nāma hoti.

Nidānogadha: Because all āpattis are included in "yassa siyā āpatti so āvikareyyā," [it is] nidānogadha; the meaning is included in the nidāna. By the second uddesa: Though nidānogadha is included in the nidāna, it comes to the uddesa by the second uddesa itself, beginning with "tatrime cattāro pārājikā dhammā." Of the four vipattis: Of sīlavipatti etc. The first two āpattikkhandhas are called sīlavipatti, the remaining five are called ācāravipatti. Micchādiṭṭhi and antaggāhikadiṭṭhi are called diṭṭhivipatti, the six sikkhāpadas prescribed for the sake of livelihood are called ājīvavipatti. Thus, of these four vipattis, this pārājika is called sīlavipatti.

Ekena samuṭṭhānenāti dvaṅgikena ekena samuṭṭhānena. Ettha hi cittaṃ aṅgaṃ hoti, kāyena pana āpattiṃ āpajjati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘kāyato ca cittato ca samuṭṭhātī’’ti.Dvīhi samathehi sammatīti ‘‘āpannosī’’ti sammukhā pucchiyamāno ‘‘āma āpannomhī’’ti paṭijānāti, tāvadeva bhaṇḍanakalahaviggahā vūpasantā honti, sakkā ca hoti taṃ puggalaṃ apanetvā uposatho vā pavāraṇā vā kātuṃ. Iti sammukhāvinayena ca paṭiññātakaraṇena cāti dvīhi samathehi sammati, na ca tappaccayā koci upaddavo hoti. Yaṃ pana upari paññattivagge ‘‘na katamena samathena sammatī’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ samathaṃ otāretvā anāpatti kātuṃ na sakkāti imamatthaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.

By one samuṭṭhāna: By one samuṭṭhāna that is dvaṅgika. Here, the citta is an aṅga, but one incurs an āpatti by the body. Therefore, it is said, "It arises from body and from mind." It is settled by two samathas: When asked face to face "Are you āpanna?" one acknowledges "Yes, I am āpanna," then at once quarrels, disputes, and contentions are calmed, and it is possible to remove that individual and do the uposatha or pavāraṇā. Thus, it is settled by sammukhāvinaya and by paṭiññātakaraṇa, by these two samathas, and no disturbance occurs because of that. But that which was said above in the Paññatti vagga, "By which samatha is it not settled?" that was said having in mind the meaning that it is not possible to absolve [him] of the āpatti by bringing down a samatha.

Paññatti vinayoti ‘‘yo pana bhikkhū’’tiādinā nayena vuttamātikā paññatti vinayoti attho.Vibhattīti padabhājanaṃ vuccati;vibhattīti hi vibhaṅgassevetaṃ nāmaṃ.Asaṃvaroti vītikkamo.Saṃvaroti avītikkamo.Yesaṃ vattatīti yesaṃ vinayapiṭakañca aṭṭhakathā ca sabbā paguṇāti attho.Te dhārentīti te etaṃ paṭhamapārājikaṃ pāḷito ca atthato ca dhārenti; na hi sakkā sabbaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ ajānantena etassa attho jānitunti.Kenābhatanti idaṃ paṭhamapārājikaṃ pāḷivasena ca atthavasena ca yāva ajjatanakālaṃ kena ānītanti.Paramparābhatanti paramparāya ānītaṃ.

Paññatti vinaya: The mātikā stated in the manner beginning with "yo pana bhikkhu" is the paññatti vinaya; that is the meaning. Vibhatti means padabhājana; vibhatti is a name for vibhaṅga itself. Asaṃvaro: Vītikkamo. Saṃvaro: Avītikkamo. For whom it operates: For whom the Vinaya Piṭaka and the aṭṭhakathā are all mastered; that is the meaning. They retain: They retain this first pārājika from both the Pāḷi and the meaning; indeed, it is not possible for one who does not know the entire Vinaya Piṭaka to know its meaning. By whom was it brought: By whom has this first pārājika been brought, in terms of both the Pāḷi and the meaning, up to today? Paramparābhata: Brought by tradition.

3.Idāni yāya paramparāya ānītaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘upāli dāsako cevā’’tiādinā nayena porāṇakehi mahātherehi gāthāyo ṭhapitā. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ nidānavaṇṇanāyameva vuttaṃ. Iminā nayena dutiyapārājikādipucchāvissajjanesupi vinicchayo veditabboti.

3. Now, to show by which tradition it was brought, the gāthās were established by the ancient Mahātheras in the manner beginning with "Upāli, Dāsaka, and...". There, that which should be said has already been said in the Nidāna description. By this method, the decision should be understood even in the questions and answers about the second pārājika and so on.

Mahāvibhaṅge paññattivāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Paññattivaṇṇanā of the Mahāvibhaṅga is finished.

Katāpattivārādivaṇṇanā
Description of the Katāpatti Vāra, etc.

157.Ito paraṃ ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevanto kati āpattiyo āpajjatī’’ti ādippabhedokatāpattivāro,‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevantassa āpattiyo catunnaṃ vipattīnaṃ kati vipattiyo bhajantī’’ti ādippabhedovipattivāro,‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevantassa āpattiyo sattannaṃ āpattikkhandhānaṃ katihi āpattikkhandhehi saṅgahitā’’ti ādippabhedosaṅgahavāro,‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevantassa āpattiyo channaṃ āpattisamuṭṭhānānaṃ katihi samuṭṭhānehi samuṭṭhahantī’’ti ādippabhedosamuṭṭhānavāro,‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevantassa āpattiyo catunnaṃ adhikaraṇānaṃ katamaṃ adhikaraṇa’’nti ādippabhedoadhikaraṇavāro,‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevantassa āpattiyo sattannaṃ samathānaṃ katihi samathehi sammantī’’ti ādippabhedosamathavāro,tadanantarosamuccayavārocāti ime satta vārā uttānatthā eva.

157. After this, Katāpattivāro is the variety beginning with "How many āpattis does one incur while engaging in methuna dhamma?"; Vipattivāro is the variety beginning with "How many vipattis of the four vipattis do the āpattis of one engaging in methuna dhamma partake in?"; Saṅgahavāro is the variety beginning with "With how many āpattikkhandhas of the seven āpattikkhandhas are the āpattis of one engaging in methuna dhamma included?"; Samuṭṭhānavāro is the variety beginning with "From how many samuṭṭhānas of the six āpattisamuṭṭhānas do the āpattis of one engaging in methuna dhamma arise?"; Adhikaraṇavāro is the variety beginning with "Which adhikaraṇa of the four adhikaraṇas are the āpattis of one engaging in methuna dhamma?"; Samathavāro is the variety beginning with "By how many samathas of the seven samathas are the āpattis of one engaging in methuna dhamma settled?"; and the subsequent Samuccayavāro—these seven vāras are obvious in meaning.

188.Tato paraṃ ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevanapaccayā pārājikaṃ kattha paññatta’’ntiādinā nayena puna paccayavasena ekopaññattivāro,tassa vasena purimasadisā eva katāpattivārādayo satta vārāti evaṃ aparepi aṭṭha vārā vuttā, tepi uttānatthā eva. Iti ime aṭṭha, purimā aṭṭhāti mahāvibhaṅge soḷasa vārā dassitā. Tato paraṃ teneva nayena bhikkhunivibhaṅgepi soḷasa vārā āgatāti evamime ubhatovibhaṅge dvattiṃsa vārā pāḷinayeneva veditabbā. Na hettha kiñci pubbe avinicchitaṃ nāma atthi.

188. After that, again, one paññattivāro [is stated] because of the reason in the manner beginning with "Where was the pārājika prescribed because of the reason of engaging in methuna dhamma?", and dependent on that, the seven vāras, the Katāpattivāra and so on, are just like the previous ones; in this way, eight more vāras were stated, those too are obvious in meaning. Thus, these eight, and the previous eight—in the Mahāvibhaṅga, sixteen vāras are shown. After that, in the same manner, sixteen vāras have come in the Bhikkhunivibhaṅga too; thus, these thirty-two vāras in both Vibhaṅgas should be understood by the Pāḷi method itself. Indeed, there is nothing here called previously undecided.

Mahāvibhaṅge ca bhikkhunivibhaṅge ca

In the Mahāvibhaṅga and the Bhikkhunivibhaṅga,

Soḷasamahāvāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Soḷasamahāvāravaṇṇanā is finished.

Samuṭṭhānasīsavaṇṇanā

Samuṭṭhāna Sīsa Vaṇṇanā

257.Tadanantarāya pana samuṭṭhānakathāyaanattā iti nicchayāti anattā iti nicchitā.Sabhāgadhammānanti aniccākārādīhi sabhāgānaṃ saṅkhatadhammānaṃ.Nāmamattaṃ na nāyatīti nāmamattampi na paññāyati.Dukkhahāninti dukkhaghātanaṃ.Khandhakā yā ca mātikāti khandhakā yā ca mātikāti attho. Ayameva vā pāṭho.Samuṭṭhānaṃ niyato katanti samuṭṭhānaṃ niyatokataṃ niyatakataṃ; niyatasamuṭṭhānanti attho. Etena bhūtārocanacorivuṭṭhāpanaananuññātasikkhāpadattayassa saṅgaho paccetabbo. Etāneva hi tīṇi sikkhāpadāni niyatasamuṭṭhānāni, aññehi saddhiṃ asambhinnasamuṭṭhānāni.

257. However, in the subsequent Samuṭṭhāna Kathā, "Anattā iti nicchayā" means decided as anattā. Sabhāgadhammānaṃ: Of saṅkhata dhammas that are sabhāga because of anicca-ness etc. Nāmamattaṃ na nāyatī: Even mere name is not known. Dukkhahāni: Destruction of dukkha. Khandhakā yā ca mātikā: Khandhakā and the mātikā; that is the meaning. Or this itself is the reading. Samuṭṭhānaṃ niyato kataṃ: Samuṭṭhānaṃ niyatokataṃ niyatakataṃ; the meaning is niyatasamuṭṭhāna. By this, the inclusion of the three sikkhāpadas of bhūtārocana, corivuṭṭhāpana, and ananuññāta should be understood. Indeed, these three sikkhāpadas alone are niyatasamuṭṭhāna, asambhinnasamuṭṭhāna with others.

Sambhedaṃ nidānañcaññanti aññampi sambhedañca nidānañca. Tattha sambhedavacanena samuṭṭhānasambhedassa gahaṇaṃ paccetabbaṃ, tāni hi tīṇi sikkhāpadāni ṭhapetvā sesāni sambhinnasamuṭṭhānāni. Nidānavacanena sikkhāpadānaṃ paññattidesasaṅkhātaṃ nidānaṃ paccetabbaṃ.Sutte dissanti uparīti sikkhāpadānaṃ samuṭṭhānaniyamo sambhedo nidānanti imāni tīṇi suttamhi eva dissanti; paññāyantīti attho. Tattha ‘‘ekena samuṭṭhānena samuṭṭhāti, kāyato ca cittato cā’’tiādimhi tāva purimanaye samuṭṭhānaniyamo ca sambhedo ca dissanti. Itaraṃ pana nidānaṃ nāma –

Sambhedaṃ nidānañcaññaṃ: And something else, sambheda and nidāna. There, by the statement of sambheda, the acceptance of samuṭṭhānasambheda should be understood; indeed, having set aside those three sikkhāpadas, the rest are sambhinnasamuṭṭhāna. By the statement of nidāna, the nidāna, numbered as the place of prescription of the sikkhāpadas, should be understood. Sutte dissanti upari: These three—samuṭṭhāna-niyama, sambheda, and nidāna—are seen only in the sutta; the meaning is, they are evident. There, in "ekena samuṭṭhānena samuṭṭhāti, kāyato ca cittato ca," etc., the samuṭṭhāna-niyama and sambheda are evident in the previous manner. However, the other, nidāna, is—

‘‘Vesāliyā rājagahe, sāvatthiyā ca āḷavī;

"In Vesālī, Rājagaha,
Sāvatthī and Āḷavī;

Evaṃ upari dissati, parato āgate sutte dissatīti veditabbaṃ.

In Kosambī and among the Sakyas,
And among the Bhaggas it was prescribed."

‘‘Vibhaṅgedvīsū’’ti gāthāya ayamattho – yaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ dvīsu vibhaṅgesu paññattaṃ uposathadivase bhikkhū ca bhikkhuniyo ca uddisanti, tassa yathāñāyaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ pavakkhāmi, taṃ me suṇāthāti.

In this way, it is seen upari, it should be understood that it is seen in the sutta that has come subsequently.

Sañcarittānubhāsanañcāti sañcarittañca samanubhāsanañca.Atirekañca cīvaranti atirekacīvaraṃ; kathinanti attho.Lomāni padasodhammoti eḷakalomāni ca padasodhammo ca.Bhūtaṃ saṃvidhānena cāti bhūtārocanañca saṃvidahitvā addhānappaṭipajjanañca.Theyyadesanā coriṃ cāti theyyasattho ca chattapāṇissa agilānassa dhammadesanā ca corivuṭṭhāpanañca.Ananuññātāya terasāti mātāpitusāmikehi ananuññātāya saddhiṃ imāni terasa samuṭṭhānāni honti.Sadisā idha dissareti idha ubhatovibhaṅge etesu terasasu samuṭṭhānasīsesu ekekasmiṃ aññānipi sadisāni samuṭṭhānāni dissanti.

The meaning of the gāthā "Vibhaṅge dvīsū" is this: the samuṭṭhāna that I will declare according to justice for the sikkhāpada that is prescribed in the two vibhaṅgas, which bhikkhus and bhikkhunīs recite on the uposatha day, listen to that. Sañcarittānubhāsanañcā: Sañcaritta and samanubhāsana. Atirekañca cīvaraṃ: And atirekacīvaraṃ; the meaning is kathina. Lomāni padasodhammo: Eḷaka-lomāni and padasodhammo. Bhūtaṃ saṃvidhānena cā: Bhūtārocana and arranging to go on a journey. Theyyadesanā coriṃ cā: Theyyasattha and dhamma-desanā to one with an umbrella in hand who is not ill, and corivuṭṭhāpana. Ananuññātāya terasā: Together with ananuññāta by mother and father, or by the owner, these are thirteen samuṭṭhānas. Sadisā idha dissare: Here, in each of these thirteen samuṭṭhānasīsas, other similar samuṭṭhānas are seen in both vibhaṅgas.

Paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā
Paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā

258.Idāni tāni dassetuṃ‘‘methunaṃ sukkasaṃsaggo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthamethunanti idaṃ tāva paṭhamapārājikaṃ nāma ekaṃ samuṭṭhānasīsaṃ, sesāni tena sadisāni. Tatthasukkasaṃsaggoti sukkavissaṭṭhi ceva kāyasaṃsaggo ca.Aniyatā paṭhamikāti paṭhamaṃ aniyatasikkhāpadaṃ.Pubbūpaparipācitāti ‘‘jānaṃ pubbūpagataṃ bhikkhu’’nti sikkhāpadañca bhikkhuniparipācitapiṇḍapātasikkhāpadañca.Raho bhikkhuniyā sahāti bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ raho nisajjasikkhāpadañca.

258. Now, to show those, "Methunaṃ sukkasaṃsaggo" etc. was said. There, methunaṃ—this is one samuṭṭhānasīsa called paṭhamapārājika, the rest are similar to that. There, sukkasaṃsaggo: Sukkavissaṭṭhi and bodily contact. Aniyatā paṭhamikā: The first aniyatasikkhāpada. Pubbūpaparipācitā: The sikkhāpada "jānaṃ pubbūpagataṃ bhikkhu" and the sikkhāpada of piṇḍapāta paricipata by a bhikkhunī. Raho bhikkhuniyā sahā: The sikkhāpada of sitting in private with a bhikkhunī.

Sabhojane raho dve cāti sabhojane kule anupakhajjanisajjasikkhāpadañca dve rahonisajjasikkhāpadāni ca.Aṅguli udake hasanti aṅgulipatodakañca udake hasadhammasikkhāpadañca.Pahāre uggire cevāti pahāradānasikkhāpadañca talasattikauggiraṇasikkhāpadañca.Tepaññāsā ca sekhiyāti parimaṇḍalanivāsanādīni khuddakavaṇṇanāvasāne vuttāni tepaññāsa sekhiyasikkhāpadāni ca.

Tepaññāsā ca sekhiyāti, and the fifty-three Sekhiya training rules beginning with "parimaṇḍalanivāsana" (wearing the robe evenly), as mentioned at the end of the minor explanations.

Adhakkhagāmāvassutāti bhikkhunīnaṃ adhakkhakasikkhāpadañca gāmantaragamanaṃ avassutā avassutassa hatthato khādanīyabhojanīyaggahaṇasikkhāpadañca.Talamaṭṭhañca suddhikāti talaghātakaṃ jatumaṭṭhaṃ udakasuddhikādiyanañca.Vassaṃvuṭṭhā ca ovādanti vassaṃvuṭṭhā chappañcayojanāni sikkhāpadañca ovādāya agamanasikkhāpadañca.Nānubandhe pavattininti yā pana bhikkhunī vuṭṭhāpitaṃ pavattiniṃ dve vassāni nānubandheyyāti vuttasikkhāpadaṃ.

Adhakkhagāmāvassutāti, "bhikkhunīnaṃ adhakkhakasikkhāpada" (the training rule about the arbitrator for nuns) and "gāmantaragamanaṃ avassutā avassutassa hatthato khādanīyabhojanīyaggahaṇa sikkhāpada" (the training rule about going to another village and receiving food from the hand of a non-ordained person without permission). Talamaṭṭhañca suddhikāti, "talaghātakaṃ" (the training rule about striking with the palm) "jatumaṭṭhaṃ" (the training rule about lac dye), "udakasuddhikādi yanañca" (and the rules about cleaning water etc.). Vassaṃvuṭṭhā ca ovādanti, "vassaṃvuṭṭhā chappañcayojanāni sikkhāpada" (the training rule about a nun who has spent the rains dwelling within five or six yojanas) and "ovādāya agamana sikkhāpada" (the training rule about not going for exhortation). Nānubandhe pavattininti, the training rule that states, "yā pana bhikkhunī vuṭṭhāpitaṃ pavattiniṃ dve vassāni nānubandheyyāti" (a bhikkhuni should not attend to a probationer for two years).

Imesikkhāti imā sikkhāyo; liṅgavipariyāyo kato.Kāyamānasikā katāti kāyacittasamuṭṭhānā katā.

Imesikkhāti, these are the trainings; the gender is reversed. Kāyamānasikā katāti, they are made of bodily and mental origin.

Dutiyapārājikasamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā
Dutiyapārājikasamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā

259.Adinnanti idaṃ tāva adinnādānanti vā dutiyapārājikanti vā ekaṃ samuṭṭhānasīsaṃ, sesāni tena sadisāni. Tatthaviggahuttarīti manussaviggahauttarimanussadhammasikkhāpadāni.Duṭṭhullā attakāminanti duṭṭhullavācāattakāmapāricariyasikkhāpadāni.Amūlā aññabhāgiyāti dve duṭṭhadosasikkhāpadāni.Aniyatā dutiyikāti dutiyaṃ aniyatasikkhāpadaṃ.

259.Adinnanti, this is adinnādāna (taking what is not given) or the second Pārājika, one origin heading, the rest are similar to that. There, viggahuttarīti, "manussaviggaha uttarimanussadhammasikkhāpada" (the training rule about human form and claiming superior human qualities). Duṭṭhullā attakāminanti, "duṭṭhullavācā attakāmapāricariya sikkhāpada" (the training rules about offensive speech and performing services for selfish desires). Amūlā aññabhāgiyāti, two "duṭṭhadosa sikkhāpada" (training rules about false accusations). Aniyatā dutiyikāti, the second "aniyata sikkhāpada" (undetermined rule).

Acchinde pariṇāmaneti sāmaṃ cīvaraṃ datvā acchindanañca saṅghikalābhassa attano pariṇāmanañca.Musā omasapesuṇāti musāvādo ca omasavādo ca bhikkhupesuññañca.Duṭṭhullā pathavīkhaṇeti duṭṭhullāpattiārocanañca pathavīkhaṇañca.Bhūtaṃ aññāya ujjhāpeti bhūtagāmaaññavādakaujjhāpanakasikkhāpadāni.

Acchinde pariṇāmaneti, personally giving a robe and then taking it back, and converting sangha gains for oneself. Musā omasapesuṇāti, musāvādo (false speech), omasavādo (demeaning speech), and bhikkhupesuñña (sowing discord among bhikkhus). Duṭṭhullā pathavīkhaṇeti, duṭṭhullāpattiārocana (reporting an offense with malicious intent) and pathavīkhaṇa (digging the earth). Bhūtaṃ aññāya ujjhāpeti, bhūtagāmaaññavādaka (denying the existence of beings) and ujjhāpanaka sikkhāpada (finding fault).

Nikkaḍḍhanaṃ siñcanañcāti vihārato nikkaḍḍhanañca udakena tiṇādisiñcanañca.Āmisahetu bhuttāvīti ‘‘āmisahetu bhikkhuniyo ovadantī’’ti sikkhāpadañca, bhuttāviṃ anatirittena khādanīyādinā pavāraṇāsikkhāpadañca.Ehi anādari bhiṃsāti ‘‘ehāvuso gāmaṃ vā’’ti sikkhāpadañca, anādariyañca bhikkhubhiṃsāpanakañca.Apanidhe ca jīvitanti pattādīnaṃ apanidhānasikkhāpadañca, sañcicca pāṇaṃ jīvitāvoropanañca.

Nikkaḍḍhanaṃ siñcanañcāti, "vihārato nikkaḍḍhanañca" (dragging out of the monastery) and "udakena tiṇādisiñcanañca" (watering grass etc. with water). Āmisahetu bhuttāvīti, the training rule that says, "āmisahetu bhikkhuniyo ovadantī" (bhikkhunis give advice for the sake of material gain), and bhuttāviṃ anatirittena khādanīyādinā pavāraṇāsikkhāpada (inviting with non-excessive edibles etc.). Ehi anādari bhiṃsāti, the training rule that says, "ehāvuso gāmaṃ vā" (come, friend, to the village), and anādariya (disrespect) and bhikkhubhiṃsāpanaka (intimidating bhikkhus). Apanidhe ca jīvitanti, apanidhānasikkhāpada of bowls etc. and intentionally taking a life.

Jānaṃ sappāṇakaṃ kammanti jānaṃ sappāṇakaudakasikkhāpadañca punakammāya ukkoṭanañca.Ūnasaṃvāsanāsanāti ūnavīsativassasikkhāpadañca ukkhittakena saddhiṃ saṃvāsasikkhāpadañca nāsitakasāmaṇerasambhogasikkhāpadañca.Sahadhammikaṃ vilekhāti sahadhammikaṃ vuccamānasikkhāpadañca, vilekhāya saṃvattantīti āgatasikkhāpadañca.Moho amūlakena cāti mohanake pācittiyasikkhāpadañca, amūlakena saṅghādisesena anuddhaṃsanasikkhāpadañca.

Jānaṃ sappāṇakaṃ kammanti, jānaṃ sappāṇakaudaka sikkhāpada (knowingly using water with living beings) and ukkoṭana for punakamma (demanding more work). Ūnasaṃvāsanāsanāti, ūnavīsativassa sikkhāpada (ordaining one under twenty years old), saṃvāsa sikkhāpada with one who is suspended and nāsitakasāmaṇerasambhogasikkhāpada (association with a novice who has been expelled). Sahadhammikaṃ vilekhāti, sahadhammikaṃ vuccamāna sikkhāpada (speaking against what is in accordance with the Dhamma) and vilekhāya saṃvattantīti āgatasikkhāpada (engaging in conduct that leads to criticism). Moho amūlakena cāti, mohanake pācittiya sikkhāpada (the pacittiya training rule about bewilderment) and amūlakena saṅghādisesena anuddhaṃsana sikkhāpada (not retracting an unfounded saṅghādisesa offense).

Kukkuccaṃ dhammikaṃ cīvaraṃ datvāti kukkuccaupadahanañca, dhammikānaṃ kammānaṃ chandaṃ datvā khīyanañca, cīvaraṃ datvā khīyanañca.Pariṇāmeyya puggaleti saṅghikaṃ lābhaṃ puggalassa pariṇāmanasikkhāpadaṃ.Kiṃ te akālaṃ acchindeti ‘‘kiṃ te ayye eso purisapuggalo karissatī’’ti āgatasikkhāpadañca, ‘‘akālacīvaraṃ kālacīvara’’nti adhiṭṭhahitvā bhājanasikkhāpadañca, bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ cīvaraṃ parivattetvā acchindanasikkhāpadañca.Duggahī nirayenati duggahitena duppadhāritena paraṃ ujjhāpanasikkhāpadañca, nirayena vā brahmacariyena vā abhisapanasikkhāpadañca.

Kukkuccaṃ dhammikaṃ cīvaraṃ datvāti, kukkuccaupadahana (causing remorse), khīyana (displeasure) after giving consent to justified actions, and khīyana after giving a robe. Pariṇāmeyya puggaleti, converting sangha gains to an individual. Kiṃ te akālaṃ acchindeti, the training rule that says, "kiṃ te ayye eso purisapuggalo karissatī" (what will this person do for you, venerable lady), and adhiṭṭhahitvā bhājanasikkhāpada (rejecting after accepting) with "akālacīvaraṃ kālacīvara" (untimely robe, timely robe), and parivattetvā acchindana sikkhāpada (taking back) after exchanging robes with a bhikkhuni. Duggahī nirayenati, ujjhāpanasikkhāpada (criticizing) due to being "duggahitena duppadhāritena" (poorly grasped, poorly understood), and abhisapanasikkhāpada (cursing) with nirayena or brahmacariyena (hell or the holy life).

Gaṇaṃ vibhaṅga dubbalanti ‘‘gaṇassa cīvaralābhaṃ antarāyaṃ kareyyā’’ti ca ‘‘dhammikaṃ cīvaravibhaṅgaṃ paṭibāheyyā’’ti ca ‘‘dubbalacīvarapaccāsāya cīvarakālasamayaṃ atikkāmeyyā’’ti ca vuttasikkhāpadāni.Kathinā phāsu passayanti ‘‘dhammikaṃ kathinuddhāraṃ paṭibāheyya, bhikkhuniyā sañcicca aphāsuṃ kareyya, bhikkhuniyā upassayaṃ datvā kupitā anattamanā nikkaḍḍheyya vā’’ti vuttasikkhāpadāni.Akkosacaṇḍī maccharīti ‘‘bhikkhuṃ akkoseyya vā paribhāseyya vā, caṇḍikatā gaṇaṃ paribhāseyya, kule maccharinī assā’’ti vuttasikkhāpadāni.Gabbhiniñca pāyantiyāti ‘‘gabbhiniṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya, pāyantiṃ vuṭṭhāpeyyā’’ti vuttasikkhāpadāni.

Gaṇaṃ vibhaṅga dubbalanti, the training rules stated as "gaṇassa cīvaralābhaṃ antarāyaṃ kareyyā" (obstructing the gain of robes for the group), "dhammikaṃ cīvaravibhaṅgaṃ paṭibāheyyā" (rejecting the rightful distribution of robes), and "dubbalacīvarapaccāsāya cīvarakālasamayaṃ atikkāmeyyā" (exceeding the time for robes while expecting a weak robe). Kathinā phāsu passayanti, the training rules stated as "dhammikaṃ kathinuddhāraṃ paṭibāheyya" (rejecting the rightful removal of the kathina), "bhikkhuniyā sañcicca aphāsuṃ kareyya" (intentionally causing discomfort to a bhikkhuni), "bhikkhuniyā upassayaṃ datvā kupitā anattamanā nikkaḍḍheyya vā" (giving lodging to a bhikkhuni, then angrily and displeased, dragging her out). Akkosacaṇḍī maccharīti, the training rules stated as "bhikkhuṃ akkoseyya vā paribhāseyya vā" (scolding or insulting a bhikkhu), "caṇḍikatā gaṇaṃ paribhāseyya" (being fierce and insulting the group), "kule maccharinī assā" (being stingy in families). Gabbhiniñca pāyantiyāti, the training rules stated as "gabbhiniṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya, pāyantiṃ vuṭṭhāpeyyā" (ordaining a pregnant woman, ordaining a woman who is breastfeeding).

Dvevassaṃ sikkhā saṅghenāti ‘‘dve vassāni chasu dhammesu asikkhitasikkhaṃ sikkhamānaṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya, sikkhitasikkhaṃ sikkhamānaṃ saṅghena asammataṃ vuṭṭhāpeyyā’’ti vuttasikkhāpadāni.Tayo ceva gihīgatāti ūnadvādasavassaṃ gihigataṃ, paripuṇṇadvādasavassaṃ gihigataṃ ‘‘dve vassāni chasu dhammesu asikkhitasikkhaṃ dve vassāni sikkhitasikkhaṃ saṅghena asammata’’nti vuttasikkhāpadāni.Kumāribhūtā tissoti ‘‘ūnavīsativassaṃ kumāribhūta’’ntiādinā nayena vuttā tisso.Ūnadvādasasammatāti ‘‘ūnadvādasavassā vuṭṭhāpeyya, paripuṇṇadvādasavassā saṅghena asammatā vuṭṭhāpeyyā’’ti vuttasikkhāpadadvayaṃ.

Dvevassaṃ sikkhā saṅghenāti, the training rules stated as "dve vassāni chasu dhammesu asikkhitasikkhaṃ sikkhamānaṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya, sikkhitasikkhaṃ sikkhamānaṃ saṅghena asammataṃ vuṭṭhāpeyyā" (ordaining a trainee who has not trained in the six rules for two years, ordaining a trainee who has trained in the training but is not approved by the sangha). Tayo ceva gihīgatāti, ūnadvādasavassaṃ gihigataṃ (gone to a householder being under twelve years), paripuṇṇadvādasavassaṃ gihigataṃ (gone to a householder being fully twelve years) "dve vassāni chasu dhammesu asikkhitasikkhaṃ dve vassāni sikkhitasikkhaṃ saṅghena asammata"nti vuttasikkhāpadāni (the stated training rules about not training in the six rules for two years, training in the training for two years, not being approved by the sangha). Kumāribhūtā tissoti, three stated in the manner beginning with "ūnavīsativassaṃ kumāribhūta" (being a virgin under twenty years). Ūnadvādasasammatāti, the two training rules stated as "ūnadvādasavassā vuṭṭhāpeyya, paripuṇṇadvādasavassā saṅghena asammatā vuṭṭhāpeyyā" (ordaining one under twelve years old, ordaining one fully twelve years old who is not approved by the sangha).

Alaṃ tāva sokāvāsanti ‘‘alaṃ tāva te ayye vuṭṭhāpitenā’’ti ca, ‘‘caṇḍiṃ sokāvāsaṃ sikkhamānaṃ vuṭṭhāpeyyā’’ti ca vuttasikkhāpadadvayaṃ.Chandā anuvassā ca dveti ‘‘pārivāsikachandadānena sikkhamānaṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya, anuvassaṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya, ekaṃ vassaṃ dve vuṭṭhāpeyyā’’ti vuttasikkhāpadattayaṃ.Samuṭṭhānā tikā katāti tikasamuṭṭhānā katā.

Alaṃ tāva sokāvāsanti, the two training rules stated as "alaṃ tāva te ayye vuṭṭhāpitenā" (enough, venerable lady, with the ordination) and "caṇḍiṃ sokāvāsaṃ sikkhamānaṃ vuṭṭhāpeyyā" (ordaining an angry trainee with a house of sorrow). Chandā anuvassā ca dveti, the three training rules stated as "pārivāsikachandadānena sikkhamānaṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya, anuvassaṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya, ekaṃ vassaṃ dve vuṭṭhāpeyyā" (ordaining a trainee with giving consent for probation, ordaining every year, ordaining two in one year). Samuṭṭhānā tikā katāti, these origins are made as groups of three.

Sañcarittasamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā
Sañcarittasamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā

260.Sañcarīkuṭi vihāroti sañcarittaṃ saññācikāya kuṭikaraṇaṃ mahallakavihārakaraṇañca.Dhovanañca paṭiggahoti aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā purāṇacīvaradhovāpanañca cīvarapaṭiggahaṇañca.Viññattuttari abhihaṭṭhunti aññātakaṃ gahapatiṃ cīvaraviññāpanaṃ tatuttarisādiyanasikkhāpadañca.Ubhinnaṃ dūtakena cāti ‘‘cīvaracetāpannaṃ upakkhaṭaṃ hotī’’ti āgatasikkhāpadadvayañca dūtena cīvaracetāpannapahitasikkhāpadañca.

260.Sañcarīkuṭi vihāroti, sañcaritta (wandering), saññācikāya kuṭikaraṇa (building a hut with planning) and mahallakavihārakaraṇa (building a large monastery). Dhovanañca paṭiggahoti, having an unknown bhikkhuni wash an old robe and accepting a robe. Viññattuttari abhihaṭṭhunti, viññāpana (requesting) a robe from an unknown householder and tatuttarisādiyana sikkhāpada (receiving more than that). Ubhinnaṃ dūtakena cāti, the two training rules stated as "cīvaracetāpannaṃ upakkhaṭaṃ hotī" (being prepared to seek a robe) and the training rule about sending a messenger with a robe-seeking intention.

Kosiyā suddhadvebhāgā, chabbassāni nisīdananti ‘‘kosiyamissakaṃ santhata’’ntiādīni pañca sikkhāpadāni.Riñcanti rūpikā cevāti vibhaṅge ‘‘riñcanti uddesa’’nti āgataṃ eḷakalomadhovāpanaṃ rūpiyappaṭiggahaṇasikkhāpadañca.Ubho nānappakārakāti rūpiyasaṃvohārakayavikkayasikkhāpadadvayaṃ.

Kosiyā suddhadvebhāgā, chabbassāni nisīdananti, the five training rules starting with "kosiyamissakaṃ santhata" (a mixed silk spread). Riñcanti rūpikā cevāti, eḷakalomadhovāpana (washing goat hair) stated as "riñcanti uddesa" in the Vibhanga and rūpiyappaṭiggahaṇa sikkhāpada (accepting silver). Ubho nānappakārakāti, the two rūpiyasaṃvohārakayavikkayasikkhāpada (training rules about different kinds of silver transactions).

Ūnabandhanavassikāti ūnapañcabandhanapattasikkhāpadañca vassikasāṭikasikkhāpadañca.Suttaṃ vikappanena cāti suttaṃ viññāpetvā cīvaravāyāpanañca tantavāye upasaṅkamitvā cīvare vikappāpajjanañca.Dvāradānasibbāni cāti yāva dvārakosā aggaḷaṭṭhapanāya, ‘‘aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā cīvaraṃ dadeyya, cīvaraṃ sibbeyyā’’ti vuttasikkhāpadattayaṃ.Pūvapaccayajoti cāti pūvehi vā manthehi vā abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāraṇāsikkhāpadaṃ cātumāsapaccayappavāraṇājotisamādahanasikkhāpadāni ca.

Ūnabandhanavassikāti, ūnapañcabandhanapatta sikkhāpada (bowl with less than five bonds) and vassikasāṭika sikkhāpada (rain cloth). Suttaṃ vikappanena cāti, viññāpetvā suttaṃ cīvaravāyāpana (requesting thread to weave a robe) and upasaṅkamitvā tantavāye cīvare vikappāpajjana (going to the weaver and rejecting the robe). Dvāradānasibbāni cāti, up to placing the bolt for the door, the three training rules stated as, "aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā cīvaraṃ dadeyya, cīvaraṃ sibbeyyā" (giving a robe to an unknown bhikkhuni, sewing a robe). Pūvapaccayajoti cāti, the cātumāsapaccayappavāraṇājotisamādahanasikkhāpadāni (training rules about invitation for the four month requisites) and pūvehi vā manthehi vā abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāraṇāsikkhāpada (inviting with cake or flour).

Ratanaṃsūci mañco ca, tūlaṃ nisīdanakaṇḍu ca, vassikā ca sugatenāti ratanasikkhāpadañceva sūcigharasikkhāpadādīni ca satta sikkhāpadāni.Viññatti aññaṃ cetāpanā, dve saṅghikā mahājanikā, dve puggalalahukā garūti ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī aññaṃ viññāpetvā aññaṃ viññāpeyyā’’tiādīni nava sikkhāpadāni.Dve vighāsā sāṭikā cāti ‘‘uccāraṃ vā passāvaṃ vā saṅkāraṃ vā vighāsaṃ vā tirokuṭṭe vā tiropākāre vā chaḍḍeyya vā chaḍḍāpeyya vā, harite chaḍḍeyya vā chaḍḍāpeyya vā’’ti evaṃ vuttāni dve vighāsasikkhāpadāni ca udakasāṭikāsikkhāpadañca.Samaṇacīvarena cāti ‘‘samaṇacīvaraṃ dadeyyā’’ti idametaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.

Ratanaṃsūci mañco ca, tūlaṃ nisīdanakaṇḍu ca, vassikā ca sugatenāti, ratana sikkhāpada (jewels) and the seven sikkhāpadāni (training rules) starting with sūcighara sikkhāpada (needle case). Viññatti aññaṃ cetāpanā, dve saṅghikā mahājanikā, dve puggalalahukā garūti, the nine training rules starting with "yā pana bhikkhunī aññaṃ viññāpetvā aññaṃ viññāpeyyā" (whatever bhikkhuni requesting one thing and requesting another thing). Dve vighāsā sāṭikā cāti, the two vighāsa sikkhāpadāni (training rules about throwing remains) stated as "uccāraṃ vā passāvaṃ vā saṅkāraṃ vā vighāsaṃ vā tirokuṭṭe vā tiropākāre vā chaḍḍeyya vā chaḍḍāpeyya vā, harite chaḍḍeyya vā chaḍḍāpeyya vā" (throwing or having thrown feces, urine, rubbish or remains behind a wall or enclosure, throwing or having thrown on green things) and udakasāṭikā sikkhāpada (water cloth). Samaṇacīvarena cāti, this is said in reference to "samaṇacīvaraṃ dadeyyā" (giving a samaṇa's robe).

Samanubhāsanāsamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā
Samanubhāsanāsamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā

261.Bhedānuvattadubbacadūsaduṭṭhulladiṭṭhiti saṅghabhedānuvattakadubbacakuladūsakaduṭṭhullappaṭicchādanadiṭṭhiappaṭinissajjanasikkhāpadāni.Chandaṃ ujjagghikā dve cāti chandaṃ adatvā gamanasikkhāpadaṃ ujjagghikāya antaraghare gamananisīdanasikkhāpadadvayañca.Dve ca saddāti ‘‘appasaddo antaraghare gamissāmi, nisīdissāmī’’ti sikkhāpadadvayañca.Na byāhareti ‘‘na sakabaḷena mukhena byāharissāmī’’ti sikkhāpadaṃ.

261.Bhedānuvattadubbacadūsaduṭṭhulladiṭṭhiti, saṅghabhedānuvattaka (following schism), dubbaca (difficult to speak to), kuladūsaka (corrupting families), duṭṭhullappaṭicchādana (concealing serious offenses) and diṭṭhiappaṭinissajjana sikkhāpada (not abandoning wrong view). Chandaṃ ujjagghikā dve cāti, chandaṃ adatvā gamana sikkhāpada (going without giving consent) and the two antaraghare gamananisīdana sikkhāpadadvaya (training rules about going and sitting in an inner room). Dve ca saddāti, the two sikkhāpadadvaya (training rules) about "appasaddo antaraghare gamissāmi, nisīdissāmī" (going and sitting silently in an inner room). Na byāhareti, the sikkhāpada (training rule) about "na sakabaḷena mukhena byāharissāmī" (not speaking with a mouthful of food).

Chamā nīcāsane ṭhānaṃ, pacchato uppathena cāti chamāyaṃ nisīditvā, nīce āsane nisīditvā; ṭhitena nisinnassa, pacchato gacchantena purato gacchantassa, uppathena gacchantena pathena gacchantassa dhammadesanāsikkhāpadāni.Vajjānuvattigahaṇāti vajjappaṭicchādana, ukkhittānuvattaka, hatthaggahaṇādisaṅkhātāni tīṇi pārājikāni.Osāre paccācikkhanāti ‘‘anapaloketvā kārakasaṅghaṃ anaññāya gaṇassa chandaṃ osāreyyā’’ti ca ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti ca vuttasikkhāpadadvayaṃ.

Chamā nīcāsane ṭhānaṃ, pacchato uppathena cāti, nisīditvā chamāyaṃ (sitting on the ground), nisīditvā nīce āsane (sitting on a low seat); ṭhitena nisinnassa (standing to one who is sitting), pacchato gacchantena purato gacchantassa (one walking behind to one walking in front), uppathena gacchantena pathena gacchantassa (one walking on a side path to one walking on the main path), dhammadesanā sikkhāpadāni (training rules about teaching dhamma). Vajjānuvattigahaṇāti, vajjappaṭicchādana (concealing a fault), ukkhittānuvattaka (following a suspended one), the three pārājikāni (pārājikas) known as hatthaggahaṇādi (etc. taking hands). Osāre paccācikkhanāti, the two training rules stated as "anapaloketvā kārakasaṅghaṃ anaññāya gaṇassa chandaṃ osāreyyā" (without informing the acting sangha, withdrawing consent from the group) and "buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī" (rejecting the Buddha).

Kismiṃ saṃsaṭṭhā dve vadhīti ‘‘kismiñcideva adhikaraṇe paccākatā’’ti ca ‘‘bhikkhuniyo paneva saṃsaṭṭhā viharantī’’ti ca ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī evaṃ vadeyya saṃsaṭṭhāva ayye tumhe viharathā’’ti ca ‘‘attānaṃ vadhitvā vadhitvā rodeyyā’’ti ca vuttasikkhāpadāni.Visibbe dukkhitāya cāti ‘‘bhikkhuniyā cīvaraṃ visibbetvā vā visibbāpetvā vā’’ti ca ‘‘dukkhitaṃ sahajīvini’’nti ca vuttasikkhāpadadvayaṃ.Puna saṃsaṭṭhā na vūpasameti ‘‘saṃsaṭṭhā vihareyya gahapatinā vā gahapatiputtena vā’’ti evaṃ puna vuttasaṃsaṭṭhasikkhāpadañca ‘‘ehayye, imaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasamehī’’ti vuccamānā, ‘‘sādhū’’ti paṭissuṇitvā ‘‘sā pacchā anantarāyikinī neva vūpasammeyyā’’ti vuttasikkhāpadañca.Ārāmañca pavāraṇāti ‘‘jānaṃ sabhikkhukaṃ ārāmaṃ anāpucchā paviseyyā’’ti ca ‘‘ubhatosaṅghe tīhi ṭhānehi na pavāreyyā’’ti ca vuttasikkhāpadadvayaṃ.

Kismiṃ saṃsaṭṭhā dve vadhīti, the stated sikkhāpadāni (training rules) "kismiñcideva adhikaraṇe paccākatā" (being defeated in some matter), "bhikkhuniyo paneva saṃsaṭṭhā viharantī" (bhikkhunis living in association), "yā pana bhikkhunī evaṃ vadeyya saṃsaṭṭhāva ayye tumhe viharathā" (whatever bhikkhuni should say you live in association), and "attānaṃ vadhitvā vadhitvā rodeyyā" (striking oneself and weeping). Visibbe dukkhitāya cāti, the two sikkhāpadadvaya (training rules) stated as "bhikkhuniyā cīvaraṃ visibbetvā vā visibbāpetvā vā" (unsewing or having unsewn a bhikkhuni's robe) and "dukkhitaṃ sahajīvini" (making a fellow nun unhappy). Puna saṃsaṭṭhā na vūpasameti, the sikkhāpada (training rule) saṃsaṭṭha (association) stated again as "saṃsaṭṭhā vihareyya gahapatinā vā gahapatiputtena vā" (living in association with a householder or householder's son) and vuccamānā (being told) "ehayye, imaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasamehī" (come, venerable lady, settle this matter), "sādhū"ti paṭissuṇitvā (agreeing with "good"), "sā pacchā anantarāyikinī neva vūpasammeyyā"ti (later, without obstruction, she should not settle it) the stated sikkhāpada (training rule). Ārāmañca pavāraṇāti, the two sikkhāpadadvaya (training rules) stated as "jānaṃ sabhikkhukaṃ ārāmaṃ anāpucchā paviseyyā" (knowingly entering a monastery with bhikkhus without asking permission) and "ubhatosaṅghe tīhi ṭhānehi na pavāreyyā" (not inviting in three ways in both sanghas).

Anvaddhaṃ sahajīviniṃ dveti ‘‘anvaddhamāsaṃ bhikkhuniyā bhikkhusaṅghato dve dhammā paccāsīsitabbā’’ti vuttasikkhāpadañca, ‘‘sahajīviniṃ vuṭṭhāpetvā dve vassāni neva anuggaṇheyya, sahajīviniṃ vuṭṭhāpetvā neva vūpakāseyyā’’ti vuttasikkhāpadadvayañca.Cīvaraṃ anubandhanāti ‘‘sace me tvaṃ, ayye, cīvaraṃ dassasi, evāhaṃ taṃ vuṭṭhāpessāmī’’ti ca ‘‘sace maṃ tvaṃ, ayye, dve vassāni anubandhissasi, evāhaṃ taṃ vuṭṭhāpessāmī’’ti ca vuttasikkhāpadadvayaṃ.

Anvaddhaṃ sahajīviniṃ dveti, the sikkhāpada (training rule) stated as "anvaddhamāsaṃ bhikkhuniyā bhikkhusaṅghato dve dhammā paccāsīsitabbā" (every half month, two things should be expected by a bhikkhuni from the bhikkhu sangha) and the two sikkhāpadadvaya (training rules) stated as "sahajīviniṃ vuṭṭhāpetvā dve vassāni neva anuggaṇheyya, sahajīviniṃ vuṭṭhāpetvā neva vūpakāseyyā" (after ordaining a fellow nun, not supporting her for two years, after ordaining a fellow nun, not revealing her virtues). Cīvaraṃ anubandhanāti, the two sikkhāpadadvaya (training rules) stated as "sace me tvaṃ, ayye, cīvaraṃ dassasi, evāhaṃ taṃ vuṭṭhāpessāmī" (if you give me a robe, venerable lady, then I will ordain you) and "sace maṃ tvaṃ, ayye, dve vassāni anubandhissasi, evāhaṃ taṃ vuṭṭhāpessāmī" (if you attend to me for two years, venerable lady, then I will ordain you).

Kathinasamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā
Kathinasamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā

262.Ubbhataṃkathinaṃ tīṇīti ‘‘niṭṭhitacīvarasmiṃ bhikkhunā ubbhatasmiṃ kathine’’ti vuttāni āditova tīṇi sikkhāpadāni.Paṭhamaṃ pattabhesajjanti ‘‘dasāhaparamaṃ atirekapatto’’ti vuttaṃ paṭhamapattasikkhāpadañca ‘‘paṭisāyanīyāni bhesajjānī’’ti vuttasikkhāpadañca.Accekañcāpi sāsaṅkanti accekacīvarasikkhāpadañca tadanantarameva sāsaṅkasikkhāpadañca.Pakkamantena vā duveti ‘‘taṃ pakkamanto neva uddhareyyā’’ti bhūtagāmavagge vuttasikkhāpadadvayaṃ.

262.Ubbhataṃkathinaṃ tīṇīti, the first three sikkhāpadāni (training rules) stated as "niṭṭhitacīvarasmiṃ bhikkhunā ubbhatasmiṃ kathine" (when the kathina is removed by a bhikkhu with a finished robe). Paṭhamaṃ pattabhesajjanti, the first patta sikkhāpada (bowl training rule) stated as "dasāhaparamaṃ atirekapatto" (an extra bowl is allowed for ten days) and the sikkhāpada (training rule) stated as "paṭisāyanīyāni bhesajjānī" (medicines that can be received). Accekañcāpi sāsaṅkanti, accekacīvara sikkhāpada (emergency robe) and sāsaṅka sikkhāpada (suspicious) immediately after that. Pakkamantena vā duveti, the two sikkhāpadadvaya (training rules) stated in the Bhūtagāmavagga as "taṃ pakkamanto neva uddhareyyā" (one should not remove it when leaving).

Upassayaṃ paramparāti ‘‘bhikkhunupassayaṃ gantvā bhikkhuniyo ovadeyyā’’ti ca ‘‘paramparabhojane pācittiya’’nti ca vuttasikkhāpadadvayaṃ.Anatirittaṃ nimantanāti ‘‘anatirittaṃ khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā’’ti ca ‘‘nimantito sabhatto samāno’’ti ca vuttasikkhāpadadvayaṃ.Vikappaṃ rañño vikāleti ‘‘sāmaṃ cīvaraṃ vikappetvā’’ti ca ‘‘rañño khattiyassā’’ti ca ‘‘vikāle gāmaṃ paviseyyā’’ti ca vuttasikkhāpadattayaṃ.Vosāsāraññakena cāti ‘‘vosāsamānarūpā ṭhitā’’ti ca ‘‘tathārūpesu āraññakesu senāsanesu pubbe appaṭisaṃvidita’’nti ca vuttasikkhāpadadvayaṃ.

Upassayaṃ paramparā means the two rules of training that state, "Having gone to a nun's residence, nuns should give advice," and "A Pācittiya offense for successive meals." Anatirittaṃ nimantanā means the two rules of training that state, "Not extra, either hard food or soft food," and "Being invited, if he eats a communal meal." Vikappaṃ rañño vikāle means the three rules of training that state, "Having exchanged a robe oneself," and "To a king, a nobleman," and "Should enter a village at the wrong time." Vosāsāraññakena cā and "Having stayed appearing destitute," and "In such forest hermitages, not previously acquainted." Thus, two rules of training are stated with āraññakena.

Ussayā sannicayañcāti ‘‘ussayavādikā’’ti ca ‘‘pattasannicayaṃ kareyyā’’ti ca vuttasikkhāpadadvayaṃ.Pure pacchā vikāle cāti ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī purebhattaṃ kulāni upasaṅkamitvā’’ti ca, ‘‘pacchābhattaṃ kulāni upasaṅkamitvā’’ti ca, ‘‘vikāle kulāni upasaṅkamitvā’’ti ca vuttasikkhāpadattayaṃ.Pañcāhikā saṅkamanīti ‘‘pañcāhikā saṅghāṭicāraṃ atikkameyyā’’ti ca ‘‘cīvarasaṅkamanīyaṃ dhāreyyā’’ti ca vuttasikkhāpadadvayaṃ.Dvepi āvasathena cāti ‘‘āvasathacīvaraṃ anissajjitvā paribhuñjeyya, āvasathaṃ anissajjitvā cārikaṃ pakkameyyā’’ti ca evaṃ āvasathena saddhiṃ vuttasikkhāpadāni ca dve.

Ussayā sannicayañcā means the two rules of training that state, "Being an instigator," and "Should make a collection of bowls." Pure pacchā vikāle cā means the three rules of training that state, "Whatever nun, having approached families before mealtime," and "Having approached families after mealtime," and "Having approached families at the wrong time." Pañcāhikā saṅkamanī means the two rules of training that state, "Should exceed the five-day wandering with the double robe," and "Should wear a robe marker." Dvepi āvasathena cā means "Having used a dwelling robe without relinquishing it, having set out wandering without relinquishing the dwelling," and thus, two rules of training are stated with āvasatha.

Pasākhe āsane cevāti ‘‘pasākhe jātaṃ gaṇḍaṃ vā’’ti ca ‘‘bhikkhussa purato anāpucchā āsane nisīdeyyā’’ti ca vuttasikkhāpadadvayaṃ.

Pasākhe āsane cevā means the two rules of training that state, "A swelling born in a branch," and "Without asking permission in front of a monk, should sit on a seat."

Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā
Description of the Group Beginning with Sheep's Wool

263.Eḷakalomādve seyyāti eḷakalomasikkhāpadañceva dve ca sahaseyyasikkhāpadāni.Āhacca piṇḍabhojananti āhaccapādakasikkhāpadañca āvasathapiṇḍabhojanasikkhāpadañca.Gaṇavikālasannidhīti gaṇabhojanavikālabhojanasannidhikārakasikkhāpadattayaṃ.Dantaponena celakāti dantaponasikkhāpadañca acelakasikkhāpadañca.Uyyuttaṃ senaṃ uyyodhīti ‘‘uyyuttaṃ senaṃ dassanāya gaccheyya, senāya vaseyya, uyyodhikaṃ vā…pe… anīkadassanaṃ vā gaccheyyā’’ti vuttasikkhāpadattayaṃ.Surā orena nhāyanāti surāpānasikkhāpadañca orenaddhamāsanahānasikkhāpadañca.Dubbaṇṇe dve desanikāti ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ dubbaṇṇakaraṇāna’’nti vuttasikkhāpadañca vuttāvasesapāṭidesanīyadvayañca.Lasuṇupatiṭṭhe naccanāti lasuṇasikkhāpadaṃ, ‘‘bhikkhussa bhuñjantassa pānīyena vā vidhūpanena vā upatiṭṭheyyā’’ti vuttasikkhāpadaṃ, ‘‘naccaṃ vā gītaṃ vā vāditaṃ vā dassanāya gaccheyyā’’ti vuttasikkhāpadañca. Ito paraṃ pāḷiṃ virajjhitvā likhanti. Yathā pana atthaṃ vaṇṇayissāma; evamettha anukkamo veditabbo.

263.Eḷakalomādve seyyā means the eḷakaloma (sheep's wool) training rule and the two rules about sharing a bed. Āhacca piṇḍabhojana means the āhaccapādaka (going on the road on purpose) training rule and the āvasathapiṇḍabhojana (lodging-house alms food) training rule. Gaṇavikālasannidhī means the three training rules of gaṇabhojana (group meal), vikālabhojana (untimely meal), and sannidhikāraka (storing up). Dantaponena celakā means the dantapona (tooth stick) training rule and the acelaka (naked) training rule. Uyyuttaṃ senaṃ uyyodhī means the three training rules that state, "Should go to see an army arrayed for battle, should stay in an army, or should go to see an army in battle…pe… anīkadassanaṃ vā gaccheyyā". Surā orena nhāyanā means the surāpāna (intoxicating drinks) training rule and the orenaddhamāsanahāna (bathing in less than half-month) training rule. Dubbaṇṇe dve desanikā means the training rule that states "of the three discolourations" and the two remaining Pāṭidesanīyas that were stated. Lasuṇupatiṭṭhe naccanā means the lasuṇa (garlic) training rule, the training rule that states, "Should attend upon a monk who is eating with water or a fan," and the training rule that states, "Should go to see dancing, singing, or instrumental music." From here on, they write diverging from the Pali. However, we will describe the meaning as it is; thus, the sequence should be understood here.

Nhānamattharaṇaṃseyyāti ‘‘naggā nahāyeyya, ekattharaṇapāvuraṇā tuvaṭṭeyyuṃ, ekamañce tuvaṭṭeyyu’’nti vuttasikkhāpadattayaṃ.Antoraṭṭhe tathā bahīti ‘‘antoraṭṭhe sāsaṅkasammate, tiroraṭṭhe sāsaṅkasammate’’ti vuttasikkhāpadadvayaṃ.Antovassaṃ cittāgāranti ‘‘antovassaṃ cārikaṃ pakkameyya, rājāgāraṃ vā cittāgāraṃ vā…pe… pokkharaṇiṃ vā dassanāya gaccheyyā’’ti ca vuttasikkhāpadadvayaṃ.Āsandiṃ suttakantanāti ‘‘āsandiṃ vā pallaṅkaṃ vā paribhuñjeyya, suttaṃ kanteyyā’’ti vuttasikkhāpadadvayaṃ.

Nhānamattharaṇaṃseyyā means the three training rules that state, "Should bathe naked, should use single-layered bedspreads, should share a single cot." Antoraṭṭhe tathā bahī means the two training rules that state, "In the inner territory, with recognized apprehension; in the outer territory, with recognized apprehension." Antovassaṃ cittāgāra means the two training rules that state, "Should set out wandering during the rains, should go to see a royal palace or picture gallery…pe… or a pond." Āsandiṃ suttakantanā means the two training rules that state, "Should use a chair or a couch, should spin thread."

Veyyāvaccaṃ sahatthā cāti ‘‘gihiveyyāvaccaṃ kareyya, agārikassa vā paribbājakassa vā paribbājikāya vā sahatthā khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā dadeyyā’’ti vuttasikkhāpadadvayaṃ.Abhikkhukāvāsena cāti ‘‘abhikkhuke āvāse vassaṃ vaseyyā’’ti idametaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Chattaṃ yānañca saṅghāṇinti ‘‘chattupāhanaṃ dhāreyya, yānena yāyeyya, saṅghāṇiṃ dhāreyyā’’ti vuttasikkhāpadattayaṃ.Alaṅkāragandhavāsitanti ‘‘itthālaṅkāraṃ dhāreyya, gandhacuṇṇakena nahāyeyya, vāsitakena piññākena nahāyeyyā’’ti vuttasikkhāpadattayaṃ.Bhikkhunītiādinā ‘‘bhikkhuniyā ummaddāpeyyā’’tiādīni cattāri sikkhāpadāni vuttāni.Asaṅkaccikā āpattīti ‘‘asaṅkaccikā gāmaṃ paviseyya pācittiya’’nti evaṃ vuttaāpatti ca.Cattārīsā catuttarīti etāni sabbānipi catucattālīsa sikkhāpadāni vuttāni.

Veyyāvaccaṃ sahatthā cā means the two training rules that state, "Should do work for a householder, should give hard food or soft food with her own hand to a householder or a wanderer or a female wanderer." Abhikkhukāvāsena cā means this was said referring to "Should spend the rains in a dwelling without a monk." Chattaṃ yānañca saṅghāṇi means the three training rules that state, "Should wear an umbrella and shoes, should travel by vehicle, should wear a wrap." Alaṅkāragandhavāsita means the three training rules that state, "Should wear female adornments, should bathe with scented powder, should bathe with perfumed oil-cake." Bhikkhunītiādinā means the four training rules beginning with "A nun should have herself massaged." Asaṅkaccikā āpattī means the offense that was stated, "Without intending to, should enter a village; it is a Pācittiya." Cattārīsā catuttarī means all of these forty-four training rules were stated.

Kāyena na vācācittena, kāyacittena na vācatoti kāyena ceva kāyacittena ca samuṭṭhahanti; na vācācittena na vācatoti attho.Dvisamuṭṭhānikā sabbe, samā eḷakalomikāti idaṃ uttānatthameva.

Kāyena na vācācittena, kāyacittena na vācato means they arise from the body and from the body-mind; not from the mind-speech, not from speech is the meaning. Dvisamuṭṭhānikā sabbe, samā eḷakalomikā means this meaning is straightforward.

Padasodhammasamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā
Description of the Arising According to the Word-by-Word Method

264.Padaññatra asammatāti ‘‘padaso dhammaṃ, mātugāmassa uttarichappañcavācāhi dhammaṃ deseyya, aññatra viññunā purisaviggahena, asammato bhikkhuniyo ovadeyyā’’ti vuttasikkhāpadattayaṃ.Tathā atthaṅgatena cāti ‘‘atthaṅgate sūriye ovadeyyā’’ti idametaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Tiracchānavijjā dveti ‘‘tiracchānavijjaṃ pariyāpuṇeyya, vāceyyā’’ti evaṃ vuttasikkhāpadadvayaṃ.Anokāso ca pucchanāti ‘‘anokāsakataṃ bhikkhuṃ pañhaṃ puccheyyā’’ti idametaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.

264.Padaññatra asammatā means the three training rules that state, "Should teach the Dhamma word by word to a woman with more than five or six phrases, except with an intelligent man, should advise nuns without consent." Tathā atthaṅgatena cā means this was said referring to "Should advise after the sun has set." Tiracchānavijjā dve means the two training rules that state, "Should learn a base art, should recite it." Anokāso ca pucchanā means this was said referring to "Should ask a question of a monk who is made uneasy."

Addhānasamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā
Description of the Arising According to the Journey

265.Addhānanāvaṃ paṇītanti ‘‘bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ saṃvidhāya ekaddhānamaggaṃ paṭipajjeyya, ekaṃ nāvaṃ abhiruheyya, paṇītabhojanāni agilāno attano atthāya viññāpetvā bhuñjeyyā’’ti vuttasikkhāpadattayaṃ.Mātugāmena saṃhareti mātugāmena saddhiṃ saṃvidhāya gamanañca ‘‘sambādhe lomaṃ saṃharāpeyyā’’ti vuttasikkhāpadañca.Dhaññaṃ nimantitā cevāti ‘‘dhaññaṃ viññāpetvā vā’’ti ca ‘‘nimantitā vā pavāritā vā khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā khādeyya vā bhuñjeyya vā’’ti vuttasikkhāpadañca.Aṭṭha cāti bhikkhunīnaṃ vuttā aṭṭha pāṭidesanīyā vā.

265.Addhānanāvaṃ paṇīta means the three training rules that state, "Having made an agreement with a nun, should set out on a journey for the same distance, should board the same boat, should request and eat fine foods for oneself when not ill." Mātugāmena saṃhare means travelling having made an agreement with a woman, and the training rule that says, "In a crowded place, should have hair arranged." Dhaññaṃ nimantitā cevā means "Having requested grain," and "Whether invited or requested, should eat or consume hard food or soft food." Aṭṭha cā means the eight Pāṭidesanīyas stated for nuns.

Theyyasatthasamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā
Description of the Arising According to the Group of Thieves

266.Theyyasatthaṃ upassutīti theyyasatthena saddhiṃ saṃvidhāya ekaddhānamaggagamanañca upassutitiṭṭhanañca.Sūpaviññāpanena cāti idaṃ sūpodanaviññattiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Rattichannañca okāsanti ‘‘rattandhakāre appadīpe, paṭicchanne okāse, ajjhokāse purisena saddhi’’nti evaṃ vuttasikkhāpadattayaṃ.Byūhena sattamāti idaṃ tadanantarameva ‘‘rathikāya vā byūhe vā siṅghāṭake vā purisena saddhi’’nti āgatasikkhāpadaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.

266.Theyyasatthaṃ upassutī means going on a journey for the same distance having made an agreement with a band of thieves, and standing eavesdropping. Sūpaviññāpanena cā means this was said referring to requesting soup and rice. Rattichannañca okāsa means the three training rules that state, "In the darkness of night without a lamp, in a covered place, in the open air with a man." Byūhena sattamā means this was said referring to the training rule that comes immediately after that, "On a road or in a crowd or at a crossroads with a man."

Dhammadesanāsamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā
Description of the Arising According to the Teaching of the Dhamma

267.Dhammadesanāsamuṭṭhānāni ekādasa uttānāneva. Evaṃ tāva sambhinnasamuṭṭhānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Niyatasamuṭṭhānaṃ pana tividhaṃ, taṃ ekekasseva sikkhāpadassa hoti, taṃ visuṃyeva dassetuṃ‘‘bhūtaṃ kāyena jāyatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ, taṃ uttānameva.Nettidhammānulomikanti vinayapāḷidhammassa anulomanti.

267.The eleven kinds of arising from the teaching of the Dhamma are straightforward. Thus, the mixed arising should be understood. However, the definite arising is threefold; that occurs to only one training rule, to show that separately, "bhūtaṃ kāyena jāyatī" etc. was said; that is straightforward. Nettidhammānulomikanti means according to the Vinaya Piṭaka Dhamma.

Samuṭṭhānasīsavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Conclusion of the Summary of Arisings.

Antarapeyyālaṃ

Intermediate Extended Form

Katipucchāvāravaṇṇanā
Description of the Series of Questions Beginning with 'How Many'

271.Idāni āpattiādikoṭṭhāsesu kosallajananatthaṃ ‘‘kati āpattiyo’’tiādinā nayena mātikaṃ ṭhapetvā niddesappaṭiniddesavasena vibhaṅgo vutto.

271.Now, to generate skill in the sections beginning with offenses, having established the matrix with the method beginning with "How many offenses?" etc., the analysis was stated in terms of designation and counter-designation.

kati āpattiyoti mātikāya ca vibhaṅge ca āgatāpattipucchā. Esa nayo dutiyapadepi. Kevalañhettha āpattiyo eva rāsivasenakhandhāti vuttā.Vinītavatthūnīti tāsaṃ āpattīnaṃvinayapucchā;‘‘vinītaṃ vinayo vūpasamo’’ti idañhi atthato ekaṃ, vinītāniyevavinītavatthūnīti ayamettha padattho. Idāni yesu sati āpattiyo honti, asati na honti, te dassetuṃ‘‘kati agāravā’’ti pucchādvayaṃ. Vinītavatthūnīti ayaṃ pana tesaṃ agāravānaṃ vinayapucchā. Yasmā pana tā āpattiyo vipattiṃ āpattā nāma natthi, tasmā ‘‘kati vipattiyo’’ti ayaṃ āpattīnaṃ vipattibhāvapucchā.Kati āpattisamuṭṭhānānīti tāsaṃyeva āpattīnaṃ samuṭṭhānapucchā.Vivādamūlāni anuvādamūlānīti imā ‘‘vivādādhikaraṇaṃ anuvādādhikaraṇa’’nti āgatānaṃ vivādānuvādānaṃ mūlapucchā.Sāraṇīyā dhammāti vivādānuvādamūlānaṃ abhāvakaradhammapucchā.Bhedakaravatthūnīti ayaṃ ‘‘bhedanasaṃvattanikaṃ vā adhikaraṇa’’ntiādīsu vuttabhedakaraṇapucchā.Adhikaraṇānīti bhedakaravatthūsu sati uppajjanadhammapucchā.Samathāti tesaṃyeva vūpasamanadhammapucchā.Pañca āpattiyoti mātikāya āgatavasena vuttā.Sattāti vibhaṅge āgatavasena.

kati āpattiyo means the question about offenses that comes in the matrix and in the analysis. This method is also in the second term. Only here are the offenses stated as a heap as khandhā. Vinītavatthūnī means the Vinaya question about those offenses; "Vinītaṃ vinayo vūpasamo" indeed this is one in meaning, only the disciplined are vinītavatthūnī, this is the meaning of the term here. Now, to show those things in the presence of which there are offenses, and in the absence of which there are not, the two questions "kati agāravā" are asked. Vinītavatthūnī is the Vinaya question about those instances of lack of respect. However, since those offenses are called having fallen into misfortune (vipatti), there is no such thing, therefore "kati vipattiyo" is a question about the state of misfortune of the offenses. Kati āpattisamuṭṭhānānī means the question about the arising of those very offenses. Vivādamūlāni anuvādamūlānī means these are the root questions about the disputes and accusations that come as "vivādādhikaraṇaṃ anuvādādhikaraṇaṃ". Sāraṇīyā dhammā means the question about the dhamma that eliminates the roots of disputes and accusations. Bhedakaravatthūnī means this is the question about the factors of division stated in "bhedanasaṃvattanikaṃ vā adhikaraṇaṃ" etc. Adhikaraṇānī means the question about the phenomena that arise in the presence of the factors of division. Samathā means the question about the phenomena that calm those very things. Pañca āpattiyo means they are stated according to what comes in the matrix. Sattā means according to what comes in the analysis.

ārati;bhusā vā ratiārati. Vinā etehi ramatītivirati. Paccekaṃ paccekaṃ viramatītipaṭivirati. Veraṃ maṇati vināsetītiveramaṇī. Na etāya ete āpattikkhandhā karīyantītiakiriyā. Yaṃ etāya asati āpattikkhandhakaraṇaṃ uppajjeyya, tassa paṭipakkhatoakaraṇaṃ. Āpattikkhandhaajjhāpattiyā paṭipakkhatoanajjhāpatti. Velanatovelā;calayanato vināsanatoti attho. Niyyānaṃ sinoti bandhati nivāretītisetu. Āpattikkhandhānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. So setu etāya paññattiyā haññatītisetughāto. Sesavinītavatthuniddesesupi eseva nayo.

ārati; great delight is ārati. He does not delight without these, therefore virati. He abstains individually, one by one, therefore paṭivirati. He rejects and destroys hatred, therefore veramaṇī. The heaps of offenses are not made by this, therefore akiriyā. Because of the opposite of that which, in the absence of this, the making of heaps of offenses would arise, therefore akaraṇaṃ. Because of the opposite of falling into offenses due to heaps of offenses, therefore anajjhāpatti. A boundary is called velā because of wandering; it means that which removes and destroys. A bridge binds and prevents departure, therefore setu. This is a designation for the heaps of offenses. Because that bridge is destroyed by this enactment, therefore setughāto. This very method applies in the remaining designations of disciplined things.

Buddhe agāravādīsuyo buddhe dharamāne upaṭṭhānaṃ na gacchati, parinibbute cetiyaṭṭhānaṃ bodhiṭṭhānaṃ na gacchati, cetiyaṃ vā bodhiṃ vā na vandati, cetiyaṅgaṇe sachatto saupāhano carati, natthetassa buddhe gāravoti veditabbo. Yo pana sakkontoyeva dhammassavanaṃ na gacchati, sarabhaññaṃ na bhaṇati, dhammakathaṃ na katheti, dhammassavanaggaṃ bhinditvā gacchati, vikkhitto vā anādaro vā nisīdati, natthetassa dhamme gāravo. Yo theranavamajjhimesu cittīkāraṃ na paccupaṭṭhāpeti, uposathāgāravitakkamāḷakādīsu kāyappāgabbhiyaṃ dasseti, yathāvuḍḍhaṃ na vandati, natthetassa saṅghe gāravo. Tisso sikkhā samādāya asikkhamānoyeva pana sikkhāya agāravoti veditabbo. Pamāde ca sativippavāse tiṭṭhamānoyeva appamādalakkhaṇaṃ abrūhayamāno appamāde agāravoti veditabbo. Tathā āmisappaṭisanthāraṃ dhammappaṭisanthāranti imaṃ duvidhaṃ paṭisanthāraṃ akarontoyevapaṭisanthāre agāravoti veditabbo. Gāravaniddese vuttavipariyāyena attho veditabbo.

Buddhe agāravādīsu one who, while the Buddha is living, does not go to attend on him, and when he has passed away, does not go to the place of the monument or the place of the Bodhi tree, does not worship the monument or the Bodhi tree, walks in the monument courtyard with an umbrella and shoes, there is no respect for the Buddha in him; this should be understood. However, one who, though able to do so, does not go to hear the Dhamma, does not recite the sarabhaññaṃ, does not tell a Dhamma talk, goes breaking up an assembly for hearing the Dhamma, or sits scattered or disrespectful, there is no respect for the Dhamma in him. One who does not establish honour among the elders, the new monks, and the middle monks, shows bodily arrogance in the uposatha hall, in the meditation hall, etc., does not salute according to seniority, there is no respect for the Saṅgha in him. However, one who, having undertaken the three trainings, does not train, should be understood as lacking respect for training. One who, while standing in heedlessness and loss of mindfulness, does not develop the characteristic of diligence, should be understood as lacking respect for diligence. Similarly, one who does not do the two kinds of cordiality, material cordiality and Dhamma cordiality, should be understood as lacking respect for cordiality. The meaning should be understood by the opposite of what was stated in the designation of respect.

272.Vivādamūlaniddese‘‘sattharipi agāravo’’tiādīnaṃ buddhe agāravādīsu vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo.Appatissoti anīcavutti; na satthāraṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā viharati.Ajjhattaṃ vāti attano santāne vā attano pakkhe vā; sakāya parisāyāti attho.Bahiddhā vāti parasantāne vā parapakkhe vā.Tatra tumheti tasmiṃ ajjhattabahiddhābhede saparasantāne vā saparaparisāya vā.Pahānāya vāyameyyāthāti mettābhāvanādīhi nayehi pahānatthaṃ vāyameyyātha; mettābhāvanādinayena hi taṃ ajjhattampi bahiddhāpi pahīyati.Anavassavāyāti appavattibhāvāya.

272.In the designation of the roots of disputes, the meaning of "sattharipi agāravo" etc. should be understood in the same way as stated in the instances of lack of respect for the Buddha. Appatisso means one whose conduct is base; he does not live making the Teacher the most senior. Ajjhattaṃ vā means in one's own mind or on one's own side; it means in one's own assembly. Bahiddhā vā means in another's mind or on another's side. Tatra tumhe means in that division of internal and external, or with one's own assembly and another's assembly. Pahānāya vāyameyyāthā means you should strive for abandoning it by means of methods like loving-kindness meditation; for by the method of loving-kindness meditation, that is abandoned internally and externally. Anavassavāyā means for the sake of non-flowing.

Sandiṭṭhiparāmāsīti sakameva diṭṭhiṃ parāmasati; yaṃ attanā diṭṭhigataṃ gahitaṃ, idameva saccanti gaṇhāti.Ādhānaggāhīti daḷhaggāhī.

Sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī means he clings to only his own view; he grasps that which has been taken as a view by himself, thinking, "This alone is true." Ādhānaggāhī means one who grasps firmly.

273.Anuvādamūlaniddeso kiñcāpi vivādamūlaniddeseneva samāno, atha kho aṭṭhārasa bhedakaravatthūni nissāya vivadantānaṃ kodhūpanāhādayo vivādamūlāni. Tathā vivadantā pana sīlavipattiādīsu aññataravipattiṃ āpajjitvā ‘‘asuko bhikkhu asukaṃ nāma vipattiṃ āpanno’’ti vā, ‘‘pārājikaṃ āpannosi, saṅghādisesaṃ āpannosī’’ti vā anuvadanti. Evaṃ anuvadantānaṃ kodhūpanāhādayo anuvādamūlānīti ayamettha viseso.

273.Although the designation of the roots of accusations is similar to the designation of the roots of disputes, yet the roots of disputes are things like anger and malice in those who dispute relying on the eighteen factors of division. However, while they are disputing, having fallen into one of the misfortunes such as a lapse in virtue, they accuse, saying, "So-and-so monk has fallen into such-and-such a misfortune," or "You have fallen into a Pārājika offense, you have fallen into a Saṅghādisesa offense." Thus, for those who are accusing, the roots of accusations are things like anger and malice; this is the difference here.

274.Sāraṇīyadhammaniddese mettacittena kataṃ kāyakammaṃ mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma.Āvi ceva raho cāti sammukhā ca parammukhā ca. Tattha navakānaṃ cīvarakammādīsu sahāyabhāvagamanaṃ sammukhā mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma. Therānaṃ pana pādadhovanabījanavātadānādibhedampi sabbaṃ sāmīcikammaṃ sammukhā mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma. Ubhayehipi dunnikkhittānaṃ dārubhaṇḍādīnaṃ tesu avamaññaṃ akatvā attanā dunnikkhittānaṃ viya paṭisāmanaṃ parammukhā mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma.Ayampi dhammo sāraṇīyoti ayaṃ mettākāyakammasaṅkhāto dhammo saritabbo satijanako; yo naṃ karoti, taṃ puggalaṃ; yesaṃ kato hoti, te pasannacittā ‘‘aho sappuriso’’ti anussarantīti adhippāyo.Piyakaraṇoti taṃ puggalaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ piyaṃ karoti.Garukaraṇoti taṃ puggalaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ garuṃ karoti.Saṅgahāyātiādīsu sabrahmacārīhi saṅgahetabbabhāvāya. Tehi saddhiṃ avivādāya samaggabhāvāya ekībhāvāya ca saṃvattati.

274. In the explanation of the conducive-to-cordiality principle, bodily action done with a mind of loving-kindness is called loving-kindness in bodily action. Āvi ceva raho cā means both in presence and in absence. Here, going to offer assistance in matters such as robes for new monks is called loving-kindness in bodily action in their presence. But for senior monks, all respectful actions such as washing their feet, offering fans, etc., are called loving-kindness in bodily action in their presence. For both, without belittling things like wooden utensils that have been improperly put away, putting them away oneself as if they were one's own is called loving-kindness in bodily action in their absence. Ayampi dhammo sāraṇīyo means this principle, known as loving-kindness in bodily action, is conducive to recollection, it generates mindfulness; those who do it, that person; those to whom it is done, they, with pleased minds, recollect, thinking, "Ah, a good person," is the meaning. Piyakaraṇo means it makes that person dear to the community of those leading the holy life. Garukaraṇo means it makes that person respected by the community of those leading the holy life. Saṅgahāyātiādi, for the sake of being welcomed by those leading the holy life. It leads to non-dispute with them, to harmony, and to unity.

Mettaṃ vacīkammantiādīsu devatthero tissattheroti evaṃ paggayha vacanaṃ sammukhā mettaṃ vacīkammaṃ nāma. Vihāre asante pana taṃ paṭipucchantassa ‘‘kuhiṃ amhākaṃ devatthero, kuhiṃ amhākaṃ tissatthero, kadā nu kho āgamissatī’’ti evaṃ mamāyanavacanaṃ parammukhā mettaṃ vacīkammaṃ nāma. Mettāsinehasiniddhāni pana nayanāni ummīletvā pasannena mukhena olokanaṃ sammukhā mettaṃ manokammaṃ nāma. ‘‘Devatthero tissatthero arogo hotu, appābādho’’ti samannāharaṇaṃ parammukhā mettaṃ manokammaṃ nāma.

Mettaṃ vacīkammantiādi: speaking respectfully, "Devatthera, Tissathera," is called loving-kindness in verbal action in their presence. However, in the monastery, when they are not present, asking about them, "Where is our Devatthera? Where is our Tissathera? When will they come?" such speech with affection is called loving-kindness in verbal action in their absence. Opening the eyes and looking with a serene face, with eyes filled with loving affection, is called loving-kindness in mental action in their presence. Reflecting, "May Devatthera and Tissathera be free from disease, free from affliction," is called loving-kindness in mental action in their absence.

Appaṭivibhattabhogīti neva āmisaṃ paṭivibhajitvā bhuñjati, na puggalaṃ. Yo hi ‘‘ettakaṃ paresaṃ dassāmi, ettakaṃ attanā bhuñjissāmi, ettakaṃ vā asukassa ca asukassa ca dassāmi, ettakaṃ attanā bhuñjissāmī’’ti vibhajitvā bhuñjati, ayaṃ paṭivibhattabhogī nāma. Ayaṃ pana evaṃ akatvā ābhataṃ piṇḍapātaṃ therāsanato paṭṭhāya datvā gahitāvasesaṃ bhuñjati. ‘‘Sīlavantehī’’ti vacanato dussīlassa adātumpi vaṭṭati, sāraṇīyadhammapūrakena pana sabbesaṃ dātabbamevāti vuttaṃ. Gilāna-gilānupaṭṭhāka-āgantuka-gamikacīvarakammādipasutānaṃ viceyya dātumpi vaṭṭati. Na hi ete vicinitvā dentena puggalavibhāgo kato hoti, īdisānañhi kicchalābhattā viseso kātabboyevāti ayaṃ karoti.

Appaṭivibhattabhogī means one does not partake of alms food by dividing it, neither the material nor the recipients. For one who partakes having divided, thinking, "I will give this much to others, I will eat this much myself, or I will give this much to so-and-so, and I will eat this much myself," is called one who partakes of divided alms. But this one, without doing so, having given the brought-in alms food starting from the seat of the elders, partakes of what remains after taking. From the statement, "With virtuous ones," it is appropriate not to give to the immoral, but it is said that one who fulfills the principles of cordiality should give to all. It is also appropriate to give selectively to those who are sick, attending to the sick, newcomers, those preparing to depart, and those occupied with robe-making, etc. Indeed, one who gives having discriminated in this way does not make a division of persons, for it is indeed appropriate to make a distinction for such persons, as they have difficulty obtaining provisions.

Akhaṇḍānītiādīsu yassa sattasu āpattikkhandhesu ādimhi vā ante vā sikkhāpadaṃ bhinnaṃ hoti, tassa sīlaṃ pariyante chinnasāṭako viya khaṇḍaṃ nāma. Yassa pana vemajjhe bhinnaṃ, tassa majjhe chiddasāṭako viya chiddaṃ nāma hoti. Yassa paṭipāṭiyā dve tīṇi bhinnāni, tassa piṭṭhiyaṃ vā kucchiyaṃ vā uṭṭhitena visabhāgavaṇṇena kāḷarattādīnaṃ aññatarasarīravaṇṇā gāvī viya sabalaṃ nāma hoti. Yassa antarantarā bhinnāni, tassa antarantarā visabhāgavaṇṇabinduvicitrā gāvī viya kammāsaṃ nāma hoti. Yassa pana sabbena sabbaṃ abhinnāni sīlāni, tassa tāni sīlāni akhaṇḍāni acchiddāni asabalāni akammāsāni nāma honti. Tāni panetāni bhujissabhāvakaraṇatobhujissāni. Viññūhi pasatthattāviññuppasatthāni. Taṇhādiṭṭhīhi aparāmaṭṭhattāaparāmaṭṭhāni. Upacārasamādhiṃ appanāsamādhiṃ vā saṃvattayantītisamādhisaṃvattanikānīti vuccanti.Sīlasāmaññagato viharatīti tesu tesu disābhāgesu viharantehi kalyāṇasīlehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ samānabhāvūpagatasīlo viharati.

Akhaṇḍānītiādi: for one whose precept is broken in the first or the last of the seven groups of offenses, that person's morality is called "broken" (khaṇḍaṃ), like a robe torn at the edge. But for one whose precept is broken in the middle, that is called "holed" (chiddaṃ), like a robe with a hole in the middle. For one whose two or three precepts are broken in succession, that is called "motley" (sabalaṃ), like a cow with patches of different colors, black or red, standing out on its back or belly from the color of the rest of its body. For one whose precepts are broken intermittently, that is called "spotted" (kammāsaṃ), like a cow speckled with spots of different colors intermittently. But for one whose precepts are entirely unbroken, those precepts are called unbroken (akhaṇḍāni), unholed (acchiddāni), unmotley (asabalāni), unspotted (akammāsāni). Furthermore, because they cause the state of being free, they are bhujissāni (freeing). Because they are praised by the wise, they are viññuppasatthāni (praised by the wise). Because they are untouched by craving and views, they are aparāmaṭṭhāni (untouched). Because they lead to access concentration or attainment concentration, they are called samādhisaṃvattanikānī (conducive to concentration). Sīlasāmaññagato viharatīti: he dwells in unison of virtue with those monks of good conduct who dwell in those various regions.

Yāyaṃ diṭṭhīti maggasampayuttā sammādiṭṭhi.Ariyāti niddosā. Niyyātītiniyyānikā.Takkarassāti yo tathākārī hoti, tassa.Dukkhakkhayāyāti sabbadukkhassa khayatthaṃ. Sesaṃ yāva samathabhedapariyosānā uttānatthameva.

Yāyaṃ diṭṭhī means right view associated with the path. Ariyā means faultless. Niyyātīti niyyānikā means leading out. Takkarassā means for one who acts accordingly. Dukkhakkhayāyā means for the destruction of all suffering. The rest, up to the conclusion of the section on calm, is straightforward in meaning.

Katipucchāvāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Katipucchāvāra is concluded.

Khandhakapucchāvāro

Khandhakapucchāvāra

Pucchāvissajjanāvaṇṇanā
Pucchāvissajjanāvaṇṇanā

320.Upasampadaṃpucchissanti upasampadakkhandhakaṃ pucchissaṃ.Sanidānaṃ saniddesanti nidānena ca niddesena ca saddhiṃ pucchissāmi.Samukkaṭṭhapadānaṃ kati āpattiyoti yāni tattha samukkaṭṭhāni uttamāni padāni vuttāni, tesaṃ samukkaṭṭhapadānaṃ uttamapadānaṃ saṅkhepato kati āpattiyo hontīti. Yena yena hi padena yā yā āpatti paññattā, sā sā tassa tassa padassa āpattīti vuccati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘samukkaṭṭhapadānaṃ kati āpattiyo’’ti.Dve āpattiyoti ūnavīsativassaṃ upasampādentassa pācittiyaṃ, sesesu sabbapadesu dukkaṭaṃ.

320. Upasampadaṃ pucchissanti: I will ask about the Upasampadā Khandhaka. Sanidānaṃ saniddesanti: I will ask together with the nidāna and the niddesa. Samukkaṭṭhapadānaṃ kati āpattiyoti: Of those supreme, excellent terms stated therein, how many offenses, in brief, occur for those supreme terms, those excellent terms? For whatever offense is prescribed by whatever term, that offense is called the offense of that term. Therefore, it is said, "How many offenses are there for the supreme terms?" Dve āpattiyoti: For one who ordains someone under twenty years of age, a pācittiya offense; in all other cases, a dukkaṭaṃ offense.

Tissoti ‘‘nassantete vinassantete, ko tehi attho’’ti bhedapurekkhārānaṃ uposathakaraṇe thullaccayaṃ, ukkhittakena saddhiṃ uposathakaraṇe pācittiyaṃ, sesesu dukkaṭanti evaṃ uposathakkhandhake tisso āpattiyo.Ekāti vassūpanāyikakkhandhake ekā dukkaṭāpattiyeva.

Tissoti: a thullaccayaṃ for performing the Uposatha with those who are intent on division, thinking, "These are being destroyed, these are perishing, what use are they?"; a pācittiya for performing the Uposatha with an expelled person; a dukkaṭaṃ in other cases. Thus, there are three offenses in the Uposatha Khandhaka. Ekāti: In the Vassūpanāyika Khandhaka, there is only one dukkaṭaṃ offense.

Tissoti bhedapurekkhārassa pavārayato thullaccayaṃ, ukkhittakena saddhiṃ pācittiyaṃ, sesesu dukkaṭanti evaṃ pavāraṇākkhandhakepi tisso āpattiyo.

Tissoti: a thullaccayaṃ for one who invites (Pavāraṇā) while intending to cause division; a pācittiya for inviting together with an expelled person; a dukkaṭaṃ in other cases. Thus, there are three offenses in the Pavāraṇā Khandhaka as well.

Tissoti vacchatariṃ uggahetvā mārentānaṃ pācittiyaṃ, rattena cittena aṅgajātachupane thullaccayaṃ, sesesu dukkaṭanti evaṃ cammasaṃyuttepi tisso āpattiyo. Bhesajjakkhandhakepi samantā dvaṅgule thullaccayaṃ, bhojjayāguyā pācittiyaṃ, sesesu dukkaṭanti evaṃ tisso āpattiyo.

Tissoti: a pācittiya for killing a calf after taking it; a thullaccayaṃ for touching the genital area with intentional thought; a dukkaṭaṃ in other cases. Thus, there are three offenses in the Cammasamyutta as well. In the Bhesajja Khandhaka also, a thullaccayaṃ if (the plaster) goes beyond two aṅgula all around; a pācittiya for rice gruel; a dukkaṭaṃ in other cases. Thus, there are three offenses.

Kathinaṃkevalaṃ paññattimeva, natthi tattha āpatti.Cīvarasaṃyuttekusacīravākacīresu thullaccayaṃ, atirekacīvare nissaggiyaṃ, sesesu dukkaṭanti imā tisso āpattiyo.

Kathinaṃ is only a prescription (paññatti); there is no offense there. Cīvarasaṃyutte: a thullaccayaṃ for robes made of kusa grass or bark; a nissaggiya for extra robes; these three are dukkaṭaṃ offenses in other cases.

Campeyyakeekā dukkaṭāpattiyeva. Kosambaka-kammakkhandhaka-pārivāsikasamuccayakkhandhakesupi ekā dukkaṭāpattiyeva.

Campeyyake: there is only one dukkaṭaṃ offense. In the Kosambaka, Kamma Khandhaka, and Pārivāsika Samuccaya Khandhakas as well, there is only one dukkaṭaṃ offense.

Samathakkhandhakechandadāyako khiyyati, khiyyanakaṃ pācittiyaṃ, sesesu dukkaṭanti imā dve āpattiyo.Khuddakavatthukeattano aṅgajātaṃ chindati, thullaccayaṃ, romaṭṭhe pācittiyaṃ, sesesu dukkaṭanti imā tisso āpattiyo.Senāsanakkhandhakegarubhaṇḍavissajjane thullaccayaṃ, saṅghikā vihārā nikkaḍḍhane pācittiyaṃ, sesesu dukkaṭanti imā tisso āpattiyo.

Samathakkhandhake: one who gives consent is rebuked (khiyyati), a pācittiya for rebuking; a dukkaṭaṃ in other cases. Thus, there are two offenses. Khuddakavatthuke: one who cuts off his own genital area (aṅgajātaṃ), a thullaccayaṃ; a pācittiya for cutting off the hair; a dukkaṭaṃ in other cases. Thus, there are three offenses. Senāsanakkhandhake: a thullaccayaṃ for disposing of heavy equipment; a pācittiya for removing sangha monasteries; a dukkaṭaṃ in other cases. Thus, there are three offenses.

Saṅghabhedebhedakānuvattakānaṃ thullaccayaṃ, gaṇabhojane pācittiyanti imā dve āpattiyo.Samācāraṃ pucchissanti vutte vattakkhandhake ekā dukkaṭāpattiyeva. Sā sabbavattesu anādariyena hoti. Tathāpātimokkhaṭṭhapane. Bhikkhunikkhandhakeappavāraṇāya pācittiyaṃ, sesesu dukkaṭanti dve āpattiyo. Pañcasatikasattasatikesu kevalaṃ dhammo saṅgahaṃ āropito, natthi tattha āpattīti.

Saṅghabhede: a thullaccayaṃ for those who follow the one who causes division; a pācittiya for group meals. Thus, there are two offenses. When it is said Samācāraṃ pucchissanti, in the Vatta Khandhaka, there is only one dukkaṭaṃ offense. That occurs due to disrespect in all duties. Similarly, pātimokkhaṭṭhapane. Bhikkhunikkhandhake: a pācittiya for not inviting (Pavāraṇā); a dukkaṭaṃ in other cases. Thus, there are two offenses. In the Pañcasatika and Sattasatika, only the Dhamma was compiled; there is no offense there.

Khandhakapucchāvāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Khandhakapucchāvāra is concluded.

Ekuttarikanayo

Ekuttarikanayo

Ekakavāravaṇṇanā
Ekakavāravaṇṇanā

321.Āpattikarādhammā jānitabbātiādimhi ekuttarikanaye āpattikarā dhammā nāma cha āpattisamuṭṭhānāni. Etesañhi vasena puggalo āpattiṃ āpajjati, tasmā ‘‘āpattikarā’’ti vuttā.Anāpattikarānāma satta samathā.Āpatti jānitabbāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sikkhāpade ca vibhaṅge ca vuttā āpatti jānitabbā.Anāpattīti ‘‘anāpatti bhikkhu asādiyantassā’’tiādinā nayena anāpatti jānitabbā.Lahukāti lahukena vinayakammena visujjhanato pañcavidhā āpatti.Garukāti garukena vinayakammena visujjhanato saṅghādisesā āpatti. Kenaci ākārena anāpattibhāvaṃ upanetuṃ asakkuṇeyyato pārājikāpatti ca.Sāvasesāti ṭhapetvā pārājikaṃ sesā.Anavasesāti pārājikāpatti. Dve āpattikkhandhāduṭṭhullā;avasesāaduṭṭhullā. Sappaṭikammadukaṃsāvasesadukasadisaṃ.Desanāgāminidukaṃlahukadukasaṅgahitaṃ.

321. Āpattikarā dhammā jānitabbātiādi: In the Ekuttarikanaya, "āpattikarā dhammā" (things that cause offenses) means the six sources of offenses. Indeed, a person incurs an offense by means of these, therefore they are called "āpattikarā." Anāpattikarā means the seven samathas (settlements). Āpatti jānitabbā means the offense stated in each and every training rule and in the Vibhaṅga should be known. Anāpattī means non-offense should be known in the manner beginning with "there is no offense for a bhikkhu who does not enjoy (it)." Lahukā means the five kinds of offenses that are purified by a light Vinaya act. Garukā means the saṅghādisesa offense that is purified by a grave Vinaya act, and the pārājika offense, since it cannot be brought to a state of non-offense by any means. Sāvasesā means those remaining, setting aside the pārājika. Anavasesā means the pārājika offense. The two groups of offenses are duṭṭhullā (serious); the remaining are aduṭṭhullā (not serious). Sappaṭikammadukaṃ is similar to the category of offenses that have a remainder (sāvasesa). Desanāgāminidukaṃ is included in the category of light offenses.

Antarāyikāti sattapi āpattiyo sañcicca vītikkantā saggantarāyañceva mokkhantarāyañca karontīti antarāyikā. Ajānantena vītikkantā pana paṇṇattivajjāpatti neva saggantarāyaṃ na mokkhantarāyaṃ karotītianantarāyikā. Antarāyikaṃ āpannassāpi desanāgāminiṃ desetvā vuṭṭhānagāminito vuṭṭhāya suddhipattassa sāmaṇerabhūmiyaṃ ṭhitassa ca avārito saggamokkhamaggoti.Sāvajjapaññattīti lokavajjā.Anavajjapaññattīti paṇṇattivajjā.Kiriyato samuṭṭhitānāma yaṃ karonto āpajjati pārājikāpatti viya.Akiriyatoti yaṃ akaronto āpajjati, cīvaraanadhiṭṭhānāpatti viya.Kiriyākiriyatoti yaṃ karonto ca akaronto ca āpajjati, kuṭikārāpatti viya.

Antarāyikā means all seven offenses, if intentionally transgressed, cause an obstruction to heaven and an obstruction to liberation, therefore they are antarāyikā. However, the paṇṇattivajjāpatti (offense against the rule) transgressed unknowingly does not cause an obstruction to heaven nor an obstruction to liberation, therefore it is anantarāyikā. For one who has incurred an antarāyika offense, even after confessing the desanāgāmini and rising from the vuṭṭhānagāmini, and for one who is established in the sāmaṇera level having attained purity, the path to heaven and liberation is not obstructed. Sāvajjapaññattī means offenses against the world. Anavajjapaññattī means offenses against the rule. Kiriyato samuṭṭhitā means the offense that arises from doing something, like the pārājika offense. Akiriyato means the offense that arises from not doing something, like the offense of not undertaking a robe. Kiriyākiriyato means the offense that arises from doing and not doing something, like the offense regarding a hut.

Pubbāpattīti paṭhamaṃ āpannāpatti.Aparāpattīti pārivāsikādīhi pacchā āpannāpatti.Pubbāpattīnaṃ antarāpattināma mūlavisuddhiyā antarāpatti.Aparāpattīnaṃ antarāpattināma agghavisuddhiyā antarāpatti. Kurundiyaṃ pana‘‘pubbāpattināma paṭhamaṃ āpannā.Aparāpattināma mānattārahakāle āpannā.Pubbāpattīnaṃ antarāpattināma parivāse āpannā.Aparāpattīnaṃ antarāpattināma mānattacāre āpannā’’ti vuttaṃ. Idampi ekena pariyāyena yujjati.

Pubbāpattī means the offense incurred first. Aparāpattī means the offense incurred later by those undergoing parivāsa, etc. Pubbāpattīnaṃ antarāpatti means the offense between the initial offenses at the time of the mūlavisuddhi. Aparāpattīnaṃ antarāpatti means the offense between the later offenses at the time of the agghavisuddhi. However, in the Kurundi, it is said, ‘‘pubbāpatti means the offense incurred first. Aparāpatti means the offense incurred during the period when one is liable to mānatta. Pubbāpattīnaṃ antarāpatti means the offense incurred during parivāsa. Aparāpattīnaṃ antarāpatti means the offense incurred while practicing mānatta.’’ This, too, is fitting in one way.

Desitā gaṇanūpagānāma yā dhuranikkhepaṃ katvā puna na āpajjissāmīti desitā hoti.Agaṇanūpagānāma yā dhuranikkhepaṃ akatvā saussāheneva cittena aparisuddhena desitā hoti. Ayañhi desitāpi desitagaṇanaṃ na upeti. Aṭṭhame vatthusmiṃ bhikkhuniyā pārājikameva hoti.Paññatti jānitabbātiādīsu navasu padesu paṭhamapārājikapucchāya vuttanayeneva vinicchayo veditabbo.

Desitā gaṇanūpagā means the offense that is confessed, having relinquished the burden, thinking, "I will not incur it again." Agaṇanūpagā means the offense that is confessed without relinquishing the burden, with eagerness of mind, impurely. Indeed, even this confessed offense does not enter into the reckoning of confessed offenses. In the eighth item, for a bhikkhuni, it is only a pārājika. In the nine items beginning with Paññatti jānitabbātiādi, the determination should be understood in the same way as stated in the explanation of the first pārājika question.

Thullavajjāti thulladose paññattā garukāpatti.Athullavajjāti lahukāpatti.Gihipaṭisaṃyuttāti sudhammattherassa āpatti, yā ca dhammikassa paṭissavassa asaccāpane āpatti, avasesāna gihipaṭisaṃyuttā. Pañcānantariyakammāpattiniyatā,sesāaniyatā.Ādikaroti sudinnattherādi ādikammiko.Anādikaroti makkaṭisamaṇādi anupaññattikārako.Adhiccāpattikonāma yo kadāci karahaci āpattiṃ āpajjati.Abhiṇhāpattikonāma yo niccaṃ āpajjati.

Thullavajjā means a grave offense prescribed for a serious fault. Athullavajjā means a light offense. Gihipaṭisaṃyuttā means the offense of Sudhammatthera, and the offense of breaking a promise to a layperson; the remaining are na gihipaṭisaṃyuttā (not connected with laypersons). The offense of the five deeds of immediate result is niyatā (fixed); the remaining are aniyatā (not fixed). Ādikaro means Sudinnatthera and others, the first offenders. Anādikaro means Makkaṭisamaṇa and others, the first prescribers. Adhiccāpattiko means one who incurs an offense occasionally, at some time or other. Abhiṇhāpattiko means one who incurs offenses constantly.

Codakonāma yo vatthunā vā āpattiyā vā paraṃ codeti. Yo pana evaṃ codito ayaṃcuditakonāma. Pañcadasasu dhammesu appatiṭṭhahitvā abhūtena vatthunā codentoadhammacodakonāma, tena tathā coditoadhammacuditakonāma. Vipariyāyenadhammacodakacuditakāveditabbā. Micchattaniyatehi vā sammattaniyatehi vā dhammehi samannāgatoniyato,viparītoaniyato.

Codako means one who accuses another with a thing or an offense. However, one who is accused in this way is called cuditako. One who accuses with an unfounded thing, not being established in the fifteen qualities, is called adhammacodako; one who is accused in that way is called adhammacuditako. The opposites, dhammacodakacuditakā, should be understood. One who is endowed with qualities that are fixed in wrongness or fixed in rightness is niyato (fixed); the opposite is aniyato (not fixed).

bhabbāpattikānāma, buddhā ca paccekabuddhā caabhabbāpattikānāma. Ukkhepanīyakammakatoukkhittakonāma, avasesacatubbidhatajjanīyādikammakatoanukkhittakonāma. Ayañhi uposathaṃ vā pavāraṇaṃ vā dhammaparibhogaṃ vā āmisaparibhogaṃ vā na kopeti. ‘‘Mettiyaṃ bhikkhuniṃ nāsetha, dūsako nāsetabbo, kaṇṭako samaṇuddeso nāsetabbo’’ti evaṃ liṅgadaṇḍakamma-saṃvāsanāsanāhi nāsitabbonāsitakonāma. Sesā sabbeanāsitakā. Yena saddhiṃ uposathādiko saṃvāso atthi, ayaṃsamānasaṃvāsako,itaronānāsaṃvāsako. So kammanānāsaṃvāsako laddhinānāsaṃvāsakoti duvidho hoti.Ṭhapanaṃ jānitabbanti ‘‘ekaṃ bhikkhave adhammikaṃ pātimokkhaṭṭhapana’’ntiādinā nayena vuttaṃ pātimokkhaṭṭhapanaṃ jānitabbanti attho.

bhabbāpattikā means Buddhas and Paccekabuddhas are abhabbāpattikā (incapable of incurring offenses). One who has been subjected to ukkhepanīyakamma is called ukkhittako; one who has been subjected to the remaining four kinds of tajjanīyādikamma is called anukkhittako. Indeed, this one does not spoil the Uposatha, Pavāraṇā, enjoyment of the Dhamma, or enjoyment of material things. One who should be destroyed by liṅgadaṇḍakamma, saṃvāsanāsanāhi, thinking, "Destroy the bhikkhuni Mettiyaṃ, the defiler should be destroyed, the sāmaṇuddesa who is a thorn should be destroyed," is called nāsitako. All the remaining are anāsitakā. One with whom there is association (saṃvāsa) such as Uposatha is samānasaṃvāsako, the other is nānāsaṃvāsako. That one is twofold: nānāsaṃvāsaka due to kamma, and nānāsaṃvāsaka due to doctrine. Ṭhapanaṃ jānitabbanti: the meaning is that the ṭhapana (suspension) of the Pātimokkha stated in the manner beginning with "Bhikkhus, one suspension of the Pātimokkha is unlawful," should be known.

Ekakavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Ekakavāra is concluded.

Dukavāravaṇṇanā
Dukavāravaṇṇanā

322.Dukesu sacittakā āpattisaññāvimokkhā,acittakānosaññāvimokkhā. Laddhasamāpattikassa āpattināma bhūtārocanāpatti,aladdhasamāpattikassa āpattināma abhūtārocanāpatti.Saddhammapaṭisaññuttānāma padasodhammādikā,asaddhammapaṭisaññuttānāma duṭṭhullavācāpatti.Saparikkhārapaṭisaññuttānāma nissaggiyavatthuno anissajjitvā paribhoge, pattacīvarānaṃ nidahane, kiliṭṭhacīvarānaṃ adhovane, malaggahitapattassa apacaneti evaṃ ayuttaparibhoge āpatti.Paraparikkhārapaṭisaññuttānāma saṅghikamañcapīṭhādīnaṃ ajjhokāse santharaṇaanāpucchāgamanādīsu āpajjitabbā āpatti.Sapuggalapaṭisaññuttānāma ‘‘mudupiṭṭhikassa lambissa ūrunā aṅgajātaṃ pīḷentassā’’tiādinā nayena vuttāpatti.Parapuggalapaṭisaññuttānāma methunadhammakāyasaṃsaggapahāradānādīsu vuttāpatti, ‘‘sikharaṇīsī’’tisaccaṃ bhaṇanto garukaṃāpajjati, ‘‘sampajānamusāvāde pācittiya’’ntimusā bhaṇanto lahukaṃ. Abhūtārocanemusā bhaṇanto garukaṃ. Bhūtārocanesaccaṃ bhaṇanto lahukaṃ.

  1. In cases of dukkata, if it is intentional, there is saññāvimokkha (release by perception); if it is unintentional, there is nosaññāvimokkha (no release by perception). For one who has attained samāpatti, the offense is called bhūtārocanāpatti (an offense by revealing what is true); for one who has not attained samāpatti, the offense is called abhūtārocanāpatti (an offense by revealing what is untrue). Saddhammapaṭisaññuttā (connected with the true Dhamma) means offenses related to correct wording of the Dhamma, etc.; asaddhammapaṭisaññuttā (connected with the untrue Dhamma) means offenses related to using harsh language. Saparikkhārapaṭisaññuttā (connected with requisites) means offenses in unskilful use, such as using nissaggiya items without relinquishing them, storing robes and bowls, not washing soiled robes, and using a bowl with dirt still sticking to it. Paraparikkhārapaṭisaññuttā (connected with other requisites) means offenses to be incurred regarding Saṅgha property such as beds and chairs, such as spreading them in the open air or going without asking permission. Sapuggalapaṭisaññuttā (connected with oneself) means offenses stated in the manner of "when one with a soft back presses the genitals with a long thigh," etc. Parapuggalapaṭisaññuttā (connected with another person) means offenses stated in relation to sexual intercourse, bodily contact, giving blows, etc. Uttering the truth, "it is a sikharaṇī seed," one incurs a grave (garuka) offense; uttering a falsehood, "in intentional false speech, a pācittiya offense," one incurs a light (lahukaṃ) offense. In abhūtārocana (reporting falsely), uttering a falsehood incurs a grave (garuka) offense. In bhūtārocana (reporting truthfully), uttering the truth incurs a light (lahukaṃ) offense.

bhūmigato āpajjatināma. Sace pana aṅgulimattampi ākāse tiṭṭheyya, na āpajjeyya, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘no vehāsagato’’ti. Vehāsakuṭiyā āhaccapādakaṃ mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā abhinisīdantovehāsagatoāpajjatināma. Sace pana taṃ bhūmiyaṃ paññāpetvā nipajjeyya na āpajjeyya, tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘no bhūmigato’’ti. Gamiyo gamiyavattaṃ apūretvā gacchantonikkhamanto āpajjati nāma, no pavisanto. Āgantuko āgantukavattaṃ apūretvā sachattupāhano pavisantopavisanto āpajjati nāma, no nikkhamanto.

bhūmigato āpajjati (one on the ground incurs an offense). But if even an inch is in the air, one does not incur an offense; hence it is said, "not one in the air (no vehāsagato)." Sitting on a bed or chair with legs touching a vehāsa hut, vehāsagato āpajjati (one in the air incurs an offense). But if that is placed on the ground and one lies down, one does not incur an offense; hence it is said – "not one on the ground (no bhūmigato)." One who leaves without fulfilling the duties of a resident monk, nikkhamanto āpajjati nāma, no pavisanto (incurrs an offense when leaving, not when entering). A newcomer, entering with shoes and an umbrella without fulfilling the duties of a newcomer monk, pavisanto āpajjati nāma, no nikkhamanto (incurs an offense when entering, not when leaving).

Ādiyantoāpajjatināma bhikkhunī atigambhīraṃ udakasuddhikaṃ ādiyamānā; dubbaṇṇakaraṇaṃ anādiyitvā cīvaraṃ paribhuñjanto panaanādiyanto āpajjatināma. Mūgabbatādīni titthiyavattāni samādiyantosamādiyanto āpajjatināma. Pārivāsikādayo pana tajjanīyādikammakatā vā attano vattaṃ asamādiyantā āpajjanti, te sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘atthāpatti na samādiyanto āpajjatī’’ti. Aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā cīvaraṃ sibbanto vejjakammabhaṇḍāgārikakammacittakammādīni vā karontokaronto āpajjatināma. Upajjhāyavattādīni akarontoakaronto āpajjatināma. Aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā cīvaraṃ dadamānodento āpajjatināma. Saddhivihārikaantevāsikānaṃ cīvarādīni adentoadento āpajjatināma. Aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā cīvaraṃ gaṇhantopaṭiggaṇhanto āpajjatināma. ‘‘Na bhikkhave ovādo na gahetabbo’’ti vacanato ovādaṃ agaṇhantona paṭiggaṇhanto āpajjatināma.

Ādiyanto āpajjati (one who initiates incurs an offense), a bhikkhunī initiating a very deep water purification; but one using a robe without initiating the making of a discolored robe, anādiyanto āpajjati (one not initiating incurs an offense). One undertaking the practices of sectarians, such as the vow of silence, samādiyanto āpajjati (one undertaking incurs an offense). But those undergoing parivāsa, etc., or those subject to tajjanīya-kamma, incur an offense if they do not undertake their own duties; with reference to them, it is said, "there is an offense, one not undertaking incurs an offense." A monk sewing a robe for a bhikkhunī who is not a relative, or doing work as a physician, storekeeper, artist, etc., karonto āpajjati (one doing incurs an offense). Not doing the duties of an upajjhā (preceptor), etc., akaronto āpajjati (one not doing incurs an offense). Giving a robe to a bhikkhunī who is not a relative, dento āpajjati (one giving incurs an offense). Not giving robes, etc., to a saddhivihārika or antevāsika, adento āpajjati (one not giving incurs an offense). Receiving a robe from a bhikkhunī who is not a relative, paṭiggaṇhanto āpajjati (one receiving incurs an offense). Not accepting advice, because of the saying, "Bhikkhus, advice should not be refused," na paṭiggaṇhanto āpajjati (one not accepting incurs an offense).

paribhogena āpajjatināma. Pañcāhikaṃ saṅghāṭicāraṃ atikkāmayamānāaparibhogena āpajjatināma. Sahagāraseyyaṃrattiṃ āpajjati nāma, no divā,dvāraṃ asaṃvaritvā paṭisallīyantodivā āpajjati, no rattiṃ. Ekarattachārattasattāhadasāhamāsātikkamesu vuttaāpattiṃ āpajjantoaruṇugge āpajjatināma, pavāretvā bhuñjantona aruṇugge āpajjatināma.

paribhogena āpajjati (one incurs an offense by using). Exceeding the five-day wearing period for a sanghati robe, aparibhogena āpajjati (one incurs an offense by not using). In sleeping under the same roof, rattiṃ āpajjati nāma, no divā (one incurs an offense at night, not during the day), going to seclusion without closing the door, divā āpajjati, no rattiṃ (one incurs an offense during the day, not at night). In incurring an offense stated for exceeding one night, four nights, seven days, ten days, or one month, aruṇugge āpajjati (one incurs the offense at dawn), eating after invitation na aruṇugge āpajjati (one does not incur the offense at dawn).

chindanto āpajjatināma, kese vā nakhe vā na chindantona chindanto āpajjatināma. Āpattiṃ chādentochādento āpajjatināma, ‘‘tiṇena vā paṇṇena vā paṭicchādetvā āgantabbaṃ, natveva naggena āgantabbaṃ, yo āgaccheyya āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti imaṃ pana āpattiṃna chādento āpajjatināma. Kusacīrādīni dhārentodhārento āpajjatināma, ‘‘ayaṃ te bhikkhu patto yāva bhedanāya dhāretabbo’’ti imaṃ āpattiṃna dhārento āpajjatināma.

chindanto āpajjati (one cutting incurs an offense), not cutting hair or nails, na chindanto āpajjati (one not cutting incurs an offense). Covering up an offense, chādento āpajjati (one covering incurs an offense), but this offense, "one should come covering with grass or leaves, one should certainly not come naked; whoever should come, there is an offense of dukkata," na chādento āpajjati (one not covering incurs an offense). Wearing garments of kusa grass, etc., dhārento āpajjati (one wearing incurs an offense), this bowl should be kept until it breaks, na dhārento āpajjati (one not keeping incurs an offense).

‘‘Attanā vā attānaṃ nānāsaṃvāsakaṃ karotī’’ti ekasīmāyaṃ dvīsu saṅghesu nisinnesu ekasmiṃ pakkhe nisīditvā parapakkhassa laddhiṃ gaṇhanto yasmiṃ pakkhe nisinno tesaṃ attanāva attānaṃ nānāsaṃvāsakaṃ karoti nāma. Yesaṃ santike nisinno tesaṃ gaṇapūrako hutvā kammaṃ kopeti, itaresaṃ hatthapāsaṃ anāgatattā. Samānasaṃvāsakepi eseva nayo. Yesañhi so laddhiṃ roceti, tesaṃ samānasaṃvāsako hoti, itaresaṃ nānāsaṃvāsako.Satta āpattiyo satta āpattikkhandhāti āpajjitabbato āpattiyo, rāsaṭṭhena khandhāti evaṃ dveyeva nāmāni hontīti nāmavasena dukaṃ dassitaṃ.Kammena vā salākaggāhena vāti ettha uddeso ceva kammañca ekaṃ, vohāro ceva anussāvanā ca salākaggāho ca ekaṃ, vohārānussāvanasalākaggāhā pubbabhāgā, kammañceva uddeso ca pamāṇaṃ.

"Attanā vā attānaṃ nānāsaṃvāsakaṃ karotī" (either by oneself, one makes oneself of different communion) when two Saṅghas are sitting within the same boundary, one who, sitting on one side, approves of the doctrine of the other side, by himself makes himself of different communion from those on whose side he is sitting. He corrupts the act, becoming the quorum for those near him, since those on the other side are not within arm's reach. The same method applies even to those of same communion. For he is of same communion with those whose doctrine he approves of, and of different communion with the others. Satta āpattiyo satta āpattikkhandhā (Seven offenses, seven groups of offenses): because of incurring, they are offenses; by way of aggregation, they are groups; thus there are only these two names; thus, a pair is shown by way of name. Kammena vā salākaggāhena vā (by means of a formal act or by taking ballots): here, the announcement and the act are one, the declaring and the announcement and the taking of ballots are one; the declaring, announcement, and taking of ballots are the preliminary parts, the act and the announcement are the measure.

Addhānahīnonāma ūnavīsativasso.Aṅgahīnonāma hatthacchinnādibhedo.Vatthuvipannonāma paṇḍako tiracchānagato ubhatobyañjanako ca. Avasesā theyyasaṃvāsakādayo aṭṭha abhabbapuggalākaraṇadukkaṭakānāma. Dukkaṭakiriyā dukkaṭakammā, imasmiṃyeva attabhāve katena attano kammena abhabbaṭṭhānaṃ pattāti attho.Aparipūronāma aparipuṇṇapattacīvaro.No ca yācatināma upasampadaṃ na yācati.Alajjissa ca bālassa cāti alajjī sacepi tepiṭako hoti, bālo ca sacepi saṭṭhivasso hoti, ubhopi nissāya na vatthabbaṃ.Bālassa ca lajjissa cāti ettha bālassa ‘‘tvaṃ nissayaṃ gaṇhā’’ti āṇāyapi nissayo dātabbo, lajjissa pana yācantasseva.Sātisāranti sadosaṃ; yaṃ ajjhācaranto āpattiṃ āpajjati.

Addhānahīno (deficient in time) means one under twenty years old. Aṅgahīno (deficient in limbs) means a person with cut hands, etc. Vatthuvipanno (deficient in gender) means a eunuch, a non-human animal, or a hermaphrodite. The remaining eight incapable individuals, beginning with theyyasaṃvāsaka, karaṇadukkaṭakā (doers of dukkata) Dukkata-kiriya is dukkata-kamma; it means that by his own action done in this very existence, he has reached the state of being incapable. Aparipūro (incomplete) means one whose bowl and robe are incomplete. No ca yācati (and does not request) means he does not request ordination. Alajjissa ca bālassa cā (to the shameless and the foolish): even if the shameless one is a master of the Tipitaka, and even if the fool is sixty years old, one should not live in dependence on either of them. Bālassa ca lajjissa cā (to the foolish and the shameful): here, to the foolish, even if ordered "accept a preceptor," a preceptor should be given; but to the shameful, only when he requests. Sātisāranti (with transgression): while engaging in which, one incurs an offense.

Kāyena paṭikkosanānāma hatthavikārādīhi paṭikkosanā.Kāyena paṭijānātīti hatthavikārādīhi paṭijānāti.Upaghātikānāma upaghātā.Sikkhūpaghātikānāma sikkhūpaghāto.Bhogūpaghātikānāma paribhogūpaghāto, tattha tisso sikkhā asikkhato sikkhūpaghātikāti veditabbā. Saṅghikaṃ vā puggalikaṃ vā dupparibhogaṃ bhuñjato bhogūpaghātikāti veditabbā.Dve venayikāti dve atthā vinayasiddhā.Paññattaṃnāma sakale vinayapiṭake kappiyākappiyavasena paññattaṃ.Paññattānulomaṃnāma catūsu mahāpadesesu daṭṭhabbaṃ.Setughātoti paccayaghāto; yena cittena akappiyaṃ kareyya, tassa cittassāpi anuppādananti attho.Mattakāritāti mattāya pamāṇena karaṇaṃ; pamāṇe ṭhānanti attho.Kāyena āpajjatīti kāyadvārikaṃ kāyena āpajjati; vacīdvārikaṃ vācāya.Kāyena vuṭṭhātīti tiṇavatthārakasamathe vināpi desanāya kāyeneva vuṭṭhāti; desetvā vuṭṭhahanto pana vācāya vuṭṭhāti.Abbhantaraparibhogonāma ajjhoharaṇaparibhogo.Bāhiraparibhogonāma sīsamakkhanādi.

Kāyena paṭikkosanā (rejection by body) means rejection by gestures of the hand, etc. Kāyena paṭijānātī (one acknowledges by the body) means one acknowledges by gestures of the hand, etc. Upaghātikā (destructive) means destructive. Sikkhūpaghātikā (destructive to training) means destructive to training. Bhogūpaghātikā (destructive to possessions) means destructive to use of possessions; among them, the three trainings are to be understood as destructive to training by one who is untrained. It is to be understood as destructive to possessions when one uses Saṅgha or individual property improperly. Dve venayikā (two things based on discipline) means two meanings established by discipline. Paññattaṃ (laid down) means what is laid down in the entire Vinaya Piṭaka as allowable or unallowable. Paññattānulomaṃ (conforming to what is laid down) is to be seen in the four great authorities. Setughāto (destruction of the bridge) means destruction of conditions; it means that the thought with which one would do what is unallowable should not even arise. Mattakāritāti (doing measuredly) means doing according to measure; it means staying within the measure. Kāyena āpajjati (one incurs an offense by body) means one incurs an offense by way of the body-door; one incurs an offense by way of speech by speech. Kāyena vuṭṭhātī (one emerges by body) means one emerges merely by the body, even without confession, if capable of spreading a covering of grass; but one who emerges after confessing emerges by speech. Abbhantaraparibhogo (internal use) means the use of consuming. Bāhiraparibhogo (external use) means anointing the head, etc.

Anāgataṃ bhāraṃ vahatīti atherova samāno therehi vahitabbaṃ bījanagāhadhammajjhesanādibhāraṃ vahati; taṃ nittharituṃ vīriyaṃ ārabhati.Āgataṃ bhāraṃ na vahatīti thero therakiccaṃ na karoti, ‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave therena bhikkhunā sāmaṃ vā dhammaṃ bhāsituṃ, paraṃ vā ajjhesituṃ, anujānāmi bhikkhave therādheyyaṃ pātimokkha’’nti evamādi sabbaṃ parihāpetīti attho.Na kukkuccāyitabbaṃ kukkuccāyatīti na kukkuccāyitabbaṃ kukkuccāyitvā karoti.Kukkuccāyitabbaṃ na kukkuccāyatīti kukkuccāyitabbaṃ na kukkuccāyitvā karoti. Etesaṃ dvinnaṃ divā ca ratto ca āsavā vaḍḍhantīti attho. Anantaradukepi vuttapaṭipakkhavasena attho veditabbo. Sesaṃ tattha tattha vuttanayattā uttānamevāti.

Anāgataṃ bhāraṃ vahatī (he carries a burden not yet come) means though a junior, he carries the burden of reciting the Dhamma, learning the Dhamma, etc., which should be carried by the elders; he undertakes effort to accomplish that. Āgataṃ bhāraṃ na vahatī (he does not carry a burden that has come) means the elder does not do the duties of an elder, he abandons everything such as, "I allow, monks, a monk who is an elder to speak the Dhamma himself or to teach others; I allow the Pātimokkha to be entrusted to an elder," etc. Na kukkuccāyitabbaṃ kukkuccāyatī (what should not be worried about, he worries about) means he does what should not be worried about after worrying about it. Kukkuccāyitabbaṃ na kukkuccāyatī (what should be worried about, he does not worry about) means he does what should be worried about without worrying about it. For these two, defilements increase day and night. In the subsequent pair of dyads, the meaning should be understood according to the opposite stated. The rest is easily understood because of the methods stated in the respective places.

Dukavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Dyads is Finished.

Tikavāravaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Triads

323.Tikesuatthāpatti tiṭṭhante bhagavati āpajjatīti atthi āpatti, yaṃ tiṭṭhante bhagavati āpajjatīti attho. Eseva nayo sabbattha. Tattha lohituppādāpattiṃ tiṭṭhante āpajjati. ‘‘Etarahi kho panānanda, bhikkhū aññamaññaṃ āvusovādena samudācaranti, na vo mamaccayena evaṃ samudācaritabbaṃ, navakena, ānanda, bhikkhunā thero bhikkhū ‘bhante’ti vā ‘āyasmā’ti vā samudācaritabbo’’ti vacanato theraṃ āvusovādena samudācaraṇapaccayā āpattiṃ parinibbute bhagavati āpajjati, no tiṭṭhante. Imā dve āpattiyo ṭhapetvā avasesā dharantepi bhagavati āpajjati, parinibbutepi.

  1. In the Triads, atthāpatti tiṭṭhante bhagavati āpajjati (there is an offense, one incurs with the Blessed One present) means there is an offense that one incurs with the Blessed One present. The same method applies everywhere. Here, one incurs the offense of drawing blood with the Blessed One present. Because of the saying, "But now, Ānanda, monks address each other by name; monks should not address each other in this way after my passing; a new monk, Ānanda, should address an elder monk as 'bhante' or 'āyasmā'," one incurs an offense due to addressing an elder by name, with the Blessed One passed away, not while he is present. Except for these two offenses, the remaining offenses are incurred whether the Blessed One is living or has passed away.

Pavāretvā anatirittaṃ bhuñjanto āpattiṃ kāle āpajjati no vikāle. Vikālabhojanāpattiṃ pana vikāle āpajjati no kāle. Avasesā kāle ceva āpajjati vikāle ca. Sahagāraseyyaṃ rattiṃ āpajjati, dvāraṃ asaṃvaritvā paṭisallīyanaṃ divā. Sesā rattiñceva divā ca. ‘‘Dasavassomhi atirekadasavassomhī’’ti bālo abyatto parisaṃ upaṭṭhāpento dasavasso āpajjati no ūnadasavasso. ‘‘Ahaṃ paṇḍito byatto’’ti navo vā majjhimo vā parisaṃ upaṭṭhāpento ūnadasavasso āpajjati no dasavasso. Sesā dasavasso ceva āpajjati ūnadasavasso ca. ‘‘Pañcavassomhī’’ti bālo abyatto anissāya vasanto pañcavasso āpajjati. ‘‘Ahaṃ paṇḍito byatto’’ti navako anissāya vasanto ūnapañcavasso āpajjati. Sesaṃ pañcavasso ceva āpajjati ūnapañcavasso ca. Anupasampannaṃ padasodhammaṃ vācento, mātugāmassa dhammaṃ desento evarūpaṃ āpattiṃ kusalacitto āpajjati, pārājika-sukkavissaṭṭhi-kāyasaṃsagga-duṭṭhulla-attakāmapāricariya-duṭṭhadosa-saṅghabhedapahāradāna-talasattikādibhedaṃ akusalacitto āpajjati, asañcicca sahagāraseyyādiṃ abyākatacitto āpajjati, yaṃ arahāva āpajjati, sabbaṃ abyākatacittova āpajjati, methunadhammādibhedamāpattiṃ sukhavedanāsamaṅgī āpajjati, duṭṭhadosādibhedaṃ dukkhavedanāsamaṅgī, yaṃ sukhavedanāsamaṅgī āpajjati, taṃyeva majjhatto hutvā āpajjanto adukkhamasukhavedanāsamaṅgī āpajjati.

One who eats non-excess food after invitation incurs an offense at the proper time, not at the wrong time. But one incurs the offense of eating at the wrong time at the wrong time, not at the proper time. The remaining offenses are incurred both at the proper time and at the wrong time. One incurs sahagāraseyya at night, and going to seclusion without closing the door during the day. The rest are both during the day and at night. A fool, unlearned, who establishes an assembly, saying, "I am ten years old, I am more than ten years old," incurs an offense if he is ten years old, not if he is under ten years old. A new or intermediate monk, who establishes an assembly, saying, "I am wise and learned," incurs an offense if he is under ten years old, not if he is ten years old. The rest incur an offense both if they are ten years old and if they are under ten years old. A fool, unlearned, who lives without dependence, saying, "I am five years old," incurs an offense if he is five years old. A new monk, who lives without dependence, saying, "I am wise and learned," incurs an offense if he is under five years old. The rest incur an offense both if they are five years old and if they are under five years old. One of good intention incurs this kind of offense by reciting pada-sodhammas to one who is not ordained, or by teaching the Dhamma to a woman. One of bad intention incurs different offenses, such as pārājika, emission of semen, bodily contact, harsh words, procuring sensual pleasures for oneself, evil thoughts, causing schism in the Sangha, giving blows, or use of a talasattika. One of indeterminate intention incurs offenses unintentionally, such as sleeping under the same roof. All that a arahant would incur, he incurs only with an indeterminate intention. One experiencing pleasant feeling incurs offenses of the nature of sexual intercourse, etc.; one experiencing painful feeling incurs offenses of the nature of evil thoughts, etc.; the same that one experiencing pleasant feeling would incur, one incurs, being neutral, when experiencing neither-painful-nor-pleasant feeling.

Tayo paṭikkhepāti buddhassa bhagavato tayo paṭikkhepā. Catūsu paccayesu mahicchatā asantuṭṭhitā kilesasallekhanapaṭipattiyā agopāyanā, ime hi tayo dhammā buddhena bhagavatā paṭikkhittā. Appicchatādayo pana tayo buddhena bhagavatā anuññātā, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tayo anuññātā’’ti.

Tayo paṭikkhepāti (three rejections): three rejections of the Blessed Buddha. Great desire for the four requisites, discontent, lack of protection in the practice of eradicating defilements; these three things were rejected by the Blessed Buddha. But frugality, etc., were allowed by the Blessed Buddha; hence it is said, "three allowances (tayo anuññātā)."

‘‘Dasavassomhī’’ti parisaṃ upaṭṭhāpento ‘‘pañcavassomhī’’ti nissayaṃ agaṇhanto bālo āpajjati no paṇḍito, ūnadasavasso ‘‘byattomhī’’ti bahussutattā parisaṃ upaṭṭhāpento ūnapañcavasso ca nissayaṃ agaṇhanto paṇḍito āpajjati no bālo; avasesaṃ paṇḍito ceva āpajjati bālo ca. Vassaṃ anupagacchanto kāḷe āpajjati no juṇhe; mahāpavāraṇāya appavārento juṇhe āpajjati no kāḷe; avasesaṃ kāḷe ceva āpajjati juṇhe ca. Vassūpagamanaṃ kāḷe kappati no juṇhe; mahāpavāraṇāya pavāraṇā juṇhe kappati no kāḷe; sesaṃ anuññātakaṃ kāḷe ceva kappati juṇhe ca.

A fool incurs an offense by establishing an assembly, saying, "I am ten years old," and by not taking dependence, saying, "I am five years old," not a wise person. A wise person incurs an offense by establishing an assembly, saying "I am learned," though under ten years old because of much learning, and by not taking dependence, though under five years old, not a fool; the rest are incurred by both the wise and the foolish. One who does not observe vassa incurs an offense in the dark fortnight, not in the bright fortnight; one who does not invite at the great pavāraṇā incurs an offense in the bright fortnight, not in the dark fortnight; the rest are incurred both in the dark fortnight and in the bright fortnight. Observing vassa is suitable in the dark fortnight, not in the bright fortnight; invitation at the great pavāraṇā is suitable in the bright fortnight, not in the dark fortnight; the rest that is allowed is suitable both in the dark fortnight and in the bright fortnight.

Kattikapuṇṇamāsiyā pacchime pāṭipadadivase vikappetvā ṭhapitaṃ vassikasāṭikaṃ nivāsento hemante āpajjati. Kurundiyaṃ pana ‘‘kattikapuṇṇamadivase apaccuddharitvā hemante āpajjatī’’ti vuttaṃ, tampi suvuttaṃ. ‘‘Cātumāsaṃ adhiṭṭhātuṃ tato paraṃ vikappetu’’nti hi vuttaṃ. Atirekamāse sese gimhāne pariyesanto atirekaḍḍhamāse sese katvā nivāsento ca gimhe āpajjati nāma. Satiyā vassikasāṭikāya naggo kāyaṃ ovassāpento vasse āpajjati nāma. Pārisuddhiuposathaṃ vā adhiṭṭhānuposathaṃ vā karonto saṅgho āpajjati. Suttuddesañca adhiṭṭhānuposathañca karonto gaṇo āpajjati. Ekako suttuddesaṃ pārisuddhiuposathañca karonto puggalo āpajjati. Pavāraṇāyapi eseva nayo.

Wearing a vassikasāṭika that was set aside after being set aside on the day of the first waning moon after the Kattika full moon day, one incurs an offense in the winter season (hemanta). But in the Kurundi, it is said, "without recalling it on the day of the Kattika full moon, one incurs an offense in the winter season," that too is well said. For it is said, "to determine for four months, then to set aside." While searching in the remaining month of the hot season, and wearing it after making it for the remaining half-month, one incurs an offense in the hot season. While naked, letting the body be rained on with a vassikasāṭika at hand, one incurs an offense in the rainy season. The Saṅgha incurs an offense by doing pārisuddhi-uposatha or adhiṭṭhānuposatha. The gaṇa incurs an offense by doing suttuddesa and adhiṭṭhānuposatha. An individual incurs an offense by doing suttuddesa and pārisuddhi-uposatha alone. The same method applies to pavāraṇā.

Saṅghuposatho ca saṅghapavāraṇā ca saṅghasseva kappati. Gaṇuposatho ca gaṇapavāraṇā ca gaṇasseva kappati. Adhiṭṭhānuposatho ca adhiṭṭhānapavāraṇā ca puggalasseva kappati. ‘‘Pārājikaṃ āpannomhī’’tiādīni bhaṇanto vatthuṃ chādeti na āpattiṃ, ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevi’’ntiādīni bhaṇanto āpattiṃ chādeti no vatthuṃ, yo neva vatthuṃ na āpattiṃ āroceti, ayaṃ vatthuñceva chādeti āpattiñca.

Saṅghuposatha and saṅghapavāraṇā are suitable only for the Saṅgha. Gaṇuposatha and gaṇapavāraṇā are suitable only for a group. Adhiṭṭhānuposatha and adhiṭṭhānapavāraṇā are suitable only for an individual. When one says, "I have committed a pārājika offence," etc., he conceals the basis (vatthu) but not the offence. When one says, "I have engaged in sexual activity," etc., he conceals the offence but not the basis. One who declares neither the basis nor the offence, conceals both the basis and the offence.

jantāgharapaṭicchādi. Itarāsupi eseva nayo. Dvāraṃ pidahitvā antojantāghare ṭhitena parikammaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Udake otiṇṇenāpi etadeva vaṭṭati. Ubhayattha khādituṃ bhuñjituṃ vā na vaṭṭati. Vatthapaṭicchādi sabbakappiyatāya paṭicchannena sabbaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati.Vahantīti yanti niyyanti; nindaṃ vā paṭikkosaṃ vā na labhanti. Candamaṇḍalaṃ abbhāmahikādhūmarajarāhuvimuttaṃ vivaṭaṃyeva virocati, na tesu aññatarena paṭicchannaṃ. Tathā sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ, dhammavinayopi vivaritvā vibhajitvā desiyamānova virocati no paṭicchanno.

jantāgharapaṭicchādi: This same method applies in other cases as well. One who is inside a hot room with the door closed is allowed to do parikamma. Similarly, one immersed in water is allowed to do this. In both situations, it is not allowed to eat or consume food. Vatthapaṭicchādi: Covered by all suitable (kappiya) means, one is allowed to do everything. Vahantī: They go and come; they do not receive blame or rejection. The orb of the moon, free from clouds, mist, smoke, dust, and Rāhu, shines openly, not covered by any of these. Similarly, the orb of the sun, the Dhamma-Vinaya also shines when opened up, divided, and taught, not when covered.

Aññena bhesajjena karaṇīyena aññaṃ viññāpento gilāno āpajjati, na bhesajjena karaṇīyena bhesajjaṃ viññāpento agilāno āpajjati, avasesaṃ āpattiṃ gilāno ceva āpajjati agilāno ca.

If a sick person requests something different from what should be done with medicine, he commits an offence. But a healthy person who requests medicine for something that should be done with medicine does not commit an offence. In the remaining cases, both the sick and healthy person commit an offence.

Anto āpajjati no bahīti anupakhajja seyyaṃ kappento anto āpajjati no bahi,bahiāpajjati no antoti saṅghikaṃ mañcādiṃ ajjhokāse santharitvā pakkamanto bahi āpajjati no anto, avasesaṃ panaanto ceva āpajjati bahi ca.Antosīmāyāti āgantuko āgantukavattaṃ adassetvā sachattupāhano vihāraṃ pavisanto upacārasīmaṃ okkantamattova āpajjati.Bahisīmāyāti gamiko dārubhaṇḍapaṭisāmanādigamikavattaṃ apūretvā pakkamanto upacārasīmaṃ atikkantamattova āpajjati. Avasesaṃ antosīmāya ceva āpajjati bahisīmāya ca. Sati vuḍḍhatare anajjhiṭṭho dhammaṃ bhāsanto saṅghamajjhe āpajjati nāma. Gaṇamajjhepi puggalasantikepi eseva nayo.Kāyena vuṭṭhātīti tiṇavatthārakasamathena vuṭṭhāti. Kāyaṃ acāletvā vācāya desentassa vācāya vuṭṭhāti. Vacīsampayuttaṃ kāyakiriyaṃ katvā desentassa kāyena vācāya vuṭṭhāti nāma. Saṅghamajjhe desanāgāminīpi vuṭṭhānagāminīpi vuṭṭhāti. Gaṇapuggalamajjhe pana desanāgāminīyeva vuṭṭhāti.

Anto āpajjati no bahī: One who prepares a bed without permission commits an offence inside but not outside. Bahi āpajjati no anto: One who spreads out Saṅghika furniture etc., in an open space and leaves commits an offence outside but not inside. However, in the remaining cases, one commits an offence both inside and outside. Antosīmāya: A newcomer, entering the monastery with shoes and an umbrella without showing the newcomer's duties, commits an offence as soon as he steps into the boundary of the upacāra. Bahisīmāyā: One who is leaving, without completing the duties of a departing monk such as putting away wooden items etc., commits an offence as soon as he crosses the boundary of the upacāra. In the remaining cases, one commits an offence both inside and outside the boundary. If a senior monk preaches the Dhamma without being requested, he commits an offence in the Saṅgha. The same method applies in a group and in the presence of an individual. Kāyena vuṭṭhāti: He rises through the tiṇavatthāraka-samatha. One who teaches by speech without moving his body rises by speech. One who teaches after performing a bodily action connected with speech rises by body and speech. In the Saṅgha, rising can be either to give a discourse or to leave. However, in a group or with an individual, rising is only to give a discourse.

Āgāḷhāya ceteyyāti āgāḷhāya daḷhabhāvāya ceteyya; tajjanīyakammādikatassa vattaṃ na pūrayato icchamāno saṅgho ukkhepanīyakammaṃ kareyyāti attho.Alajjī ca hoti bālo ca apakatatto cāti ettha bālo ‘‘ayaṃ dhammādhammaṃ na jānāti’’ apakatatto vā ‘‘āpattānāpattiṃ na jānātī’’ti na ettāvatā kammaṃ kātabbaṃ; bālabhāvamūlakaṃ pana apakatattabhāvamūlakañca āpattiṃ āpannassa kammaṃ kātabbanti attho. Adhisīle sīlavipanno nāma dve āpattikkhandhe āpanno; ācāravipanno nāma pañca āpattikkhandhe āpanno; diṭṭhivipanno nāma antaggāhikāya diṭṭhiyā samannāgato. Tesaṃ āpattiṃ apassantānaṃ appaṭikarontānaṃ diṭṭhiñca anissajjantānaṃyeva kammaṃ kātabbaṃ.

Āgāḷhāya ceteyyā: He should intend with firm conviction; meaning, the Saṅgha, if it wishes, may perform the ukkhepanīyakamma on one who does not fulfill the duties of tajjanīyakamma, etc. Alajjī ca hoti bālo ca apakatatto cā: Here, kamma should not be done merely because one is a fool who "does not know what is Dhamma and what is not Dhamma," or because one is unskilled who "does not know what is an offence and what is not an offence"; rather, kamma should be done if one commits an offence rooted in foolishness or rooted in unskillfulness. One who is sīlavipanna in regard to higher morality has committed two āpattikkhandhas; one who is ācāravipanna has committed five āpattikkhandhas; one who is diṭṭhivipanna is endowed with a clinging to an extreme view. Kamma should be done only when they do not see their offences, do not atone for them, and do not relinquish their view.

Kāyikena upaghātikenāti kāyadvāre paññattassa sikkhāpadassa asikkhanena, yo hi taṃ na sikkhati, so naṃ upaghāteti, tasmā tassa taṃ asikkhanaṃ ‘‘kāyikaṃ upaghātika’’nti vuccati. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo.Kāyikena micchājīvenāti jaṅghapesanikādinā vā gaṇḍaphālanādinā vā vejjakammena;vācasikenāti sāsanauggahaṇaārocanādinā; tatiyapadaṃ ubhayasampayogavasena vuttaṃ.

Kāyikena upaghātikenā: By not training in a training rule (sikkhāpada) laid down for the body; for whoever does not train in it, harms it; therefore, his not training in it is called "bodily detrimental." The same method applies to the remaining two terms. Kāyikena micchājīvenā: Through medicine such as being a messenger or healer who bursts tumors; vācasikenā: Through announcing instruction in the Teaching; the third term is stated by way of combination of both.

Alaṃ bhikkhu mā bhaṇḍananti alaṃ bhikkhu mā bhaṇḍanaṃ kari, mā kalahaṃ, mā vivādaṃ karīti attho.Na voharitabbanti na kiñci vattabbaṃ; vadatopi hi tādisassa vacanaṃ na sotabbaṃ maññanti.Na kismiñci paccekaṭṭhāneti kismiñci bījanaggāhādike ekasmimpi jeṭṭhakaṭṭhāne na ṭhapetabboti attho.Okāsakammaṃ kārentassāti ‘‘karotu āyasmā okāsaṃ, ahaṃ taṃ vattukāmo’’ti evaṃ okāsaṃ kārentassa.Nālaṃ okāsakammaṃ kātunti ‘‘kiṃ tvaṃ karissasī’’ti okāso na kātabbo.Savacanīyaṃ nādātabbanti vacanaṃ na ādātabbaṃ, vacanampi na sotabbaṃ; yattha gahetvā gantukāmo hoti, na tattha gantabbanti attho.

Alaṃ bhikkhu mā bhaṇḍana: Enough, bhikkhu, do not quarrel, do not dispute, do not argue, is the meaning. Na voharitabba: Nothing should be said; even if such a person speaks, his words should not be heard. Na kismiñci paccekaṭṭhāne: He should not be placed in any individual position, even in a senior position such as when offering seeds etc. Okāsakammaṃ kārentassā: To one requesting permission, "May the venerable one grant permission, I wish to speak about that." Nālaṃ okāsakammaṃ kātu: Permission should not be granted by saying, "What will you do?". Savacanīyaṃ nādātabba: The word should not be received, the word should not be heard; where he wishes to go having taken (it), one should not go there.

Tīhaṅgehi samannāgatassa bhikkhuno vinayoti yaṃ so jānāti, so tassa vinayo nāma hoti; so na pucchitabboti attho.Anuyogo na dātabboti ‘‘idaṃ kappatī’’ti pucchantassa pucchāya okāso na dātabbo, ‘‘aññaṃ pucchā’’ti vattabbo. Iti so neva pucchitabbo nāssa pucchā sotabbāti attho.Vinayo na sākacchātabboti vinayapañho na sākacchitabbo, kappiyākappiyakathā na saṃsandetabbā.

Tīhaṅgehi samannāgatassa bhikkhuno vinayo: What he knows, that is his Vinaya; he should not be asked, is the meaning. Anuyogo na dātabbo: If he asks, "Is this allowable?" an opportunity for questioning should not be given; he should be told, "Ask something else." Thus, he should neither be questioned nor should his question be heard, is the meaning. Vinayo na sākacchātabbo: A question about the Vinaya should not be discussed, talk about what is allowable and what is not allowable should not be engaged in.

Idamappahāyāti etaṃ brahmacāripaṭiññātādikaṃ laddhiṃ avijahitvā.Suddhaṃ brahmacārinti khīṇāsavaṃ bhikkhuṃ.‘‘Pātabyataṃ āpajjatī’’ti pātabyabhāvaṃ paṭisevanaṃ āpajjati. ‘‘Idamappahāyā’’ti vacanato pana taṃ brahmacāripaṭiññātaṃ pahāya khīṇāsavaṃ ‘‘musā mayā bhaṇitaṃ, khamatha me’’ti khamāpetvā ‘‘natthi kāmesu doso’’ti laddhiṃ vijahitvā gativisodhanaṃ kareyya.Akusalamūlānīti akusalāni ceva mūlāni ca, akusalānaṃ vā mūlāni akusalamūlāni. Kusalamūlesupi eseva nayo. Duṭṭhu caritāni virūpāni vā caritāniduccaritāni. Suṭṭhu caritāni sundarāni vā caritānisucaritāni. Kāyena karaṇabhūtena kataṃ duccaritaṃkāyaduccaritaṃ. Esa nayo sabbattha. Sesaṃ tattha tattha vuttanayattā uttānamevāti.

Idamappahāyā: Without abandoning this doctrine, starting with the professed celibate. Suddhaṃ brahmacāri: A bhikkhu who is a Khīṇāsava. ‘‘Pātabyataṃ āpajjatī’’: He commits the state of practicing pātabyata. However, because of the statement "Idamappahāyā", having abandoned that professed celibacy, and after the Khīṇāsava apologizes saying ‘‘musā mayā bhaṇitaṃ, khamatha me’’, having abandoned the view that "there is no fault in sensual pleasures," he should purify his course of conduct. Akusalamūlānī: Unwholesome things and roots, or the roots of unwholesome things are akusalamūlāni. The same method applies to kusalamūlas. Actions that are badly conducted or are ugly are duccaritāni. Actions that are well conducted or beautiful are sucaritāni. Evil conduct done by means of the body is kāyaduccaritaṃ. This method applies everywhere. The rest is easy to understand since the method has been stated in the respective places.

Tikavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Triplet is Finished.

Catukkavāravaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Quadruplet

324.Catukkesusakavācāya āpajjati paravācāya vuṭṭhātīti vacīdvārikaṃ padasodhammādibhedaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjitvā tiṇavatthārakasamathaṭṭhānaṃ gato parassa kammavācāya vuṭṭhāti.Paravācāya āpajjati sakavācāya vuṭṭhātīti pāpikāya diṭṭhiyā appaṭinissagge parassa kammavācāya āpajjati, puggalassa santike desento sakavācāya vuṭṭhāti.Sakavācāya āpajjati sakavācāya vuṭṭhātīti vacīdvārikaṃ padasodhammādibhedaṃ āpattiṃ sakavācāya āpajjati, desetvā vuṭṭhahantopi sakavācāya vuṭṭhāti.Paravācāya āpajjati paravācāya vuṭṭhātīti yāvatatiyakaṃ saṅghādisesaṃ parassa kammavācāya āpajjati, vuṭṭhahantopi parassa parivāsakammavācādīhi vuṭṭhāti. Tato paresu kāyadvārikaṃkāyena āpajjati,desentovācāya vuṭṭhāti. Vacīdvārikaṃvācāya āpajjati,tiṇavatthārakekāyena vuṭṭhāti. Kāyadvārikaṃ kāyena*āpajjati, tameva tiṇavatthārake kāyena vuṭṭhāti. Vacīdvārikaṃ vācāya āpajjati, tameva desento vācāya vuṭṭhāti. Saṅghikamañcassa attano paccattharaṇena anattharato kāyasamphusane lomagaṇanāya āpajjitabbāpattiṃ sahagāraseyyāpattiñca*pasutto āpajjati,pabujjhitvā pana āpannabhāvaṃ ñatvā desentopaṭibuddho vuṭṭhāti. Jagganto āpajjitvā pana tiṇavatthārakasamathaṭṭhāne sayantopaṭibuddho āpajjati pasutto vuṭṭhātināma. Pacchimapadadvayampi vuttānusāreneva veditabbaṃ.

324. In the sets of four, he incurs (the offence) by his own speech, but emerges by the speech of another: Having committed an offence through speech, such as padasodhamma etc., having gone to the place of tiṇavatthāraka-samatha, he emerges by the kammavācā of another. He incurs (the offence) by the speech of another, but emerges by his own speech: If he does not relinquish a wrong view, he incurs (the offence) by the kammavācā of another, but emerging while confessing in the presence of an individual, he emerges by his own speech. He incurs (the offence) by his own speech, and emerges by his own speech: Having committed an offence through speech, such as padasodhamma etc., he incurs (the offence) by his own speech, and emerging after confessing, he also emerges by his own speech. He incurs (the offence) by the speech of another, and emerges by the speech of another: Having committed a Saṅghādisesa offence up to the third announcement by the kammavācā of another, he emerges by the parivāsakammavācā etc. of another. Further, in the others, through body he incurs (the offence) by body, confessing he emerges by speech. Through speech he incurs (the offence) by speech, in the tiṇavatthāraka he emerges by body. Through body he incurs (the offence) by body, in the same tiṇavatthāraka he emerges by body. Through speech he incurs (the offence) by speech, confessing the same he emerges by speech. By not spreading out his own covering on Saṅghika furniture, he lies down intending to incur an offence of counting hairs during bodily contact and sahagāraseyyā asleep he incurs (the offence), waking up, however, recognizing that he has committed an offence, and confessing awakened he emerges. One who incurs the offence awake, however, lying down in the tiṇavatthāraka-samatha, awakened he incurs, asleep he emerges**, it is called. The last two terms should be understood according to what was stated earlier.

acittako āpajjatināma. Pacchā desentosacittako vuṭṭhāti. Sacittakāpattiṃsacittako āpajjatināma. Tiṇavatthārakaṭṭhāne sayantoacittako vuṭṭhāti. Sesapadadvayampi vuttānusāreneva veditabbaṃ. Yo sabhāgaṃ āpattiṃ deseti, ayaṃ desanāpaccayā dukkaṭaṃ āpajjanto pācittiyādīsu aññataraṃ deseti, tañca desento dukkaṭaṃ āpajjati. Taṃ pana dukkaṭaṃ āpajjanto pācittiyādito vuṭṭhāti. Pācittiyādito ca vuṭṭhahanto taṃ āpajjati. Iti ekassa puggalassa ekameva payogaṃ sandhāya ‘‘āpattiṃ āpajjanto desetī’’ti idaṃ catukkaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.

acittako āpajjati it is called. Confessing later sacittako vuṭṭhāti. sacittako āpajjati means incurring an offence knowingly. acittako vuṭṭhāti means emerging unknowingly lying in tiṇavatthāraka. The other two terms should be understood in the manner already stated. He who confesses an offence that is sabhāga, as a result of confessing, while incurring a dukkata offence, confesses one of the pācittiya offences etc., and while confessing that, he incurs a dukkata offence. However, incurring that dukkata offence, he emerges from the pācittiya offence etc. And emerging from the pācittiya offence etc., he incurs that. Thus, it should be understood that this set of four is stated referring to a single effort of a single individual saying "incurring an offence, he confesses."

kammena āpajjati,desentoakammena vuṭṭhāti. Vissaṭṭhiādikaṃakammena āpajjati,parivāsādinā kammena vuṭṭhāti. Samanubhāsanaṃkammeneva āpajjati, kammena vuṭṭhāti. Sesaṃakammena āpajjati,akammenavuṭṭhāti.

kammena āpajjati, confessing akammena vuṭṭhāti. Vissaṭṭhi etc. akammena āpajjati, by parivāsa etc. he emerges by kamma. Samanubhāsana kammena eva āpajjati, kammena vuṭṭhāti. The rest akammena āpajjati, akammena vuṭṭhāti.

Parikkhāracatukke paṭhamo sakaparikkhāro, dutiyo saṅghikova tatiyo cetiyasantako, catuttho gihiparikkhāro. Sace pana so pattacīvaranavakammabhesajjānaṃ atthāya āhaṭo hoti, avāpuraṇaṃ dātuṃ anto ṭhapāpetuñca vaṭṭati.

In the set of four regarding requisites, the first is his own requisite, the second is belonging to the Saṅgha, the third belongs to a Cetiya, the fourth is a requisite of a householder. If, however, it is brought for the sake of bowls, robes, construction work, or medicine, it is allowed to give the key and have it placed inside.

sammukhā āpajjati,vuṭṭhānakāle pana saṅghena kiccaṃ natthītiparammukhā vuṭṭhāti. Vissaṭṭhiādikaṃparammukhā āpajjati,saṅghassasammukhā vuṭṭhāti. Samanubhāsanaṃ saṅghassasammukhā eva āpajjati, sammukhā vuṭṭhāti. Sesaṃ sampajānamusāvādādibhedaṃparammukhāva āpajjati, parammukhāva vuṭṭhāti. Ajānantacatukkaṃ acittakacatukkasadisaṃ.

sammukhā āpajjati, however, at the time of emerging, there is no need for the Saṅgha, therefore parammukhā vuṭṭhāti. Vissaṭṭhi etc. parammukhā āpajjati, in the sammukhā vuṭṭhāti. Samanubhāsana the sammukhā eva āpajjati, sammukhā vuṭṭhāti. The remaining kinds of sampajānamusāvāda etc. parammukhāva āpajjati, parammukhāva vuṭṭhāti. The set of four on not knowing is similar to the set of four on unknowingly.

Liṅgapātubhāvenāti sayitasseva bhikkhussa vā bhikkhuniyā vā liṅgaparivatte jāte sahagāraseyyāpatti hoti idameva taṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ. Ubhinnampi pana asādhāraṇāpatti liṅgapātubhāvena vuṭṭhāti. Sahapaṭilābhacatukke yassa bhikkhuno liṅgaṃ parivattati, so saha liṅgapaṭilābhena paṭhamaṃ uppannavasena seṭṭhabhāvena ca purimaṃ purisaliṅgaṃ jahati, pacchime itthiliṅge patiṭṭhāti, purisakuttapurisākārādivasena pavattā kāyavacīviññattiyo paṭippassambhanti, bhikkhūti vā purisoti vā evaṃ pavattā paṇṇattiyo nirujjhanti, yāni bhikkhunīhi asādhāraṇāni chacattālīsa sikkhāpadāni tehi anāpattiyeva hoti. Dutiyacatukke pana yassā bhikkhuniyā liṅgaṃ parivattati, sā pacchāsamuppattiyā vā hīnabhāvena vā pacchimanti saṅkhyaṃ gataṃ itthiliṅgaṃ jahati, vuttappakārena purimanti saṅkhyaṃ gate purisaliṅge patiṭṭhāti. Vuttaviparītā viññattiyo paṭippassambhanti, bhikkhunīti vā itthīti vā evaṃ pavattā paṇṇattiyopi nirujjhanti, yāni bhikkhūhi asādhāraṇāni sataṃ tiṃsañca sikkhāpadāni, tehi anāpattiyeva hoti.

Liṅgapātubhāvenā: When a bhikkhu or bhikkhunī is lying down, if a change of gender occurs, there is a sahagāraseyyā offence. This is stated in reference to that. However, offences that are not common to both emerge by the manifestation of gender. In the set of four on the simultaneous regaining (of gender), for the bhikkhu whose gender changes, with the simultaneous regaining of gender, he abandons the former male gender due to it being the first that arose and due to its being superior, and he is established in the latter female gender, the bodily and verbal expressions that occurred in terms of male customs, male characteristics etc. are stilled, the designations that occurred thus: "bhikkhu" or "male" cease, and he is completely free from the forty-six training rules that are not common to bhikkhunīs. However, in the second set of four, for the bhikkhunī whose gender changes, she abandons the female gender, which is called "latter" due to its arising later or due to its inferior status, and in the manner stated, she is established in the male gender, which is called "former". The expressions contrary to what was stated are stilled, and the designations that occurred thus: "bhikkhunī" or "female" also cease, and she is completely free from the one hundred and thirty training rules that are not common to bhikkhus.

Cattāro sāmukkaṃsāti cattāro mahāpadesā, te hi bhagavatā anuppanne vatthumhi sayaṃ ukkaṃsitvā ukkhipitvā ṭhapitattā ‘‘sāmukkaṃsā’’ti vuccanti.Paribhogāti ajjhoharaṇīyaparibhogā, udakaṃ pana akālikattā appaṭiggahitakaṃ vaṭṭati. Yāvakālikādīni appaṭiggahitakāni ajjhoharituṃ na vaṭṭanti.Cattāri mahāvikaṭānikālodissattā yathāvutte kāle vaṭṭanti.Upāsako sīlavāti pañca vā dasa vā sīlāni gopayamāno.

Cattāro sāmukkaṃsā: The four great references (mahāpadesā); because they were raised up (ukkaṃsitvā) and established by the Blessed One himself when a matter had not arisen, they are called "sāmukkaṃsā". Paribhogā: Things that are suitable for consumption, but water is allowed without being received because it is akālika. Yāvakālika etc. are not allowed to be consumed without being received. Cattāri mahāvikaṭāni: Because they are bound by time, they are suitable at the time stated. Upāsako sīlavā: One who protects five or ten precepts.

āgantukova āpajjati, no āvāsiko. Āvāsikavattaṃ akaronto panaāvāsiko āpajjati, no āgantuko. Sesaṃ kāyavacīdvārikaṃ āpattiṃ ubhopi āpajjanti, asādhāraṇaṃ āpattiṃneva āgantuko āpajjati, no āvāsiko. Gamiyacatukkepi gamiyavattaṃ apūretvā gacchantogamiko āpajjati, no āvāsiko. Āvāsikavattaṃ akaronto panaāvāsiko āpajjati, no gamiko. Sesaṃ ubhopi āpajjanti, asādhāraṇaṃ ubhopi nāpajjanti. Vatthunānattatādicatukke catunnaṃ pārājikānaṃ aññamaññaṃvatthunānattatāva hoti,na*āpattinānattatā. Sabbāpi hi sā pārājikāpattiyeva. Saṅghādisesādīsupi eseva nayo. Bhikkhussa ca bhikkhuniyā ca aññamaññaṃ kāyasaṃsagge bhikkhussa saṅghādiseso bhikkhuniyā pārājikanti evaṃ*āpattinānattatāvahoti, na vatthunānattatā, ubhinnampi hi kāyasaṃsaggova vatthu. Tathā ‘‘lasuṇakkhādane bhikkhuniyā pācittiyaṃ, bhikkhussa dukkaṭa’’nti evamādināpettha nayena yojanā veditabbā. Catunnaṃ pārājikānaṃ terasahi saṅghādisesehi saddhiṃvatthunānattatā ceva āpattinānattatāca. Evaṃ saṅghādisesādīnaṃ aniyatādīhi. Ādito paṭṭhāya cattāri pārājikāni ekato āpajjantānaṃ bhikkhubhikkhunīnaṃneva vatthunānattatā no āpattinānattatā. Visuṃ āpajjantesupi sesā sādhāraṇāpattiyo āpajjantesupi eseva nayo.

A newcomer incurs (the offense), but not a resident. However, one who does not fulfill the duties of a resident, a resident incurs (the offense), but not a newcomer. For the remaining offenses committed through body and speech, both incur (the offense). For an offense that is not shared in common, neither the newcomer incurs (the offense), nor the resident. In the set of four concerning going away, one who goes away without completing the duties of a traveler, a traveler incurs (the offense), but not a resident. But one who does not fulfill the duties of a resident, a resident incurs (the offense), but not a traveler. For the remaining offenses, both incur (the offense), and for an offense that is not shared in common, neither incurs (the offense). In the set of four concerning difference of object etc., among the four pārājikas, there is only difference of object from each other, not difference of offense. For all of them are offenses entailing expulsion. The same method applies to saṅghādisesa etc. As for a bhikkhu and a bhikkhunī, in mutual physical contact, for the bhikkhu there is a saṅghādisesa, for the bhikkhunī a pārājika. Thus there is only difference of offense, not difference of object, for physical contact is the object for both. Similarly, the application should be understood in this way, with instances such as "for a bhikkhunī, in eating garlic, there is a pācittiya, for a bhikkhu, a dukkaṭa." With the four pārājikas together with the thirteen saṅghādisesas, there is both difference of object and difference of offense. Similarly, with the saṅghādisesas etc. together with the aniyatas etc. For bhikkhus and bhikkhunīs incurring the four pārājikas together from the beginning, there is neither difference of object nor difference of offense. Even when incurring them separately, and when incurring the remaining offenses shared in common, the same method applies.

vatthusabhāgatā, no āpattisabhāgatā,catūsu pārājikesuāpattisabhāgatā, no vatthusabhāgatā. Esa nayo saṅghādisesādīsu. Bhikkhussa ca bhikkhuniyā ca catūsu pārājikesuvatthusabhāgatā ceva āpattisabhāgatā ca. Esa nayo sabbāsu sādhāraṇāpattīsu. Asādhāraṇāpattiyaṃneva vatthusabhāgatā no āpattisabhāgatā. Yo hi purimacatukke paṭhamo pañho, so idha dutiyo; yo ca tattha dutiyo, so idha paṭhamo. Tatiyacatutthesu nānākaraṇaṃ natthi.

There is similarity of object, but not similarity of offense, in the four pārājikas there is similarity of offense, but not similarity of object. This method applies to the saṅghādisesas etc. For a bhikkhu and a bhikkhunī, in the four pārājikas, there is both similarity of object and similarity of offense. This method applies to all offenses shared in common. In an offense that is not shared in common, there is neither similarity of object nor similarity of offense. For the first question in the first set of four is the second here; and the second there is the first here. There is no differentiation in the third and fourth sets.

upajjhāyoāpajjati, no saddhivihārikoupajjhāyassa kattabbavattaṃ akarontosaddhivihāriko āpajjati, no upajjhāyo;sesaṃ ubhopi āpajjanti, asādhāraṇaṃ ubhopi nāpajjanti. Ācariyacatukkepi eseva nayo.

The preceptor incurs (the offense), but not the student; a student who does not fulfill the duties to be done for the preceptor, the student incurs (the offense), but not the preceptor; for the remaining offenses, both incur (the offense), and for an offense that is not shared in common, neither incurs (the offense). The same method applies to the set of four concerning the teacher.

garukaṃ āpajjati,ūnakapādaṃ gaṇhāhīti āṇattiyā aññaṃ payojentolahukaṃ āpajjati. Etena nayena sesapadattayaṃ veditabbaṃ.

He incurs a grave (offense); when employing another in the command "take the lesser part," he incurs a light (offense). The remaining set of three terms should be understood in this way.

abhivādanārahā no paccuṭṭhānārahā. Avisesena ca vippakatabhojanassa bhikkhussa yo koci vuḍḍhataro. Saṭṭhivassassāpi pārivāsikassa samīpagato tadahupasampannopipaccuṭṭhānāraho no abhivādanāraho. Appaṭikkhittesu ṭhānesu vuḍḍho navakassaabhivādanāraho ceva paccuṭṭhānāraho ca. Navako pana vuḍḍhassaneva abhivādanāraho na paccuṭṭhānāraho. Āsanārahacatukkassa paṭhamapadaṃ purimacatukke dutiyapadena, dutiyapadañca paṭhamapadena atthato sadisaṃ.

Worthy of salutation, but not worthy of rising to greet. Whichever bhikkhu is older, without distinction, to a bhikkhu whose meal has been interrupted. Even a probationary monk of sixty years, when approaching one ordained on that very day, is worthy of rising to greet, but not worthy of salutation. In places where it is not disallowed, an elder is both worthy of salutation and worthy of rising to greet for a junior. But a junior is neither worthy of salutation nor worthy of rising to greet for an elder. The first term of the set of four concerning being worthy of a seat is similar in meaning to the second term in the previous set of four, and the second term is similar to the first.

kāle āpajjati no vikāle,vikālabhojanāpattiṃvikāle āpajjati no kāle,sesaṃkāle ceva āpajjati vikāle ca,asādhāraṇaṃneva kāle no vikāle. Paṭiggahitacatukke purebhattaṃ paṭiggahitāmisaṃkāle kappati no vikāle. Pānakaṃvikāle kappati, punadivasamhi no kāle. Sattāhakālikaṃ yāvajīvikaṃkāle ceva kappati vikāle ca. Attano attano kālātītaṃ yāvakālikādittayaṃ akappiyamaṃsaṃ uggahitakamappaṭiggahitakañcaneva kāle kappati no vikāle.

He incurs (the offense) at the proper time, but not at the wrong time; he incurs the offense of eating at the wrong time at the wrong time, but not at the proper time; for the remaining offenses, he incurs (the offense) both at the proper time and at the wrong time; for an offense that is not shared in common, neither at the proper time nor at the wrong time. In the set of four concerning receiving, almsfood received before the meal is allowable at the proper time, but not at the wrong time. Drink is allowable at the wrong time, but not at the proper time on the following day. That which is allowable for a week and that which is allowable for life is allowable both at the proper time and at the wrong time. The three kinds of allowable (items), yāvakālika etc., that have lapsed their time, and meat that is not allowable, that which has been taken up and that which has not been received, are allowable neither at the proper time nor at the wrong time.

paccantimesu janapadesu āpajjati, no majjhimesu;pañcavaggena gaṇena upasampādento guṇaṅguṇūpāhanaṃ dhuvanahānaṃ cammattharaṇāni camajjhimesu janapadesu āpajjati no paccantimesu. Imāni cattāri ‘‘idha na kappantī’’ti vadantopi paccantimesu āpajjati, ‘‘idha kappantī’’ti vadanto pana majjhimesu āpajjati. Sesāpattiṃ ubhayattha āpajjati, asādhāraṇaṃ na katthaci āpajjati. Dutiyacatukke pañcavaggena gaṇena upasampadādi catubbidhampi vatthupaccantimesu janapadesu kappati. ‘‘Idaṃ kappatī’’ti dīpetumpi tattheva kappati no majjhimesu. ‘‘Idaṃ na kappatī’’ti dīpetuṃ panamajjhimesu janapadesu kappati no paccantimesu. Sesaṃ ‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave pañca loṇānī’’tiādi anuññātakaṃ ubhayattha kappati. Yaṃ pana akappiyanti paṭikkhittaṃ, taṃ ubhayatthāpi na kappati.

He incurs (the offense) in the border regions, but not in the central regions; when conferring the Going-forth with a group of five, and (when using) a needle case, sandals covering the whole foot, fixed alms bowls, and leather mats, he incurs (the offense) in the central regions, but not in the border regions. Even saying "these four are not allowable here," he incurs (the offense) in the border regions; but saying "these are allowable here," he incurs (the offense) in the central regions. He incurs the remaining offenses in both places, and he incurs an offense that is not shared in common in neither place. In the second set of four, the fourfold object, i.e., conferring the Going-forth with a group of five etc., is allowable in the border regions. Even indicating "this is allowable" is allowable only there, not in the central regions. But indicating "this is not allowable" is allowable in the central regions, but not in the border regions. The remaining items that have been allowed, such as "I allow, bhikkhus, the five salts," are allowable in both places. But that which has been disallowed as not allowable, that is not allowable in either place.

anto āpajjati no bahi,ajjhokāse saṅghikamañcādīni nikkhipitvā pakkamantobahi āpajjati no anto,sesaṃanto ceva bahi ca,asādhāraṇaṃneva anto na bahi. Antosīmādicatukke āgantuko vattaṃ apūrentoantosīmāya āpajjati,gamiyobahisīmāyamusāvādādiṃantosīmāya ca bahisīmāya ca āpajjati,asādhāraṇaṃ na katthaci. Gāmacatukke antaragharapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ sekhiyapaññattiṃgāme āpajjati no araññe. Bhikkhunī aruṇaṃ uṭṭhāpayamānāaraññe āpajjati no gāme. Musāvādādiṃgāme ceva āpajjati araññe ca,asādhāraṇaṃ na katthaci.

He incurs (the offense) inside, but not outside; when leaving after putting down saṅghika couches etc. in the open, he incurs (the offense) outside, but not inside; for the remaining offenses, (he incurs the offense) both inside and outside; for an offense that is not shared in common, neither inside nor outside. In the set of four concerning the boundary etc., a newcomer who does not fulfill the duties incurs (the offense) inside the boundary, and a traveler (incurs the offense) outside the boundary; he incurs offenses such as false speech both inside the boundary and outside the boundary; an offense that is not shared in common (occurs) in neither place. In the set of four concerning the village, for a training rule connected with an interior house, he incurs (the offense) in the village, but not in the wilderness. A bhikkhunī causing dawn to break incurs (the offense) in the wilderness, but not in the village. He incurs offenses such as false speech both in the village and in the wilderness; an offense that is not shared in common (occurs) in neither place.

Cattāropubbakiccāti‘‘sammajjanī padīpo ca udakaṃ āsanena cā’’ti idaṃ catubbidhaṃ pubbakaraṇanti vuccatīti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Chandapārisuddhiutukkhānaṃ bhikkhugaṇanā ca ovādo’’ti ime pana ‘‘cattāro pubbakiccā’’ti veditabbā.Cattāro pattakallātiuposatho yāvatikā ca bhikkhū kammappattā te āgatā honti, sabhāgāpattiyo na vijjanti, vajjanīyā ca puggalā tasmiṃ na honti, pattakallanti vuccatīti.Cattāri anaññapācittiyānīti ‘‘etadeva paccayaṃ karitvā anaññaṃ pācittiya’’nti evaṃ vuttāni anupakhajjaseyyākappanasikkhāpadaṃ ‘‘ehāvuso gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vā’’ti sikkhāpadaṃ, sañcicca kukkuccaupadahanaṃ, upassutitiṭṭhananti imāni cattāri.Catasso bhikkhusammutiyoti ‘‘ekarattampi ce bhikkhu ticīvarena vippavaseyya aññatra bhikkhusammutiyā, aññaṃ navaṃ santhataṃ kārāpeyya aññatra bhikkhusammutiyā, tato ce uttari vippavaseyya aññatra bhikkhusammutiyā, duṭṭhullaṃ āpattiṃ anupasampannassa āroceyya aññatra bhikkhusammutiyā’’ti evaṃ āgatā terasahi sammutīhi muttāsammutiyo. Gilānacatukke aññabhesajjena karaṇīyena lolatāya aññaṃ viññāpentogilāno āpajjati,abhesajjakaraṇīyena bhesajjaṃ viññāpentoagilāno āpajjati,musāvādādiṃ ubhopi āpajjanti, asādhāraṇaṃ ubhopi nāpajjanti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

The four are preliminary duties: it has been said that this fourfold activity—"a broom, a lamp, water, and a seat"—is called preliminary activity. But these should be understood as "the four preliminary duties": consent, purity of conduct, announcement of the season, calculation of the number of bhikkhus, and exhortation. The four are the proper time for the act: the Uposatha (day); as many bhikkhus as are qualified for the act are present; there are no offenses sharing the same object; and there are no individuals who should be excluded present in it, is said to be the proper time for the act. The four anaññapācittiyas are those stated thus: "having made just this a condition, another pācittiya," the training rule concerning preparing a bed by encroaching, the training rule "Come, friend, to a village or market town," intentionally causing worry, and eavesdropping. The four bhikkhuni permissions are the permissions that are free from the thirteen permissions that have come thus: "If a bhikkhu should dwell apart from the three robes even for one night, except with the permission of the bhikkhus; should have a new spread made, except with the permission of the bhikkhus; if he should dwell apart for longer than that, except with the permission of the bhikkhus; should announce a gross offense to one who is not ordained, except with the permission of the bhikkhus." In the set of four concerning a sick person, a sick person incurs (the offense) when requesting something else with greed, due to something to be done with another medicine; a non-sick person incurs (the offense) when requesting medicine for something to be done without medicine; both incur offenses such as false speech; neither incurs an offense that is not shared in common. The remainder is clear everywhere.

Catukkavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the sets of four is finished.

Pañcakavāravaṇṇanā
Commentary on the Sets of Five

325.Pañcakesupañca puggalā niyatāti ānantariyānamevetaṃ gahaṇaṃ.Pañca chedanakā āpattiyonāma pamāṇātikkante mañcapīṭhe nisīdanakaṇḍuppaṭicchādivassikasāṭikāsu sugatacīvare ca veditabbā.Pañcahākārehīti alajjitā, aññāṇatā, kukkuccappakatatā, akappiye kappiyasaññitā, kappiye akappiyasaññitāti imehi pañcahi.Pañca āpattiyo musāvādapaccayāti pārājikathullaccayadukkaṭasaṅghādisesapācittiyā.Anāmantacāroti ‘‘santaṃ bhikkhuṃ anāpucchā purebhattaṃ pacchābhattaṃ kulesu cārittaṃ āpajjeyyā’’ti imassa āpucchitvā cārassa abhāvo.Anadhiṭṭhānanti ‘‘gaṇabhojane aññatra samayā’’ti vuttaṃ samayaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvā bhojanaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ nāma; tathā akaraṇaṃanadhiṭṭhānaṃ.Avikappanānāma yā paramparabhojane vikappanā vuttā, tassā akaraṇaṃ. Imāni hi pañca piṇḍapātikassa dhutaṅgeneva paṭikkhittāni.Ussaṅkitaparisaṅkitoti ye passanti, ye suṇanti, tehi ussaṅkito ceva parisaṅkito ca. Api akuppadhammo khīṇāsavopi samāno, tasmā agocarā pariharitabbā. Na hi etesu sandissamāno ayasato vā garahato vā muccati.Sosānikanti susāne patitakaṃ.Pāpaṇikanti āpaṇadvāre patitakaṃ.Thūpacīvaranti vammikaṃ parikkhipitvā balikammakataṃ.Ābhisekikanti nahānaṭṭhāne vā rañño abhisekaṭṭhāne vā chaḍḍitacīvaraṃ.Bhatapaṭiyābhatanti susānaṃ netvā puna ānītakaṃ.Pañca mahācorāuttarimanussadhamme vuttā.

325. In the sets of five, five individuals are fixed: this refers to the Ānantariya offenses themselves. Five offenses entailing cutting off should be understood as (those concerning) sitting on a couch or chair that exceeds the proper measure, a covering for the boil, a rains-bathing cloth, and a Sugata's robe. By five ways: by being shameless, by unknowingness, by being overwhelmed by worry, by perceiving what is not allowable as allowable, and by perceiving what is allowable as not allowable—by these five. Five offenses due to false speech: pārājika, thullaccaya, dukkaṭa, saṅghādisesa, and pācittiya. Uninvited wandering is the absence of asking permission to wander in families before or after the meal, for him who "should wander in families without asking permission from an available bhikkhu." Non-determination is not doing so; similarly, not doing it is non-determination: determining a time for eating after determining a time, as stated, "at a group meal, except at a time". Non-alternation is not doing that alternation which was stated for eating in succession. These five are rejected by the dhutaṅga of the alms-food eater alone. Suspected and apprehensive is suspected and apprehensive by those who see and those who hear. Even one who is unwavering in the Dhamma, a stream-enterer, should avoid unsafe places, since when seen in these, he is not freed from disgrace or censure. Sosānika is that which has fallen in a cemetery. Pāpaṇika is that which has fallen at a shop door. Thūpacīvara is a robe given after making a mound and performing a rite of offering. Ābhisekika is a robe discarded at a bathing place or a place where a king is consecrated. Bhatapaṭiyābhata is that which has been taken to a cemetery and then brought back. The five great thieves are stated in the section on higher human qualities.

Pañcāpattiyo kāyato samuṭṭhantīti paṭhamena āpattisamuṭṭhānena pañca āpattiyo āpajjati, ‘‘bhikkhu kappiyasaññī saññācikāya kuṭiṃ karotī’’ti evaṃ antarapeyyāle vuttāpattiyo.Pañca āpattiyo kāyato ca vācato cāti tatiyena āpattisamuṭṭhānena pañca āpattiyo āpajjati, ‘‘bhikkhu kappiyasaññī saṃvidahitvā kuṭiṃ karotī’’ti evaṃ tattheva vuttā āpattiyo.Desanāgāminiyoti ṭhapetvā pārājikañca saṅghādisesañca avasesā.

Five offenses arise from the body: he incurs five offenses by the first arising of offenses, the offenses stated with an intermediate expansion thus: "a bhikkhu, perceiving it to be allowable, makes a hut with grass." Five offenses arise from the body and from speech: he incurs five offenses by the third arising of offenses, the offenses stated there thus: "a bhikkhu, perceiving it to be allowable, having arranged (it), makes a hut." Leading to confession are those remaining, excluding pārājika and saṅghādisesa.

Pañca kammānīti tajjanīyaniyassapabbājanīyapaṭisāraṇīyāni cattāri ukkhepanīyañca tividhampi ekanti pañca.Yāvatatiyake pañcāti ukkhittānuvattikāya bhikkhuniyā yāvatatiyaṃ samanubhāsanāya appaṭinissajjantiyā pārājikaṃ thullaccayaṃ dukkaṭanti tisso, bhedakānuvattakādisamanubhāsanāsu saṅghādiseso, pāpikāya diṭṭhiyā appaṭinissagge pācittiyaṃ.Adinnanti aññena adinnaṃ.Aviditanti paṭiggaṇhāmīti cetanāya abhāvena aviditaṃ.Akappiyanti pañcahi samaṇakappehi akappiyakataṃ; yaṃ vā panaññampi akappiyamaṃsaṃ akappiyabhojanaṃ.Akatātirittanti pavāretvā atirittaṃ akataṃ.Samajjadānanti naṭasamajjādidānaṃ.Usabhadānanti gogaṇassa antare usabhavissajjanaṃ.Cittakammadānanti āvāsaṃ kāretvā tattha cittakammaṃ kāretuṃ vaṭṭati. Idaṃ pana paṭibhānacittakammadānaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Imāni hi pañca kiñcāpi lokassa puññasammatāni, atha kho apuññāni akusalāniyeva.Uppannaṃ paṭibhānanti ettha paṭibhānanti kathetukamyatā vuccati.Ime pañca duppaṭivinodayāti na supaṭivinodayā; upāyena pana kāraṇena anurūpāhi paccavekkhanāanusāsanādīhi sakkā paṭivinodetunti attho.

Five acts are the four: act of censure, act of degradation, act of banishment, act of reconciliation, and the act of suspension, threefold also as one; thus (there are) five. Five in the third instance: if a bhikkhunī adhering to one who has been suspended does not relinquish (that adherence) after being formally informed up to three times, (there are) three offenses entailing expulsion, thullaccaya, and dukkaṭa; and saṅghādisesa in the formal informing regarding one adhering to a divider of the Saṅgha etc., and pācittiya for not relinquishing a wicked view. Not given is that not given by another. Not known is that not known due to the absence of the intention "I receive." Not allowable is that made not allowable by the five requisites of a samaṇa; or also any other not-allowable meat or not-allowable food. Not done in excess is that not done in excess after invitation. Samajjadāna is giving to festivals of dancing etc. Usabhadāna is the release of a bull amidst a herd of cows. Cittakammadāna is fitting to have painting done there after having a dwelling made. This, however, is stated with reference to the gift of painting done spontaneously. These five, although considered meritorious by the world, are unmeritorious and unwholesome. Spontaneous wit arisen: here, wit (paṭibhāna) is called the desire to speak. These five are difficult to avert: they are not easy to avert; but it is possible to avert (them) by means, by reason, with appropriate reflection, instruction etc.; such is the meaning.

Sakacittaṃ pasīdatīti ettha imāni vatthūni – kaṭaandhakāravāsīphussadevattherokira cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ sammajjitvā ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā sinduvārakusumasanthatamiva samavippakiṇṇavālikaṃ cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ olokento buddhārammaṇaṃ pītipāmojjaṃ uppādetvā aṭṭhāsi. Tasmiṃ khaṇe māro pabbatapāde nibbattakāḷamakkaṭo viya hutvā cetiyaṅgaṇe gomayaṃ vippakiranto gato. Thero nāsakkhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇituṃ, sammajjitvā agamāsi. Dutiyadivasepi jaraggavo hutvā tādisameva vippakāraṃ akāsi. Tatiyadivase vaṅkapādaṃ manussattabhāvaṃ nimminitvā pādena parikasanto agamāsi. Thero ‘‘evarūpo bībhacchapuriso samantā yojanappamāṇesu gocaragāmesu natthi, siyā nu kho māro’’ti cintetvā ‘‘mārosi tva’’nti āha. ‘‘Āma, bhante, māromhi, na dāni te vañcetuṃ asakkhi’’nti. ‘‘Diṭṭhapubbo tayā tathāgato’’ti? ‘‘Āma, diṭṭhapubbo’’ti. ‘‘Māro nāma mahānubhāvo hoti, iṅgha tāva buddhassa bhagavato attabhāvasadisaṃ attabhāvaṃ nimmināhī’’ti? ‘‘Na sakkā, bhante, tādisaṃ rūpaṃ nimminituṃ; apica kho pana taṃsarikkhakaṃ patirūpakaṃ nimminissāmī’’ti sakabhāvaṃ vijahitvā buddharūpasadisena attabhāvena aṭṭhāsi. Thero māraṃ oloketvā ‘‘ayaṃ tāva sarāgadosamoho evaṃ sobhati, kathaṃ nu kho bhagavā na sobhati sabbaso vītarāgadosamoho’’ti buddhārammaṇaṃ pītiṃ paṭilabhitvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. Māro ‘‘vañcitomhi tayā, bhante’’ti āha. Theropi ‘‘kiṃ atthi jaramāra, tādisaṃ vañcetu’’nti āha. Lokantaravihārepi datto nāma daharabhikkhu cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ sammajjitvā olokento odātakasiṇaṃ paṭilabhi. Aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbattesi. Tato vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā phalattayaṃ sacchākāsi.

One's own mind is serene: here are these instances: it seems that the Elder Phussadeva, dwelling in a dark hut, having swept the courtyard of a cetiya, having arranged his upper robe over one shoulder, stood looking at the courtyard of the cetiya, the sand scattered evenly like a bed of sinduvāra flowers, producing joy and delight with the Buddha as his object. At that moment, Māra, having become like a black monkey born at the foot of a mountain, went scattering cow dung in the cetiya courtyard. The Elder was not able to attain Arahantship, (but) went away after sweeping. On the second day too, having become an old ox, he did just such an affront. On the third day, having fashioned a bent-legged human form, he went about digging with his foot. The Elder, thinking, "There is no such repulsive person within a league's compass in the villages for alms, could he be Māra?" said, "Are you Māra?" "Yes, venerable sir, I am Māra; now I was not able to deceive you." "(Have you) seen the Tathāgata before?" "Yes, (I have) seen (him) before." "Māra is of great power; come, fashion a likeness of the Buddha Bhagavā." "It is not possible, venerable sir, to fashion such a form; however, I will fashion a similar likeness." Having abandoned his own form, he stood with a form like the Buddha's form. The Elder, looking at Māra, thought, "Even this defiled by lust and delusion is so beautiful, how could the Bhagavā, altogether free from lust and delusion, not be beautiful?" Having regained joy with the Buddha as his object, having developed insight, he attained Arahantship. Māra said, "I have been deceived by you, venerable sir." The Elder also said, "What is there, old Māra, to deceive like that?" In Lokantaravihāra too, a young bhikkhu named Datta, having swept the courtyard of a cetiya, looking around, attained the white kasina. He produced the eight attainments. Then, having developed insight, he realized the three fruits.

Paracittaṃpasīdatīti ettha imāni vatthūni –tissonāma daharabhikkhu jambukolacetiyaṅgaṇaṃ sammajjitvā saṅkārachaḍḍaniṃ hatthena gahetvāva aṭṭhāsi. Tasmiṃ khaṇetissadattattheronāma nāvāto oruyha cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ olokento bhāvitacittena sammaṭṭhaṭṭhānanti ñatvā pañhāsahassaṃ pucchi, itaro sabbaṃ vissajjesi. Aññatarasmimpi vihāre thero cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ sammajjitvā vattaṃ paricchindi. Yonakavisayato cetiyavandakā cattāro therā āgantvā cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ disvā anto appavisitvā dvāreyeva ṭhatvā eko thero aṭṭha kappe anussari, eko soḷasa, eko vīsati, eko tiṃsa kappe anussari.

Paracittaṃ pasīdatīti (The mind of others becomes clear) Here are the instances: A young bhikkhu named Tissa, having swept the courtyard of the Jambukola Cetiya, stood there still holding the dustpan in his hand. At that moment, a thero named Tissadatta, disembarking from a ship and looking at the Cetiya courtyard, recognized it as a well-prepared place with a cultivated mind and asked a thousand questions, all of which the former answered. In another monastery, a thero, having swept the Cetiya courtyard, completed his duty. Four therōs, pilgrims from the Yonaka country, came and, seeing the Cetiya courtyard, stood at the gate without entering. One thero recollected eight aeons, one sixteen, one twenty, and one thirty aeons.

Devatā attamanā hontīti ettha idaṃ vatthu – ekasmiṃ kira vihāre eko bhikkhu cetiyaṅgaṇañca bodhiyaṅgaṇañca sammajjitvā nahāyituṃ gato. Devatā ‘‘imassa vihārassa katakālato paṭṭhāya evaṃ vattaṃ pūretvā sammaṭṭhapubbo bhikkhu natthī’’ti pasannacittā pupphahatthā aṭṭhaṃsu. Thero āgantvā ‘‘kataragāmavāsikātthā’’ti āha. ‘‘Bhante, idheva vasāma, imassa vihārassa katakālato paṭṭhāya evaṃ vattaṃ pūretvā sammaṭṭhapubbo bhikkhu natthīti tumhākaṃ, bhante, vatte pasīditvā pupphahatthā ṭhitāmhā’’ti devatā āhaṃsu.

Devatā attamanā hontīti (The deities become delighted) Here is the instance: It is said that in one monastery, a bhikkhu, having swept both the Cetiya courtyard and the Bodhi courtyard, went to bathe. The deities, thinking, "Since the founding of this monastery, there has never been a bhikkhu who has fulfilled the duty and swept like this," stood with delighted minds and handfuls of flowers. The thero came and asked, "From which village do you come?" The deities said, "Bhante, we live here. Since the founding of this monastery, there has never been a bhikkhu who has fulfilled the duty and swept like this, so, Bhante, pleased with your duty, we stand here with handfuls of flowers."

Pāsādikasaṃvattanikanti ettha idaṃ vatthu – ekaṃ kira amaccaputtaṃ abhayattherañca ārabbha ayaṃ kathā udapādi ‘‘kiṃ nu kho amaccaputto pāsādiko, abhayattheroti ubhopi ne ekasmiṃ ṭhāne olokessāmā’’ti. Ñātakā amaccaputtaṃ alaṅkaritvā mahācetiyaṃ vandāpessāmāti agamaṃsu. Theramātāpi pāsādikaṃ cīvaraṃ kāretvā puttassa pahiṇi, ‘‘putto me kese chindāpetvā imaṃ cīvaraṃ pārupitvā bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto mahācetiyaṃ vandatū’’ti. Amaccaputto ñātiparivuto pācīnadvārena cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ āruḷho, abhayatthero bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto dakkhiṇadvārena cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ āruhitvā cetiyaṅgaṇe tena saddhiṃ samāgantvā āha – ‘‘kiṃ tvaṃ, āvuso, mahallakattherassa sammaṭṭhaṭṭhāne kacavaraṃ chaḍḍetvā mayā saddhiṃ yugaggāhaṃ gaṇhāsī’’ti. Atītattabhāve kira abhayatthero mahallakatthero nāma hutvā gocaragāme cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ sammajji, amaccaputto mahāupāsako hutvā sammaṭṭhaṭṭhāne kacavaraṃ gahetvā chaḍḍesi.

Pāsādikasaṃvattanikanti (Leads to serenity) Here is the instance: This story arose concerning a minister's son and Abhayatthera: "Which is more serene, the minister's son or Abhayatthera? Let us observe both in one place." Relatives adorned the minister's son and took him to worship the Mahācetiya. Theramātā (the thera's mother) also had a serene robe made and sent it to her son, saying, "May my son have his hair cut, put on this robe, and, surrounded by the community of bhikkhus, worship the Mahācetiya." The minister's son, surrounded by relatives, ascended to the Cetiya courtyard through the eastern gate, while Abhayatthera, surrounded by the community of bhikkhus, ascended to the Cetiya courtyard through the southern gate, met him in the Cetiya courtyard, and said, "Why, friend, do you throw rubbish in the well-swept place of an elder thero and try to compete with me?" In a past life, Abhayatthera had been a mahallakatthera (elderly thera) and swept the Cetiya courtyard in a village for alms, while the minister's son had been a mahāupāsaka (great lay devotee) and had taken rubbish and thrown it in the swept place.

Satthusāsanaṃ kataṃ hotīti idaṃ sammajjanavattaṃ nāma buddhehi vaṇṇitaṃ, tasmā taṃ karontena satthusāsanaṃ kataṃ hoti. Tatridaṃ vatthu – āyasmā kirasāriputtohimavantaṃ gantvā ekasmiṃ pabbhāre asammajjitvāva nirodhaṃ samāpajjitvā nisīdi. Bhagavā āvajjanto therassa asammajjitvā nisinnabhāvaṃ ñatvā ākāsena gantvā therassa purato asammaṭṭhaṭṭhāne pādāni dassetvā paccāgañchi. Thero samāpattito vuṭṭhito bhagavato pādāni disvā balavahirottappaṃ paccupaṭṭhāpetvā jaṇṇukehi patiṭṭhāya ‘‘asammajjitvā nisinnabhāvaṃ vata me satthā aññāsi, saṅghamajjhe dāni codanaṃ kāressāmī’’ti dasabalassa santikaṃ gantvā vanditvā nisīdi. Bhagavā ‘‘kuhiṃ gatosi, sāriputtā’’ti vatvā ‘‘na patirūpaṃ dāni te mayhaṃ anantare ṭhāne ṭhatvā vicarantassa asammajjitvā nisīditu’’nti āha. Tato paṭṭhāya thero gaṇṭhikapaṭimuñcanaṭṭhānepi tiṭṭhanto pādena kacavaraṃ viyūhitvāva tiṭṭhati.

Satthusāsanaṃ kataṃ hotīti (The Teacher's instruction is done) This sweeping duty is praised by the Buddhas; therefore, by doing it, the Teacher's instruction is done. Here is the instance: It is said that venerable Sāriputta, having gone to the Himalayas, entered cessation without sweeping on one mountain slope and sat down. The Blessed One, reflecting, knew that the thero had sat down without sweeping and, going through the air, showed his feet in the unswept place in front of the thero and returned. The thero, rising from his attainment, seeing the Blessed One's feet, strongly established a sense of shame and, kneeling down, thought, "The Teacher knows that I sat down without sweeping, now he will make me feel guilty in the Saṅgha," and went to the presence of the Ten-Powered One, paid homage, and sat down. The Blessed One, saying, "Where have you gone, Sāriputta?" said, "It is not appropriate for you, standing in the place next to me and wandering, to sit down without sweeping." From then on, the thero, even when standing at the place for untying bundles, would sweep away the rubbish with his foot before standing.

Attano bhāsapariyantaṃ na uggaṇhātīti ‘‘imasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ ettakaṃ suttaṃ upalabbhati, ettako vinicchayo, ettakaṃ suttañca vinicchayañca vakkhāmī’’ti evaṃ attano bhāsapariyantaṃ na uggaṇhāti. ‘‘Ayaṃ codakassa purimakathā, ayaṃ pacchimakathā, ayaṃ cuditakassa purimakathā, ayaṃ pacchimakathā, ettakaṃ gayhūpagaṃ, ettakaṃ na gayhūpaga’’nti evaṃ anuggaṇhanto panaparassa bhāsapariyantaṃ na uggaṇhātināma.Āpattiṃ na jānātīti pārājikaṃ vā saṅghādisesaṃ vāti sattannaṃ āpattikkhandhānaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ na jānāti.Mūlanti dve āpattiyā mūlāni kāyo ca vācā ca, tāni na jānāti.Samudayanti cha āpattisamuṭṭhānāni āpattisamudayo nāma, tāni na jānāti. Pārājikādīnaṃ vatthuṃ na jānātītipi vuttaṃ hoti.Nirodhanti ayaṃ āpatti desanāya nirujjhati, vūpasammati, ayaṃ vuṭṭhānenāti evaṃ āpattinirodhaṃ na jānāti. Satta samathe ajānanto panaāpattinirodhagāminipaṭipadaṃna jānāti.

Attano bhāsapariyantaṃ na uggaṇhātīti (Does not grasp the limit of his own speech) He does not grasp the limit of his own speech, thinking, "In this matter, so much sutta (discourse) is found, so much vinicchaya (judgment), I will speak so much sutta and vinicchaya." Parassa bhāsapariyantaṃ na uggaṇhāti (Does not grasp the limit of another's speech) But one who does not grasp thus, "This is the questioner's initial statement, this is the final statement, this is the defendant's initial statement, this is the final statement, so much is to be taken, so much is not to be taken," is said not to grasp the limit of another's speech. Āpattiṃ na jānātīti (Does not know the offense) He does not know the distinction between the seven groups of offenses, whether it is a pārājika or a saṅghādisesa. Mūlanti (Root) The two roots of offenses are body and speech; he does not know them. Samudayanti (Origin) The six sources of offenses are called the origin of offenses; he does not know them. This is also said to mean that he does not know the basis of the pārājika offenses, etc. Nirodhanti (Cessation) He does not know the cessation of offenses, thinking, "This offense ceases by confession, subsides, this by formal rehabilitation." Āpattinirodhagāminipaṭipadaṃna jānāti (Does not know the practice leading to the cessation of offenses) But one who does not know the seven samatha (settlements) does not know the practice leading to the cessation of offenses.

adhikaraṇaṃnāma cattāri adhikaraṇāni.Adhikaraṇassa mūlaṃnāma tettiṃsa mūlāni – vivādādhikaraṇassa dvādasa mūlāni, anuvādādhikaraṇassa cuddasa, āpattādhikaraṇassa cha, kiccādhikaraṇassa ekaṃ; tāni parato āvi bhavissanti.Adhikaraṇasamudayonāma adhikaraṇasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Vivādādhikaraṇaṃ aṭṭhārasa bhedakaravatthūni nissāya uppajjati; anuvādādhikaraṇaṃ catasso vipattiyo; āpattādhikaraṇaṃ sattāpattikkhandhe; kiccādhikaraṇaṃ cattāri saṅghakiccānīti imaṃ vibhāgaṃ na jānātīti attho.Adhikaraṇanirodhaṃ na jānātīti dhammena vinayena satthusāsanena mūlāmūlaṃ gantvā vinicchayasamathaṃ pāpetuṃ na sakkoti; ‘‘idaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ dvīhi, idaṃ catūhi, idaṃ tīhi idaṃ ekena samathena sammatī’’ti evaṃ satta samathe ajānanto panaadhikaraṇanirodhagāminipaṭipadaṃna jānāti nāma.Vatthuṃ na jānātīti ‘‘idaṃ pārājikassa vatthu, idaṃ saṅghādisesassā’’ti evaṃ sattannaṃ āpattikkhandhānaṃ vatthuṃ na jānāti.Nidānanti ‘‘sattannaṃ nidānānaṃ idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ ettha paññattaṃ, idaṃ etthā’’ti na jānāti.Paññattiṃ na jānātīti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sikkhāpade paṭhamapaññattiṃ na jānāti.Anupaññattinti punappunaṃ paññattiṃ na jānāti.Anusandhivacanapathanti kathānusandhi-vinicchayānusandhivasena vatthuṃ na jānāti.Ñattiṃ na jānātīti sabbena sabbaṃ ñattiṃ na jānāti.Ñattiyā karaṇaṃ na jānātīti ñattikiccaṃ na jānāti, osāraṇādīsu navasu ṭhānesu ñattikammaṃ nāma hoti, ñattidutiyañatticatutthakammesu ñattiyā kammappatto hutvā tiṭṭhatīti na jānāti.Na pubbakusalo hoti na aparakusaloti pubbe kathetabbañca pacchā kathetabbañca na jānāti, ñatti nāma pubbe ṭhapetabbā, pacchā na ṭhapetabbātipi na jānāti.Akālaññū ca hotīti kālaṃ na jānāti, anajjhiṭṭho ayācito bhāsati, ñattikālampi ñattikhettampi ñattiokāsampi na jānāti.

adhikaraṇaṃnāma (Adhikaraṇa means) The four adhikaraṇa (legal issues). Adhikaraṇassa mūlaṃnāma (The root of adhikaraṇa means) The thirty-three roots—twelve roots of vivādādhikaraṇa (disputes), fourteen of anuvādādhikaraṇa (accusations), six of āpattādhikaraṇa (offenses), one of kiccādhikaraṇa (procedures); these will become apparent later. Adhikaraṇasamudayonāma (The origin of adhikaraṇa means) The arising of adhikaraṇa. Vivādādhikaraṇa arises dependent on the eighteen grounds for contention; anuvādādhikaraṇa from the four kinds of failures; āpattādhikaraṇa from the seven groups of offenses; kiccādhikaraṇa from the four Saṅgha procedures; this means that he does not know this distinction. Adhikaraṇanirodhaṃ na jānātīti (Does not know the cessation of adhikaraṇa) He is not able to bring it to a settlement of judgment by going to the root and non-root with the Dhamma, the Vinaya, the Teacher's instruction; but one who does not know the seven samatha, thinking, "This adhikaraṇa is settled by two, this by four, this by three, this by one samatha," is said not to know the practice leading to the cessation of adhikaraṇa. Vatthuṃ na jānātīti (Does not know the basis) He does not know the basis of the seven groups of offenses, thinking, "This is the basis of a pārājika, this of a saṅghādisesa." Nidānanti (Cause) He does not know, thinking, "This sikkhāpada (precept) was established here, this here, of the seven causes." Paññattiṃ na jānātīti (Does not know the enactment) He does not know the first enactment in each sikkhāpada. Anupaññattinti (Supplementary enactment) He does not know the repeated enactment. Anusandhivacanapathanti (Connected series of statements) He does not know the basis in terms of the connection of the narrative, the connection of the judgment. Ñattiṃ na jānātīti (Does not know the motion) He does not know all of the motion. Ñattiyā karaṇaṃ na jānātīti (Does not know the performance of the motion) He does not know the business of the motion. There is the act of motion in nine places, such as expulsion, etc.; he does not know that in motions requiring one announcement, two announcements, or four announcements, one stands having attained the motion's business. Na pubbakusalo hoti na aparakusaloti (Is not skilled in what should be said first, nor in what should be said later) He does not know what should be said first and what should be said later; he also does not know that the motion should be established first, not later. Akālaññū ca hotīti (And is not aware of the proper time) He does not know the proper time, he speaks uninvited, unasked; he also does not know the time for the motion, the place for the motion, the occasion for the motion.

Mandattā momūhattāti kevalaṃ aññāṇena momūhabhāvena dhutaṅge ānisaṃsaṃ ajānitvā.Pāpicchoti tena araññavāsena paccayalābhaṃ patthayamāno.Pavivekanti kāyacittaupadhivivekaṃ.Idamatthitanti imāya kalyāṇāya paṭipattiyā attho etassāti idamatthi, idamatthino bhāvo idamatthitā; taṃ idamatthitaṃyeva nissāya na aññaṃ kiñci lokāmisanti attho.

Mandattā momūhattāti (Through dullness, through delusion) Merely through ignorance, through delusion, not knowing the benefits in dhutaṅga (ascetic practices). Pāpicchoti (Wicked in his desires) Desiring gain of requisites through that forest dwelling. Pavivekanti (Seclusion) Seclusion of body, mind, and defilements. Idamatthitanti (Having this purpose) He has a purpose by this wholesome practice, therefore, he is idamatthi (having this purpose), the state of being idamatthi; meaning, he relies solely on that idamatthita and nothing else worldly.

Uposathaṃ na jānātīti navavidhaṃ uposathaṃ na jānāti.Uposathakammanti adhammenavaggādibhedaṃ catubbidhaṃ uposathakammaṃ na jānāti.Pātimokkhanti dve mātikā na jānāti.Pātimokkhuddesanti sabbampi navavidhaṃ pātimokkhuddesaṃ na jānāti.Pavāraṇanti navavidhaṃ pavāraṇaṃ na jānāti. Pavāraṇākammaṃ uposathakammasadisameva.

Uposathaṃ na jānātīti (Does not know the Uposatha) He does not know the nine kinds of Uposatha. Uposathakammanti (Uposatha act) He does not know the four kinds of Uposatha acts, distinguished by adhamma-vagga, etc. Pātimokkhanti (Pātimokkha) He does not know the two matrices. Pātimokkhuddesanti (Recitation of the Pātimokkha) He does not know all nine kinds of Pātimokkha recitation. Pavāraṇanti (Pavāraṇa) He does not know the nine kinds of Pavāraṇa. The Pavāraṇa act is similar to the Uposatha act.

apāsādikanti kāyaduccaritādi akusalakammaṃ vuccati.Pāsādikanti kāyasucaritādi kusalakammaṃ vuccati.Ativelanti velaṃ atikkamma bahutaraṃ kālaṃ kulesu appaṃ vihāreti attho.Otāroti kilesānaṃ anto otaraṇaṃ.Saṃkiliṭṭhanti duṭṭhullāpattikāyasaṃsaggādibhedaṃ.Visuddhipañcakepavāraṇāggahaṇena navavidhāpi pavāraṇā veditabbā. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

apāsādikanti (Unlovely) This is said to be unwholesome action, such as misconduct of body, etc. Pāsādikanti (Lovely) This is said to be wholesome action, such as good conduct of body, etc. Ativelanti (Excessively) Meaning, he dwells in families for a very long time, exceeding the proper time. Otāroti (Opportunity) Entering into the defilements. Saṃkiliṭṭhanti (Defiled) Distinguished by gross offenses, bodily contact, etc. Visuddhipañcake (In the five purifications) By including the acceptance of Pavāraṇa, all nine kinds of Pavāraṇa should be understood. The rest is straightforward everywhere.

Pañcakavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the fifth division is finished.

Chakkavāravaṇṇanā
The Explanation of the Sixth Division

326.Chakkesu –cha sāmīciyoti ‘‘so ca bhikkhu anabbhito, te ca bhikkhū gārayhā, ayaṃ tattha sāmīci’’, ‘‘yuñjantāyasmanto sakaṃ, mā vo sakaṃ vinassāti ayaṃ tattha sāmīci’’, ‘‘ayaṃ te bhikkhu patto yāva bhedanāya dhāretabboti ayaṃ tattha sāmīci’’, ‘‘tato nīharitvā bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ saṃvibhajitabbaṃ, ayaṃ tattha sāmīci’’, ‘‘aññātabbaṃ paripucchitabbaṃ paripañhitabbaṃ, ayaṃ tattha sāmīci’’, ‘‘yassa bhavissati so harissatīti ayaṃ tattha sāmīcī’’ti imā bhikkhupātimokkheyevacha sāmīciyo. Cha chedanakāti pañcake vuttā pañca bhikkhunīnaṃ udakasāṭikāya saddhiṃ cha.Chahākārehīti alajjitā aññāṇatā kukkuccapakatatā akappiye kappiyasaññitā kappiye akappiyasaññitā satisammosāti. Tattha ekarattachārattasattāhātikkamādīsu āpattiṃ satisammosena āpajjati. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.Cha ānisaṃsā vinayadhareti pañcake vuttā pañca tassādheyyo uposathoti iminā saddhiṃ cha.

326. Among the sixes— cha sāmīciyoti (six proprieties) "That bhikkhu is unassailable, and those bhikkhus are blameworthy, this is propriety there," "Venerable ones, apply yourselves to your own (duties), lest your own should perish, this is propriety there," "This bowl is to be kept by you, bhikkhu, until it is broken, this is propriety there," "Having taken it out, it should be shared among the bhikkhus, this is propriety there," "It should be known, inquired about, questioned, this is propriety there," "Whoever it belongs to, he will take it, this is propriety there"—these are the six proprieties in the Bhikkhupātimokkha itself. Cha chedanakāti (Six cutting off) The five mentioned in the fifth division, together with the bhikkhunī's water cloth, are six. Chahākārehīti (By six ways) By shamelessness, unknowing, scrupulousness, making what is improper proper, making what is proper improper, loss of mindfulness. Of these, one incurs an offense through loss of mindfulness in cases such as exceeding one night, four nights, seven days, etc. The rest is as stated. Cha ānisaṃsā vinayadhareti (Six benefits for the Vinaya-holder) The five mentioned in the fifth division, together with "his is the Uposatha that depends on that," are six.

Cha paramānīti ‘‘dasāhaparamaṃ atirekacīvaraṃ dhāretabbaṃ, māsaparamaṃ tena bhikkhunā taṃ cīvaraṃ nikkhipitabbaṃ, santaruttaraparamaṃ tena bhikkhunā tato cīvaraṃ sāditabbaṃ, chakkhattuparamaṃ tuṇhībhūtena uddissa ṭhātabbaṃ, navaṃ pana bhikkhunā santhataṃ kārāpetvā chabbassāni dhāretabbaṃ chabbassaparamatā dhāretabbaṃ, tiyojanaparamaṃ sahatthā dhāretabbāni, dasāhaparamaṃ atirekapatto dhāretabbo, sattāhaparamaṃ sannidhikārakaṃ paribhuñjitabbāni, chārattaparamaṃ tena bhikkhunā tena cīvarena vippavasitabbaṃ, catukkaṃsaparamaṃ, aḍḍhateyyakaṃsaparamaṃ, dvaṅgulapabbaparamaṃ ādātabbaṃ, aṭṭhaṅgulaparamaṃ mañcapaṭipādakaṃ, aṭṭhaṅgulaparamaṃ dantakaṭṭha’’nti imānicuddasa paramāni. Tattha paṭhamāni cha ekaṃ chakkaṃ, tato ekaṃ apanetvā sesesu ekekaṃ pakkhipitvātiādinā nayena aññānipi chakkāni kātabbāni.

Cha paramānīti (Six limits) "An extra robe may be kept for ten days at most, that robe should be put away by that bhikkhu for a month at most, that robe should be solicited by him between the inner and outer robes at most, one who has been silenced should stand addressed at most six times, a new cloth spread should be used by a bhikkhu for six years after it has been made, it may be kept for six years at most, it should be carried in hand for three yojanas at most, an extra bowl may be kept for ten days at most, that which is allowed to be stored may be used for seven days at most, that bhikkhu may be separated from that robe for six nights at most, four kaṃsas at most, one and a half teyyakaṃsas at most, two aṅgulas (finger-widths) of joint at most may be taken, a bed leg may be eight aṅgulas at most, a toothpick may be eight aṅgulas at most"—these are the fourteen limits. Of these, the first six are one group of six, then another group of six should be made in the way that one is removed and one is added to the remainder.

Chaāpattiyoti tīṇi chakkāni antarapeyyāle vuttāni.Cha kammānīti tajjanīya-niyassa-pabbājanīya-paṭisāraṇīyāni cattāri, āpattiyā adassane ca appaṭikamme ca vuttadvayampi ekaṃ, pāpikāya diṭṭhiyā appaṭinissagge ekanti cha.Nahāneti orenaḍḍhamāsaṃ nahāne; vippakatacīvarādichakkadvayaṃ kathinakkhandhake niddiṭṭhaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

Cha āpattiyoti (Six offenses) The three groups of six stated in between. Cha kammānīti (Six acts) The four: tajjanīya (act of censure), niyassa (act of dependence), pabbājanīya (act of banishment), paṭisāraṇīya (act of reconciliation), and the pair stated regarding not seeing the offense and not making amends are one, and one regarding not relinquishing a wicked view, thus six. Nahāneti (Bathing) Bathing every half month. The two groups of six, beginning with robes with missing parts, etc., are specified in the Kathina section. The rest is straightforward everywhere.

Chakkavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the sixth division is finished.

Sattakavāravaṇṇanā
The Explanation of the Seventh Division

327.Sattakesu –satta sāmīciyoti pubbe vuttesu chasu ‘‘sā ca bhikkhunī anabbhitā, tā ca bhikkhuniyo gārayhā, ayaṃ tattha sāmīcī’’ti imaṃ pakkhipitvā satta veditabbā.Satta adhammikā paṭiññātakaraṇāti ‘‘bhikkhu pārājikaṃ ajjhāpanno hoti, pārājikena codiyamāno ‘saṅghādisesaṃ ajjhāpannomhī’ti paṭijānāti, taṃ saṅgho saṅghādisesena kāreti, adhammikaṃ paṭiññātakaraṇa’’nti evaṃ samathakkhandhake niddiṭṭhā. Dhammikāpi tattheva niddiṭṭhā.Sattannaṃ anāpatti sattāhakaraṇīyena gantunti vassūpanāyikakkhandhake vuttaṃ.Sattānisaṃsā vinayadhareti ‘‘tassādheyyo uposatho pavāraṇā’’ti imehi saddhiṃ pañcake vuttā pañca satta honti.Satta paramānīti chakke vuttāniyeva sattakavasena yojetabbāni.Katacīvarantiādīni dve sattakāni kathinakkhandhake niddiṭṭhāni.

327. Among the sevens— satta sāmīciyoti (seven proprieties) The seven should be understood by including "That bhikkhunī is unassailable, and those bhikkhunīs are blameworthy, this is propriety there" in the six previously stated. Satta adhammikā paṭiññātakaraṇāti (Seven unrighteous acknowledgements) "A bhikkhu has committed a pārājika offense, when accused of a pārājika offense, he acknowledges 'I have committed a saṅghādisesa offense,' the Saṅgha makes him deal with the saṅghādisesa offense, that is an unrighteous acknowledgement," thus it is specified in the samathakkhandhaka (section on settlements). Righteous acknowledgements are also specified there. Sattannaṃ anāpatti sattāhakaraṇīyena gantunti (Seven are free from offense by going on a seven-day allowable journey) This is stated in the vassūpanāyikakkhandhaka (section on entering the rains residence). Sattānisaṃsā vinayadhareti (Seven benefits for the Vinaya-holder) The five stated in the fifth division, together with "his is the Uposatha and Pavāraṇa that depends on that," are seven. Satta paramānīti (Seven limits) The limits stated in the sixth division should be combined with the seventh. The two groups of seven beginning with katacīvara (making robes), etc., are specified in the Kathina section.

Bhikkhussa na hoti āpatti daṭṭhabbā, bhikkhussa hoti āpatti daṭṭhabbā, bhikkhussa hoti āpatti paṭikātabbāti imāni tīṇi sattakāni, dve adhammikāni, ekaṃ dhammikaṃ; tāni tīṇipi campeyyake niddiṭṭhāni.Asaddhammāti asataṃ dhammā, asanto vā dhammā; asobhanā hīnā lāmakāti attho.Saddhammāti sataṃ buddhādīnaṃ dhammā; santo vā dhammā sundarā uttamāti attho. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

Bhikkhussa na hoti āpatti daṭṭhabbā, bhikkhussa hoti āpatti daṭṭhabbā, bhikkhussa hoti āpatti paṭikātabbā—these three are the heptads, two are unlawful, one is lawful; all three were not specified in Campeyya.Asaddhammā—the dhamma of the untrue, or untrue dhammas; meaning unlovely, base, and inferior.Saddhammā—the dhamma of the true, of the Buddha and others; or true dhammas, beautiful and excellent is the meaning. The rest is self-explanatory everywhere.

Sattakavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Section of Sevens is finished.

Aṭṭhakavāravaṇṇanā
Commentary on the Section of Eights

328.Aṭṭhakesu –aṭṭhānisaṃseti ‘‘na mayaṃ iminā bhikkhunā saddhiṃ uposathaṃ karissāma, vinā iminā bhikkhunā uposathaṃ karissāma, na mayaṃ iminā bhikkhunā saddhiṃ pavāressāma, saṅghakammaṃ karissāma, āsane nisīdissāma, yāgupāne nisīdissāma, bhattagge nisīdissāma, ekacchanne vasissāma, yathāvuḍḍhaṃ abhivādanaṃ paccuṭṭhānaṃ añjalikammaṃ sāmīcikammaṃ karissāma, vinā iminā bhikkhunā karissāmā’’ti evaṃ kosambakakkhandhake vutte ānisaṃse. Dutiyaaṭṭhakepi eseva nayo, tampi hi evameva kosambakakkhandhake vuttaṃ.

328.Among the eights—eight advantages means the advantages stated in the Kosambaka Khandhaka, such as, "We will not perform the Uposatha with this bhikkhu; we will perform the Uposatha without this bhikkhu; we will not end the Rains Retreat (pavāreti) with this bhikkhu; we will perform Saṅgha kamma; we will sit on a seat; we will sit for rice-gruel and drinks; we will sit in the refectory; we will dwell under one roof; we will do the proper greeting, rising up, añjali, and customary duties according to seniority; we will do these without this bhikkhu." The same method applies to the second eight; for that too is stated in the Kosambaka Khandhaka in the same way.

Aṭṭha yāvatatiyakāti bhikkhūnaṃ terasake cattāro, bhikkhunīnaṃ sattarasake bhikkhūhi asādhāraṇā cattāroti aṭṭha.Aṭṭhahākārehi kulāni dūsetīti kulāni dūseti pupphena vā phalena vā cuṇṇena vā mattikāya vā dantakaṭṭhena vā veḷuyā vā vejjikāya vā jaṅghapesanikena vāti imehi aṭṭhahi.Aṭṭha mātikācīvarakkhandhake, aparā aṭṭha kathinakkhandhake vuttā.Aṭṭhahi asaddhammehīti lābhena alābhena yasena ayasena sakkārena asakkārena pāpicchatāya pāpamittatāya.Aṭṭha lokadhammānāma lābhe sārāgo, alābhe paṭivirodho; evaṃ yase ayase, pasaṃsāya nindāya, sukhe sārāgo, dukkhe paṭivirodhoti.Aṭṭhaṅgiko musāvādoti ‘‘vinidhāya sañña’’nti iminā saddhiṃ pāḷiyaṃ āgatehi sattahīti aṭṭhahi aṅgehi aṭṭhaṅgiko.

Eight up to the third means eight: four in the thirteen for bhikkhus, and four not shared by bhikkhunīs in the seventeen for bhikkhunīs.Aṭṭhahākārehi kulāni dūsetī means he corrupts families by these eight ways: with flowers, fruits, powder, soil, tooth sticks, bamboo, medicine, or conveying messages.Eight matrices are stated in the chapter on robes, and the other eight in the chapter on the Kathina.Aṭṭhahi asaddhammehī—by eight unrighteous things: by gain, by loss, by fame, by lack of fame, by respect, by disrespect, by evil desire, by evil friendship.Eight worldly conditions are: being attached to gain, being averse to loss; similarly with fame and lack of fame, praise and blame, being attached to pleasure, and being averse to pain.Eight-factored lie—is eight-factored, with the seven that come in the Pāḷi along with "vinidhāya sañña".

Aṭṭha uposathaṅgānīti –

Eight Uposatha factors

‘‘Pāṇaṃ na hane na cādinnamādiye,

‘‘One should not kill a living being, nor take what is not given,
Not speak falsely, nor be a drinker of intoxicants;
One should abstain from unchaste conduct, sexual intercourse,
Not eat at night, abstaining from untimely food.

‘‘Mālaṃ na dhāre na ca gandhamācare,

‘‘Not wear garlands, nor use scents,
One should lie on a couch on the bare earth or on a mat;
This, indeed, is called the eight-factored Uposatha,
Declared by the Buddha, the one with qualities ending suffering.’’ (a. ni. 3.71);

Aṭṭha dūteyyaṅgānīti ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sotā ca hoti sāvetā cā’’tiādinā nayena saṅghabhedake vuttāni.Titthiyavattānimahākhandhake niddiṭṭhāni.Anatirittācaatirittāca pavāraṇāsikkhāpade niddiṭṭhā.Aṭṭhannaṃ paccuṭṭhātabbanti bhattagge vuḍḍhabhikkhunīnaṃ, āsanampi tāsaṃyeva dātabbaṃ.Upāsikāti visākhā.Aṭṭhānisaṃsā vinayadhareti pañcake vuttesu pañcasu ‘‘tassādheyyo uposatho, pavāraṇā, saṅghakamma’’nti ime tayo pakkhipitvā aṭṭha veditabbā.Aṭṭha paramānīti pubbe vuttaparamāneva aṭṭhakavasena yojetvā veditabbāni.Aṭṭhasu dhammesu sammā vattitabbanti ‘‘na pakatattassa bhikkhuno uposatho ṭhapetabbo, na pavāraṇā ṭhapetabbā’’tiādinā nayena samathakkhandhake niddiṭṭhesu aṭṭhasu. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

Eight qualities of a messenger are stated in the section on the schism of the Saṅgha, in the manner beginning with "Here, bhikkhus, a bhikkhu is both a hearer and a proclaimer."Practices of sectarians (titthiya) are specified in the Mahā Khandhaka.Not exceeding (anatirittā) and exceeding (atirittā) are specified in the Pavāraṇā training rule.Aṭṭhannaṃ paccuṭṭhātabbaṃ—at the refectory, one should rise for older bhikkhunīs, and seats should be given to them.Upāsikā—Visākhā.Eight advantages in a Vinaya-holder—of the five stated in the Pañcaka, eight should be understood by including these three: "For him, the Uposatha, Pavāraṇā, and Saṅghakamma are empowered."Eight measures—should be understood by combining the previously stated measures with a section of eight.Should rightly conduct in eight things—in the eight specified in the Samatha Khandhaka, in the manner beginning with "The Uposatha should not be stopped for a bhikkhu who is of right conduct, nor should the Pavāraṇā be stopped." The rest is self-explanatory everywhere.

Aṭṭhakavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Section of Eights is finished.

Commentary on the Section of Nines

329.Navakesu –nava āghātavatthūnīti ‘‘anatthaṃ me acarī’’tiādīni nava.Nava āghātapaṭivinayāti ‘‘anatthaṃ me acari, taṃ kutettha labbhāti āghātaṃ paṭivinetī’’tiādīni nava.Nava vinītavatthūnīti navahi āghātavatthūhi ārati virati paṭivirati setughāto.Navahi saṅgho bhijjatīti ‘‘navannaṃ vā, upāli, atirekanavannaṃ vā saṅgharāji ceva hoti saṅghabhedo cā’’ti.Nava paramānīti pubbe vuttaparamāneva navakavasena yojetvā veditabbāni.Nava taṇhāmūlakānāma taṇhaṃ paṭicca pariyesanā, pariyesanaṃ paṭicca lābho, lābhaṃ paṭicca vinicchayo, vinicchayaṃ paṭicca chandarāgo, chandarāgaṃ paṭicca ajjhosānaṃ, ajjhosānaṃ paṭicca pariggaho, pariggahaṃ paṭicca macchariyaṃ, macchariyaṃ paṭicca ārakkhā, ārakkhādhikaraṇaṃ daṇḍādānasatthādānakalahaviggahavivādatuvaṃtuvaṃpesuññamusāvādā.Nava vidhamānāti ‘‘seyyassa seyyohamasmī’’timānādayo.Nava cīvarānīti ticīvaranti vā vassikasāṭikāti vātiādinā nayena vuttāni.Na vikappetabbānīti adhiṭṭhitakālato paṭṭhāya na vikappetabbāni.Nava adhammikāni dānānīti saṅghassa pariṇataṃ aññasaṅghassa vā cetiyassa vā puggalassa vā pariṇāmeti, cetiyassa pariṇataṃ aññacetiyassa vā saṅghassa vā puggalassa vā pariṇāmeti, puggalassa pariṇataṃ aññapuggalassa vā saṅghassa vā cetiyassa vā pariṇāmetīti evaṃ vuttāni.

329.Among the nines—nine grounds for animosity are the nine beginning with "He has done me harm."Nine ways of removing animosity are the nine beginning with "He has done me harm, but how could one obtain anything from that?"Nine eliminated objects are cessation, abstention, and desisting through the nine grounds for animosity; a dam against it.By nine ways, the Saṅgha is split—"By nine or more than nine, Upāli, there is both a faction (saṅgharāji) and a schism of the Saṅgha."Nine measures—should be understood by combining the previously stated measures with a section of nine.Nine rooted in craving—dependent on craving is seeking, dependent on seeking is gain, dependent on gain is deciding, dependent on deciding is desire and lust, dependent on desire and lust is attachment, dependent on attachment is possession, dependent on possession is stinginess, dependent on stinginess is protection, due to protection are the taking up of sticks and weapons, quarrels, disputes, arguments, accusations, slander, and lies.Nine conceits are conceits such as "I am better than him."Nine robes are those stated in the manner such as the triple robe or the rains-bathing cloth.Na vikappetabbānī—from the time of resolve, they should not be disjoined.Nine unrighteous donations—what is designated for the Saṅgha, one directs to another Saṅgha or to a shrine or to an individual; what is designated for a shrine, one directs to another shrine or to the Saṅgha or to an individual; what is designated for an individual, one directs to another individual or to the Saṅgha or to a shrine; these are stated thus.

Nava paṭiggahaparibhogāti etesaṃyeva dānānaṃ paṭiggahā ca paribhogā ca.Tīṇi dhammikāni dānānīti saṅghassa ninnaṃ saṅghasseva deti, cetiyassa ninnaṃ cetiyasseva, puggalassa ninnaṃ puggalasseva detīti imāni tīṇi. Paṭiggahapaṭibhogāpi tesaṃyeva paṭiggahā ca paribhogā ca.Nava adhammikā saññattiyoti adhammavādipuggalo, adhammavādisambahulā, adhammavādisaṅghoti evaṃ tīṇi tikāni samathakkhandhake niddiṭṭhāni.Dhammikā saññattiyopi dhammavādī puggalotiādinā nayena tattheva niddiṭṭhā.Adhammakamme dve navakāniovādavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpadaniddese pācittiyavasena vuttāni.Dhammakamme dve navakānitattheva dukkaṭavasena vuttāni. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

Nine acceptances and uses are the acceptances and uses of these same donations.Three righteous donations are these three: what is assigned to the Saṅgha, one gives to the Saṅgha; what is assigned to a shrine, one gives to the shrine; what is assigned to an individual, one gives to the individual. The acceptance and use are also the acceptance and use of these.Nine unrighteous formal acts (saññattiyo)—the individual who speaks against the Dhamma, many who speak against the Dhamma, and the Saṅgha that speaks against the Dhamma; these three triads are specified in the Samatha Khandhaka.Righteous formal acts (saññattiyo) are specified there in the manner of "the individual who speaks for the Dhamma."Two nines of unrighteous acts (adhammakamma) are stated in the first training rule discourse of the Ovadavagga, according to the Pācittiya.Two nines of righteous acts (dhammakamma) are stated there according to the Dukkaṭa. The rest is self-explanatory everywhere.

Navakavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Section of Nines is finished.

Dasakavāravaṇṇanā
Commentary on the Section of Tens

330.Dasakesu –dasa āghātavatthūnīti navakesu vuttāni nava ‘‘aṭṭhāne vā pana āghāto jāyatī’’ti iminā saddhiṃ dasa honti.Āghātapaṭivinayāpi tattha vuttā nava ‘‘aṭṭhāne vā pana āghāto jāyati, taṃ kutettha labbhāti āghātaṃ paṭivinetī’’ti iminā saddhiṃ dasa veditabbā.Dasa vinītavatthūnīti dasahi āghātavatthūhi viratisaṅkhātāni dasa.Dasavatthukā micchādiṭṭhīti ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādivasena veditabbā, ‘‘atthi dinna’’ntiādivasenasammādiṭṭhi,‘‘sassato loko’’tiādinā vasena panaantaggāhikā diṭṭhiveditabbā.Dasa micchattāti micchādiṭṭhiādayo micchāvimuttipariyosānā, viparītāsammattā.Salākaggāhāsamathakkhandhake niddiṭṭhā.

330.Among the tens—ten grounds for animosity—the nine stated in the nines, with this, "or animosity arises in an improper situation," are ten.Grounds for removing animosity—the nine stated there, with this, "or animosity arises in an improper situation, but how could one obtain anything from that?" should be understood as ten.Ten eliminated objects—are the ten counted as abstaining through the ten grounds for animosity.Ten-based wrong view—should be understood in the manner of "there is no giving." Right view is in the manner of "there is giving." Antaggāhikā diṭṭhi however, should be understood in the manner of "the world is eternal."Ten wrongnesses are wrong view and so on, ending in wrong liberation; the opposites are rightnesses.Ballot-taking is specified in the Samatha Khandhaka.

Dasahaṅgehi samannāgato bhikkhu ubbāhikāya sammannitabboti ‘‘sīlavā hotī’’tiādinā nayena samathakkhandhake vuttehi dasahi.Dasa ādīnavā rājantepurappavesanerājasikkhāpade niddiṭṭhā.Dasa dānavatthūnīti annaṃ pānaṃ vatthaṃ yānaṃ mālā gandhaṃ vilepanaṃ seyyāvasathaṃ padīpeyyaṃ.Dasa ratanānīti muttāmaṇiveḷuriyādīni.Dasa paṃsukūlānīti sosānikaṃ, pāpaṇikaṃ, undūrakkhāyitaṃ, upacikakkhāyitaṃ, aggidaḍḍhaṃ, gokhāyitaṃ, ajikakkhāyitaṃ, thūpacīvaraṃ, ābhisekiyaṃ, bhatapaṭiyābhatanti etesu upasampannena ussukkaṃ kātabbaṃ.Dasa cīvaradhāraṇāti ‘‘sabbanīlakāni cīvarāni dhārentī’’ti vuttavasena dasāti kurundiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘navasu kappiyacīvaresu udakasāṭikaṃ vā saṅkaccikaṃ vā pakkhipitvā dasā’’ti vuttaṃ.

A bhikkhu endowed with ten qualities should be appointed for expulsions—with the ten stated in the Samatha Khandhaka in the manner of "he is virtuous."Ten dangers in entering the royal harem are specified in the training rule on kings.Ten objects of giving are food, drink, cloth, vehicles, garlands, scents, unguents, bedding, lodging, and lamps.Ten jewels are pearls, gems, beryl, and so on.Ten rags from a dust heap—effort should be made in these by one who is ordained: those from a cemetery, a shop, gnawed by mice, gnawed by rats, burnt by fire, gnawed by cows, gnawed by goats, robe from a stupa, coronation robe, and one received as part of a meal.Ten robe-wearings—in the Kurundī it is stated as ten, in the manner stated as "they wear all-blue robes." But in the Mahā-aṭṭhakathā it is stated, "Having included a water-bathing cloth or a waist cloth among the nine allowable robes, there are ten."

Avandanīyapuggalāsenāsanakkhandhake niddiṭṭhā.Dasa akkosavatthūniomasavāde niddiṭṭhāni.Dasa ākārāpesuññasikkhāpade niddiṭṭhā.Dasa senāsanānīti mañco, pīṭhaṃ, bhisi, bimbohanaṃ, cimilikā, uttarattharaṇaṃ, taṭṭikā, cammakhaṇḍo, nisīdanaṃ, tiṇasanthāro, paṇṇasanthāroti.Dasa varāni yāciṃsūti visākhā aṭṭha, suddhodanamahārājā ekaṃ, jīvako ekaṃ.Yāguānisaṃsācaakappiyamaṃsānica bhesajjakkhandhake niddiṭṭhāni. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

Persons not to be venerated are specified in the Senāsana Khandhaka.Ten grounds for abuse are specified in the abusive speech.Ten ways are specified in the tale-bearing training rule.Ten lodgings are a couch, a chair, a mattress, a pillow, a bolster, an upper sheet, a mat, a hide, a sitting cloth, a grass mat, and a leaf mat.Ten boons they requested—Visākhā eight, King Suddhodana one, and Jīvaka one.Advantages of rice-gruel and unallowable meats are specified in the Bhesajja Khandhaka. The rest is self-explanatory everywhere.

Dasakavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Section of Tens is finished.

Ekādasakavāravaṇṇanā
Commentary on the Section of Elevens

331.Ekādasakesu –ekādasāti paṇḍakādayo ekādasa.Ekādasa pādukāti dasa ratanamayā, ekā kaṭṭhapādukā. Tiṇapādukamuñjapādukapabbajapādukādayo pana kaṭṭhapādukasaṅgahameva gacchanti.Ekādasa pattāti tambalohamayena vā dārumayena vā saddhiṃ dasa ratanamayā.Ekādasa cīvarānīti sabbanīlakādīni ekādasa.Yāvatatiyakāti ukkhittānuvattikā bhikkhunī, saṅghādisesā aṭṭha, ariṭṭho, caṇḍakāḷīti.Ekādasa antarāyikānāma ‘‘nasi animittā’’ti ādayo.Ekādasacīvarāni adhiṭṭhātabbānīti ticīvaraṃ, vassikasāṭikā, nisīdanaṃ, paccattharaṇaṃ, kaṇḍuppaṭicchādi, mukhapuñchanacoḷaṃ, parikkhāracoḷaṃ, udakasāṭikā, saṅkaccikāti.Na vikappetabbānīti etāneva adhiṭṭhitakālato paṭṭhāya na vikappetabbāni.Gaṇṭhikācavidhāca suttamayena saddhiṃ ekādasa honti, te sabbe khuddakakkhandhake niddiṭṭhā.Pathaviyopathavisikkhāpade niddiṭṭhā.Nissayapaṭipassaddhiyoupajjhāyamhā pañca, ācariyamhā cha; evaṃ ekādasa.Avandiyapuggalānaggena saddhiṃ ekādasa, te sabbe senāsanakkhandhake niddiṭṭhā.Ekādasa paramānipubbe vuttesu cuddasasu ekādasakavasena yojetvā veditabbāni.Ekādasa varānīti mahāpajāpatiyā yācitavarena saddhiṃ pubbe vuttāni dasa.Ekādasa sīmādosāti ‘‘atikhuddakaṃ sīmaṃ sammannantī’’tiādinā nayena kammavagge āgamissanti.

331.Among the elevens—eleven are the eleven, such as eunuchs.Eleven sandals—ten are made of jewels, one is a wooden sandal. Sandals made of grass, muṅja grass, palm leaves, and so on, however, are included within wooden sandals.Eleven bowls—ten are made of jewels along with one made of copper or wood.Eleven robes are eleven, such as all-blue.Up to the third—the bhikkhunī who is an instigator of suspension, the eight Saṅghādisesas, Ariṭṭha, and Caṇḍakāḷī.Eleven dangers are those beginning with "not without a cause."Eleven robes should be resolved—the triple robe, rains-bathing cloth, sitting cloth, patching cloth, cloth for covering the bowl, cloth for wiping the face, cloth for requisites, water-bathing cloth, and waist cloth.Na vikappetabbānī—these same should not be disjoined from the time of resolve.Seams and types along with thread are eleven; all these are specified in the Khuddaka Khandhaka.Grounds are specified in the ground training rule.Dependencies and cessations—five from the preceptor, six from the teacher; thus eleven.Persons not to be venerated are eleven with the naked ascetic; all these are specified in the Senāsana Khandhaka.Eleven measures—should be understood by combining the previously stated fourteen with a section of eleven.Eleven boons—the ten previously stated with the boon requested by Mahāpajāpatī.Eleven boundary faults—will come in the Kammavagga in the manner of "they designate a very small boundary."

Akkosakaparibhāsake puggale ekādasādīnavānāma ‘‘yo so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu akkosako paribhāsako ariyūpavādī, sabrahmacārīnaṃ aṭṭhānametaṃ anavakāso yaṃ so ekādasannaṃ byasanānaṃ aññataraṃ byasanaṃ na nigaccheyya. Katamesaṃ ekādasannaṃ? Anadhigataṃ nādhigacchati, adhigatā parihāyati, saddhammassa na vodāyanti, saddhammesu vā adhimāniko hoti, anabhirato vā brahmacariyaṃ carati, aññataraṃ vā saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjati, sikkhaṃ vā paccakkhāya hīnāyāvattati, gāḷhaṃ vā rogātaṅkaṃ phusati, ummādaṃ vā pāpuṇāti cittakkhepaṃ vā, sammūḷho kālaṃ karoti, kāyassa bhedā parammaraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapajjatī’’ti (a. ni. 11.6). Ettha casaddhammoti buddhavacanaṃ adhippetaṃ.

In a person who is abusive and reviling, there are eleven dangers—"Bhikkhus, a bhikkhu who is abusive and reviling, who speaks against the noble ones, it is impossible that he would not fall into one of eleven calamities. Which eleven? He does not attain what he has not attained, he declines from what he has attained, he does not progress in the true Dhamma, or he is arrogant about true dhammas, or he lives the holy life unhappily, or he commits some defiled offense, or he renounces the training and returns to the lower state, or he is touched by a serious disease, or he attains madness or mental derangement, or confused, he dies, or at the breaking up of the body, after death, he is reborn in the plane of misery, the bad destination, the lower realm, hell" (a. ni. 11.6). Here, saddhammo means the words of the Buddha are intended.

Āsevitāyā*ti ādito paṭṭhāya sevitāya.Bhāvitāyā*ti nipphāditāya vaḍḍhitāya

Āsevitāyā*—having been cultivated from the beginning. Bhāvitāyā*—having been produced and developed.

Bahulīkatāyāti punappunaṃ katāya.Yānīkatāyāti suyuttayānasadisāya katāya.Vatthukatāyāti yathā patiṭṭhā hoti; evaṃ katāya.Anuṭṭhitāyāti anu anu pavattitāya; niccādhiṭṭhitāyāti attho.Paricitāyāti samantato citāya; sabbadisāsu citāya ācitāya bhāvitāya abhivaḍḍhitāyāti attho.Susamāraddhāyāti suṭṭhu samāraddhāya; vasībhāvaṃ upanītāyāti attho.Na pāpakaṃ supinanti pāpakameva na passati, bhadrakaṃ pana vuḍḍhikāraṇabhūtaṃ passati.Devatā rakkhantīti ārakkhadevatā dhammikaṃ rakkhaṃ paccupaṭṭhāpenti.Tuvaṭaṃ cittaṃ samādhiyatīti khippaṃ cittaṃ samādhiyati.Uttari appaṭivijjhantoti mettājhānato uttariṃ arahattaṃ asacchikaronto sekho vā puthujjano vā hutvā kālaṃ karonto brahmalokūpago hoti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

Bahulīkatāyāti: by doing it repeatedly. Yānīkatāyāti: by doing it like a well-yoked vehicle. Vatthukatāyāti: by doing it as it should be established; that is, by doing it in a way that it becomes a foundation. Anuṭṭhitāyāti: by continuously maintaining it; the meaning is constantly being determined. Paricitāyāti: by accumulating it from all around; the meaning is accumulated, developed, and increased in all directions. Susamāraddhāyāti: by thoroughly undertaking it; the meaning is brought into a state of mastery. Na pāpakaṃ supinanti: does not see an evil dream; but sees an auspicious dream that is the cause of growth. Devatā rakkhantīti: guardian deities provide protection to the righteous. Tuvaṭaṃ cittaṃ samādhiyatīti: the mind quickly becomes concentrated. Uttari appaṭivijjhantoti: not realizing arahantship beyond the jhana of loving-kindness, one who makes time as a sekha or puthujjana goes to the Brahma world. The rest is clear everywhere.

Ekādasakavāravaṇṇanā pariyosānā

The explanation of the eleventh section is concluded.

Ekuttarikavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of Ekuttarika is finished.

Uposathādipucchāvissajjanā

Uposatha and Other Questions and Answers

332.‘‘Uposathakammassa ko ādī’’tiādīnaṃ pucchānaṃ vissajjanesāmaggī ādīti ‘‘uposathaṃ karissāmā’’ti sīmaṃ sodhetvā chandapārisuddhiṃ āharitvā sannipatitānaṃ kāyasāmaggī ādi.Kiriyā majjheti pubbakiccaṃ katvā pātimokkhaosāraṇakiriyā majjhe.Niṭṭhānaṃ pariyosānanti ‘‘tattha sabbeheva samaggehi sammodamānehi avivadamānehi sikkhitabba’’nti idaṃ pātimokkhaniṭṭhānaṃ pariyosānaṃ.Pavāraṇākammassa sāmaggī ādīti ‘‘pavāraṇaṃ karissāmā’’ti sīmaṃ sodhetvā chandapavāraṇaṃ āharitvā sannipatitānaṃ kāyasāmaggī ādi.Kiriyā majjheti pavāraṇāñatti ca pavāraṇākathā ca majjhe, saṅghanavakassa ‘‘passanto paṭikarissāmī’’ti vacanaṃ pariyosānaṃ. Tajjanīyakammādīsuvatthunāma yena vatthunā kammāraho hoti, taṃ vatthu.Puggaloti yena taṃ vatthu kataṃ, so puggalo.Kammavācā pariyosānanti ‘‘kataṃ saṅghena itthannāmassa bhikkhuno tajjanīyakammaṃ, khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṃ dhārayāmī’’ti evaṃ tassā tassā kammavācāya avasānavacanaṃ pariyosānaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti

332. In answering the questions beginning with ‘‘Uposathakammassa ko ādī’’ (What is the beginning of the Uposatha act?), sāmaggī ādīti: the harmony of those who have gathered after purifying the boundary, bringing the declaration of consent and purity, saying "we will do the Uposatha," is the beginning. Kiriyā majjheti: after doing the preliminary duties, the act of reciting the Pāṭimokkha is in the middle. Niṭṭhānaṃ pariyosānanti: "there all should train in harmony, with mutual appreciation, without dispute" this concluding statement of the Pāṭimokkha is the end. Pavāraṇākammassa sāmaggī ādīti: the harmony of those who have gathered after purifying the boundary, bringing the invitation to make pavāraṇa, saying "we will do pavāraṇa," is the beginning. Kiriyā majjheti: the announcement of pavāraṇa and the talk of pavāraṇa are in the middle; the statement of the newly appointed member of the Sangha, "I will correct it if I see it," is the end. In tajjanīyakamma, etc., vatthunāma: the thing because of which it is worthy of the act, that thing. Puggaloti: the person by whom that thing was done, that person. Kammavācā pariyosānanti: "the tajjanīya act has been done by the Sangha to the bhikkhu named so-and-so; it is pleasing to the Sangha, therefore it is silent; thus I hold it" thus, the final statement of each act of declaration is the end. The rest is clear everywhere.

Uposathādipucchāvissajjanāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the questions and answers about Uposatha etc., is concluded.

Atthavasapakaraṇāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Section on the Ten Advantages

334.Atthavasapakaraṇe –dasa atthavasetiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ taṃ paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanāyameva vuttaṃ.Yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu taṃ saṅghaphāsūtiādīsu uparimaṃ uparimaṃ padaṃ heṭṭhimassa heṭṭhimassa padassa attho.

334. In the section on the ten advantages – in dasa atthavasetiādīsu, what should be said has already been said in the explanation of the first pārājika. In Yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu taṃ saṅghaphāsūtiādīsu, the higher and higher words are the meaning of the lower and lower words.

Atthasataṃdhammasatantiādimhi pana yadetaṃ dasasu padesu ekekaṃ mūlaṃ katvā dasakkhattuṃ yojanāya padasataṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha pacchimassa pacchimassa padassa vasena atthasataṃ purimassa purimassa vasena dhammasataṃ veditabbaṃ. Atha vā ye dasa atthavase paṭicca tathāgatena sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ, ye pubbe paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanāyaṃ ‘‘tattha saṅghasuṭṭhutā nāma saṅghassa suṭṭhubhāvo ‘suṭṭhu devā’ti āgataṭṭhāne viya ‘suṭṭhu bhante’ti vacanasampaṭicchanabhāvo, yo ca tathāgatassa vacanaṃ sampaṭicchati, tassa taṃ dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya hoti, tasmā saṅghassa ‘suṭṭhu bhante’ti mama vacanasampaṭicchanatthaṃ paññapessāmi asampaṭicchane ādīnavaṃ sampaṭicchane ca ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā na balakkārena abhibhavitvāti etamatthaṃ āvikaronto āha – saṅghasuṭṭhutāyā’’ti evamādinā nayena vaṇṇitā, tesaṃ idha dasakkhattuṃ āgatattā atthasataṃ tadatthajotakānañca padānaṃ vasena dhammasataṃ veditabbaṃ. Idāni atthajotakānaṃ niruttīnaṃ vasena niruttisataṃ, dhammabhūtānaṃ niruttīnaṃ vasena niruttisatanti dve niruttisatāni, atthasate ñāṇasataṃ, dhammasate ñāṇasataṃ, dvīsu niruttisatesu dve ñāṇasatānīti cattāri ñāṇasatāni ca veditabbāni.

However, in Atthasataṃdhammasatantiādi, here, by taking each root in the ten places and combining them ten times, a hundred words are spoken. There, a hundred meanings should be understood in terms of the last word, and a hundred dhammas in terms of the first word. Or, because of the ten advantages which the Tathāgata considered when prescribing the training rules for the disciples, which were previously described in the explanation of the first pārājika, beginning with "there, 'saṅghasuṭṭhutā' means the Sangha being well, like the phrase 'suṭṭhu devā' which means 'suṭṭhu bhante' (venerable sir), it is the acceptance of the words, and whoever accepts the words of the Tathāgata, that is for their long-term benefit and happiness, therefore, for the Sangha's acceptance of my words 'suṭṭhu bhante,' I will prescribe, showing the disadvantages of non-acceptance and the advantages of acceptance, without overwhelming by force" thus, revealing this meaning, he said - 'saṅghasuṭṭhutāyā'" in this way, because they appear ten times here, there are a hundred meanings, and a hundred dhammas should be understood in terms of the words that illuminate those meanings. Now, there are two hundreds of expressions: a hundred expressions in terms of the meanings illuminating, and a hundred expressions in terms of the nature of the Dhamma. There are a hundred knowledges in a hundred meanings, a hundred knowledges in a hundred dhammas, and four hundreds of knowledges in two hundreds of expressions.

‘‘Atthasataṃ dhammasataṃ, dve niruttisatāni;

"A hundred meanings, a hundred dhammas,
Two hundreds of expressions;
Four hundreds of knowledges,
In the section on the ten advantages."

Iti hi yaṃ vuttaṃ, idametaṃ paṭicca vuttanti.

Thus, what was said, this was said with reference to that.

Iti samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya

Thus ends the Mahāvagga commentary in the Samantapāsādikā Vinaya commentary.

Mahāvaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Mahāvagga Commentary is completed.

Paṭhamagāthāsaṅgaṇikaṃ

Paṭhamagāthāsaṅgaṇikaṃ

Sattanagaresu paññattasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
Description of the Training Rules Prescribed in Seven Cities

335.Ekaṃsaṃcīvaraṃ katvāti ekasmiṃ aṃsakūṭe cīvaraṃ katvā; sādhukaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ katvāti attho.Paggaṇhitvāna añjalinti dasanakhasamodhānasamujjalaṃ añjaliṃ ukkhipitvā.Āsīsamānarūpo vāti paccāsīsamānarūpo viya.Kissa tvaṃ idha māgatoti kena kāraṇena kimatthaṃ patthayamāno tvaṃ idha āgato. Ko evamāha? Sammāsambuddho. Kaṃ evamāha? Āyasmantaṃ upāliṃ. Iti āyasmā upāli bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘dvīsu vinayesū’’ti imaṃ gāthaṃ pucchi. Athassa bhagavā ‘‘bhaddako te ummaṅgo’’tiādīni vatvā taṃ vissajjesi. Esa nayo sabbattha. Iti ime sabbapañhe buddhakāle upālitthero pucchi. Bhagavā byākāsi. Saṅgītikāle pana mahākassapatthero pucchi. Upālitthero byākāsi.

335. Ekaṃsaṃcīvaraṃ katvāti: having arranged the robe over one shoulder; the meaning is having properly arranged the upper robe. Paggaṇhitvāna añjalinti: having raised the añjali, which is radiant with the joining of the ten fingernails. Āsīsamānarūpo vāti: as if expecting a blessing. Kissa tvaṃ idha māgatoti: for what reason, desiring what, have you come here? Who said this? The Sammāsambuddho. To whom did he say this? To venerable Upāli. Thus, venerable Upāli approached the Blessed One and asked this verse, ‘‘dvīsu vinayesū’’ (in two vinayas). Then the Blessed One, saying to him "bhaddako te ummaṅgo" (Good is your question), answered it. This is the method everywhere. Thus, venerable Upāli asked all these questions during the Buddha's time. The Blessed One explained. However, during the time of the Sangiti, venerable Mahākassapa asked. Venerable Upāli explained.

bhaddako te ummaṅgoti bhaddakā te pañhā; pañhā hi avijjandhakārato ummujjitvā ṭhitattā ‘‘ummaṅgo’’ti vuccati.Tagghāti kāraṇatthe nipāto. Yasmā maṃ pucchasi, tasmā te ahamakkhissanti attho. Sampaṭicchanatthe vā, ‘‘tagghā’’ti hi iminā vacanaṃ sampaṭicchitvā akkhissanti āha. ‘‘Samādahitvā visibbenti, sāmisena, sasitthaka’’nti imāni tīṇiyeva sikkhāpadāni bhaggesu paññattāni.

bhaddako te ummaṅgoti: your questions are good; questions are called "ummaṅgo" because they emerge from the darkness of ignorance and stand. Tagghāti: a particle in the sense of a reason. Because you ask me, therefore I will explain to you, is the meaning. Or in the sense of acceptance, having accepted the words with this "tagghā," he says he will explain. "Samādahitvā visibbenti, sāmisena, sasitthaka" - these three training rules were prescribed in the land of the Bhaggas.

Catuvipattivaṇṇanā
Description of the Four Failures

336.Yaṃ taṃ pucchimhāti yaṃ tvaṃ apucchimhā.Akittayīti abhāsi.Noti amhākaṃ.Taṃ taṃ byākatanti yaṃ yaṃ puṭṭhaṃ, taṃ tadeva byākataṃ.Anaññathāti aññathā akatvā byākataṃ.

336. Yaṃ taṃ pucchimhāti: that which we asked you. Akittayīti: he spoke. Noti: to us. Taṃ taṃ byākatanti: that which was asked, that was explained. Anaññathāti: having explained without making it otherwise.

Ye duṭṭhullā sā sīlavipattīti ettha kiñcāpi sīlavipatti nāma pañhe natthi, atha kho duṭṭhullaṃ vissajjetukāmatāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Catūsu hi vipattīsu duṭṭhullaṃ ekāya vipattiyā saṅgahitaṃ, aduṭṭhullaṃ tīhi vipattīhi saṅgahitaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘ye duṭṭhullā sā sīlavipattī’’ti vatvā tameva vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘pārājikaṃ saṅghādiseso sīlavipattīti vuccatī’’ti āha.

Ye duṭṭhullā sā sīlavipattīti: although there is no mention of sīlavipatti (failure of morality) in the question, this is said because of the desire to explain the gross. Among the four failures, the gross is included in one failure, and the non-gross is included in three failures. Therefore, having said "ye duṭṭhullā sā sīlavipattī" (those that are gross are failure of morality), he says "pārājikaṃ saṅghādiseso sīlavipattīti vuccatī" (pārājika and saṅghādisesa are called failure of morality) to show that in detail.

yo cāyaṃ, akkosati hasādhippāyoti idaṃ dubbhāsitassa vatthudassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ.

yo cāyaṃ, akkosati hasādhippāyoti: this is said to show the basis for the wrong speech.

Abbhācikkhantīti ‘‘tathāhaṃ bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmī’’ti vadantā abbhācikkhanti.

Abbhācikkhantīti: they accuse, saying "I understand the Dhamma taught by the Blessed One thus."

Ayaṃ sā ājīvavipattisammatāti ayaṃ chahi sikkhāpadehi saṅgahitā ājīvavipatti nāma catutthā vipatti sammatāti ettāvatā ‘‘aduṭṭhulla’’nti idaṃ vissajjitaṃ hoti.

Ayaṃ sā ājīvavipattisammatāti: this ājīvavipatti (failure of livelihood), which is included in six training rules, is considered the fourth failure; thus, "aduṭṭhulla" (not gross) is explained by this much.

Idāni ‘‘ye ca yāvatatiyakā’’ti pañhaṃ vissajjetuṃ ‘‘ekādasā’’tiādimāha.

Now, to answer the question "ye ca yāvatatiyakā" (and those that extend to the third time), he says "ekādasā" (eleven) etc.

Chedanakādivaṇṇanā
Description of Chedanakādi

337.Yasmā pana ‘‘ye ca yāvatatiyakā’’ti ayaṃ pañho ‘‘ekādasa yāvatatiyakā’’ti evaṃ saṅkhāvasena vissajjito, tasmā saṅkhānusandhivaseneva‘‘kati chedanakānī’’tiādike aññe antarāpañhe pucchi. Tesaṃ vissajjanatthaṃ‘‘cha chedanakānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘ekaṃ bhedanakaṃ, ekaṃ uddālanakaṃ, sodasa jānanti paññattā’’ti idameva apubbaṃ. Sesaṃ mahāvagge vibhattameva. Yaṃ panetaṃ apubbaṃ tatthaekaṃ bhedanakanti sūcigharaṃ.Ekaṃ uddālanakanti tūlonaddhamañcapīṭhaṃ.Sodasāti soḷasa.Jānanti paññattāti ‘‘jāna’’nti evaṃ vatvā paññattā, te evaṃ veditabbā – ‘‘jānaṃ saṅghikaṃ lābhaṃ pariṇataṃ attano pariṇāmeyya, jānaṃ pubbupagataṃ bhikkhuṃ anupakhajja nisajjaṃ kappeyya, jānaṃ sappāṇakaṃ udakaṃ tiṇaṃ vā mattikaṃ vā siñceyya vā siñcāpeyya vā, jānaṃ bhikkhuniparipācitaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ bhuñjeyya, jānaṃ āsādanāpekkho bhuttasmiṃ pācittiyaṃ, jānaṃ sappāṇakaṃ udakaṃ paribhuñjeyya, jānaṃ yathādhammaṃ nihatādhikaraṇaṃ, jānaṃ duṭṭhullaṃ āpattiṃ paṭicchādeyya, jānaṃ ūnavīsativassaṃ puggalaṃ upasampādeyya, jānaṃ theyyasatthena saddhiṃ, jānaṃ tathāvādinā bhikkhunā akatānudhammena, jānaṃ tathānāsitaṃ samaṇuddesaṃ, jānaṃ saṅghikaṃ lābhaṃ pariṇataṃ puggalassa pariṇāmeyya, jānaṃ pārājikaṃ dhammaṃ ajjhāpannaṃ bhikkhuniṃ neva attanā paṭicodeyya, jānaṃ coriṃ vajjhaṃ viditaṃ anapaloketvā, jānaṃ sabhikkhukaṃ ārāmaṃ anāpucchā paviseyyā’’ti.

337. Because this question, "ye ca yāvatatiyakā" (and those that extend to the third time), is answered in terms of number as "ekādasa yāvatatiyakā" (eleven extending to the third time), therefore, only following the connection of numbers, he asked other intermediate questions such as ‘‘kati chedanakānī’’(how many are cutting?) For the sake of answering them ‘‘cha chedanakānī’’(six are cutting) etc. is said. There, "ekaṃ bhedanakaṃ, ekaṃ uddālanakaṃ, sodasa jānanti paññattā" (one is splitting, one is removing, sixteen knowing are prescribed) this alone is new. The rest is already explained in the Mahāvagga. There, this which is new, ekaṃ bhedanakanti: a needle case. ekaṃ uddālanakanti: a bed or seat stuffed with cotton. Sodasāti: sixteen. Jānanti paññattāti: prescribed saying "knowing," these should be understood thus - "knowing, one transforms the Sangha's gain into one's own, knowing, one makes a pre-existing bhikkhu sit without invitation, knowing, one pours or has poured water with living beings, grass, or clay, knowing, one eats almsfood prepared for a bhikkhu, knowing, there is a pācittiya after eating with the intention of offending, knowing, one uses water with living beings, knowing, one stirs up a case decided according to the Dhamma, knowing, one conceals a gross offense, knowing, one ordains a person under twenty years of age, knowing, with a thief, knowing, with a bhikkhu who speaks truthfully but does not follow the Dhamma, knowing, a novice who has left in this way, knowing, one transforms the Sangha's gain into a personal gain, knowing, a bhikkhuni who has fallen into a pārājika offense, one does not admonish oneself, knowing, a thief, knowing, one enters an ārāma with bhikkhus without asking permission."

Asādhāraṇādivaṇṇanā
Description of Asādhāraṇādi

338.Idāni ‘‘sādhāraṇaṃ asādhāraṇa’’nti imaṃ purimapañhaṃ vissajjento‘‘vīsaṃ dve satānī’’tiādimāha. Tattha bhikkhunīhi asādhāraṇesucha saṅghādisesāti vissaṭṭhi, kāyasaṃsaggo, duṭṭhullaṃ, attakāma, kuṭi, vihāroti.Dve aniyatehi aṭṭhāti dvīhi aniyatehi saddhiṃ aṭṭha ime.

338. Now, answering the previous question ‘‘sādhāraṇaṃ asādhāraṇa’’nti (common and uncommon), he says ‘‘vīsaṃ dve satānī’’tiādi (two hundred and twenty) etc. There, among the uncommon ones for bhikkhunis, cha saṅghādisesāti: six are saṅghādisesa: release, physical contact, grossness, self-desire, hut, and dwelling. Dve aniyatehi aṭṭhāti: with two aniyata, these are eight.

Nissaggiyāni dvādasāti –

Nissaggiyāni dvādasāti –

Dhovanañca paṭiggaho, koseyyasuddhadvebhāgā;

Dhovanañca paṭiggaho, koseyyasuddhadvebhāgā;
Chabbassāni nisīdanaṃ, dve lomā paṭhamo patto;
Vassikā āraññakena cāti – these are twelve.

Dvevīsati khuddakāti –

Dvevīsati khuddakāti –

Sakalo bhikkhunīvaggo, paramparañca bhojanaṃ;

Sakalo bhikkhunīvaggo, paramparañca bhojanaṃ;
Anatirittaṃ abhihaṭaṃ, paṇītañca acelakaṃ;
Ūnaṃ duṭṭhullachādanaṃ.

Mātugāmena saddhiñca, yā ca anikkhantarājake;

Mātugāmena saddhiñca, yā ca anikkhantarājake;
Santaṃ bhikkhuṃ anāpucchā, vikāle gāmappavesanā.

Nisīdane ca yā sikkhā, vassikā yā ca sāṭikā;

Nisīdane ca yā sikkhā, vassikā yā ca sāṭikā;
Dvāvīsati imā sikkhā, khuddakesu pakāsitāti.

saṅghamhā dasa nissareti ‘‘saṅghamhā nissārīyatī’’ti evaṃ vibhaṅge vuttā, mātikāyaṃ pana ‘‘nissāraṇīyaṃ saṅghādisesa’’nti evaṃ āgatā dasa.Nissaggiyāni dvādasāti bhikkhunivibhaṅge vibhattāni nissaggiyāneva. Khuddakāpi tattha vibhattakhuddakā eva. Tathā cattāro pāṭidesanīyā, iti satañceva tiṃsañca sikkhā vibhaṅge bhikkhunīnaṃ bhikkhūhi asādhāraṇā. Sesaṃ imasmiṃ sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇavissajjane uttānameva.

saṅghamhā dasa nissareti: ten that are expelled from the Sangha are said in the Vibhaṅga, but in the Mātikā, ten that "should be expelled, are saṅghādisesa" are mentioned. Nissaggiyāni dvādasāti: the nissaggiya are those that are explained in the Bhikkhunivibhaṅga. The khuddaka are the khuddaka that are explained there. Likewise, there are four pāṭidesanīya, thus a hundred and thirty training rules are uncommon to bhikkhunis compared to bhikkhus in the Vibhaṅga. The rest in this explanation of common and uncommon is clear.

aṭṭheva pārājikātiādimāha. Tatthadurāsadāti iminā tesaṃ sappaṭibhayataṃ dasseti. Kaṇhasappādayo viya hi ete durāsadā durūpagamanā durāsajjanā, āpajjiyamānā mūlacchedāya saṃvattanti.Tālavatthusamūpamāti sabbaṃ tālaṃ uddharitvā tālassa vatthumattakaraṇena samūpamā. Yathā vatthumattakato tālo na puna pākatiko hoti, evaṃ na puna pākatikā honti.

aṭṭheva pārājikātiādi (eight are pārājika) is said. There, durāsadāti: with this, he shows their danger. For these, like black snakes, are difficult to approach, difficult to come near, difficult to touch, and when committed, lead to the cutting of the root. Tālavatthusamūpamāti: it is like cutting off the entire palm tree, leaving only the stump. Just as a palm tree cut down to the stump does not grow again, so they do not return to their original state.

paṇḍupalāsotiādimāha.Aviruḷhī bhavanti teti yathā ete paṇḍupalāsādayo punaharitādibhāvena aviruḷhidhammā honti; evaṃ pārājikāpi puna pakatisīlābhāvena aviruḷhidhammā hontīti attho. Ettāvatā ‘‘vipattiyo ca yehi samathehi sammantī’’ti ettha imā tāva aṭṭha pārājikavipattiyo kehici samathehi na sammantīti evaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Yā pana vipattiyo sammanti, tā dassetuṃtevīsati saṅghādisesātiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthatīhi samathehīti sabbasaṅgāhikavacanametaṃ. Saṅghādisesā hi dvīhi samathehi sammanti, na tiṇavatthārakena. Sesā tīhipi sammanti.

paṇḍupalāsotiādi (a yellow leaf) etc., is said. Aviruḷhī bhavanti teti: just as these yellow leaves etc., are of a nature that does not grow back to a green state, so too the pārājika are of a nature that does not grow back to the original state of virtue, is the meaning. Thus, by this much, in "vipattiyo ca yehi samathehi sammantī" (and the failures that are settled by the means of settling), it is shown that these eight pārājika failures are not settled by any means of settling. To show those failures that are settled, tevīsati saṅghādisesātiādi (twenty-three saṅghādisesa) is said. There, tīhi samathehīti: this is a comprehensive statement. For the saṅghādisesa are settled by two means of settling, not by tiṇavatthāraka. The rest are settled by all three.

Dve uposathā dve pavāraṇāti idaṃ bhikkhūnañca bhikkhunīnañca vasena vuttaṃ. Vibhattimattadassaneneva cetaṃ vuttaṃ, na samathehi vūpasamanavasena. Bhikkhuuposatho, bhikkhuniuposatho, bhikkhupavāraṇā, bhikkhunipavāraṇāti imāpi hi catasso vibhattiyo; vibhajanānīti attho.Cattāri kammānīti adhammenavaggādīni uposathakammāni.Pañceva uddesā caturo bhavanti anaññathāti bhikkhūnaṃ pañca uddesā bhikkhunīnaṃ caturo bhavanti, aññathā na bhavanti; imā aparāpi vibhattiyo.Āpattikkhandhā ca bhavanti satta, adhikaraṇāni cattārīti imā pana vibhattiyo samathehi sammanti, tasmāsattahi samathehītiādimāha. Atha vā ‘‘dve uposathā dve pavāraṇā cattāri kammāni pañceva uddesā caturo bhavanti, anaññathā’’ti imāpi catasso vibhattiyo nissāya ‘‘nassantete vinassantete’’tiādinā nayena yā āpattiyo āpajjanti, tā yasmā vuttappakāreheva samathehi sammanti, tasmā taṃmūlakānaṃ āpattīnaṃ samathadassanatthampi tā vibhattiyo vuttāti veditabbā.Kiccaṃ ekenāti kiccādhikaraṇaṃ ekena samathena sammati.

Dve uposathā dve pavāraṇā means this was said with reference to both monks and nuns. This was said merely to show the distinction in vibhatti (grammatical case), not in terms of calming through samatha (methods of settling disputes). Because there are indeed these four vibhatti as bhikkhu uposatho, bhikkhuni uposatho, bhikkhu pavāraṇā, bhikkhuni pavāraṇā, meaning divisions. Cattāri kammānī means Uposatha-kamma such as adhammena vagga. Pañceva uddesā caturo bhavanti anaññathā means bhikkhus have five uddesas, bhikkhunis have four; it cannot be otherwise. These are other distinctions (vibhatti). Āpattikkhandhā ca bhavanti satta, adhikaraṇāni cattārī means these distinctions accord with the samatha. Therefore it says sattahi samathehī etc. Alternatively, it should be understood that these distinctions are mentioned to show the calming of offenses originating from those distinctions through the samatha, since the offenses committed based on these four distinctions - "dve uposathā dve pavāraṇā cattāri kammāni pañceva uddesā caturo bhavanti, anaññathā" - in ways like "nassantete vinassantete," are settled by the previously mentioned samatha. Kiccaṃ ekenā means the kiccādhikaraṇa is settled by one samatha.

Pārājikādiāpattivaṇṇanā
Description of Pārājika etc. Offenses

339.Evaṃ pucchānukkamena sabbapañhe vissajjetvā idāni ‘‘āpattikkhandhā ca bhavanti sattā’’ti ettha saṅgahitaāpattikkhandhānaṃ paccekaṃ nibbacanamattaṃ dassentopārājikantiādimāha. Tatthapārājikanti gāthāya ayamattho – yadidaṃ puggalāpattisikkhāpadapārājikesuāpattipārājikaṃnāma vuttaṃ, taṃ āpajjanto puggalo yasmā parājito parājayamāpanno saddhammā cuto paraddho bhaṭṭho niraṅkato ca hoti, anihate tasmiṃ puggale puna uposathappavāraṇādibhedo saṃvāso natthi.Tenetaṃ iti vuccatīti tena kāraṇena etaṃ āpattipārājikanti vuccati. Ayañhettha saṅkhepattho – yasmā parājito hoti tena, tasmā etaṃ pārājikanti vuccati.

339. Having thus explained all questions in sequence, now, showing the meaning of distributing each of the āpattikkhandha contained in “āpattikkhandhā ca bhavanti sattā,” he says pārājika etc. Herein, pārājika has this meaning in the verse: that which is called āpattipārājikaṃ among the pārājika that are personal offenses and training rules. Because the person incurring it is defeated (parājito), has met defeat, has fallen from the true Dhamma, is ruined (paraddho), fallen (bhaṭṭho), and without support (niraṅkato), there is no association with that person again in terms of Uposatha, Pavāraṇā, etc. Tenetaṃ iti vuccatī means it is called āpattipārājika for that reason. This is the condensed meaning here: Because one is defeated (parājito), therefore it is called pārājika.

saṅghova deti parivāsantiādi vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha attho – imaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjitvā vuṭṭhātukāmassa yaṃ taṃ āpattivuṭṭhānaṃ tassa ādimhi ceva parivāsadānatthāya ādito sese majjhe mānattadānatthāya mūlāyapaṭikassanena vā saha mānattadānatthāya, avasāne abbhānatthāya ca saṅgho icchitabbo, na hettha ekampi kammaṃ vinā saṅghena sakkā kātunti saṅgho, ādimhi ceva sese ca icchitabbo assātisaṅghādiseso.

saṅghova deti parivāsantiādi is said. The meaning here is: for one who has committed this offense and desires to be restored, at the beginning of that restoration from the offense, for the purpose of giving parivāsa, from the beginning, in the middle for the purpose of giving mānatta, or for the purpose of giving mānatta together with mūlāyapaṭikassana, and at the end for the purpose of absolution, the Saṅgha is required. Because not even one of these acts can be done without the Saṅgha, the Saṅgha is required at the beginning and at the end. Thus, saṅghādiseso.

aniyato na niyatoti yasmā na niyato, tasmā aniyato ayamāpattikkhandhoti attho. Kiṃ kāraṇā na niyatoti?Anekaṃsikataṃpadaṃ,yasmā idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ anekaṃsena katanti attho. Kathaṃ anekaṃsena?Tiṇṇamaññataraṃ ṭhānaṃ,tiṇṇaṃ dhammānaṃ aññatarena kāretabboti hi tattha vuttaṃ, tasmā ‘‘aniyato’’ti pavuccati, so āpattikkhandho aniyatoti vuccati. Yathā ca tiṇṇaṃ aññataraṃ ṭhānaṃ, evaṃ dvinnaṃ dhammānaṃ aññataraṃ ṭhānaṃ yattha vuttaṃ, sopi aniyato eva.

aniyato na niyatoti Because it is not fixed (niyato), therefore it is aniyato (unfixed), this āpattikkhandha. What is the reason it is not fixed? Anekaṃsikataṃ padaṃ, because this training rule (sikkhāpada) is made with multiple aspects (anekaṃsena). How with multiple aspects? Tiṇṇamaññataraṃ ṭhānaṃ, because it is said there that it should be done by any one of three things, therefore it is called "aniyato," that āpattikkhandha is called aniyato. And just as any one of three things, so too where any one of two things is mentioned, that too is aniyato.

accayo tena samo natthīti desanāgāminīsu accayesu tena samo thūlo accayo natthi, tenetaṃ iti vuccati; thūlattā accayassa etaṃthullaccayanti vuccatīti attho.

accayo tena samo natthīti among offenses leading to confession (desanāgāminīsu), there is no offense as gross (thūlo) as that. It is called this for that reason; because of the grossness of the offense (accayassa), this is called thullaccaya.

nissajjitvāna deseti tenetanti nissajjitvā desetabbatonissaggiyanti vuccatīti attho.

nissajjitvāna deseti tenetanti Because it should be confessed after forfeiting (nissajjitvā desetabbato), it is called nissaggiya.

pāteti kusalaṃ dhammanti sañcicca āpajjantassa kusaladhammasaṅkhātaṃ kusalacittaṃ pāteti, tasmā pāteti cittantipācittiyaṃ. Yaṃ pana cittaṃ pāteti, taṃ yasmā ariyamaggaṃ aparajjhati, cittasammohakāraṇañca hoti, tasmā ‘‘ariyamaggaṃ aparajjhati, cittasammohanaṭṭhāna’’nti ca vuttaṃ.

pāteti kusalaṃ dhammanti It destroys the wholesome mind (kusalacitta), known as kusala dhamma, of one intentionally committing it; therefore, because it destroys the mind (cittanti pāteti), it is pācittiyaṃ. Moreover, because the mind it destroys offends the Noble Path (ariyamaggaṃ aparajjhati) and is a cause of mental confusion (cittasammohakāraṇañca), it is said that it "offends the Noble Path, is a place of mental confusion."

bhikkhu aññātako santotiādi vuttaṃ. Paṭidesetabbato pana sā āpattipāṭidesanīyāti vuccati.

bhikkhu aññātako santotiādi is said. But because that offense should be confessed (paṭidesetabbato), it is called pāṭidesanīyā.

aparaddhaṃ viraddhañca khalitanti sabbametaṃ ‘‘yañca dukkaṭa’’nti ettha vuttassa dukkaṭassa pariyāyavacanaṃ. Yañhi duṭṭhu kataṃ virūpaṃ vā kataṃ, taṃdukkaṭaṃ. Taṃ panetaṃ yathā satthārā vuttaṃ; evaṃ akatattāaparaddhaṃ,kusalaṃ virajjhitvā pavattattāviraddhaṃ,ariyavattapaṭipadaṃ anāruḷhattākhalitaṃ. Yaṃmanusso kareti idaṃ panassa opammanidassanaṃ. Tassattho – yathā hi yaṃ loke manusso āvi vā yadi vā raho pāpaṃ karoti, taṃ dukkaṭanti pavedenti; evamidampi buddhappaṭikuṭṭhena lāmakabhāvena pāpaṃ, tasmā dukkaṭanti veditabbaṃ.

aparaddhaṃ viraddhañca khalitanti All this is a synonymous expression for the dukkaṭa said in "yañca dukkaṭa". Because that which is badly done or wrongly done is dukkaṭaṃ. However, because it is not done according to what the Teacher said, it is aparaddhaṃ, because it occurs by abstaining from what is wholesome (kusalaṃ virajjhitvā pavattattā) it is viraddhaṃ, because one has not ascended the conduct of the Noble Vatta (ariyavattapaṭipadaṃ anāruḷhattā), it is khalitaṃ. Yaṃ manusso kareti This is an illustration by way of simile. Its meaning is: Just as whatever evil a person does openly or in secret in the world is declared to be dukkaṭa; so too this should be understood as dukkaṭa, because it is evil due to being condemned by the Buddha and being base (lāmakabhāvena).

dubbhāsitaṃ durābhaṭṭhanti duṭṭhu ābhaṭṭhaṃ bhāsitaṃ lapitantidurābhaṭṭhaṃ. Yaṃ durābhaṭṭhaṃ, taṃdubbhāsitanti attho. Kiñca bhiyyo?Saṃkiliṭṭhañca yaṃ padaṃ,saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ yasmā taṃ padaṃ hotīti attho. Tathāyañca viññū garahanti,yasmā ca naṃ viññū garahantīti attho.Tenetaṃ iti vuccatīti tena saṃkiliṭṭhabhāvena ca viññugarahanenāpi ca etaṃ iti vuccati; ‘‘dubbhāsita’’nti evaṃ vuccatīti attho.

dubbhāsitaṃ durābhaṭṭhanti durābhaṭṭhaṃ means speech that is badly spoken (duṭṭhu ābhaṭṭhaṃ bhāsitaṃ lapitaṃ). That which is durābhaṭṭhaṃ is dubbhāsitaṃ. Moreover, saṃkiliṭṭhañca yaṃ padaṃ, because that expression (padaṃ) is defiled (saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ). Similarly, yañca viññū garahanti, because the wise censure it. Tenetaṃ iti vuccatīti it is called this because of being defiled and because of the wise censuring it; it is called "dubbhāsita".

sekhiyanti ayamettha saṅkhepattho. Idaṃ ‘‘garukalahukañcāpī’’tiādipañhehi asaṅgahitassa ‘‘handa vākyaṃ suṇoma te’’ti iminā pana āyācanavacanena saṅgahitassa atthassa dīpanatthaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.

sekhiyanti This is the condensed meaning here. This should be understood as said for the purpose of illuminating the meaning of that which is contained in the request "handa vākyaṃ suṇoma te," but not contained in the five questions beginning with "garukalahukañcāpī".

channamativassatīti gehaṃ tāva tiṇādīhi acchannaṃ ativassati. Idaṃ pana āpattisaṅkhātaṃ gehaṃ channaṃ ativassati; mūlāpattiñhi chādento aññaṃ navaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjati.Vivaṭaṃ nātivassatīti gehaṃ tāva avivaṭaṃ succhannaṃ nātivassati. Idaṃ pana āpattisaṅkhātaṃ gehaṃ vivaṭaṃ nātivassati; mūlāpattiñhi vivaranto desanāgāminiṃ desetvā vuṭṭhānagāminito vuṭṭhahitvā suddhante patiṭṭhāti. Āyatiṃ saṃvaranto aññaṃ āpattiṃ nāpajjati.Tasmā channaṃ vivarethāti tena kāraṇena desanāgāminiṃ desento vuṭṭhānagāminito ca vuṭṭhahanto channaṃ vivaretha.Evaṃ taṃ nātivassatīti evañcetaṃ vivaṭaṃ nātivassatīti attho.

channamativassatīti A house covered with grass etc. gets excessively rained on. But this house consisting of offenses is excessively rained on when covered; because while covering up the original offense, one incurs another new offense. Vivaṭaṃ nātivassatīti A house that is not uncovered, well covered, does not get excessively rained on. But this house consisting of offenses does not get excessively rained on when uncovered; because by uncovering the original offense, confessing an offense leading to confession, and rising from an offense leading to rising, one is established in purity. By restraining oneself in the future, one does not incur another offense. Tasmā channaṃ vivarethāti Therefore, while confessing an offense leading to confession and rising from an offense leading to rising, uncover the covered. Evaṃ taṃ nātivassatīti Thus, this uncovered, does not get excessively rained on.

Gati migānaṃ pavananti ajjhokāse byagghādīhi paripātiyamānānaṃ migānaṃ pavanaṃ rukkhādigahanaṃ araññaṃ gati paṭisaraṇaṃ hoti, taṃ patvā te assāsanti. Eteneva nayenaākāso pakkhīnaṃ gati. Avassaṃ upagamanaṭṭhena panavibhavo gati dhammānaṃ,sabbesampi saṅkhatadhammānaṃ vināsova tesaṃ gati. Na hi te vināsaṃ agacchantā ṭhātuṃ sakkonti. Sucirampi ṭhatvā pananibbānaṃ arahato gati,khīṇāsavassa arahato anupādisesanibbānadhātu ekaṃsena gatīti attho.

Gati migānaṃ pavananti For deer being harassed by tigers etc. in the open, the forest, the thicket of trees etc., is a refuge, a place of return. Having reached that, they find relief. In this same way, ākāso pakkhīnaṃ gati. However, by way of necessarily approaching, vibhavo gati dhammānaṃ, the destruction itself is the destination of all conditioned phenomena (saṅkhatadhammānaṃ). Because they cannot remain without going to destruction. However, even after remaining for a long time, nibbānaṃ arahato gati, the anupādisesanibbānadhātu is certainly the destination of the arahant whose taints are destroyed.

Paṭhamagāthāsaṅgaṇikavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the first collection of verses is finished.

Adhikaraṇabhedaṃ

Ukkoṭanabhedādivaṇṇanā
Description of Varieties of Condemnation (Ukkoṭanabhedādivaṇṇanā)

340.Adhikaraṇabhedeime dasa ukkoṭāti adhikaraṇānaṃ ukkoṭetvā puna adhikaraṇaukkoṭena samathānaṃ ukkoṭaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘vivādādhikaraṇaṃ ukkoṭento kati samathe ukkoṭetī’’tiādimāha. Tatthavivādādhikaraṇaṃ ukkoṭento dve samathe ukkoṭetīti sammukhāvinayañca yebhuyyasikañca ime dve ukkoṭeti, paṭisedheti; paṭikkosatīti attho.Anuvādādhikaraṇaṃ ukkoṭento cattāroti sammukhāvinayaṃ, sativinayaṃ, amūḷhavinayaṃ, tassapāpiyasikanti ime cattāro samathe ukkoṭeti.Āpattādhikaraṇaṃ ukkoṭento tayoti sammukhāvinayaṃ, paṭiññātakaraṇaṃ, tiṇavatthārakanti ime tayo samathe ukkoṭeti.Kiccādhikaraṇaṃ ukkoṭento ekanti sammukhāvinayaṃ imaṃ ekaṃ samathaṃ ukkoṭeti.

340. In the section on varieties of legal issues, ime dasa ukkoṭāti (these are the ten condemnations) to show the condemnations by condemning the legal issues and then condemning the condemnations by samatha, he says “When condemning a vivādādhikaraṇa, how many samatha does he condemn?” etc. Therein, vivādādhikaraṇaṃ ukkoṭento dve samathe ukkoṭetīti he condemns these two: sammukhāvinaya and yebhuyyasika; he prohibits (paṭisedheti); he rejects (paṭikkosatīti). Anuvādādhikaraṇaṃ ukkoṭento cattāroti he condemns these four samatha: sammukhāvinayaṃ, sativinayaṃ, amūḷhavinayaṃ, tassapāpiyasikaṃ. Āpattādhikaraṇaṃ ukkoṭento tayoti he condemns these three samatha: sammukhāvinayaṃ, paṭiññātakaraṇaṃ, tiṇavatthārakaṃ. Kiccādhikaraṇaṃ ukkoṭento ekanti he condemns this one samatha: sammukhāvinayaṃ.

341.Kati ukkoṭātiādipucchānaṃ vissajjane pana dvādasasu ukkoṭesuakataṃ kammantiādayo tāva tayo ukkoṭā visesato dutiye anuvādādhikaraṇe labbhanti.Anihataṃ kammantiādayo tayo paṭhame vivādādhikaraṇe labbhanti.Avinicchitantiādayo tayo tatiye āpattādhikaraṇe labbhanti.Avūpasantantiādayo tayo catutthe kiccādhikaraṇe labbhanti; apica dvādasāpi ca ekekasmiṃ adhikaraṇe labbhantiyeva.

341. In the answers to the questions beginning with Kati ukkoṭāti, among the twelve condemnations, the three condemnations beginning with akataṃ kammanti are especially found in the second, anuvādādhikaraṇa. The three beginning with Anihataṃ kammanti are found in the first, vivādādhikaraṇa. The three beginning with Avinicchitanti are found in the third, āpattādhikaraṇa. The three beginning with Avūpasantanti are found in the fourth, kiccādhikaraṇa. Moreover, all twelve are found in each legal issue (adhikaraṇa).

Tatthajātakaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ ukkoṭetīti yasmiṃ vihāre ‘‘mayhaṃ iminā patto gahito, cīvaraṃ gahita’’ntiādinā nayena pattacīvarādīnaṃ atthāya adhikaraṇaṃ uppannaṃ hoti, tasmiṃyeva ca naṃ vihāre āvāsikā sannipatitvā ‘‘alaṃ āvuso’’ti attapaccatthike saññāpetvā pāḷimuttakavinicchayeneva vūpasamenti, idaṃ tatthajātakaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ nāma. Yenāpi vinicchayena samitaṃ, sopi eko samathoyeva. Imaṃ ukkoṭentassāpi pācittiyaṃ.

Tatthajātakaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ ukkoṭetīti In whatever monastery a legal issue has arisen for the sake of bowls, robes, etc., in the manner of "he took my bowl, he took my robe," and in that same monastery the residents (āvāsikā) having gathered, after making known their intentions (attapaccatthike saññāpetvā) with the decision outside the Pāḷi (pāḷimuttakavinicchayeneva) settle it, this is called a legal issue "born there" (tatthajātakaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ). That decision (vinicchayena) by which it is settled is itself one samatha. He who condemns this also commits a pācittiya.

Tatthajātakaṃ vūpasantanti sace pana taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ nevāsikā vūpasametuṃ na sakkonti, athañño vinayadharo āgantvā ‘‘kiṃ āvuso imasmiṃ vihāre uposatho vā pavāraṇā vā ṭhitā’’ti pucchati, tehi ca tasmiṃ kāraṇe kathite taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ khandhakato ca parivārato ca suttena vinicchinitvā vūpasameti, idaṃ tatthajātakaṃ vūpasantaṃ nāma adhikaraṇaṃ. Etaṃ ukkoṭentassāpi pācittiyameva.

Tatthajātakaṃ vūpasantanti But if the residents are unable to settle that legal issue, then another vinayadhara comes and asks, "Friends, is the Uposatha or Pavāraṇā established in this monastery?" And when they have told him the reason, having decided that legal issue from the Khandhaka, the Parivāra, and the Sutta, he settles it, this is called a legal issue "settled there" (tatthajātakaṃ vūpasantaṃ nāma adhikaraṇaṃ). He who condemns this also commits a pācittiya.

Antarāmaggeti te attapaccatthikā ‘‘na mayaṃ etassa vinicchaye tiṭṭhāma, nāyaṃ vinaye kusalo, asukasmiṃ nāma gāme vinayadharā therā vasanti, tattha gantvā vinicchinissāmā’’ti gacchantā antarāmaggeyeva kāraṇaṃ sallakkhetvā aññamaññaṃ vā saññāpenti, aññe vā te bhikkhū nijjhāpenti, idampi vūpasantameva hoti. Evaṃ vūpasantaṃ antarāmagge adhikaraṇaṃ ukkoṭeti yo, tassāpi pācittiyameva.

Antarāmaggeti Those intending to accuse (attapaccatthikā), thinking, "We will not abide by this decision, he is not skilled in the Vinaya; there are Vinayadhara elders living in such and such a village, we will go there and have it decided," while going, reflecting on the reason on the way, either reconcile with each other or other monks make them understand, this too is settled. He who condemns a legal issue thus settled on the way (antarāmagge), also commits a pācittiya.

Antarāmagge vūpasantanti na heva kho pana aññamaññaṃ saññattiyā vā sabhāgabhikkhunijjhāpanena vā vūpasantaṃ hoti; apica kho paṭipathaṃ āgacchanto eko vinayadharo disvā ‘‘kattha āvuso gacchathā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘asukaṃ nāma gāmaṃ, iminā nāma kāraṇenā’’ti vutte ‘‘alaṃ, āvuso, kiṃ tattha gatenā’’ti tattheva dhammena vinayena taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasameti, idaṃ antarāmagge vūpasantaṃ nāma. Etaṃ ukkoṭentassāpi pācittiyameva.

Antarāmagge vūpasantanti But it is not settled by reconciliation with each other or by other like-minded monks making them understand; but rather, a Vinayadhara coming on the road sees them and asks, "Friends, where are you going?" And when they say, "To such and such a village, for such and such a reason," he says, "Enough, friends, what is the point of going there?" and then and there, by Dhamma and Vinaya, he settles that legal issue. This is called a legal issue "settled on the way" (antarāmagge vūpasantaṃ nāma). He who condemns this also commits a pācittiya.

Tattha gatanti sace pana ‘‘alaṃ, āvuso, kiṃ tattha gatenā’’ti vuccamānāpi ‘‘mayaṃ tattheva gantvā vinicchayaṃ pāpessāmā’’ti vinayadharassa vacanaṃ anādiyitvā gacchantiyeva, gantvā sabhāgānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ etamatthaṃ ārocenti. Sabhāgā bhikkhū ‘‘alaṃ, āvuso, saṅghasannipātaṃ nāma garuka’’nti tattheva nisīdāpetvā vinicchinitvā saññāpenti, idampi vūpasantameva hoti. Evaṃ vūpasantaṃ tattha gataṃ adhikaraṇaṃ ukkoṭeti yo, tassāpi pācittiyameva.

Tattha gatanti But if, even when being told, "Enough, friends, what is the point of going there?" they do not heed the Vinayadhara's words and continue going, having gone, they announce this matter to the like-minded monks. The like-minded monks, thinking, "Enough, friends, a Saṅgha gathering is a serious matter," have them sit down right there and, having decided, reconcile them. This too is settled. He who condemns a legal issue thus settled after going there (tattha gataṃ), also commits a pācittiya.

Tatthagataṃ vūpasantanti na heva kho pana sabhāgabhikkhūnaṃ saññattiyā vūpasantaṃ hoti; apica kho saṅghaṃ sannipātetvā ārocitaṃ saṅghamajjhe vinayadharā vūpasamenti, idaṃ tattha gataṃ vūpasantaṃ nāma. Etaṃ ukkoṭentassāpi pācittiyameva.

Tattha gataṃ vūpasantanti But it is not settled by the reconciliation of the like-minded monks; but rather, having convened the Saṅgha, the Vinayadharas settle it in the middle of the Saṅgha. This is called a legal issue "settled after going there" (tattha gataṃ vūpasantaṃ nāma). He who condemns this also commits a pācittiya.

Sativinayanti khīṇāsavassa dinnaṃ sativinayaṃ ukkoṭeti, pācittiyameva. Ummattakassa dinne amūḷhavinaye pāpussannassa dinnāya tassapāpiyasikāyapi eseva nayo.

Sativinayanti He who condemns the sativinaya given to one with destroyed taints, commits a pācittiya. The same method applies to the amūḷhavinaya given to a madman and the tassapāpiyasikā given to one overwhelmed by evil.

Tiṇavatthārakaṃukkoṭetīti saṅghena tiṇavatthārakasamathena vūpasamite adhikaraṇe ‘‘āpatti nāma ekaṃ bhikkhuṃ upasaṅkamitvā ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā añjaliṃ paggahetvā desiyamānā vuṭṭhāti, yaṃ panetaṃ niddāyantassāpi āpattivuṭṭhānaṃ nāma, etaṃ mayhaṃ na khamatī’’ti evaṃ vadantopi tiṇavatthārakaṃ ukkoṭeti nāma, tassāpi pācittiyameva.

Tiṇavatthārakaṃ ukkoṭetīti In a legal issue settled by the Saṅgha with the tiṇavatthāraka-samatha, he who says, "An offense arises when a monk, approaching another, sits squatting, raises his joined palms, and confesses; but this so-called rising from an offense even for one who is dozing, I do not approve of this," thus, he is said to condemn the tiṇavatthāraka, he also commits a pācittiya.

Chandāgatiṃ gacchanto adhikaraṇaṃ ukkoṭetīti vinayadharo hutvā attano upajjhāyādīnaṃ atthāya ‘‘adhammaṃ dhammo’’tiādīni dīpetvā pubbe vinicchitaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ dvādasasu ukkoṭesu yena kenaci ukkoṭento chandāgatiṃ gacchanto adhikaraṇaṃ ukkoṭeti nāma. Dvīsu pana attapaccatthikesu ekasmiṃ ‘‘anatthaṃ me acarī’’tiādinā nayena samuppannāghāto, tassa parājayaṃ āropanatthaṃ ‘‘adhammaṃ dhammo’’tiādīni dīpetvā pubbe vinicchitaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ dvādasasu ukkoṭesu yena kenaci ukkoṭento dosāgatiṃ gacchanto adhikaraṇaṃ ukkoṭeti nāma. Mando pana momūho momūhattā eva ‘‘adhammaṃ dhammo’’tiādīni dīpetvā vuttanayeneva ukkoṭento mohāgatiṃ gacchanto adhikaraṇaṃ ukkoṭeti nāma. Sace pana dvīsu attapaccatthikesu eko visamāni kāyakammādīni gahanamicchādiṭṭhiṃ balavante ca pakkhantariye abhiññāte bhikkhū nissitattā visamanissito gahananissito balavanissito ca hoti, tassa bhayena ‘‘ayaṃ me jīvitantarāyaṃ vā brahmacariyantarāyaṃ vā kareyyā’’ti ‘‘adhammaṃ dhammo’’tiādīni dīpetvā vuttanayeneva ukkoṭento bhayāgatiṃ gacchanto adhikaraṇaṃ ukkoṭeti nāma.

Chandāgatiṃ gacchanto adhikaraṇaṃ ukkoṭetīti, meaning "one who goes to bias due to desire overturns the case," refers to a Vinaya expert who, being a vinayadhara, for the sake of his preceptor (upajjhaya) or others, clarifies things like "'Adhammaṃ dhammo' (what is not Dhamma is Dhamma)," and overturns a case previously decided by overturning it with any of the twelve overturnings (ukkoṭana), goes to bias due to desire, thus it is called "he overturns the case." But in the case of two persons who have a grievance against each other, if anger arises in one in the manner of "'Anatthaṃ me acarī' (he did me harm)," clarifying things like "'Adhammaṃ dhammo'," in order to impose defeat on that person, he overturns a previously decided case with any of the twelve overturnings, goes to bias due to hate (dosāgati), thus it is called "he overturns the case." However, a foolish, deluded person, simply out of delusion, clarifying things like "'Adhammaṃ dhammo'," and overturning the case in the manner described above, goes to bias due to delusion (mohāgati), thus it is called "he overturns the case." But if, among two persons who have a grievance against each other, one, due to relying on monks known to be biased in their bodily actions, etc., having wrong views rooted in greed, and being powerful in the other faction, is biased, rooted in greed, and powerful, then out of fear that "'Ayaṃ me jīvitantarāyaṃ vā brahmacariyantarāyaṃ vā kareyyā' (this one might cause danger to my life or danger to my holy life)," clarifying things like "'Adhammaṃ dhammo'," and overturning the case in the manner described above, goes to bias due to fear (bhayāgati), thus it is called "he overturns the case."

Tadahupasampannoti eko sāmaṇero byatto hoti bahussuto, so vinicchaye parājayaṃ patvā maṅkubhūte bhikkhū disvā pucchati ‘‘kasmā maṅkubhūtātthā’’ti? Te tassa taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ ārocenti. So te evaṃ vadeti ‘‘hotu, bhante, maṃ upasampādetha, ahaṃ taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasamessāmī’’ti. Te taṃ upasampādenti. So dutiyadivase bheriṃ paharitvā saṅghaṃ sannipāteti. Tato bhikkhūhi ‘‘kena saṅgho sannipātito’’ti vutte ‘‘mayā’’ti vadati. ‘‘Kasmā sannipātito’’ti? ‘‘Hiyyo adhikaraṇaṃ dubbinicchitaṃ, tamahaṃ vinicchinissāmī’’ti. ‘‘Tvaṃ pana hiyyo kuhiṃ gato’’ti? ‘‘Anupasampannomhi, bhante, ajja pana upasampannomhī’’ti. So vattabbo ‘‘idaṃ āvuso tumhādisānaṃ bhagavatā sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ, ‘tadahupasampanno ukkoṭeti, ukkoṭanakaṃ pācittiya’nti, gaccha āpattiṃ desehī’’ti. Āgantukepi eseva nayo.

Tadahupasampannoti, meaning "one ordained then," refers to a novice (sāmaṇera) who is intelligent and learned. Having been defeated in a judgment, he sees the monks despondent and asks, "Why are you despondent?" They tell him about that case. He says to them, "Venerable sirs, let it be, ordain me, and I will settle that case." They ordain him. On the second day, he beats the drum and assembles the saṅgha. Then, when the monks say, "Why has the saṅgha been assembled?" he says, "By me." "Why has it been assembled?" "Yesterday, a case was wrongly decided; I will decide it." "But where were you yesterday?" "I was not yet ordained, venerable sirs, but today I am ordained." He should be told, "This, friend, is a training rule (sikkhāpada) laid down by the Blessed One for those like you: 'tadahupasampanno ukkoṭeti, ukkoṭanakaṃ pācittiyaṃ (one ordained then overturns, it is pācittiya for overturning)', go and confess the offense." The same method applies to a newcomer.

Kārakoti ekaṃ saṅghena saddhiṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vinicchinitvā pariveṇagataṃ parājitā bhikkhū vadanti ‘‘kissa, bhante, tumhehi evaṃ vinicchitaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ, nanu evaṃ vinicchinitabba’’nti. So ‘‘kasmā paṭhamaṃyeva evaṃ na vaditthā’’ti taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ ukkoṭeti. Evaṃ yo kārako ukkoṭeti, tassāpi ukkoṭanakaṃ pācittiyaṃ.Chandadāyakoti eko adhikaraṇavinicchaye chandaṃ datvā sabhāge bhikkhū parājayaṃ patvā āgate maṅkubhūte disvā ‘‘sve dāni ahaṃ vinicchinissāmī’’ti saṅghaṃ sannipātetvā ‘‘kasmā sannipātesī’’ti vutte ‘‘hiyyo adhikaraṇaṃ dubbinicchitaṃ, tamahaṃ ajja vinicchinissāmī’’ti. ‘‘Hiyyo pana tvaṃ kattha gato’’ti. ‘‘Chandaṃ datvā nisinnomhī’’ti. So vattabbo ‘‘idaṃ āvuso tumhādisānaṃ bhagavatā sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ, ‘chandadāyako ukkoṭeti, ukkoṭanakaṃ pācittiya’nti, gaccha āpattiṃ desehī’’ti.

Kārakoti, meaning "the doer," refers to one who, having decided a case with the saṅgha, the defeated monks who have gone to their dwelling (pariveṇa) say, "Venerable sirs, why did you decide the case in this way? Should it not be decided in this way?" He thinks, "Why did you not say so in the first place?" and overturns that case. Thus, whoever, being the doer (kārako), overturns it, for him too, it is pācittiya for overturning. Chandadāyakoti, meaning "the giver of consent," refers to one who, having given his consent (chanda) in the decision of a case, sees the monks in his faction defeated and having come despondent, thinks, "Tomorrow, I will decide it," assembles the saṅgha, and when asked, "Why did you assemble it?" says, "Yesterday, a case was wrongly decided; I will decide it today." "But where were you yesterday?" "I was sitting having given my consent (chanda)." He should be told, "This, friend, is a training rule laid down by the Blessed One for those like you: 'chandadāyako ukkoṭeti, ukkoṭanakaṃ pācittiyaṃ (the giver of consent overturns, it is pācittiya for overturning)', go and confess the offense."

Adhikaraṇanidānādivaṇṇanā
Description of the Basis, etc., of Adhikaraṇa

342.Vivādādhikaraṇaṃ kiṃnidānantiādīsu kiṃ nidānamassātikiṃnidānaṃ. Ko samudayo assātikiṃsamudayaṃ. Kā jāti assātikiṃjātikaṃ. Ko pabhavo assātikiṃpabhavaṃ. Ko sambhāro assātikiṃsambhāraṃ. Kiṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ assātikiṃsamuṭṭhānaṃ. Sabbānetāni kāraṇavevacanāniyeva.

342. Among "Vivādādhikaraṇaṃ kiṃnidānantiādi (What is the basis of the dispute case?)," kiṃnidānaṃ means what is its basis? Kiṃsamudayaṃ means what is its origin? Kiṃjātikaṃ means what is its nature? Kiṃpabhavaṃ means what is its source? Kiṃsambhāraṃ means what is its accumulation? Kiṃsamuṭṭhānaṃ means what is its arising? All these are simply synonyms for cause.

Vivādanidānantiādīsupi aṭṭhārasabhedakaravatthusaṅkhāto vivādo nidānametassātivivādanidānaṃ. Vivādaṃ nissāya uppajjanakavivādavasenetaṃ vuttaṃ. Anuvādo nidānaṃ assātianuvādanidānaṃ. Idampi anuvādaṃ nissāya uppajjanakaanuvādavasena vuttaṃ. Āpatti nidānaṃ assātiāpattinidānaṃ. Āpattādhikaraṇapaccayā catasso āpattiyo āpajjatīti evaṃ āpattiṃ nissāya uppajjanakaāpattivasenetaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiccayaṃ nidānamassātikiccayanidānaṃ;catubbidhaṃ saṅghakammaṃ kāraṇamassāti attho. Ukkhittānuvattikāya bhikkhuniyā yāvatatiyaṃ samanubhāsanādīnaṃ kiccaṃ nissāya uppajjanakakiccānaṃ vasenetaṃ vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ catunnampi adhikaraṇānaṃ vissajjanapakkhe ekapadayojanā. Etenānusārena sabbapadāni yojetabbāni.

In "Vivādanidānantiādi (dispute-basis)": Vivādaṃ nidānaṃ etassāti vivādanidānaṃ (dispute-basis) because the dispute is the basis for this, namely dispute consisting of the eighteen grounds for quarrel. This is said in terms of a dispute that arises dependent on dispute. Anuvādo nidānaṃ assāti anuvādanidānaṃ (accusation-basis) because the accusation is the basis for this. This is said in terms of an accusation that arises dependent on accusation. Āpatti nidānaṃ assāti āpattinidānaṃ (offense-basis) because the offense is the basis for this. One commits the four kinds of offenses due to the condition of an offense case (āpattādhikaraṇa), thus, this is said in terms of an offense that arises dependent on offense. Kiccayaṃ nidānamassāti kiccayanidānaṃ (business-basis); the meaning is that the fourfold saṅgha business is its cause. This is said in terms of business that arises dependent on the business of giving probation, etc., up to the third time to a nun who adheres to an expelled nun (ukkhittānuvattikā). This is a connection of a single word on the side of explanation for all four cases. According to this, all words should be connected.

hetunidānantiādimhi vissajjane navannaṃ kusalākusalābyākatahetūnaṃ vasena hetunidānāditā veditabbā. Tatiyapucchāya vissajjane byañjanamattaṃ nānaṃ. Hetuyeva hi ettha paccayoti vutto.

In "hetunidānantiādi (root-basis)", in the explanation, hetunidānādita should be understood in terms of the nine roots: wholesome, unwholesome, and indeterminate. In the explanation of the third question, only the wording is different. For here, the root is simply called a condition (paccaya).

343.Mūlapucchāya vissajjanedvādasa mūlānīti kodhaupanāhayugaḷakādīni cha vivādāmūlāni, lobhadosamohā tayo, alobhādosāmohā tayoti imāni ajjhattasantānappavattāni dvādasa mūlāni.Cuddasa mūlānīti tāneva dvādasa kāyavācāhi saddhiṃ cuddasa honti.Cha mūlānīti kāyādīni cha samuṭṭhānāni.

343. In the explanation of the root question, dvādasa mūlānīti (twelve roots) means the six roots of dispute, beginning with the pair of anger and resentment, and the three: greed, hatred, delusion, and the three: non-greed, non-hatred, non-delusion; these twelve roots occur in one's own heart.Cuddasa mūlānīti (fourteen roots) means those same twelve together with body and speech, are fourteen.Cha mūlānīti (six roots) means the six arisings, beginning with body.

aṭṭhārasa bhedakaravatthūnisamuṭṭhānāni, tañhi etesu aṭṭhārasasu bhedakaravatthūsu samuṭṭhāti, etehi vā kāraṇabhūtehi samuṭṭhāti. Tenassetāni samuṭṭhānāni vuccanti. Esa nayo sabbattha.

aṭṭhārasa bhedakaravatthūnisamuṭṭhānāni (the eighteen grounds for quarrel are the arisings) because it arises in these eighteen grounds for quarrel, or it arises from these as causes. Therefore, these are called arisings. This method applies everywhere.

344.Vivādādhikaraṇaṃ āpattītiādibhedeekena adhikaraṇena kiccādhikaraṇenāti idaṃ yena adhikaraṇena sammanti, taṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ, na panetāni ekaṃsato kiccādhikaraṇeneva sammanti. Na hi puggalassa santike desentassa kiccādhikaraṇaṃ nāma atthi.

344. In the division "Vivādādhikaraṇaṃ āpattītiādi (the dispute case is an offense)", "ekena adhikaraṇena kiccādhikaraṇenāti (by one case, by the business case)" is said to show by which case it is settled, but these are not necessarily settled only by the business case. For there is no such thing as a business case for one who confesses in the presence of an individual.

Na katamena samathenāti sāvasesāpatti viya na sammati. Na hi sakkā sā desetuṃ, na tato vuṭṭhāya suddhante patiṭṭhātuṃ.

Na katamena samathenāti (by which settlement?) means it is not settled like an offense with remainder (sāvasesāpatti). For it is not possible to confess it, nor to rise from it and be established in purity.

348.Vivādādhikaraṇaṃ hoti anuvādādhikaraṇantiādi nayo uttānoyeva.

348.Vivādādhikaraṇaṃ hoti anuvādādhikaraṇantiādi nayo uttānoyeva (the dispute case is an accusation case, etc.) the method is plain.

349.Tato paraṃyattha sativinayotiādikā sammukhāvinayaṃ amuñcitvā cha yamakapucchā vuttā, tāsaṃ vissajjaneneva attho pakāsito.

349. After that, yattha sativinayotiādikā (where there is mindfulness-vinaya) six pair of questions are said without releasing the face-to-face-vinaya, their meaning is shown by the explanation itself.

351.Saṃsaṭṭhādipucchānaṃ vissajjanesaṃsaṭṭhāti sativinayakammavācākkhaṇasmiṃyeva dvinnampi samathānaṃ siddhattā sammukhāvinayoti vā sativinayoti vā ime dhammā saṃsaṭṭhā, no visaṃsaṭṭhā. Yasmā pana kadalikkhandhe pattavaṭṭīnaṃ viya na sakkā tesaṃ vinibbhujitvā nānākaraṇaṃ dassetuṃ, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘na ca labbhā imesaṃ dhammānaṃ vinibbhujitvā vinibbhujitvā nānākaraṇaṃ paññāpetu’’nti. Esa nayo sabbattha.

351. In the explanation of the intertwined questions, saṃsaṭṭhāti (intertwined) because the accomplishment of both settlements is at the moment of the mindfulness-vinaya-kammavācā, these qualities are intertwined, whether it is face-to-face-vinaya or mindfulness-vinaya, not un-intertwined. But since it is not possible to separate them and show the distinction, like pattavaṭṭīnaṃ on a banana trunk, therefore it is said "‘‘na ca labbhā imesaṃ dhammānaṃ vinibbhujitvā vinibbhujitvā nānākaraṇaṃ paññāpetu’’nti (and it is not possible to discern these qualities and show the distinction)." This method applies everywhere.

Sattasamathanidānavaṇṇanā
Description of the Bases of the Seven Settlements

352.Kiṃnidānoti pucchāvissajjane nidānaṃ nidānamassātinidānanidāno. Tattha saṅghasammukhatā, dhammasammukhatā, vinayasammukhatā, puggalasammukhatāti idaṃ sammukhāvinayassa nidānaṃ. Sativepullapatto khīṇāsavo laddhupavādo sativinayassa nidānaṃ. Ummattako bhikkhu amūḷhavinayassa nidānaṃ. Yo ca deseti, yassa ca deseti, ubhinnaṃ sammukhībhāvo paṭiññātakaraṇassa nidānaṃ. Bhaṇḍanajātānaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasametuṃ asakkuṇeyyatā yebhuyyasikāya nidānaṃ. Pāpussanno puggalo tassapāpiyasikāya nidānaṃ. Bhaṇḍanajātānaṃ bahu assāmaṇakaajjhācāro tiṇavatthārakassa nidānaṃ.Hetupaccayavārāvuttanayā eva.

352. Kiṃnidānoti (what is its basis) In the answer to the question, nidānaṃ nidānamassāti nidānanidāno (basis-basis). Here, the saṅgha's presence, the Dhamma's presence, the Vinaya's presence, the individual's presence, this is the basis of the face-to-face-vinaya. The khīṇāsava who has attained mindfulness-fullness, who has received blame is the basis of the mindfulness-vinaya. The insane monk is the basis of the innocence-vinaya. And the presence of both the one who confesses and the one to whom he confesses is the basis of the acknowledgment-act. The inability to settle a case that has arisen from quarreling is the basis of the majority-rule. A wicked individual is the basis of the conduct-in-accordance-with-wickedness. Much un-ascetic behavior of those who are quarreling is the basis of the covering-over-with-grass. The Hetupaccayavārā (Root-condition section) is in the same way as said before.

353.Mūlapucchāya vissajjanaṃ uttānameva. Samuṭṭhānapucchāya kiñcāpi ‘‘sattannaṃ samathānaṃ katame chattiṃsa samuṭṭhānā’’ti vuttaṃ, sammukhāvinayassa pana kammasaṅgahābhāvena samuṭṭhānābhāvato channaṃyeva samathānaṃ cha samuṭṭhānāni vibhattāni. Tatthakammassa kiriyāti ñatti veditabbā.Karaṇanti tassāyeva ñattiyā ṭhapetabbakāle ṭhapanaṃ.Upagamananti sayaṃ upagamanaṃ; attanāyeva tassa kammassa karaṇanti attho.Ajjhupagamananti ajjhesanupagamanaṃ; aññaṃ saddhivihārikādikaṃ ‘‘idaṃ kammaṃ karohī’’ti ajjhesananti attho.Adhivāsanāti ‘‘ruccati me etaṃ, karotu saṅgho’’ti evaṃ adhivāsanā; chandadānanti attho.Appaṭikkosanāti ‘‘na metaṃ khamati, mā evaṃ karothā’’ti appaṭisedhanā. Iti channaṃ chakkānaṃ vasena chattiṃsa samuṭṭhānā veditabbā.

353. The explanation of the root question is plain. Although in the question of arising it is said "‘‘sattannaṃ samathānaṃ katame chattiṃsa samuṭṭhānā’’ti (of the seven settlements, which are the thirty-six arisings)," due to the lack of a classification of action (kamma) for the face-to-face-vinaya, and therefore the lack of arisings, the six arisings have been divided only for the six settlements. Here, kammassa kiriyāti (the action of the action) ñatti (announcement) should be understood. Karaṇanti (doing) is the placing of that same announcement at the time it should be placed. Upagamananti (approaching) is approaching oneself; the meaning is doing that action by oneself. Ajjhupagamananti (requesting approaching) is requesting and approaching; the meaning is requesting another, such as a co-resident, "'idaṃ kammaṃ karohī'ti (do this action)." Adhivāsanāti (acceptance) is "'ruccati me etaṃ, karotu saṅgho'ti (this pleases me, let the saṅgha do it)," thus acceptance; the meaning is giving consent (chanda). Appaṭikkosanāti (non-rejection) is "'na metaṃ khamati, mā evaṃ karothā'ti (this does not please me, do not do it thus)," thus non-rejection. Thus, the thirty-six arisings should be understood in terms of six sets of six.

Sattasamathanānātthādivaṇṇanā
Description of the Various Meanings of the Seven Settlements

354.Nānātthapucchāvissajjanaṃ uttānameva. Adhikaraṇapucchāvissajjaneayaṃ vivādo no adhikaraṇanti ayaṃ mātāputtādīnaṃ vivādo viruddhavādattā vivādo nāma hoti, samathehi pana adhikaraṇīyatāya abhāvato adhikaraṇaṃ na hoti. Anuvādādīsupi eseva nayo. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

354. The explanation of the question of various meanings is plain. In the explanation of the question of cases, ayaṃ vivādo no adhikaraṇanti (this dispute is not a case) this dispute of mother and son, due to being contradictory, is called a dispute, but because it cannot be made into a case by settlements, it is not a case. The same method applies to accusations, etc. The rest is plain everywhere.

Adhikaraṇabhedavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Description of the Division of Cases is Finished.

Dutiyagāthāsaṅgaṇikaṃ

Second-Verse Compendium

Codanādipucchāvissajjanāvaṇṇanā
Description of the Question and Explanation of Accusation, etc.

359.Dutiyagāthāsaṅgaṇiyaṃcodanāti vatthuñca āpattiñca dassetvā codanā.Sāraṇāti dosasāraṇā.Saṅgho kimatthāyāti saṅghasannipāto kimatthāya.Matikammaṃ pana kissa kāraṇāti matikammaṃ vuccati mantaggahaṇaṃ; taṃ kissa kāraṇāti attho.

359. In the Second-Verse Compendium, codanāti (accusation) is accusation after showing the basis and the offense.Sāraṇāti (reminding) is reminding of the fault.Saṅgho kimatthāyāti (for what purpose is the saṅgha?) is for what purpose is the saṅgha's assembly? Matikammaṃ pana kissa kāraṇāti (but for what reason is the intellect-action?) intellect-action means taking counsel; what is the reason for that?

Codanā sāraṇatthāyāti vuttappakārā codanā, tena cuditakapuggalena codakadosasāraṇatthāya.Niggahatthāya sāraṇāti dosasāraṇā pana tassa puggalassa niggahatthāya.Saṅgho pariggahatthāyāti tattha sannipatito saṅgho vinicchayapariggahaṇatthāya; dhammādhammaṃ tulanatthāya suvinicchitadubbinicchitaṃ jānanatthāyāti attho.Matikammaṃ pana pāṭiyekkanti suttantikattherānañca vinayadharattherānañca mantaggahaṇaṃ pāṭekkaṃ pāṭekkaṃ vinicchayasanniṭṭhāpanatthaṃ.

Codanā sāraṇatthāyāti (accusation is for the sake of reminding) accusation of the type described above is for the sake of reminding of the faults of the accuser by the one accused by him.Niggahatthāya sāraṇāti (reminding is for the sake of censure) but reminding of the faults is for the sake of censuring that individual.Saṅgho pariggahatthāyāti (the saṅgha is for the sake of grasping) the saṅgha assembled there is for the sake of grasping the decision; the meaning is for the sake of weighing what is Dhamma and what is not-Dhamma, for the sake of knowing what is well-decided and what is wrongly decided.Matikammaṃ pana pāṭiyekkanti (but intellect-action is separately) the taking counsel of the suttantika elders and the vinayadhara elders is separately, separately for the sake of settling the decision.

Mā kho paṭighanti cuditake vā codake vā kopaṃ mā janayi.Sace anuvijjako tuvanti sace tvaṃ saṅghamajjhe otiṇṇaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vinicchituṃ nisinno vinayadharo.

Mā kho paṭighanti (do not generate resistance) do not generate anger in the one being accused or the accuser.Sace anuvijjako tuvanti (if you are an investigator) if you are a vinayadhara sitting to decide a case that has entered the saṅgha.

Viggāhikanti ‘‘na tvaṃ imaṃ dhammavinayaṃ ājānāsī’’tiādinayappavattaṃ.Anatthasaṃhitanti yā anatthaṃ janayati, parisaṃ khobhetvā uṭṭhāpeti, evarūpiṃ kathaṃ mā abhaṇi.Sutte vinaye vātiādīsusuttaṃnāma ubhatovibhaṅgo.Vinayonāma khandhako.Anulomonāma parivāro.Paññattaṃnāma sakalaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ.Anulomikaṃnāma cattāro mahāpadesā.

Viggāhikanti (contentious) proceeding in the manner of "‘‘na tvaṃ imaṃ dhammavinayaṃ ājānāsī’’ti (you do not understand this Dhamma-Vinaya)." Anatthasaṃhitanti (connected with non-benefit) do not utter talk of that sort that generates non-benefit, agitates the assembly and makes them get up.Sutte vinaye vātiādīsu (in the Sutta or Vinaya) suttaṃnāma (Sutta means) the Ubhatovibhaṅga.Vinayonāma (Vinaya means) the Khandhaka.Anulomonāma (Anuloma means) the Parivāra.Paññattaṃnāma (laid down means) the entire Vinayapiṭaka.Anulomikaṃnāma (Anulomika means) the four Great References.

Anuyogavattaṃnisāmayāti anuyuñjanavattaṃ nisāmehi.Kusalena buddhimatā katanti chekena paṇḍitena ñāṇapāramippattena bhagavatā nīharitvā ṭhapitaṃ.Suvuttanti supaññāpitaṃ.Sikkhāpadānulomikanti sikkhāpadānaṃ anulomaṃ. Ayaṃ tāva padattho, ayaṃ panettha sādhippāyasaṅkhepavaṇṇanā – ‘‘sace tvaṃ anuvijjako, mā sahasā bhaṇi, mā anatthasaṃhitaṃ viggāhikakathaṃ bhaṇi. Yaṃ pana kusalena buddhimatā lokanāthena etesu suttādīsu anuyogavattaṃ kathaṃ supaññattaṃ sabbasikkhāpadānaṃ anulomaṃ, taṃ nisāmaya taṃ upadhārehī’’ti.Gatiṃ na nāsento samparāyikanti attano samparāye sugatinibbattiṃ anāsento anuyogavattaṃ nisāmaya. Yo hi taṃ anisāmetvā anuyuñjati, so samparāyikaṃ attano gatiṃ nāseti, tasmā tvaṃ anāsento nisāmayāti attho. Idāni taṃ anuyogavattaṃ dassetuṃhitesītiādimāha. Tatthahitesīti hitaṃ esanto gavesanto; mettañca mettāpubbabhāgañca upaṭṭhapetvāti attho.Kālenāti yuttapattakālena; ajjhesitakāleyeva tava bhāre kate anuyuñjāti attho.

Anuyogavattaṃnisāmayāti (listen to the questioning-procedure) listen to the questioning procedure.Kusalena buddhimatā katanti (done by the skillful, intelligent one) taken out and established by the clever, wise Blessed One, who has attained the perfection of knowledge.Suvuttanti (well-spoken) well-established.Sikkhāpadānulomikanti (in accordance with the training rules) in accordance with the training rules. This is the word meaning, this here is the concise description with hidden meaning – "‘‘sace tvaṃ anuvijjako, mā sahasā bhaṇi, mā anatthasaṃhitaṃ viggāhikakathaṃ bhaṇi. (if you are an investigator, do not speak rashly, do not speak contentious talk connected with non-benefit.) Yaṃ pana kusalena buddhimatā lokanāthena etesu suttādīsu anuyogavattaṃ kathaṃ supaññattaṃ sabbasikkhāpadānaṃ anulomaṃ, taṃ nisāmaya taṃ upadhārehī’’ti. (But listen to and consider that questioning procedure in these Suttas etc., which is well-established by the skillful, intelligent Lord of the world, which is in accordance with all the training rules.)" Gatiṃ na nāsento samparāyikanti (not destroying one's destination in the next world) listen to the questioning procedure without destroying the arising of a good destination for oneself in the next world. For whoever questions without listening to that, destroys his own destination in the next world, therefore, listen without destroying, is the meaning. Now, in order to show that questioning procedure, he says hitesītiādi (seeking benefit). Here, hitesīti (seeking benefit) means seeking and searching for benefit; the meaning is having established loving-kindness and the preliminary part of loving-kindness.Kālenāti (at the time) at the proper time; question when your burden has been made at the time of request.

Sahasā vohāraṃ mā padhāresīti yo etesaṃ sahasā vohāro hoti, sahasā bhāsitaṃ, taṃ mā padhāresi, mā gaṇhittha.

Sahasā vohāraṃ mā padhāresīti (do not offer speech rashly) do not offer rashly, do not take up that speech that is rash for these.

Paṭiññānusandhitena kārayeti etthaanusandhitanti kathānusandhi vuccati, tasmā paṭiññānusandhinā kāraye; kathānusandhiṃ sallakkhetvā paṭiññāya kārayeti attho. Atha vā paṭiññāya ca anusandhitena ca kāraye, lajjiṃ paṭiññāya kāraye; alajjiṃ vattānusandhināti attho. Tasmā evapaṭiññā lajjīsūti gāthamāha. Tatthavattānusandhitena kārayeti vattānusandhinā kāraye, yā assa vattena saddhiṃ paṭiññā sandhiyati, tāya paṭiññāya kārayeti attho.

Paṭiññānusandhitena kārayeti here, anusandhi means connection of the story. Therefore, he should cause [him to confess] with a connection to the acknowledgement; having considered the connection of the story, the meaning is that he should cause [him to confess] based on the acknowledgement. Or, he should cause [him to confess] by the acknowledgement and the connection; he should cause the bashful one to confess by the acknowledgement; he should cause the shameless one [to confess] by connection to the matter. Therefore, he spoke the verse, paṭiññā lajjīsū. Here, vattānusandhitena kāraye means he should cause [him to confess] with connection to the matter; the acknowledgement by which the acknowledgement connects with his matter, he should cause [him to confess] by that acknowledgement.

Sañciccāti jānanto āpajjati.Parigūhatīti nigūhati na deseti na vuṭṭhāti.

Sañciccā means he commits [an offense] knowingly. Parigūhatī means he conceals it, does not declare it, and does not emerge [from it].

Sā ahampi jānāmīti yaṃ tumhehi vuttaṃ, taṃ saccaṃ, ahampi naṃ evameva jānāmi.Aññañca tāhanti aññañca taṃ ahaṃ pucchāmi.

Sā ahampi jānāmī means that which has been said by you is true, I also know it in the same way. Aññañca tāha means and also, I ask you that.

Pubbāparaṃna jānātīti purekathitañca pacchākathitañca na jānāti.Akovidoti tasmiṃ pubbāpare akusalo.Anusandhivacanapathaṃ na jānātīti kathānusandhivacanaṃ vinicchayānusandhivacanañca na jānāti.

Pubbāparaṃ na jānātī means he does not know what was said before and what was said later. Akovido means unskilled in that which is before and after. Anusandhivacanapathaṃ na jānātī means he does not know the connection of the story, the statement, and the connection of the decision statement.

Sīlavipattiyā codetīti dvīhi āpattikkhandhehi codeti.Ācāradiṭṭhiyāti ācāravipattiyā ceva diṭṭhivipattiyā ca. Ācāravipattiyā codento pañcahāpattikkhandhehi codeti, diṭṭhivipattiyā codento micchādiṭṭhiyā ceva antaggāhikadiṭṭhiyā ca codeti.Ājīvenapi codetīti ājīvahetupaññattehi chahi sikkhāpadehi codeti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

Sīlavipattiyā codetī means he accuses [him] with two aggregates of offenses. Ācāradiṭṭhiyā means by failure in conduct and failure in view. Accusing with failure in conduct, he accuses with the five aggregates of offenses; accusing with failure in view, he accuses with wrong view and clinging to extreme views. Ājīvenapi codetī means he accuses with the six training rules prescribed on account of livelihood. The rest is straightforward everywhere.

Dutiyagāthāsaṅgaṇikavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Second Gāthā-saṅgaṇika is finished.

Codanākaṇḍaṃ

The Chapter on Accusation

Anuvijjakakiccavaṇṇanā
The Exposition on the Duty of the Investigator

360-361.Idāni evaṃ uppannāya codanāya vinayadharena kattabbakiccaṃ dassetuṃanuvijjakenātiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthadiṭṭhaṃ diṭṭhenāti gāthāya ayamattho – ekeneko mātugāmena saddhiṃ ekaṭṭhānato nikkhamanto vā pavisanto vā diṭṭho, so taṃ pārājikena codeti, itaro tassa dassanaṃ anujānāti. Taṃ pana dassanaṃ paṭicca pārājikaṃ na upeti, na paṭijānāti. Evamettha yaṃ tena diṭṭhaṃ, taṃ tassa ‘‘diṭṭho mayā’’ti iminā diṭṭhavacanena sameti. Yasmā pana itaro taṃ dassanaṃ paṭicca dosaṃ na paṭijānāti, tasmā asuddhaparisaṅkito hoti; amūlakaparisaṅkitoti attho. Tassa puggalassa ‘‘suddho aha’’nti paṭiññāya tena saddhiṃ uposatho kātabbo. Sesagāthādvayepi eseva nayo. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

360-361. Now, to show the duty to be done by the Vinaya-holder in an accusation that has arisen in this way, [the passage] beginning with anuvijjakena is begun. Here, in the verse diṭṭhaṃ diṭṭhenā, this is the meaning: one individual is seen exiting or entering from one place with one woman. He accuses him of that with a pārājika offense. The other one acknowledges that seeing. But regarding that seeing, he does not incur a pārājika offense, he does not confess it. Here, that which was seen by him agrees with his statement of seeing, "I saw". But because the other one does not confess a fault regarding that seeing, therefore he is suspected without grounds. The meaning is: suspected without basis. The uposatha should be done with that person with the declaration, "I am pure". The same method should be applied in the remaining two verses. The rest is straightforward everywhere.

Anuvijjakakiccavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Exposition on the Duty of the Investigator is finished.

Codakapucchāvissajjanāvaṇṇanā
The Exposition on the Accuser's Questions and Answers

362-363.Codanāyako ādītiādipucchānaṃ vissajjanesacce ca akuppe cāti sacce patiṭṭhātabbaṃ akuppe ca. Yaṃ kataṃ vā na kataṃ vā, tadeva vattabbaṃ, na ca codake vā anuvijjake vā saṅghe vā kopo uppādetabbo.Otiṇṇānotiṇṇaṃ jānitabbanti otiṇṇañca anotiṇṇañca vacanaṃ jānitabbaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ jānanavidhi – ettakā codakassa pubbakathā, ettakā pacchimakathā, ettakā cuditakassa pubbakathā, ettakā pacchimakathāti jānitabbā. Codakassa pamāṇaṃ gaṇhitabbaṃ, cuditakassa pamāṇaṃ gaṇhitabbaṃ, anuvijjakassa pamāṇaṃ gaṇhitabbaṃ, anuvijjako appamattakampi ahāpento ‘‘āvuso samannāharitvā ujuṃ katvā āharā’’ti vattabbo, saṅghena evaṃ paṭipajjitabbaṃ.Yena dhammena yena vinayena yena satthusāsanena taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasammatīti etthadhammoti bhūtaṃ vatthu.Vinayoti codanā ceva sāraṇā ca.Satthusāsananti ñattisampadā ceva anussāvanasampadā ca. Etena hi dhammena ca vinayena ca satthusāsanena ca adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasamati, tasmā anuvijjakena bhūtena vatthunā codetvā āpattiṃ sāretvā ñattisampadāya ceva anussāvanasampadāya ca taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasametabbaṃ, anuvijjakena evaṃ paṭipajjitabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva.

362-363. In the answers to the initial questions, Codanāya ko ādī, [one] should be established in truth and in the unshakeable, sacce ca akuppe cā. Whatever has been done or not done, that itself should be said, and anger should not be generated in the accuser, investigator, or Sangha. Otiṇṇānotiṇṇaṃ jānitabbaṃ means the statement that is pertinent and impertinent should be known. Here, this is the method of knowing: so much is the accuser's prior statement, so much is the latter statement; so much is the accused's prior statement, so much is the latter statement – this should be known. The measure of the accuser should be taken, the measure of the accused should be taken, the measure of the investigator should be taken. The investigator, without causing even a small amount to be lost, should be told, "Friend, bring it having gathered it together and made it straight". The Sangha should act in this way. Yena dhammena yena vinayena yena satthusāsanena taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasammatī, here, dhammo means the actual fact. Vinayo means both the accusation and the recalling. Satthusāsana means both the accomplishment of the motion (ñatti) and the accomplishment of the announcement (anussāvana). For by this Dhamma, by this Vinaya, and by this teaching of the Teacher, that case is calmed. Therefore, the investigator, having accused with the actual fact, having reminded [him] of the offense, should calm that case with the accomplishment of the motion and the accomplishment of the announcement. The investigator should act in this way. The rest here is straightforward.

364.Uposatho kimatthāyātiādipucchāvissajjanampi uttānameva. Avasānagāthāsuthere ca paribhāsatīti avamaññaṃ karonto ‘‘kiṃ ime jānantī’’ti paribhāsati.Khato upahatindriyoti tāya chandādigāmitāya tena ca paribhāsanena attanā attano khatattākhato. Saddhādīnañca indriyānaṃ upahatattāupahatindriyo.Nirayaṃ gacchati dummedho, na ca sikkhāya gāravoti so khato upahatindriyo paññāya abhāvato dummedho tīsu sikkhāsu asikkhanato na ca sikkhāya gāravo kāyassa bhedā nirayameva upagacchati, tasmāna ca āmisaṃ nissāya…pe… yathā dhammo tathā kareti. Tassattho na ca āmisaṃ nissāya kare, cuditakacodakesu hi aññatarena dinnaṃ cīvarādiāmisaṃ gaṇhanto āmisaṃ nissāya karoti, evaṃ na kareyya.Na ca nissāya puggalanti ‘‘ayaṃ me upajjhāyo vā ācariyo vā’’tiādinā nayena chandādīhi gacchanto puggalaṃ nissāya karoti, evaṃ na kareyya. Atha khoubhopete vivajjetvāyathā dhammo ṭhito, tatheva kareyyāti.

364. The answers to the initial questions, Uposatho kimatthāyā, are also straightforward. In the final verses, there ca paribhāsatī means he insults, making light [of others], [thinking,] "What do these ones know?" Khato upahatindriyo means, because of that going to favoritism and because of that insult, by himself, he is cut down by himself, therefore khato [cut down]. And because the faculties such as faith are injured, upahatindriyo [with injured faculties]. Nirayaṃ gacchati dummedho, na ca sikkhāya gāravo means that cut down one, with injured faculties, unintelligent due to the lack of wisdom, not respecting the training due to not training in the three trainings, at the breaking up of the body, goes to hell itself. Therefore, na ca āmisaṃ nissāya…pe… yathā dhammo tathā kare. The meaning of that is, he should not do [it] relying on material things. For while taking robes and so on, material things given by either the accused or the accusers, he does [it] relying on material things. He should not do [it] in this way. Na ca nissāya puggala means going with favoritism and so on by way of, "This is my preceptor or teacher," he does [it] relying on a person. He should not do [it] in this way. But rather, ubhopete vivajjetvā, having avoided both of these, he should do [it] just as the Dhamma is established.

Upakaṇṇakaṃ jappatīti ‘‘evaṃ kathehi, mā evaṃ kathayitthā’’ti kaṇṇamūle manteti.Jimhaṃ pekkhatīti dosameva gavesati.Vītiharatīti vinicchayaṃ hāpeti.Kummaggaṃ paṭisevatīti āpattiṃ dīpeti.

Upakaṇṇakaṃ jappatī means he whispers in the ear, "Speak in this way, do not speak in that way". Jimhaṃ pekkhatī means he seeks only faults. Vītiharatī means he diminishes the judgment. Kummaggaṃ paṭisevatī means he reveals an offense.

Akālena ca codetīti anokāse anajjhiṭṭhova codeti.Pubbāparaṃ na jānātīti purimakathañca pacchimakathañca na jānāti.

Akālena ca codetī means he accuses at an improper time, without being requested. Pubbāparaṃ na jānātī means he does not know the prior matter and the subsequent matter.

Anusandhivacanapathaṃna jānātīti kathānusandhivinicchayānusandhivasena vacanaṃ na jānāti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

Anusandhivacanapathaṃ na jānātī means he does not know the statement in the sense of the connection of the story and the connection of the judgment. The rest is straightforward everywhere.

Codanākaṇḍavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Chapter on Accusation is finished.

Cūḷasaṅgāmo

The Lesser Battle

Anuvijjakassa paṭipattivaṇṇanā
The Exposition on the Practice of the Investigator

365.Cūḷasaṅgāmesaṅgāmāvacarena bhikkhunāti saṅgāmo vuccati adhikaraṇavinicchayatthāya saṅghasannipāto. Tatra hi attapaccatthikā ceva sāsanapaccatthikā ca uddhammaṃ ubbinayaṃ satthu sāsanaṃ dīpentā samosaranti vesālikā vajjiputtakā viya. Yo bhikkhu tesaṃ paccatthikānaṃ laddhiṃ madditvā sakavādadīpanatthāya tattha avacarati, ajjhogāhetvā vinicchayaṃ pavatteti, so saṅgāmāvacaro nāma yasatthero viya. Tena saṅgāmāvacarena bhikkhunā saṅghaṃ upasaṅkamantena nīcacittena saṅgho upasaṅkamitabbo.Nīcacittenāti mānaddhajaṃ nipātetvā nihatamānacittena.Rajoharaṇasamenāti pādapuñchanasamena; yathā rajoharaṇassa saṃkiliṭṭhe vā asaṃkiliṭṭhe vā pāde puñchiyamāne neva rāgo na doso; evaṃ iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu arajjantena adussantenāti attho.Yathāpatirūpe āsaneti yathāpatirūpaṃ āsanaṃ ñatvā attano pāpuṇanaṭṭhāne therānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ piṭṭhiṃ adassetvā nisīditabbaṃ.Anānākathikenāti nānāvidhaṃ taṃ taṃ anatthakathaṃ akathentena.Atiracchānakathikenāti diṭṭhasutamutampi rājakathādikaṃ tiracchānakathaṃ akathentena.Sāmaṃ vā dhammo bhāsitabboti saṅghasannipātaṭṭhāne kappiyākappiyanissitā vā rūpārūpaparicchedasamathācāravipassanācāraṭṭhānanisajjavattādinissitā vā kathā dhammo nāma. Evarūpo dhammo sayaṃ vā bhāsitabbo, paro vā ajjhesitabbo. Yo bhikkhu tathārūpiṃ kathaṃ kathetuṃ pahoti, so vattabbo – ‘‘āvuso saṅghamajjhamhi pañhe uppanne tvaṃ katheyyāsī’’ti.Ariyo vā tuṇhībhāvo nātimaññitabboti ariyā tuṇhī nisīdantā na bālaputhujjanā viya nisīdanti. Aññataraṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvāva nisīdanti. Iti kammaṭṭhānamanasikāravasena tuṇhībhāvo ariyo tuṇhībhāvo nāma, so nātimaññitabbo, kiṃ kammaṭṭhānānuyogenāti nāvajānitabbo; attano patirūpaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvāva nisīditabbanti attho.

365. In the Lesser Battle, saṅgāmāvacarena bhikkhunā, saṅgāmo means the gathering of the Sangha for the sake of the judgment of a case. For there, those who are enemies of themselves and those who are enemies of the Teaching, declaring what is contrary to the Dhamma, contrary to the Vinaya, the Teacher’s teaching, gather together, like the Vajjian Licchavis of Vesālī. The bhikkhu who, having crushed the doctrine of those enemies, frequents there for the sake of declaring his own doctrine, having plunged in, initiates the judgment, is called one who frequents the battle, like the venerable Yasa. The Sangha should be approached by that bhikkhu who frequents the battle, with a humble mind. Nīcacittenā means having lowered the flag of pride, with a mind with pride destroyed. Rajoharaṇasamenā means like a footwiper; just as when wiping feet with a footwiper, whether the feet are dirty or not dirty, there is neither attachment nor aversion; so too, the meaning is that one should not be attached and not be averse to desirable and undesirable things. Yathāpatirūpe āsane means having known a suitable seat, one should sit down in a place appropriate for oneself, without showing one’s back to the elder bhikkhus. Anānākathikenā means without speaking various kinds of pointless talk. Atiracchānakathikenā means without speaking the talk of animals, such as talk about kings, which has been seen, heard, and thought. Sāmaṃ vā dhammo bhāsitabbo means in a place of assembly of the Sangha, talk based on what is allowable and unallowable, or talk based on the analysis of form and formless [realms], serenity, conduct, insight, proper behavior, posture, duties and so on, is called Dhamma. Such Dhamma should be spoken by oneself, or another should be requested. The bhikkhu who is capable of speaking such talk should be told, “Friend, in the middle of the Sangha, when a question arises, you should speak". Ariyo vā tuṇhībhāvo nātimaññitabbo means noble ones sitting silently do not sit like foolish ordinary people. They sit having taken hold of one or another meditation subject. Thus, silence in the sense of attending to a meditation subject is called noble silence, that should not be disrespected, [thinking,] "What [is the use] of applying oneself to meditation subject?" The meaning is that one should sit having taken hold of a meditation subject suitable for oneself.

Na upajjhāyo pucchitabboti ‘‘ko nāmo tuyhaṃ upajjhāyo’’ti na pucchitabbo. Esa nayo sabbattha.Na jātīti ‘‘khattiyajātiyo tvaṃ brāhmaṇajātiyo’’ti evaṃ jāti na pucchitabbā.Na āgamoti ‘‘dīghabhāṇakosi tvaṃ majjhimabhāṇako’’ti evaṃ āgamo na pucchitabbo.Kulapadesoti khattiyakulādivaseneva veditabbo.Atrassa pemaṃ vā doso vāti atra puggale etesaṃ kāraṇānaṃ aññataravasena pemaṃ vā bhaveyya doso vā.

Na upajjhāyo pucchitabbo means one should not ask, "What is the name of your preceptor?" This method [applies] everywhere. Na jātī means one should not ask about caste in this way: "Are you of the Khattiya caste or of the Brāhmaṇa caste?" Na āgamo means one should not ask about the āgama in this way: "Are you a reciter of the Dīgha [Nikāya] or a reciter of the Majjhima [Nikāya]?" Kulapadeso should be understood only in terms of the clan of Khattiyas and so on. Atrassa pemaṃ vā doso vā means in that person there might be affection or aversion on account of one of these reasons.

No parisakappikenāti parisakappakena parisānuvidhāyakena na bhavitabbaṃ; yaṃ parisāya ruccati, tadeva cetetvā kappetvā na kathetabbanti attho.Na hatthamuddā dassetabbāti kathetabbe ca akathetabbe ca saññājananatthaṃ hatthavikāro na kātabbo.

No parisakappikenā means one should not be a parish-arranger, one who complies with the assembly; the meaning is that one should not speak having arranged and composed only that which pleases the assembly. Na hatthamuddā dassetabbā means a hand gesture should not be made for the purpose of conveying a sign about what should be said or should not be said.

Atthaṃ anuvidhiyantenāti vinicchayapaṭivedhameva sallakkhentena ‘‘idaṃ suttaṃ upalabbhati, imasmiṃ vinicchaye idaṃ vakkhāmī’’ti evaṃ paritulayantena nisīditabbanti attho.Na ca āsanā vuṭṭhātabbanti na āsanā vuṭṭhāya sannipātamaṇḍale vicaritabbaṃ, vinayadhare uṭṭhite sabbā parisā uṭṭhahati.Na vītihātabbanti na vinicchayo hāpetabbo.Na kummaggo sevitabboti na āpatti dīpetabbā.Asāhasikena bhavitabbanti na sahasākārinā bhavitabbaṃ; sahasā duruttavacanaṃ na kathetabbanti attho.Vacanakkhamenāti duruttavācaṃ khamanasīlena.Hitaparisakkināti hitesinā hitagavesinā karuṇā ca karuṇāpubbabhāgo ca upaṭṭhāpetabboti ayaṃ padadvayepi adhippāyo.Anasuruttenāti na asuruttena. Asuruttaṃ vuccati viggāhikakathāsaṅkhātaṃ asundaravacanaṃ; taṃ na kathetabbanti attho.Attā pariggahetabboti ‘‘vinicchinituṃ vūpasametuṃ sakkhissāmi nu kho no’’ti evaṃ attā pariggahetabbo; attano pamāṇaṃ jānitabbanti attho.Paro pariggahetabboti ‘‘lajjiyā nu kho ayaṃ parisā, sakkā saññāpetuṃ udāhu no’’ti evaṃ paro pariggahetabbo.

Atthaṃ anuvidhiyantenā means one should sit down paying attention only to the penetration of the judgment, considering, "This sutta is found, in this judgment I will say this," in this way. Na ca āsanā vuṭṭhātabba means one should not get up from the seat and wander in the assembly hall. When the Vinaya-holder gets up, the entire assembly gets up. Na vītihātabba means the judgment should not be diminished. Na kummaggo sevitabbo means an offense should not be revealed. Asāhasikena bhavitabba means one should not be hasty; a harsh word should not be spoken hastily. Vacanakkhamenā means with patience toward a harsh word. Hitaparisakkinā means with compassion and with the preliminary part of compassion, one who desires the welfare, one who seeks the welfare, should establish [these]. This is the intention in both word pairs. Anasuruttenā means not with ill-spoken [words]. Ill-spoken means unlovely words reckoned as quarrelsome talk; that should not be said. Attā pariggahetabbo means one should take hold of oneself in this way: "Will I be able to judge and calm [this matter] or not?" The meaning is that one should know one’s own measure. Paro pariggahetabbo means one should take hold of others in this way: "Is this assembly bashful, is it possible to convince [them] or not?"

Codako pariggahetabboti ‘‘dhammacodako nu kho no’’ti evaṃ pariggahetabbo.Cuditako pariggahetabboti ‘‘dhammacuditako nu kho no’’ti evaṃ pariggahetabbo.Adhammacodako pariggahetabboti tassa pamāṇaṃ jānitabbaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo.Vuttaṃahāpentenāti codakacuditakehi vuttavacanaṃ ahāpentena.Avuttaṃ apakāsentenāti anosaṭaṃ vatthuṃ appakāsentena.Mando hāsetabboti mando momūho paggaṇhitabbo, ‘‘nanu tvaṃ kulaputto’’ti uttejetvā anuyogavattaṃ kathāpetvā tassa anuyogo gaṇhitabbo.Bhīrū assāsetabboti yassa saṅghamajjhaṃ vā gaṇamajjhaṃ vā anosaṭapubbattā sārajjaṃ uppajjati, tādiso ‘‘mā bhāyi, vissaṭṭho kathehi, mayaṃ te upatthambhā bhavissāmā’’ti vatvāpi anuyogavattaṃ kathāpetabbo.Caṇḍo nisedhetabboti apasādetabbo tajjetabbo.Asuci vibhāvetabboti alajjiṃ pakāsetvā āpattiṃ desāpetabbo.Ujumaddavenāti yo bhikkhu uju sīlavā kāyavaṅkādirahito, so maddaveneva upacaritabbo.Dhammesu ca puggalesu cāti ettha yo dhammagaruko hoti na puggalagaruko, ayameva dhammesu ca puggalesu ca majjhattoti veditabbo.

Codako pariggahetabbo means one should take hold of the accuser in this way: "Is this one an accuser of the Dhamma or not?" Cuditako pariggahetabbo means one should take hold of the accused in this way: "Is this one accused according to the Dhamma or not?" Adhammacodako pariggahetabbo means the measure of that one should be known. The same method [applies] in the remaining [cases]. Vuttaṃ ahāpentenā means the statement spoken by the accuser and accused should not be lost. Avuttaṃ apakāsentenā means one should not reveal a thing that is not conforming. Mando hāsetabbo means a fool should be made to laugh, he should be taken hold of, having encouraged [him], "Surely you are a clansman," having made [him] speak about the matter of investigation, the investigation of that one should be taken. Bhīrū assāsetabbo means one in whom boldness arises due to not having previously conformed to the middle of the Sangha or the middle of a group, that kind of one should be reassured, saying, "Do not fear, speak confidently, we will be your support," and also he should be made to speak about the matter of investigation. Caṇḍo nisedhetabbo means he should be rebuked, threatened. Asuci vibhāvetabbo means having revealed the shameless one, he should be made to declare the offense. Ujumaddavenā means the bhikkhu who is upright, virtuous, devoid of bodily crookedness and so on, should be treated gently. Dhammesu ca puggalesu cā means here, the one who respects the Dhamma but does not respect individuals should be understood as balanced in both Dhammas and individuals.

366.Suttaṃ saṃsandanatthāyātiādīsu tena ca pana evaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ piyamanāpagarubhāvanīyena anuvijjakena samudāhaṭesu suttādīsu suttaṃ saṃsandanatthāya; āpattānāpattīnaṃ saṃsandanatthanti veditabbaṃ.Opammaṃ nidassanatthāyāti opammaṃ atthadassanatthāya.Attho viññāpanatthāyāti attho jānāpanatthāya.Paṭipucchā ṭhapanatthāyāti pucchā puggalassa ṭhapanatthāya.Okāsakammaṃ codanatthāyāti vatthunā vā āpattiyā vā codanatthāya.Codanā sāraṇatthāyāti dosādosaṃ sarāpanatthāya.Sāraṇā savacanīyatthāyāti dosādosasāraṇā savacanīyakaraṇatthāya.Savacanīyaṃ palibodhatthāyāti savacanīyaṃ ‘‘imamhā āvāsā paraṃ mā pakkamī’’ti evaṃ palibodhatthāya.Palibodho vinicchayatthāyāti vinicchayaṃ pāpanatthāya.Vinicchayo santīraṇatthāyāti dosādosaṃ santīraṇatthāya tulanatthāya.Santīraṇaṃ ṭhānāṭṭhānagamanatthāyāti āpattianāpattigarukalahukāpattijānanatthāya.Saṅgho sampariggahasampaṭicchanatthāyāti vinicchayasampaṭiggahaṇatthāya ca; suvinicchitadubbinicchitabhāvajānanatthāya cāti attho.Paccekaṭṭhāyino avisaṃvādakaṭṭhāyinoti issariyādhipaccajeṭṭhakaṭṭhāne ca avisaṃvādakaṭṭhāne ca ṭhitā; na te apasādetabbāti attho.

366. In "Suttaṃ saṃsandanatthāyāti and others," among the suttas and so on, brought together by him (the preceptor), who is pleasing, agreeable, respectable, and cultivatable to his fellow monks, the sutta is for comparing; it should be understood as for comparing what is an offense and what is not an offense. Opammaṃ nidassanatthāyāti: a simile is for showing the meaning. Attho viññāpanatthāyāti: the meaning is for making known. Paṭipucchā ṭhapanatthāyāti: a question is for establishing a person. Okāsakammaṃ codanatthāyāti: the act of seeking leave is for charging with a thing or an offense. Codanā sāraṇatthāyāti: the charge is for reminding of fault or absence of fault. Sāraṇā savacanīyatthāyāti: the reminding of fault or absence of fault is for making one amenable to instruction. Savacanīyaṃ palibodhatthāyāti: being amenable to instruction is for restraint, such as "Do not leave this monastery." Palibodho vinicchayatthāyāti: restraint is for attaining a judgment. Vinicchayo santīraṇatthāyāti: a judgment is for examining fault or absence of fault, for weighing. Santīraṇaṃ ṭhānāṭṭhānagamanatthāyāti: examining is for knowing what is an offense, what is not an offense, what is a grave offense, and what is a light offense. Saṅgho sampariggahasampaṭicchanatthāyāti: the Sangha is for complete acceptance and reception of the judgment; and the meaning is for knowing the state of being well-judged or badly-judged. Paccekaṭṭhāyino avisaṃvādakaṭṭhāyinoti: those who stand in a position of authority and supremacy and in a position of non-disagreement; they should not be discredited, is the meaning.

vinayo saṃvaratthāyātiādimāha. Tatthavinayo saṃvaratthāyāti sakalāpi vinayapaññatti kāyavacīdvārasaṃvaratthāya. Ājīvavisuddhipariyosānassa sīlassa upanissayo hoti; paccayo hotīti attho. Esa nayo sabbattha. Apicetthaavippaṭisāroti pāpapuññānaṃ katākatavasena cittavippaṭisārābhāvo.Pāmujjanti dubbalā taruṇapīti.Pītīti balavā bahalapīti.Passaddhīti kāyacittadarathapaṭippassaddhi.Sukhanti kāyikacetasikasukhaṃ. Tañhi duvidhampi samādhissa upanissayapaccayo hoti.Samādhīti cittekaggatā.Yathābhūtañāṇadassananti taruṇavipassanā; udayabbayañāṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Cittekaggatā hi taruṇavipassanāya upanissayapaccayo hoti.Nibbidāti sikhāpattā vuṭṭhānagāminibalavavipassanā.Virāgoti ariyamaggo.Vimuttīti arahattaphalaṃ. Catubbidhopi hi ariyamaggo arahattaphalassa upanissayapaccayo hoti.Vimuttiñāṇadassananti paccavekkhaṇāñāṇaṃ.Vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ anupādāparinibbānatthāyāti apaccayaparinibbānatthāya. Apaccayaparinibbānassa hi taṃ paccayo hoti, tasmiṃ anuppatte avassaṃ parinibbāyitabbatoti.Etadatthā kathāti ayaṃ vinayakathā nāma etadatthā.Mantanāti vinayamantanā eva.Upanisāti ayaṃ ‘‘vinayo saṃvaratthāyā’’tiādikā paramparapaccayatāpi etadatthāya.Sotāvadhānanti imissā paramparapaccayakathāya sotāvadhānaṃ. Imaṃ kathaṃ sutvā yaṃ uppajjati ñāṇaṃ, tampi etadatthāya.Yadidaṃ anupādā cittassa vimokkhoti yo ayaṃ catūhi upādānehi anupādiyitvā cittassa arahattaphalasaṅkhāto vimokkho, sopi etadatthāya; apaccayaparinibbānatthāya evāti attho.

He said, vinayo saṃvaratthāyāti and so on. There, vinayo saṃvaratthāyāti: all the rules of the Vinaya are for restraint of the bodily and verbal doors. It is a condition for sīla, which has purity of livelihood as its culmination; it is a requisite, is the meaning. This method applies everywhere. Moreover, here, avippaṭisāroti: the absence of mental remorse due to actions done or not done, whether evil or meritorious. Pāmujjanti: weak, young joy. Pītīti: strong, intense joy. Passaddhīti: tranquility of body and mind. Sukhanti: physical and mental happiness. Indeed, both of these are a condition and requisite for samādhi. Samādhīti: one-pointedness of mind. Yathābhūtañāṇadassananti: young vipassanā; this is a designation for the knowledge of arising and passing away. Indeed, one-pointedness of mind is a condition and requisite for young vipassanā. Nibbidāti: disgust, strong vipassanā that has reached its peak and leads to rising above. Virāgoti: the noble path. Vimuttīti: the fruit of Arahatship. Indeed, the fourfold noble path is a condition and requisite for the fruit of Arahatship. Vimuttiñāṇadassananti: the knowledge of reviewing. Vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ anupādāparinibbānatthāyāti: for attaining parinibbāna without clinging. Indeed, that is a requisite for parinibbāna without clinging, because when that is attained, one must necessarily attain parinibbāna. Etadatthā kathāti: this Vinaya discourse is for this purpose. Mantanāti: it is the very deliberation on the Vinaya. Upanisāti: this series of conditions beginning with "vinayo saṃvaratthāyā" is also for this purpose. Sotāvadhānanti: paying attention to this discourse on the series of conditions. The knowledge that arises from hearing this discourse is also for this purpose. Yadidaṃ anupādā cittassa vimokkhoti: this liberation of the mind, which is freedom from clinging through the four kinds of clinging, namely, the state of Arahatship, is also for this purpose; it is for attaining parinibbāna without clinging, is the meaning.

367.Anuyogavattagāthāsupaṭhamagāthāvuttatthā eva.

367.In the verses on the practice of investigation, the first verse has the meaning as stated.

Vatthuṃ vipattiṃ āpattiṃ, nidānaṃ ākāraakovido pubbāparaṃ na jānātīti ‘‘vatthu’’ntiādīni ‘‘na jānātī’’ti padena sambandho. ‘‘Akovido’’ti padassa ‘‘sa ve tādisako’’ti iminā sambandho. Tasmā ayamettha yojanā – yo bhikkhu pārājikādīnaṃ vatthuṃ na jānāti, catubbidhaṃ vipattiṃ na jānāti, sattavidhaṃ āpattiṃ na jānāti, ‘‘idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ asukasmiṃ nāma nagare paññatta’’nti evaṃ nidānaṃ na jānāti, ‘‘idaṃ purimavacanaṃ idaṃ pacchimavacana’’nti pubbāparaṃ na jānāti, ‘‘idaṃ kataṃ idaṃ akata’’nti katākataṃ na jānāti.Samena cāti teneva pubbāparaṃ ajānanassa samena aññāṇena, ‘‘katākataṃ na jānātī’’ti vuttaṃ hoti; evaṃ tāva najānāti-padena saddhiṃ sambandho veditabbo. Yaṃ panetaṃ ‘‘ākāraakovido’’ti vuttaṃ, tatthaākāraakovidoti kāraṇākāraṇe akovido. Iti yvāyaṃ vatthuādīnipi na jānāti, ākārassa ca akovido, sa ve tādisako bhikkhu apaṭikkhoti vuccati.

Vatthuṃ vipattiṃ āpattiṃ, nidānaṃ ākāraakovido pubbāparaṃ na jānātīti: "vatthuṃ" and the rest are connected with the word "na jānāti" (does not know). The word "akovido" (unskilled) is connected with "sa ve tādisako" (he is such). Therefore, here is the connection: the bhikkhu who does not know the vatthu (basis) of the pārājikas and so on, does not know the four kinds of vipatti (failure), does not know the seven kinds of āpatti (offense), does not know the nidāna (cause) such as "this training rule was established in such and such a city," does not know what is earlier and later, does not know what is done and not done. Samena cāti: by that same ignorance of what is earlier and later, it is said, "does not know what is done and not done"; thus, the connection with the word najānāti (does not know) should be understood. However, regarding what is said as "ākāraakovido," there, ākāraakovidoti: unskilled in cause and non-cause. Thus, that bhikkhu who does not know the vatthu and so on, and is unskilled in cause, is called unendurable.

Kammañca adhikaraṇañcāti imesampi padānaṃ ‘‘na jānātī’’ti padeneva sambandho. Ayaṃ panettha yojanā – tatheva iti yvāyaṃ kammañca na jānāti, adhikaraṇañca na jānāti, sattappakāre samathe cāpi akovido, rāgādīhi pana ratto duṭṭho ca mūḷho ca, bhayena bhayā gacchati, sammohena mohā gacchati, rattattā pana duṭṭhattā ca chandā dosā ca gacchati, paraṃ saññāpetuṃ asamatthatāya na ca saññattikusalo, kāraṇākāraṇadassane asamatthatāya nijjhattiyā ca akovido attano sadisāya parisāya laddhattā laddhapakkho, hiriyā paribāhirattā ahiriko, kāḷakehi kammehi samannāgatattā kaṇhakammo, dhammādariyapuggalādariyānaṃ abhāvato anādaro, sa ve tādisako bhikkhu apaṭikkhoti vuccati, na paṭikkhitabbo na oloketabbo, na sammannitvā issariyādhipaccajeṭṭhakaṭṭhāne ṭhapetabboti attho. Sukkapakkhagāthānampi yojanānayo vuttanayeneva veditabboti.

Kammañca adhikaraṇañcāti: these words are also connected with the word "na jānāti" (does not know). Here is the connection: just so, that bhikkhu who does not know the kamma (act), and does not know the adhikaraṇa (legal question), and is unskilled in the seven kinds of samatha (settlements), and is lustful, hateful, and deluded by rāga and so on, goes to bhaya (fear) through bhaya (fear), goes to moha (delusion) through sammoha (confusion), and through being lustful and hateful, goes to chanda (desire) and dosa (aversion), and is not skilled in saññatti (designation) because he is unable to make (it) known to others, and is unskilled in nijjhatti (explanation) because he is unable to see cause and non-cause, has gained support because he has obtained a company similar to himself, is shameless because he is outside of shame, is a doer of dark deeds because he is endowed with dark deeds, is disrespectful because of the absence of respect for the Dhamma and for persons worthy of respect, that bhikkhu is called unendurable, should not be endured, should not be looked upon, should not be appointed and placed in a position of authority and supremacy, is the meaning. The method of connection for the verses on the bright side should be understood in the same way as stated.

Cūḷasaṅgāmavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Minor Sangāma is finished.

Mahāsaṅgāmo

The Great Sangāma

Voharantena jānitabbādivaṇṇanā

368-374.Mahāsaṅgāme –vatthuto vā vatthuṃ saṅkamatīti ‘‘paṭhamapārājikavatthu mayā diṭṭhaṃ vā sutaṃ vā’’ti vatvā puna pucchiyamāno nighaṃsiyamāno ‘‘na mayā paṭhamapārājikassa vatthu diṭṭhaṃ, na sutaṃ; dutiyapārājikassa vatthu diṭṭhaṃ vā sutaṃ vā’’ti vadati. Eteneva nayena sesavatthusaṅkamanaṃ, vipattito vipattisaṅkamanaṃ āpattito āpattisaṅkamanañca veditabbaṃ. Yo pana ‘‘neva mayā diṭṭhaṃ, na suta’’nti vatvā pacchā ‘‘mayāpetaṃ diṭṭhaṃ vā sutaṃ vā’’ti vadati, ‘‘diṭṭhaṃ vā sutaṃ vā’’ti vatvā pacchā ‘‘na diṭṭhaṃ vā na sutaṃ vā’’ti vadati, ayaṃavajānitvā paṭijānāti, paṭijānitvā avajānātīti veditabbo. Esevaaññenaññaṃ paṭicaratināma.

368-374.In the Great Sangāma – vatthuto vā vatthuṃ saṅkamatīti: having said, "I have seen or heard the first pārājika matter," when asked again and pressed, he says, "I have not seen the matter of the first pārājika, nor heard it; I have seen or heard the matter of the second pārājika." In this same way, the changing from one basis to another, the changing from one failure to another, and the changing from one offense to another should be understood. However, if someone says, "I have neither seen nor heard it," and later says, "I have seen or heard this," or having said, "I have seen or heard it," later says, "I have neither seen nor heard it," this should be understood as avajānitvā paṭijānāti, paṭijānitvā avajānātīti (not knowing, he acknowledges; having acknowledged, he does not know). This itself is called aññenaññaṃ paṭicarati (he deceives with one thing for another).

375.Vaṇṇāvaṇṇoti nīlādivaṇṇāvaṇṇavasena sukkavissaṭṭhisikkhāpadaṃ vuttaṃ.Vacanamanuppadānanti sañcarittaṃ vuttaṃ. Kāyasaṃsaggādittayaṃ sarūpeneva vuttaṃ. Iti imāni pañca methunadhammassa pubbabhāgo pubbapayogoti veditabbāni.

375.Vaṇṇāvaṇṇoti: the training rule on emission of semen is stated in terms of color and lack of color, such as blue and so on. Vacanamanuppadānanti: sañcaritta (intermediary act) is stated. The three beginning with physical contact are stated in their own form. Thus, these five should be understood as the preliminary part, the preliminary effort, of sexual intercourse.

376.Cattāri apalokanakammānīti adhammenavaggādīni. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Iti cattāri catukkāni soḷasa honti.

376.Cattāri apalokanakammānīti: the groups beginning with adhammena vagga (the group by unlawful means). The same method applies in the rest as well. Thus, the four sets of four become sixteen.

Agatiagantabbavaṇṇanā
Description of going to what should not be gone to

379.Bahujanaahitāyapaṭipanno hotīti vinayadharena hi evaṃ chandādigatiyā adhikaraṇe vinicchite tasmiṃ vihāre saṅgho dvidhā bhijjati. Ovādūpajīviniyo bhikkhuniyopi dve bhāgā honti. Upāsakāpi upāsikāyopi dārakāpi dārikāyopi tesaṃ ārakkhadevatāpi tatheva dvidhā bhijjanti. Tato bhummadevatā ādiṃ katvā yāva akaniṭṭhabrahmāno dvidhāva honti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘bahujanaahitāya paṭipanno hoti…pe… dukkhāya devamanussāna’’nti.

379.Bahujanaahitāya paṭipanno hotīti: indeed, when a Vinaya-holder decides a legal question through such biases as chanda (desire) and so on, the Sangha in that monastery is split into two. The bhikkhunīs who live by instruction also become two parts. The male and female lay followers, boys and girls, and their guardian deities likewise split into two. Then, beginning with the earth deities, even up to the Akaniṭṭha Brahmas, they are divided into two. Therefore, it was said, "He is committed to the harm of many people…to the suffering of gods and humans."

382.Visamanissitoti visamāni kāyakammādīni nissito.Gahananissitoti micchādiṭṭhiantaggāhikadiṭṭhisaṅkhātaṃ gahanaṃ nissito.Balavanissitoti balavante abhiññāte bhikkhū nissito.

382.Visamanissitoti: relying on unequal bodily actions and so on. Gahananissitoti: relying on the thicket consisting of wrong view and extreme views. Balavanissitoti: relying on powerful, well-known bhikkhus.

393.Tassa avajānantoti tassa vacanaṃ avajānanto. Upayogatthe vā sāmivacanaṃ, taṃ avajānantoti attho.

393.Tassa avajānantoti: disregarding his words. Or, the genitive case is used in the sense of the dative; the meaning is disregarding him.

394.Yaṃ atthāyāti yadatthāya.Taṃ atthanti so attho. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

394.Yaṃ atthāyāti: for whatever purpose. Taṃ atthanti: that is the purpose. The rest is straightforward everywhere.

Mahāsaṅgāmavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Great Sangāma is finished.

Kathinabhedaṃ

The Breaking of the Kathina

Kathinaatthatādivaṇṇanā
Description of the meaning of the Kathina and so on

403.Kathine –aṭṭha mātikāti khandhake vuttā pakkamanantikādikā aṭṭha.Palibodhānisaṃsāpi pubbe vuttā eva.

403.In the Kathina – aṭṭha mātikāti: the eight mentioned in the Khandhaka beginning with pakkamanantika (ending of going away). Palibodhānisaṃsāpi: the restraints and advantages were also previously stated.

404.Payogassāti cīvaradhovanādino sattavidhassa pubbakaraṇassatthāya yo udakāharaṇādiko payogo kayirati, tassa payogassa.Katame dhammā anantarapaccayena paccayoti anāgatavasena anantarā hutvā katame dhammā paccayā hontīti attho.Samanantarapaccayenāti suṭṭhu anantarapaccayena, anantarapaccayameva āsannataraṃ katvā pucchati.Nissayapaccayenāti uppajjamānassa payogassa nissayaṃ ādhārabhāvaṃ upagatā viya hutvā katame dhammā paccayā hontīti attho.Upanissayapaccayenāti upetena nissayapaccayena; nissayapaccayameva upagatataraṃ katvā pucchati.Purejātapaccayenāti iminā paṭhamaṃ uppannassa paccayabhāvaṃ pucchati.Pacchājātapaccayenāti iminā pacchā uppajjanakassa paccayabhāvaṃ pucchati.Sahajātapaccayenāti iminā apubbaṃ acarimaṃ uppajjamānānaṃ paccayabhāvaṃ pucchati.Pubbakaraṇassāti dhovanādino pubbakaraṇassa.Paccuddhārassāti purāṇasaṅghāṭiādīnaṃ paccuddharaṇassa.Adhiṭṭhānassāti kathinacīvarādhiṭṭhānassa.Atthārassāti kathinatthārassa.Mātikānañca palibodhānañcāti aṭṭhannaṃ mātikānaṃ dvinnañca palibodhānaṃ.Vatthussāti saṅghāṭiādino kathinavatthussa; sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

404.Payogassāti: for the sake of the sevenfold preliminary act of washing the robe and so on, the effort that is made, such as fetching water and so on, that effort. Katame dhammā anantarapaccayena paccayoti: in terms of the future, what things, being immediately prior, are conditions, is the meaning. Samanantarapaccayenāti: by an immediately contiguous condition, he asks by making the immediately contiguous condition even more closely contiguous. Nissayapaccayenāti: what things, having approached the state of being a support or basis for the arising effort, are conditions, is the meaning. Upanissayapaccayenāti: by a condition of support that has been approached; he asks by making the condition of support even more closely approached. Purejātapaccayenāti: with this, he asks about the state of being a condition for what arose first. Pacchājātapaccayenāti: with this, he asks about the state of being a condition for what arises later. Sahajātapaccayenāti: with this, he asks about the state of being a condition for what arises without being either prior or subsequent. Pubbakaraṇassāti: for the preliminary act of washing and so on. Paccuddhārassāti: for the withdrawing of the old double robe and so on. Adhiṭṭhānassāti: for the determination of the Kathina robe and so on. Atthārassāti: for the spreading of the Kathina. Mātikānañca palibodhānañcāti: for the eight mātikās and the two palibodhas. Vatthussāti: for the Kathina cloth, the double robe and so on; the rest is in the same way as stated.

pubbakaraṇaṃ payogassātiādinā nayena vissajjanamāha. Tassattho – yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘payogassa katame dhammā’’tiādi, tattha vuccate, pubbakaraṇaṃ payogassa anantarapaccayena paccayo, samanantaranissayaupanissayapaccayena paccayo. Payogassa hi sattavidhampi pubbakaraṇaṃ yasmā tena payogena nipphādetabbassa pubbakaraṇassatthāya so payogo kayirati, tasmā imehi catūhi paccayehi paccayo hoti. Purejātapaccaye panesa uddiṭṭhadhammesu ekadhammampi na labhati, aññadatthu pubbakaraṇassa sayaṃ purejātapaccayo hoti, payoge sati pubbakaraṇassa nipphajjanato. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘payogo pubbakaraṇassa purejātapaccayena paccayo’’ti. Pacchājātapaccayaṃ pana labhati, tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘pubbakaraṇaṃ payogassa pacchājātapaccayena paccayo’’ti. Pacchā uppajjanakassa hi pubbakaraṇassa atthāya so payogo kayirati. Sahajātapaccayaṃ pana mātikāpalibodhānisaṃsasaṅkhāte pannarasa dhamme ṭhapetvā añño payogādīsu ekopi dhammo na labhati, te eva hi pannarasa dhammā saha kathinatthārena ekato nipphajjantīti aññamaññaṃ sahajātapaccayā honti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘pannarasa dhammā sahajātapaccayena paccayo’’ti. Etenupāyena sabbapadavissajjanāni veditabbāni.

He gives the answer in the manner of pubbakaraṇaṃ payogassāti and so on. Its meaning is: what was said, "What things are conditions for the effort?" and so on, there it is said, the preliminary act is a condition for the effort by way of immediately contiguous condition, by way of contiguity, support, and condition of support. Indeed, since the sevenfold preliminary act is done by that effort for the sake of the preliminary act that is to be accomplished by the effort, therefore, it is a condition by these four conditions. However, in the condition of arising beforehand, it does not obtain even one thing among the things specified, but rather the preliminary act itself is a condition of arising beforehand, because the preliminary act is accomplished when there is effort. Therefore, it was said, "The effort is a condition for the preliminary act by way of the condition of arising beforehand." However, it obtains the condition of arising afterwards, therefore, it was said, "The preliminary act is a condition for the effort by way of the condition of arising afterwards." Indeed, that effort is done for the sake of the preliminary act that arises later. However, the condition of arising together does not obtain even one thing among the effort and so on, except for the fifteen things counted as the mātikās, palibodhas, and advantages, because those fifteen things arise together with the spreading of the Kathina, therefore, they are conditions of arising together with each other. Therefore, it was said, "The fifteen things are conditions by way of the condition of arising together." By this method, all the answers to the words should be understood.

Pubbakaraṇanidānādivibhāgavaṇṇanā
Description of the division of the cause of the preliminary act and so on

405.Pubbakaraṇaṃ kiṃnidānantiādipucchāvissajjanaṃ uttānameva.

405.The question and answer beginning with Pubbakaraṇaṃ kiṃnidānanti is straightforward.

406-7.‘‘Payogo kiṃnidāno’’tiādīsu pucchādvayavissajjanesuhetunidāno paccayanidānoti ettha cha cīvarāni hetu ceva paccayo cāti veditabbāni. Pubbapayogādīnañhi sabbesaṃ tāniyeva hetu, tāni paccayo. Na hi chabbidhe cīvare asati payogo atthi, na pubbakaraṇādīni, tasmā ‘‘payogo hetunidāno’’tiādi vuttaṃ.

406-7.In the questions and answers beginning with "Payogo kiṃnidāno"ti and so on, here in hetunidāno paccayanidānoti, the six robes should be understood as both a hetu (cause) and a paccaya (condition). Indeed, those themselves are the cause and those are the condition for all of the preliminary effort and so on. Indeed, if the six kinds of robes are not present, there is no effort, nor are there preliminary acts and so on, therefore, it was said, "The effort is causally-caused," and so on.

408.Saṅgahavāre –vacībhedenāti ‘‘imāya saṅghāṭiyā, iminā uttarāsaṅgena, iminā antaravāsakena kathinaṃ attharāmī’’ti etena vacībhedena. Katimūlādipucchāvissajjane –kiriyā majjheti paccuddhāro ceva adhiṭṭhānañca.

408.In the Sangaha-vāra – vacībhedenāti: by this verbal difference, "I spread the Kathina with this double robe, with this upper robe, with this lower robe." In the question and answer beginning with katimūla, kiriyā majjheti: the withdrawing and the determination are in the middle.

411.Vatthuvipannaṃ hotīti akappiyadussaṃ hoti.Kālavipannaṃnāma ajja dāyakehi dinnaṃ sve saṅgho kathinatthārakassa deti.Karaṇavipannaṃnāma tadaheva chinditvā akataṃ.

411.Vatthuvipannaṃ hotīti: it is unsuitable cloth. Kālavipannaṃnāma: today it is given by the donors, tomorrow the Sangha gives it for the spreading of the Kathina. Karaṇavipannaṃnāma: having cut it that very day, it is not made.

Kathinādijānitabbavibhāgavaṇṇanā
Description of the division of what should be known about the Kathina and so on

412.Kathinaṃ jānitabbantiādipucchāya vissajjane –tesaññeva dhammānanti yesu rūpādidhammesu sati kathinaṃ nāma hoti, tesaṃ samodhānaṃ missībhāvo.Nāmaṃ nāmakammantiādinā pana ‘‘kathina’’nti idaṃ bahūsu dhammesu nāmamattaṃ, na paramatthato eko dhammo atthīti dasseti.

412.In the question and answer beginning with Kathinaṃ jānitabbanti – tesaññeva dhammānanti: the combination, the mixing together, of those very things in which, when those things such as rūpa and so on are present, the Kathina exists. However, with Nāmaṃ nāmakammanti and so on, it shows that this "Kathina" is merely a name among many things, and there is no single thing in reality.

Catuvīsatiyā ākārehīti ‘‘na ullikhitamattenā’’tiādīhi pubbe vuttakāraṇehi.Sattarasahi ākārehīti ‘‘ahatena atthataṃ hoti kathina’’ntiādīhi pubbe vuttakāraṇehi. Nimittakammādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ sabbaṃ kathinakkhandhakavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttaṃ.

Catuvīsatiyā ākārehīti With twenty-four aspects: "na ullikhitamattenā" etc., by the reasons previously stated. Sattarasahi ākārehīti With seventeen aspects: "ahatena atthataṃ hoti kathina" etc., by the reasons previously stated. Whatever should be said about Nimitta-kamma etc., all that has been said in the Kathinakkhandhaka commentary.

416.Ekuppādā ekanirodhāti uppajjamānāpi ekato uppajjanti, nirujjhamānāpi ekato nirujjhanti.Ekuppādā nānānirodhāti uppajjamānā ekato uppajjanti, nirujjhamānā nānā nirujjhanti. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Sabbepi atthārena saddhiṃ ekato uppajjanti, atthāre hi sati uddhāro nāma. Nirujjhamānā panettha purimā dve atthārena saddhiṃ ekato nirujjhanti, uddhārabhāvaṃ pāpuṇanti. Atthārassa hi nirodho etesañca uddhārabhāvo ekakkhaṇe hoti, itare nānā nirujjhanti. Tesu uddhārabhāvaṃ pattesupi atthāro tiṭṭhatiyeva. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

416.Ekuppādā ekanirodhāti Arising together, they arise at the same time; ceasing together, they cease at the same time. Ekuppādā nānānirodhāti Arising together, they arise at the same time; ceasing differently, they cease at different times. What is said is this: all arise together with the spreading (atthāra); for when there is a spreading, there is a taking up (uddhāra). Here, of those ceasing, the first two cease together with the spreading, attaining the state of being taken up (uddhāra). For the cessation of the spreading and their attaining the state of being taken up occur in one moment, while the others cease differently. Even when those have attained the state of being taken up, the spreading still remains. The rest is obvious everywhere.

Samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya

In the Samantapāsādikā, the Vinaya commentary,

Kathinabhedavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the dissolution of the Kathina is finished.

Paññattivaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Paññatti Vagga is finished.

Upālipañcakaṃ

Upālipañcakaṃ

Anissitavaggavaṇṇanā
Anissitavaggavaṇṇanā

417.Upālipañhesukatihi nu kho bhanteti pucchāya ayaṃ sambandho. Thero kira rahogato sabbāni imāni pañcakāni āvajjetvā ‘‘bhagavantaṃ dāni pucchitvā imesaṃ nissāya vasanakādīnaṃ atthāya tantiṃ ṭhapessāmī’’ti bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘katihi nu kho bhante’’tiādinā nayena pañhe pucchi. Tesaṃ vissajjaneuposathaṃ na jānātīti navavidhaṃ uposathaṃ na jānāti.Uposathakammaṃ na jānātīti adhammenavaggādibhedaṃ catubbidhaṃ uposathakammaṃ na jānāti.Pātimokkhaṃ na jānātīti dve mātikā na jānāti.Pātimokkhuddesaṃ na jānātīti bhikkhūnaṃ pañcavidhaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ catubbidhanti navavidhaṃ pātimokkhuddesaṃ na jānāti.

417.In the Upālipañha, katihi nu kho bhanteti this question is related. It seems that the Elder, having contemplated all these pentads in private, thought, "Now, having asked the Blessed One, I will establish a canon for the purpose of reliance and dwelling," and approaching the Blessed One, he asked the questions in the manner beginning with "katihi nu kho bhante." In the explanation of those, uposathaṃ na jānātīti he does not know the nine kinds of Uposatha. Uposathakammaṃ na jānātīti he does not know the four kinds of Uposatha-kamma, distinguished by adhammena-vagga etc. Pātimokkhaṃ na jānātīti he does not know the two mātikās. Pātimokkhuddesaṃ na jānātīti he does not know the nine kinds of Pātimokkhuddesa, five for bhikkhus and four for bhikkhunīs.

Pavāraṇaṃ na jānātīti navavidhaṃ pavāraṇaṃ na jānāti.Pavāraṇākammaṃ na jānātīti adhammenavaggādibhedaṃ catubbidhaṃ pavāraṇākammaṃ na jānāti.

Pavāraṇaṃ na jānātīti he does not know the nine kinds of Pavāraṇa. Pavāraṇākammaṃ na jānātīti he does not know the four kinds of Pavāraṇa-kamma, distinguished by adhammena-vagga etc.

Āpattānāpattiṃ na jānātīti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sikkhāpade niddiṭṭhaṃ āpattiñca anāpattiñca na jānāti.

Āpattānāpattiṃ na jānātīti he does not know the offense and non-offense specified in each sikkhāpada.

Āpanno kammakatoti āpattiṃ āpanno tappaccayāva saṅghena kammaṃ kataṃ hoti.

Āpanno kammakatoti having committed an offense, the Sangha has performed a kamma because of that.

Nappaṭippassambhanavaggavaṇṇanā
Nappaṭippassambhanavaggavaṇṇanā

420.Kammaṃnappaṭippassambhetabbanti ayaṃ yasmā anulomavatte na vattati, tasmā nāssa kammaṃ paṭippassambhetabbaṃ; sarajjukova vissajjetabboti attho.

420.Kammaṃnappaṭippassambhetabbanti Because this does not accord with proper conduct, his kamma should not be revoked; he should be dismissed directly; this is the meaning.

421.Sace upāli saṅgho samaggakaraṇīyāni kammāni karotīti sace samaggehi karaṇīyāni uposathādīni kammāni karoti, uposathapavāraṇādīsu hi ṭhitāsu upatthambho na dātabbo. Sace hi saṅgho accayaṃ desāpetvā saṅghasāmaggiṃ karoti, tiṇavatthārakasamathaṃ vā katvā uposathapavāraṇaṃ karoti, evarūpaṃ samaggakaraṇīyaṃ nāma kammaṃ hoti.Tatra ceti sace tādise kamme bhikkhuno nakkhamati, diṭṭhāvikammampi katvā tathārūpā sāmaggī upetabbā, evaṃ vilomaggāho na gaṇhitabbo. Yatra pana uddhammaṃ ubbinayaṃ satthu sāsanaṃ dīpenti, tattha diṭṭhāvikammaṃ na vaṭṭati, paṭibāhitvā pakkamitabbaṃ.

421.Sace upāli saṅgho samaggakaraṇīyāni kammāni karotīti If the Sangha performs kammas that should be done by those in concord, such as Uposatha etc., when the Uposatha and Pavāraṇa are established, support should not be given. If the Sangha, having had the transgression confessed, creates concord in the Sangha, or having performed Tiṇavatthāraka-samatha, performs Uposatha and Pavāraṇa, this kind of kamma is called samaggakaraṇīya. Tatra ceti If a bhikkhu is not pleased with such a kamma, even having performed Diṭṭhāvikamma, such harmony should be approached; thus, a reverse grasp should not be taken. But where they proclaim the Teaching that is contrary, the Discipline that is destructive, and the Teacher's dispensation, there Diṭṭhāvikamma is not suitable; having refuted it, one should leave.

Ussitamantī cāti lobhadosamohamānussannaṃ vācaṃ bhāsitā kaṇhavāco anatthakadīpano.Nissitajappīti attano dhammatāya ussadayuttaṃ bhāsituṃ na sakkoti; atha kho ‘‘mayā saddhiṃ rājā evaṃ kathesi, asukamahāmatto evaṃ kathesi, asuko nāma mayhaṃ ācariyo vā upajjhāyo vā tepiṭako mayā saddhiṃ evaṃ kathesī’’ti evaṃ aññaṃ nissāya jappati.Na ca bhāsānusandhikusaloti kathānusandhivacane ca vinicchayānusandhivacane ca akusalo hoti.Na yathādhamme yathāvinayeti na bhūtena vatthunā āpattiṃ sāretvā codetā hoti.

Ussitamantī cāti speaking words filled with greed, hatred, delusion, and pride, speaking dark words that reveal what is unprofitable. Nissitajappīti he is not able to speak with confidence due to his own nature; but rather, "The king spoke thus with me, such-and-such a great minister spoke thus, such-and-such a teacher or preceptor of mine, a Tipiṭaka, spoke thus with me," thus he prattles relying on another. Na ca bhāsānusandhikusaloti he is unskilled in the connection of speech and in the connection of decision. Na yathādhamme yathāvinayeti he is not one who, with a true matter, reminds of the offense and accuses.

Ussādetā hotīti ‘‘amhākaṃ ācariyo mahātepiṭako paramadhammakathiko’’tiādinā nayena ekaccaṃ ussādeti. Dutiyapade ‘‘āpattiṃ kiṃ so na jānātī’’tiādinā ekaccaṃ apasādeti.Adhammaṃ gaṇhātīti aniyyānikapakkhaṃ gaṇhāti.Dhammaṃ paṭibāhatīti niyyānikapakkhaṃ paṭibāhati.Samphañca bahuṃ bhāsatīti bahuṃ niratthakakathaṃ katheti.

Ussādetā hotīti he exalts one, saying, "Our teacher is a great Tipiṭaka, a supreme Dhamma speaker," etc. In the second passage, he debases another, saying, "Does he not know the offense?" etc. Adhammaṃ gaṇhātīti he takes up the side that does not lead out. Dhammaṃ paṭibāhatīti he rejects the side that leads out. Samphañca bahuṃ bhāsatīti he speaks much frivolous talk.

Pasayha pavattā hotīti anajjhiṭṭho bhāre anāropite kevalaṃ mānaṃ nissāya ajjhottharitvā anadhikāre kathetā hoti.Anokāsakammaṃ kāretvāti okāsakammaṃ akāretvā pavattā hoti.Na yathādiṭṭhiyā byākatā hotīti yassa attano diṭṭhi taṃ purakkhatvā na byākatā; laddhiṃ nikkhipitvā ayathābhuccaṃ adhammādīsu dhammādiladdhiko hutvā kathetā hotīti attho.

Pasayha pavattā hotīti though unasked, with the burden not placed upon him, relying solely on pride, having intruded, he speaks without authority. Anokāsakammaṃ kāretvāti having not caused Okāsa-kamma to be done, he proceeds. Na yathādiṭṭhiyā byākatā hotīti he does not explain upholding his own view; having set aside his view, he speaks having the view of Dhamma etc. in what is not truly Dhamma etc.; this is the meaning.

Vohāravaggavaṇṇanā
Vohāravaggavaṇṇanā

424.Āpattiyā payogaṃ na jānātīti ‘‘ayaṃ āpatti kāyappayogā, ayaṃ vacīpayogā’’ti na jānāti.Āpattiyā vūpasamaṃ na jānātīti ‘‘ayaṃ āpatti desanāya vūpasamati, ayaṃ vuṭṭhānena, ayaṃ neva desanāya na vuṭṭhānenā’’ti na jānāti.Āpattiyā na vinicchayakusalohotīti ‘‘imasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ ayaṃ āpattī’’ti na jānāti, dosānurūpaṃ āpattiṃ uddharitvā patiṭṭhāpetuṃ na sakkoti.

424.Āpattiyā payogaṃ na jānātīti he does not know, "This offense is by bodily action, this is by verbal action." Āpattiyā vūpasamaṃ na jānātīti he does not know, "This offense is calmed by confession, this by emergence, this neither by confession nor by emergence." Āpattiyā na vinicchayakusalohotīti he does not know, "In this matter, this is the offense;" he is not able to raise up and establish an offense corresponding to the fault.

Adhikaraṇasamuṭṭhānaṃ na jānātīti ‘‘idaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ aṭṭhārasa bhedakaravatthūni nissāya samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ catasso vipattiyo, idaṃ pañca vā satta vā āpattikkhandhe, idaṃ cattāri saṅghakiccāni nissāya samuṭṭhātī’’ti na jānāti.Payogaṃ na jānātīti ‘‘idaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ dvādasamūlappayogaṃ, idaṃ cuddasamūlappayogaṃ, idaṃ chamūlapayogaṃ, idaṃ ekamūlapayoga’’nti na jānāti. Adhikaraṇānañhi yathāsakaṃmūlameva payogā nāma honti, taṃ sabbampi na jānātīti attho.Vūpasamaṃ na jānātīti ‘‘idaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ dvīhi samathehi vūpasamati, idaṃ tīhi, idaṃ catūhi, idaṃ ekena samathena vūpasamatī’’ti na jānāti.Na vinicchayakusalo hotīti adhikaraṇaṃ vinicchinitvā samathaṃ pāpetuṃ na jānāti.

Adhikaraṇasamuṭṭhānaṃ na jānātīti he does not know, "This Adhikaraṇa arises relying on the eighteen grounds for division, this on the four kinds of failure, this on the five or seven groups of offenses, this arises relying on the four Sangha duties." Payogaṃ na jānātīti he does not know, "This Adhikaraṇa has a twelve-root application, this has a fourteen-root application, this has a six-root application, this has a one-root application." For the applications of Adhikaraṇas are their respective roots; he does not know all of that; this is the meaning. Vūpasamaṃ na jānātīti he does not know, "This Adhikaraṇa is calmed by two Samathas, this by three, this by four, this is calmed by one Samatha." Na vinicchayakusalo hotīti he does not know how to decide the Adhikaraṇa and bring it to Samatha.

Kammaṃ na jānātīti tajjanīyādi sattavidhaṃ kammaṃ na jānāti.Kammassa karaṇaṃ na jānātīti ‘‘idaṃ kammaṃ iminā nīhārena kātabba’’nti na jānāti.Kammassa vatthuṃ na jānātīti ‘‘idaṃ tajjanīyassa vatthu, idaṃ niyassādīna’’nti na jānāti.Vattanti sattasu kammesu heṭṭhā catunnaṃ kammānaṃ aṭṭhārasavidhaṃ tividhassa ca ukkhepanīyakammassa tecattālīsavidhaṃ vattaṃ na jānāti.Kammassa vūpasamaṃ na jānātīti ‘‘yo bhikkhu vatte vattitvā yācati, tassa kammaṃ paṭippassambhetabbaṃ, accayo desāpetabbo’’ti na jānāti.

Kammaṃ na jānātīti he does not know the seven kinds of kamma, such as Tajjanīya etc. Kammassa karaṇaṃ na jānātīti he does not know, "This kamma should be done with this method." Kammassa vatthuṃ na jānātīti he does not know, "This is the basis for Tajjanīya, this for Niyassa etc." Vattanti he does not know the eighteen kinds of Vatta for the four lower kammas among the seven kammas, and the forty-three kinds of Vatta for the three Ukkhepanīya-kammas. Kammassa vūpasamaṃ na jānātīti he does not know, "The bhikkhu who behaves according to the Vatta and begs, his kamma should be revoked, the transgression should be confessed."

Vatthuṃ na jānātīti sattannaṃ āpattikkhandhānaṃ vatthuṃ na jānāti.Nidānaṃ na jānātīti ‘‘idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ imasmiṃ nagare paññattaṃ, idaṃ imasmi’’nti na jānāti.Paññattiṃ na jānātīti paññattianupaññattianuppannapaññattivasena tividhaṃ paññattiṃ na jānāti.Padapaccābhaṭṭhaṃ na jānātīti sammukhā kātabbaṃ padaṃ na jānāti. ‘‘Buddho bhagavā’’ti vattabbe ‘‘bhagavā buddho’’ti heṭṭhupariyaṃ katvā padaṃ yojeti.

Vatthuṃ na jānātīti he does not know the basis for the seven groups of offenses. Nidānaṃ na jānātīti he does not know, "This sikkhāpada was established in this city, this in that." Paññattiṃ na jānātīti he does not know the three kinds of paññatti: paññatti, anupaññatti, and anuppannapaññatti. Padapaccābhaṭṭhaṃ na jānātīti he does not know the word that should be done directly. When it should be said, "Buddho bhagavā," he joins the words having made the lower one upper, saying "Bhagavā buddho."

Akusalo ca hoti vinayeti vinayapāḷiyañca aṭṭhakathāyañca akusalo hoti.

Akusalo ca hoti vinayeti he is unskilled in the Vinaya-pāḷi and in the commentary.

Ñattiṃ na jānātīti saṅkhepato hi duvidhā ñatti – ‘‘esā ñattī’’ti evaṃ niddiṭṭhā ca aniddiṭṭhā ca. Tattha yā evaṃ aniddiṭṭhā, sā ‘‘kammañatti’’ nāma hoti. Yā niddiṭṭhā, sā ‘‘kammapādañatti’’ nāma, taṃ sabbena sabbaṃ ñattiṃ na jānāti.Ñattiyākaraṇaṃ na jānātīti navasu ṭhānesu kammañattiyā karaṇaṃ na jānāti, dvīsu ṭhānesu kammapādañattiyā.Ñattiyā anussāvananti ‘‘imissā ñattiyā ekā anussāvanā, imissā tisso’’ti na jānāti.Ñattiyā samathaṃ na jānātīti yvāyaṃ sativinayo, amūḷhavinayo, tassapāpiyasikā, tiṇavatthārakoti catubbidho samatho ñattiyā vinā na hoti, taṃ ñattiyā samathoti na jānāti.Ñattiyā vūpasamaṃ na jānātīti yaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ iminā catubbidhena ñattisamathena vūpasamati, tassa taṃ vūpasamaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ ñattiyā vūpasamo kato’’ti na jānāti.

Ñattiṃ na jānātīti In brief, there are two kinds of ñatti: that which is specified as "This is the ñatti" and that which is unspecified. Of these, that which is unspecified is called "Kammañatti." That which is specified is called "Kammapādañatti;" he does not know all the ñatti entirely. Ñattiyākaraṇaṃ na jānātīti he does not know the performance of Kammañatti in nine places, and of Kammapādañatti in two places. Ñattiyā anussāvananti he does not know, "This ñatti has one announcement, this has three." Ñattiyā samathaṃ na jānātīti That samatha, which is Sati-vinaya, Amūḷha-vinaya, Tassapāpiyasikā, Tiṇavatthāraka, the fourfold Samatha, does not occur without ñatti; he does not know that as Ñattiyā samatha. Ñattiyā vūpasamaṃ na jānātīti The Adhikaraṇa that is calmed by this fourfold Ñatti-samatha, he does not know its calming, "This calming was done by Ñatti."

Suttaṃ na jānātīti ubhatovibhaṅgaṃ na jānāti.Suttānulomaṃ na jānātīti cattāro mahāpadese na jānāti.Vinayaṃ na jānātīti khandhakaparivāraṃ na jānāti.Vinayānulomaṃ na jānātīti cattāro mahāpadeseyeva na jānāti.Na ca ṭhānāṭhānakusaloti kāraṇākāraṇakusalo na hoti.

Suttaṃ na jānātīti he does not know the Ubhatovibhaṅga. Suttānulomaṃ na jānātīti he does not know the four Mahāpadesas. Vinayaṃ na jānātīti he does not know the Khandhaka-parivāra. Vinayānulomaṃ na jānātīti he does not know the four Mahāpadesas themselves. Na ca ṭhānāṭhānakusaloti he is not skilled in cause and non-cause.

Dhammaṃ na jānātīti ṭhapetvā vinayapiṭakaṃ avasesaṃ piṭakadvayaṃ na jānāti.Dhammānulomaṃ na jānātīti suttantike cattāro mahāpadese na jānāti.Vinayaṃ na jānātīti khandhakaparivārameva na jānāti.Vinayānulomaṃ na jānātīti cattāro mahāpadese na jānāti. Ubhatovibhaṅgā panettha asaṅgahitā honti, tasmāyaṃ kurundiyaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘vinayanti sakalaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ na jānātī’’ti taṃ na gahetabbaṃ.Na ca pubbāparakusalo hotīti purekathāya ca pacchākathāya ca akusalo hoti. Sesaṃ sabbattha vuttapaṭipakkhavasena ñeyyattā pubbe pakāsitattā ca uttānamevāti.

Dhammaṃ na jānātīti setting aside the Vinaya Piṭaka, he does not know the remaining two Piṭakas. Dhammānulomaṃ na jānātīti he does not know the four Mahāpadesas in the Suttantika. Vinayaṃ na jānātīti he does not know the Khandhaka-parivāra itself. Vinayānulomaṃ na jānātīti he does not know the four Mahāpadesas. Here, the Ubhatovibhaṅga is not included; therefore, what is said in the Kurundi, "He does not know the entire Vinaya Piṭaka as Vinaya," that should not be taken. Na ca pubbāparakusalo hotīti he is unskilled in the former and latter speech. The rest is obvious everywhere, since it is to be understood in terms of the opposite of what was said, and since it has been previously explained.

Anissitavagganappaṭippassambhanavaggavohāravaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Anissita Vagga, Nappaṭippassambhana Vagga, and Vohāra Vagga is finished.

Diṭṭhāvikammavaggavaṇṇanā
Diṭṭhāvikammavaggavaṇṇanā

425.Diṭṭhāvikammavagge –diṭṭhāvikammāti diṭṭhīnaṃ āvikammāni; laddhippakāsanāni āpattidesanāsaṅkhātānaṃ vinayakammānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Anāpattiyā diṭṭhiṃ āvi karotīti anāpattimeva āpattīti desetīti attho.Adesanāgāminiyāti garukāpattiyā diṭṭhiṃ āvikaroti; saṅghādisesañca pārājikañca desetīti attho.Desitāyāti lahukāpattiyāpi desitāya diṭṭhiṃ āvikaroti; desitaṃ puna desetīti attho.

425.In the Diṭṭhāvikamma Vagga: diṭṭhāvikammāti Diṭṭhīnaṃ āvikammāni; this is a designation for Vinaya-kammas consisting of revealing views and confessing offenses. Anāpattiyā diṭṭhiṃ āvi karotīti He reveals the view that what is not an offense is an offense; this is the meaning. Adesanāgāminiyāti He reveals the view about a serious offense; he confesses a Saṅghādisesa or Pārājika; this is the meaning. Desitāyāti He reveals the view about even a minor offense that has been confessed; he confesses what has already been confessed; this is the meaning.

Catūhi pañcahi diṭṭhinti yathā catūhi pañcahi diṭṭhi āvikatā hoti, evaṃ āvikaroti; cattāro pañca janā ekato āpattiṃ desentīti attho.Manomānasenāti manasaṅkhātena mānasena diṭṭhiṃ āvikaroti; vacībhedaṃ akatvā citteneva āpattiṃ desetīti attho.

Catūhi pañcahi diṭṭhinti Just as the view is revealed by four or five, so he reveals; four or five people confess an offense together; this is the meaning. Manomānasenāti He reveals the view with Mānasas counted by mind; without making a verbal distinction, he confesses the offense in thought; this is the meaning.

Nānāsaṃvāsakassāti laddhinānāsaṃvāsakassa vā kammanānāsaṃvāsakassa vā santike diṭṭhiṃ āvikaroti; āpattiṃ desetīti attho.Nānāsīmāyāti samānasaṃvāsakassāpi nānāsīmāya ṭhitassa santike āvikaroti. Māḷakasīmāya hi ṭhitena sīmantarikāya ṭhitassa sīmantarikāya vā ṭhitena avippavāsasīmāya ṭhitassāpi āpattiṃ desetuṃ na vaṭṭati.Apakatattassāti ukkhittakassa vā, yassa vā uposathapavāraṇā ṭhapitā honti, tassa santike desetīti attho.

Nānāsaṃvāsakassāti He reveals the view in the presence of one of different association by view or of different association by kamma; he confesses the offense; this is the meaning. Nānāsīmāyāti Even to one of the same association, he reveals in the presence of one standing in a different boundary. For one standing in the Māḷaka boundary is not allowed to confess an offense to one standing in the boundary interval, or one standing in the boundary interval to one standing in the boundary of non-separation. Apakatattassāti He confesses in the presence of one who has been expelled, or whose Uposatha and Pavāraṇa have been suspended; this is the meaning.

430.Nālaṃ okāsakammaṃ kātunti na pariyattaṃ kātuṃ; na kātabbanti attho. Idhāpi apakatatto ukkhittako ca ṭhapitauposathapavāraṇo ca.Cāvanādhippāyoti sāsanato cāvetukāmo.

430.Nālaṃ okāsakammaṃ kātunti Not fit to do Okāsa-kamma; not fit to do it; this is the meaning. Here too, Apakatatta means one who has been expelled, and one whose Uposatha and Pavāraṇa have been suspended. Cāvanādhippāyoti intending to remove from the Sāsana.

432.Mandattāmomūhattāti mandabhāvena momūhabhāvena vissajjitampi jānituṃ asamattho, kevalaṃ attano momūhabhāvaṃ pakāsentoyeva pucchati ummattako viya.Pāpicchoti ‘‘evaṃ maṃ jano sambhāvessatī’’ti pāpikāya icchāya pucchati.Paribhavāti paribhavaṃ āropetukāmo hutvā pucchati. Aññabyākaraṇesupi eseva nayo. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti. Attādānavagge ca dhutaṅgavagge ca yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva.

432.Mandattāmomūhattāti Due to dullness, due to delusion, he is unable to understand even what has been explained, only revealing his own delusion, he asks like a madman. Pāpicchoti He asks with evil desire, thinking, "Thus people will esteem me." Paribhavāti He asks intending to bring about contempt. This same method applies to other explanations as well. The rest is obvious everywhere. Whatever should be said in the Attādāna Vagga and the Dhutaṅga Vagga, all that has been said below.

Diṭṭhāvikammavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Seen Offenses Chapter is Concluded.

Musāvādavaggavaṇṇanā
Commentary on the False Speech Chapter

444.Musāvādavagge – pārājikaṃ gacchatītipārājikagāmī;pārājikāpattibhāvaṃ pāpuṇātīti attho. Itaresupi eseva nayo. Tattha asantauttarimanussadhammārocanamusāvādo pārājikagāmī, amūlakena pārājikena anuddhaṃsanamusāvādosaṅghādisesagāmī,‘‘yo te vihāre vasatī’’tiādinā pariyāyena jānantassa vuttamusāvādothullaccayagāmī,ajānantassadukkaṭagāmī,‘‘sampajānamusāvāde pācittiya’’nti āgatopācittiyagāmīti veditabbo.

444.In the False Speech Chapter—pārājikagāmī means "going to a pārājika," that is, reaching the state of a pārājika offense. The same method applies to the others as well. Here, the false speech claiming attainment of superior human qualities (uttarimanussadhamma) is pārājikagāmī; the false accusation of a pārājika offense without foundation is saṅghādisesagāmī; the false speech spoken with contrivance (pariyāyena), such as "he who dwells in your vihāra," knowing (the truth), is thullaccayagāmī; not knowing, it is dukkaṭagāmī; that which comes in the statement, "In intentional false speech, a pācittiya offense occurs," is to be understood as pācittiyagāmī.

Adassanenāti vinayadharassa adassanena. Kappiyākappiyesu hi kukkucce uppanne vinayadharaṃ disvā kappiyākappiyabhāvaṃ paṭipucchitvā akappiyaṃ pahāya kappiyaṃ kareyya, taṃ apassanto pana akappiyampi kappiyanti karonto āpajjati. Evaṃ āpajjitabbaṃ āpattiṃ vinayadharassa dassanena nāpajjati, adassaneneva āpajjati, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘adassanenā’’ti.Assavanenāti ekavihārepi vasanto pana vinayadharassa upaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā kappiyākappiyaṃ apucchitvā vā aññesañca vuccamānaṃ asuṇanto āpajjatiyeva, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘assavanenā’’ti.Pasuttakatāti pasuttakatāya. Sahagāraseyyañhi pasuttakabhāvenapi āpajjati. Akappiye kappiyasaññitāya āpajjanto panatathāsaññīāpajjati.Satisammosāekarattātikkamādivasena āpajjitabbaṃ āpajjati. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

Adassanenāti, "by not seeing," means by not seeing a Vinaya-holder. For if, when doubt arises about what is allowable and unallowable, one were to see a Vinaya-holder and ask about the nature of what is allowable and unallowable, and abandon what is unallowable and do what is allowable, one would not commit an offense. But not seeing him, one commits an offense even while thinking what is unallowable is allowable. Thus, one does not commit the offense that one would commit by seeing a Vinaya-holder; one commits it only by not seeing him. Therefore, it was said, "by not seeing." Assavanenāti, "by not hearing," means even while dwelling in the same vihāra, if one does not go to attend upon a Vinaya-holder and ask about what is allowable and unallowable, or if one does not hear what others are saying, one certainly commits an offense. Therefore, it was said, "by not hearing." Pasuttakatāti, "by being addicted," means by addiction. For shared sleeping quarters result in an offense even through addiction (pasuttakabhāva). But when committing an offense while perceiving what is unallowable as allowable, one commits the offense as tathāsaññī. Satisammosā, "through forgetfulness," means one commits the offense that is to be committed due to the passing of one night, etc. The rest is straightforward everywhere.

Musāvādavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the False Speech Chapter is Concluded.

Bhikkhunovādavaggavaṇṇanā
Commentary on the Chapter on Admonishing Nuns

450.Bhikkhunivagge –alābhāyāti catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ alābhatthāya; yathā paccaye na labhanti, tathā parisakkati vāyamatīti attho.Anatthāyāti anatthaṃ kalisāsanaṃ āropento parisakkati.Avāsāyāti avāsatthāya; yasmiṃ gāmakhette vasanti, tato nīharaṇatthāya.Sampayojetīti asaddhammapaṭisevanatthāya sampayojeti.

450.In the Chapter on Nuns—alābhāyāti, "for the sake of non-gain," means for the sake of not obtaining the four requisites; he strives and endeavors so that they do not obtain the requisites. Anatthāyāti, "for the sake of harm," means he strives while bringing harm to the Kālī's teaching. Avāsāyāti, "for the sake of expulsion," means for the sake of driving them out from the village area in which they dwell. Sampayojetīti, "he associates," means he associates them for the sake of indulging in unrighteous practices.

451.‘‘Katihi nu kho bhante aṅgehi samannāgatāya bhikkhuniyā kammaṃ kātabba’’nti sattannaṃ kammānaṃ aññataraṃ sandhāya pucchati.

451.“With how many qualities, venerable sir, should a nun be endowed in order to perform an act (kamma)?” He asks referring to one of the seven kinds of acts.

454.Na sākacchātabboti kappiyākappiyanāmarūpaparicchedasamathavipassanādibhedo kathāmaggo na kathetabbo. Yasmā pana khīṇāsavo bhikkhu na visaṃvādeti, tathārūpassa kathāmaggassa sāmī hutvā katheti, na itaro; tasmā paṭhamapañcake ‘‘na asekkhenā’’ti paṭikkhipitvā dutiyapañcake ‘‘asekkhenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.

454.Na sākacchātabboti, "should not be conversed with," means the path of discussion, such as distinguishing what is allowable and unallowable, name and form, serenity and insight, should not be spoken. Since a bhikkhu who is an arahant does not deceive, he is the master of such a path of discussion and speaks, not another; therefore, in the first set of five, after rejecting with "not by one who is a learner," in the second set of five, "by one who is a learner," etc., was said.

Na atthapaṭisambhidāpattoti aṭṭhakathāya paṭisambhidāpatto pabhedagatañāṇappatto na hoti.Na dhammapaṭisambhidāpattoti pāḷidhamme paṭisambhidāpatto na hoti.Na niruttipaṭisambhidāpattoti vohāraniruttiyaṃ paṭisambhidāpatto na hoti.Na paṭibhānapaṭisambhidāpattoti yāni tāni paṭibhānasaṅkhātāni atthapaṭisambhidādīni ñāṇāni, tesu paṭisambhidāpatto na hoti.Yathāvimuttaṃcittaṃ na paccavekkhitāti catunnaṃ phalavimuttīnaṃ vasena yathāvimuttaṃ cittaṃ ekūnavīsatibhedāya paccavekkhaṇāya na paccavekkhitā hoti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

Na atthapaṭisambhidāpattoti, "not attained to the attha-paṭisambhidā," means he is not one who has attained knowledge in the aspects of analytical knowledge according to the commentary. Na dhammapaṭisambhidāpattoti, "not attained to the dhamma-paṭisambhidā," means he is not one who has attained analytical knowledge in the Pali texts. Na niruttipaṭisambhidāpattoti, "not attained to the nirutti-paṭisambhidā," means he is not one who has attained analytical knowledge in conventional language. Na paṭibhānapaṭisambhidāpattoti, "not attained to the paṭibhāna-paṭisambhidā," means he is not one who has attained analytical knowledge in those kinds of knowledge called ready-wittedness, such as attha-paṭisambhidā, etc. Yathāvimuttaṃ cittaṃ na paccavekkhitāti, "does not review the mind as it is released," means she does not review the mind as it is released according to the four fruits of liberation, with the nineteenfold review. The rest is straightforward everywhere.

Bhikkhunovādavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Chapter on Admonishing Nuns is Concluded.

Ubbāhikavaggavaṇṇanā
Commentary on the Expulsion Chapter

455.Ubbāhikavagge –na atthakusaloti na aṭṭhakathākusalo; atthuddhāre cheko na hoti.Na dhammakusaloti ācariyamukhato anuggahitattā pāḷiyaṃ na kusalo, na pāḷisūro.Naniruttikusaloti bhāsantaravohāre na kusalo.Na byañjanakusaloti sithiladhanitādivasena parimaṇḍalabyañjanāropane kusalo na hoti; na akkharaparicchede nipuṇoti attho.Na pubbāparakusaloti atthapubbāpare dhammapubbāpare niruttipubbāpare byañjanapubbāpare purekathāpacchākathāsu ca na kusalo hoti.

455.In the Expulsion Chapter—na atthakusaloti, "not skilled in meaning," means not skilled in the commentary; he is not clever in extracting the meaning. Na dhammakusaloti, "not skilled in the Dhamma," means because it has not been received from the teacher's mouth, he is not skilled in the Pali, not a hero in the Pali. Na niruttikusaloti, "not skilled in language," means he is not skilled in other languages and conventions. Na byañjanakusaloti, "not skilled in phonetics," means he is not skilled in applying rounded phonetics, such as lax and emphatic; that is, he is not skilled in distinguishing letters. Na pubbāparakusaloti, "not skilled in what precedes and follows," means he is not skilled in what precedes and follows in meaning, what precedes and follows in the Dhamma, what precedes and follows in language, what precedes and follows in phonetics, and in earlier and later statements.

Kodhanotiādīni yasmā kodhādīhi abhibhūto kāraṇākāraṇaṃ na jānāti, vinicchituṃ na sakkoti, tasmā vuttāni.Pasāretā hotino sāretāti mohetā hoti, na satiuppādetā; codakacuditakānaṃ kathaṃ moheti pidahati na sāretīti attho. Sesamettha ubbāhikavagge uttānamevāti.

Kodhanotiādīni, "angry," etc., were said because one overcome by anger, etc., does not know what is reasonable and unreasonable, and cannot decide. Pasāretā hoti no sāretāti, "he bewilders, but does not remind," means he confuses and conceals the accuser and the accused; that is, how he confuses and conceals and does not remind. The rest here in the Expulsion Chapter is straightforward.

Ubbāhikavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Expulsion Chapter is Concluded.

Adhikaraṇavūpasamavaggavaṇṇanā
Commentary on the Chapter on the Settling of Disputes

457.Adhikaraṇavūpasamavagge –puggalagaru hotīti ‘‘ayaṃ me upajjhāyo, ayaṃ me ācariyo’’tiādīni cintetvā tassa jayaṃ ākaṅkhamāno ‘‘adhammaṃ dhammo’’ti dīpeti.Saṅghagaru hotīti dhammañca vinayañca amuñcitvā vinicchinanto saṅghagaruko nāma hoti. Cīvarādīni gahetvā vinicchinantoāmisagarukonāma hoti, tāni aggahetvā yathādhammaṃ vinicchinantosaddhammagarukonāma hoti.

457.In the Chapter on the Settling of Disputes—puggalagaru hotīti, "he is respectful of persons," means thinking, "This is my preceptor, this is my teacher," etc., and desiring his victory, he declares, "What is not Dhamma is Dhamma." Saṅghagaru hotīti, "he is respectful of the Sangha," means one who decides without abandoning the Dhamma and the Vinaya is called "respectful of the Sangha." One who decides while taking robes, etc., is called āmisagaruko, "respectful of material gains"; one who decides according to the Dhamma without taking them is called saddhammagaruko, "respectful of the true Dhamma."

458.Pañcahupāli ākārehīti pañcahi kāraṇehi saṅgho bhijjati –kammena, uddesena, voharanto, anussāvanena, salākaggāhenāti. Etthakammenāti apalokanādīsu catūsu kammesu aññatarena kammena.Uddesenāti pañcasu pātimokkhuddesesu aññatarena uddesena.Voharantoti kathayanto; tāhi tāhi upapattīhi ‘‘adhammaṃ dhammo’’tiādīni aṭṭhārasa bhedakaravatthūni dīpento.Anussāvanenāti ‘‘nanu tumhe jānātha mayhaṃ uccākulā pabbajitabhāvaṃ bahussutabhāvañca, mādiso nāma uddhammaṃ ubbinayaṃ satthu sāsanaṃ gāheyyāti cittampi uppādetuṃ tumhākaṃ yuttaṃ, kiṃ mayhaṃ avīci nīluppalavanamiva sītalo, kimahaṃ apāyato na bhāyāmī’’tiādinā nayena kaṇṇamūle vacībhedaṃ katvā anussāvanena.Salākaggāhenāti evaṃ anussāvetvā tesaṃ cittaṃ upatthambhetvā anivattidhamme katvā ‘‘gaṇhatha imaṃ salāka’’nti salākaggāhena.

458.Pañcahupāli ākārehīti, "in five ways, Upāli," means the Sangha is split by five causes—kammena, uddesena, voharanto, anussāvanena, salākaggāhenāti, by an act, by recitation, by speaking, by proclamation, and by taking lots. Here, kammenāti, "by an act," means by an act among the four kinds of acts, beginning with inquiry. Uddesenāti, "by recitation," means by a recitation among the five recitations of the Pātimokkha. Voharantoti, "by speaking," means by declaring the eighteen grounds for division, such as "what is not Dhamma is Dhamma," with those various justifications. Anussāvanenāti, "by proclamation," means by making a split in speech near the ear with the method, "Do you not know that I went forth from a high-class family and have great learning? It is fitting for you to even conceive the thought that one like me would grasp the distorted Dhamma and the distorted Vinaya, the teaching of the Teacher. Is Avīci as cool to me as a blue lotus pond? Do I not fear the lower realms?" Salākaggāhenāti, "by taking lots," means after proclaiming thus and supporting their minds, making them of unchangeable conviction, by taking lots, "Take this lot."

saṅghabhedakakkhandhakavaṇṇanāyaṃavocumhā ‘‘evaṃ aṭṭhārasasu vatthūsu yaṃkiñci ekampi vatthuṃ dīpetvā tena tena kāraṇena ‘imaṃ gaṇhatha, imaṃ rocethā’ti saññāpetvā salākaṃ gāhetvā visuṃ saṅghakamme kate saṅgho bhinno hoti. Parivāre pana ‘pañcahi, upāli, ākārehi saṅgho bhijjatī’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassa iminā idha vuttena saṅghabhedalakkhaṇena atthato nānākaraṇaṃ natthi. Taṃ panassa nānākaraṇābhāvaṃ tattheva pakāsayissāmā’’ti, svāyaṃ pakāsito hoti.

saṅghabhedakakkhandhakavaṇṇanāyaṃ, in the commentary on the Schism Chapter, we said, “Thus, having declared any one thing whatsoever among the eighteen things, and having made them understand with that cause, ‘Take this, approve of this,’ and having had them take a lot, when a separate act of the Sangha is done, the Sangha is split. But in the Parivāra, ‘In five ways, Upāli, the Sangha is split,’ etc., was said. There is no difference in meaning between that and this characteristic of the splitting of the Sangha stated here. But we will reveal the absence of that difference there,” and now that has been revealed.

Paññattetanti paññattaṃ etaṃ. Kva paññattaṃ? Vattakkhandhake. Tatra hi cuddasa khandhakavattāni paññattāni. Tenāha – ‘‘paññattetaṃ, upāli, mayā āgantukānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ āgantukavatta’’ntiādi.Evampi kho upāli saṅgharāji hoti, no ca saṅghabhedoti ettāvatā hi saṅgharājimattameva hoti, na tāva saṅghabhedo; anupubbena pana ayaṃ saṅgharāji vaḍḍhamānā saṅghabhedāya saṃvattatīti attho.Yathārattanti rattiparimāṇānurūpaṃ; yathātheranti attho.Āvenibhāvaṃ karitvāti visuṃ vavatthānaṃ karitvā.Kammākammāni karontīti aparāparaṃ saṅghakammaṃ upādāya khuddakāni ceva mahantāni ca kammāni karonti. Sesametthāpi adhikaraṇavūpasamavagge uttānameva.

Paññattetanti, "this is prescribed," means this is prescribed. Where is it prescribed? In the Chapter on Observances. For there, the thirteen chapter observances are prescribed. Therefore, he said, "This is prescribed by me, Upāli, as the observance for visiting bhikkhus." Evampi kho upāli saṅgharāji hoti, no ca saṅghabhedoti, "Even so, Upāli, this is merely a crack in the Sangha, but not yet a schism," means up to this point, there is merely a crack in the Sangha, not yet a schism; but gradually this crack in the Sangha, growing, leads to schism. Yathārattanti, "according to rank," means according to the measure of rank; that is, according to seniority. Āvenibhāvaṃ karitvāti, "having made a separate arrangement," means having made a distinct separation. Kammākammāni karontīti, "they do acts and non-acts," means undertaking successive acts of the Sangha, they do small and large acts. The rest here also in the Chapter on the Settling of Disputes is straightforward.

Saṅghabhedakavaggadvayavaṇṇanā
Commentary on the Two Chapters on Schism

459.Saṅghabhedavaggadvaye –vinidhāya diṭṭhiṃ kammenāti tesu adhammādīsu adhammādayo eteti evaṃdiṭṭhikova hutvā taṃ diṭṭhiṃ vinidhāya te dhammādivasena dīpetvā visuṃ kammaṃ karoti. Iti yaṃ vinidhāya diṭṭhiṃ kammaṃ karoti, tena evaṃ katena vinidhāya diṭṭhiṃ kammena saddhiṃ pañcaṅgāni honti, ‘‘imehi kho upāli pañcahaṅgehī’’ti ayamekasmiṃ pañcake atthayojanā. Etena nayena sabbapañcakāni veditabbāni. Etthāpi ca vohārādi aṅgattayaṃ pubbabhāgavaseneva vuttaṃ. Kammuddesavasena pana atekicchatā veditabbā. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānameva. Na hettha kiñci atthi yaṃ pubbe avuttanayaṃ.

459.In the two Chapters on Schism—vinidhāya diṭṭhiṃ kammenāti, "having abandoned a view, by an act," means having a view that "what is not Dhamma," etc., is "what is Dhamma," etc., and abandoning that view, declaring those things as "Dhamma," etc., he does a separate act. Thus, by whatever act he does having abandoned a view, by that doing, along with the act of abandoning a view, there are five factors. "In these five factors, Upāli," this is the connection of meaning in one set of five. By this method, all the sets of five should be understood. And here also, the set of three factors beginning with speech has been stated only as a preliminary part. But the impossibility of treatment should be understood as due to the act of recitation. The rest is straightforward everywhere. There is nothing here whose method has not been stated before.

Āvāsikavaggavaṇṇanā
Commentary on the Chapter on Dwellings

461.Āvāsikavagge –yathābhataṃ nikkhittoti yathā āharitvā ṭhapito.

461.In the Chapter on Dwellings—yathābhataṃ nikkhittoti, "put away as it was brought," means as it was brought and kept.

462.Vinayabyākaraṇāti vinayapañhe vissajjanā.Pariṇāmetīti niyāmeti dīpeti katheti. Sesamettha uttānameva.

462.Vinayabyākaraṇāti, "explanations of the Vinaya," means answers to questions about the Vinaya. Pariṇāmetīti, "he modifies," means he determines, declares, speaks. The rest here is straightforward.

Kathinatthāravaggavaṇṇanā
Commentary on the Chapter on the Spreading Out of the Kathina Robe

467.Kathinatthāravagge –otamasikoti andhakāragato; tañhi vandantassa mañcapādādīsupi nalāṭaṃ paṭihaññeyya.Asamannāharantoti kiccayapasutattā vandanaṃ asamannāharanto.Suttoti niddaṃ okkanto.Ekāvattoti ekato āvatto sapattapakkhe ṭhito verī visabhāgapuggalo vuccati; ayaṃ avandiyo. Ayañhi vandiyamāno pādenapi pahareyya.Aññavihitoti aññaṃ cintayamāno.

467.In the Chapter on the Spreading Out of the Kathina Robe—otamasikoti, "one who is in darkness," because when he bows, his forehead might strike a bed leg, etc. Asamannāharantoti, "not attending," means not attending to the act of bowing due to being engrossed in duties. Suttoti, "one who is sleeping," means one who has fallen into sleep. Ekāvattoti, "one who is hostile," means one who is turned to one side, standing on the side of an opponent, is called a hostile, uncongenial person; this one is not to be venerated. For if he were to be venerated, he might strike with his foot. Aññavihitoti, "one who is otherwise occupied," means one who is thinking of something else.

Khādantoti piṭṭhakhajjakādīni khādanto.Uccārañca passāvañca karontoanokāsagatattā avandiyo.Ukkhittakoti tividhenapi ukkhepanīyakammena ukkhittako avandiyo. Tajjanīyādikammakatā pana cattāro vanditabbā. Uposathapavāraṇāpi tehi saddhiṃ labbhanti. Ādito paṭṭhāya ca vuttesu avandiyesu naggañca ukkhittakañca vandantasseva āpatti. Itaresaṃ pana asāruppaṭṭhena ca antarā vuttakāraṇena ca vandanā paṭikkhittā. Ito paraṃpacchāupasampannādayodasapi āpattivatthubhāveneva avandiyā. Te vandantassa hi niyameneva āpatti. Iti imesu pañcasu pañcakesu terasa jane vandantassa anāpatti, dvādasannaṃ vandanāya āpatti.

Khādantoti, "one who is eating," means one who is eating cakes, fried cakes, etc. Uccārañca passāvañca karonto, "one who is urinating or defecating," because he is in an unsuitable place, is not to be venerated. Ukkhittakoti, "one who is suspended," means one who is suspended by any of the three kinds of acts of suspension is not to be venerated. But the four who are subject to acts of censure, etc., are to be venerated. The uposatha and pavāraṇā are also available to them. And among those who are not to be venerated who have been stated from the beginning, an offense occurs only for one who venerates a naked person and one who is suspended. But for the others, veneration is prohibited due to inappropriateness and due to the reason stated in between. From here on, the ten beginning with pacchāupasampannādayo, "those ordained later," are not to be venerated only because they are grounds for offense. For an offense invariably occurs for one who venerates them. Thus, in these five sets of five, there is no offense for one who venerates thirteen persons, and an offense occurs for venerating twelve.

468.Ācariyovandiyoti pabbajjācariyo upasampadācariyo nissayācariyo uddesācariyo ovādācariyoti ayaṃ pañcavidhopi ācariyo vandiyo. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

468.Ācariyo vandiyoti, "the teacher is to be venerated," means the five kinds of teachers—the ordination teacher, the higher ordination teacher, the dependence teacher, the instructor teacher, and the advice teacher—are to be venerated. The rest is straightforward everywhere.

Kathinatthāravaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Chapter on the Spreading Out of the Kathina Robe is Concluded.

Niṭṭhitā ca upālipañcakavaṇṇanā.

And the Commentary on the Upāli's Sets of Five is Concluded.

Āpattisamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā

Commentary on the Arising of Offenses

470.Acittakoāpajjatītiādīsu sahaseyyādipaṇṇattivajjaṃ asañcicca āpajjanto acittako āpajjati, desento sacittako vuṭṭhāti. Yaṃkiñci sañcicca āpajjanto sacittako āpajjati, tiṇavatthārakena vuṭṭhahanto acittako vuṭṭhāti. Pubbe vuttameva tiṇavatthārakena vuṭṭhahanto acittako āpajjati, acittako vuṭṭhāti. Itaraṃ desento sacittako āpajjati, sacittako vuṭṭhāti. ‘‘Dhammadānaṃ karomī’’ti padasodhammādīni karonto kusalacitto āpajjati, ‘‘buddhānaṃ anusāsaniṃ karomī’’ti udaggacitto desento kusalacitto vuṭṭhāti. Domanassiko hutvā desento akusalacitto vuṭṭhāti, tiṇavatthārakena niddāgatova vuṭṭhahanto abyākatacitto vuṭṭhāti. Bhiṃsāpanādīni katvā ‘‘buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ karomī’’ti somanassiko desento akusalacitto āpajjati, kusalacitto vuṭṭhāti. Domanassikova desento akusalacitto vuṭṭhāti, vuttanayeneva tiṇavatthārakena vuṭṭhahanto abyākatacitto vuṭṭhāti. Niddokkantasamaye sahagāraseyyaṃ āpajjanto abyākatacitto āpajjati, vuttanayeneva panettha ‘‘kusalacitto vuṭṭhātī’’tiādi veditabbaṃ.

470.In Acittako āpajjatītiādīsu, "One who is unintentional incurs an offense," etc., one who unintentionally commits a paṇṇattivajja such as sharing sleeping quarters incurs an offense unintentionally, and emerging, one is intentional. Whatever one commits intentionally, one incurs an offense intentionally, and emerging with a covering of grass, one is unintentional. Having stated earlier that one who emerges with a covering of grass incurs an offense unintentionally, one emerges unintentionally. In the other case, emerging, one incurs an offense intentionally, and one emerges intentionally. Doing the giving of the Dhamma, "Dhammadānaṃ karomī," etc., and making a verse-by-verse recitation of the Dhamma, one with a wholesome mind incurs an offense, and declaring with an uplifted mind, "I am doing the Teacher's instruction," one emerges with a wholesome mind. Emerging while being distressed, one emerges with an unwholesome mind, and emerging having fallen asleep with a covering of grass, one emerges with an indeterminate mind. Having done frightening, etc., and declaring with a joyful mind, "I am doing the Buddha's teaching," one incurs an offense with an unwholesome mind, and one emerges with a wholesome mind. Emerging being distressed, one emerges with an unwholesome mind, and emerging with a covering of grass in the manner stated, one emerges with an indeterminate mind. At the time of falling asleep, incurring the offense of sharing sleeping quarters, one incurs an offense with an indeterminate mind, and here also, "one emerges with a wholesome mind," etc., should be understood in the manner stated.

Paṭhamaṃ pārājikaṃ katihi samuṭṭhānehītiādi pubbe vuttanayattā uttānameva.

Paṭhamaṃ pārājikaṃ katihi samuṭṭhānehītiādi, "From how many sources does the first pārājika arise?" etc., is straightforward because of the method stated earlier.

473.Cattāro pārājikā katihi samuṭṭhānehītiādīsu ukkaṭṭhaparicchedato yaṃ yaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ yassa yassa labbhati, taṃ sabbaṃ vuttameva hoti.

473.In Cattāro pārājikā katihi samuṭṭhānehītiādīsu, "From how many sources do the four pārājika offenses arise?" etc., whatever source is obtained by whomever from the standpoint of the highest determination, all that has been stated.

Āpattisamuṭṭhānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Arising of Offenses is Concluded.

Aparadutiyagāthāsaṅgaṇikaṃ

Appendix to the Second Verse

(1) Kāyikādiāpattivaṇṇanā
(1) Commentary on Offenses of Bodily Action, etc.

474.‘‘Kati āpattiyo kāyikā’’tiādigāthānaṃ vissajjanecha āpattiyo kāyikāti antarapeyyāle catutthena āpattisamuṭṭhānena cha āpattiyo āpajjati, ‘‘bhikkhu methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevati, āpatti pārājikassā’’tiādinā nayena vuttāpattiyo. Kāyadvāre samuṭṭhitattā hi etā kāyikāti vuccanti.Cha vācasikāti tasmiṃyeva antarapeyyāle pañcamena āpattisamuṭṭhānena cha āpattiyo āpajjati, ‘‘bhikkhu pāpiccho icchāpakato’’tiādinā nayena vuttāpattiyo.Chādentassa tissoti vajjapaṭicchādikāya bhikkhuniyā pārājikaṃ, bhikkhussa saṅghādisesapaṭicchādane pācittiyaṃ, attano duṭṭhullāpattipaṭicchādane dukkaṭaṃ.Pañca saṃsaggapaccayāti bhikkhuniyā kāyasaṃsagge pārājikaṃ, bhikkhuno saṅghādiseso, kāyena kāyapaṭibaddhe thullaccayaṃ, nissaggiyena kāyapaṭibaddhe dukkaṭaṃ, aṅgulipatodake pācittiyanti imā kāyasaṃsaggapaccayā pañcāpattiyo.

474. In the explanation of the verses beginning with "How many offenses are physical?", six offenses are physical: In the intervening expansion, one incurs six offenses through the fourth origination of offenses, the offenses stated in the manner beginning with "If a bhikkhu engages in sexual intercourse, there is an offense entailing expulsion." These are called physical because they originate through the body's door. Six are verbal: In that same intervening expansion, one incurs six offenses through the fifth origination of offenses, the offenses stated in the manner beginning with "If a bhikkhu is evil-wishing, subject to desire." For one who conceals, three: For a bhikkhuni who conceals a fault, there is a pārājika; for a bhikkhu concealing a saṅghādisesa, there is a pācittiya; for concealing one's own serious offense, there is a dukkaṭa. Five are conditioned by contact: For a bhikkhuni, there is a pārājika for bodily contact; for a bhikkhu, a saṅghādisesa; for contact related to the body by the body, a thullaccaya; for a nissaggiya related to the body, a dukkaṭa; for flicking with the finger, a pācittiya. These five offenses are conditioned by bodily contact.

Aruṇugge tissoti ekarattachārattasattāhadasāhamāsātikkamavasena nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ, bhikkhuniyā rattivippavāse saṅghādiseso, ‘‘paṭhamampi yāmaṃ chādeti, dutiyampi tatiyampi yāmaṃ chādeti, uddhaste aruṇe channā hoti āpatti, yo chādeti so dukkaṭaṃ desāpetabbo’’ti imā aruṇugge tisso āpattiyo āpajjati.Dve yāvatatiyakāti ekādasa yāvatatiyakā nāma, paññattivasena pana dve honti bhikkhūnaṃ yāvatatiyakā bhikkhunīnaṃ yāvatatiyakāti.Ekettha aṭṭhavatthukāti bhikkhunīnaṃyeva ekā ettha imasmiṃ sāsane aṭṭhavatthukā nāma.Ekena sabbasaṅgahoti ‘‘yassa siyā āpatti, so āvikareyyā’’ti iminā ekena nidānuddesena sabbasikkhāpadānañca sabbapātimokkhuddesānañca saṅgaho hoti.

At dawn, three: Depending on whether one night, four nights, seven days, ten days, or a month has passed, there is a nissaggiya, a pācittiya; for a bhikkhuni's separation at night, a saṅghādisesa; "If she conceals the first watch, and the second, and the third watch, and at sunrise it is concealed, there is an offense; whoever conceals it should be made to confess a dukkaṭa." These three offenses are incurred at dawn. Two 'until the third': There are eleven called "until the third," but in terms of the rule, there are two: 'until the third' for bhikkhus and 'until the third' for bhikkhunis. One here with eight grounds: There is only one here, in this Dispensation, called "with eight grounds" for bhikkhunis. Everything is gathered by one: By this one statement of origin, "Whoever has an offense, should reveal it," there is a gathering of all training rules and all Pātimokkha recitations.

Vinayassa dve mūlānīti kāyo ceva vācā ca.Garukā dve vuttāti pārājikasaṅghādisesā.Dve duṭṭhullacchādanāti vajjapaṭicchādikāya pārājikaṃ saṅghādisesaṃ paṭicchādakassa pācittiyanti imā dve duṭṭhullacchādanāpattiyo nāma.

Two roots of the Vinaya: Body and speech. Two serious ones are stated: Pārājika and saṅghādisesa. Two concealments of serious offenses: For one who conceals a fault, a pārājika; for one who conceals a saṅghādisesa, a pācittiya. These are called two offenses of concealing serious offenses.

Gāmantare catassoti ‘‘bhikkhu bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ saṃvidahati, dukkaṭaṃ; aññassa gāmassa upacāraṃ okkamati, pācittiyaṃ; bhikkhuniyā gāmantaraṃ gacchantiyā parikkhitte gāme paṭhamapāde thullaccayaṃ, dutiyapāde saṅghādiseso; aparikkhittassa paṭhamapāde upacārokkamane thullaccayaṃ, dutiyapāde saṅghādiseso’’ti imā gāmantare dukkaṭapācittiyathullaccayasaṅghaādisesavasena catasso āpattiyo.Catasso nadipārapaccayāti ‘‘bhikkhu bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ saṃvidahati, dukkaṭaṃ; nāvaṃ abhiruhati, pācittiyaṃ; bhikkhuniyā nadipāraṃ gacchantiyā uttaraṇakāle paṭhamapāde thullaccayaṃ, dutiyapāde saṅghādiseso’’ti imā catasso.Ekamaṃse thullaccayanti manussamaṃse.Navamaṃsesu dukkaṭanti sesaakappiyamaṃsesu.

Four in another village: "If a bhikkhu makes an agreement with a bhikkhuni, a dukkaṭa; if he oversteps the boundary of another village, a pācittiya; when a bhikkhuni is going to another village, in a circumscribed village, a thullaccaya at the first step, a saṅghādisesa at the second step; in an uncircumscribed village, a thullaccaya upon overstepping the boundary at the first step, a saṅghādisesa at the second step." These are four offenses in another village, classified as dukkaṭa, pācittiya, thullaccaya, and saṅghādisesa. Four conditioned by crossing a river: "If a bhikkhu makes an agreement with a bhikkhuni, a dukkaṭa; if he boards a boat, a pācittiya; when a bhikkhuni is going across a river, a thullaccaya at the first moment of ascent, a saṅghādisesa at the second moment." These are four. Thullaccaya in one meat: In human meat. Dukkaṭa in nine meats: In the remaining improper meats.

Dve vācasikā rattinti bhikkhunī rattandhakāre appadīpe purisena saddhiṃ hatthapāse ṭhitā sallapati, pācittiyaṃ; hatthapāsaṃ vijahitvā ṭhitā sallapati, dukkaṭaṃ.Dve vācasikā divāti bhikkhunī divā paṭicchanne okāse purisena saddhiṃ hatthapāse ṭhitā sallapati, pācittiyaṃ; hatthapāsaṃ vijahitvā sallapati, dukkaṭaṃ.Dadamānassa tissoti maraṇādhippāyo manussassa visaṃ deti, so ce tena marati, pārājikaṃ; yakkhapetānaṃ deti, te ce maranti, thullaccayaṃ; tiracchānagatassa deti, so ce marati, pācittiyaṃ; aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā cīvaradāne pācittiyanti evaṃ dadamānassa tisso āpattiyo.Cattāro ca paṭiggaheti hatthaggāha-veṇiggāhesu saṅghādiseso, mukhena aṅgajātaggahaṇe pārājikaṃ, aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā cīvarapaṭiggahaṇe nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ, avassutāya avassutassa hatthato khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ paṭiggaṇhantiyā thullaccayaṃ; evaṃ paṭiggahe cattāro āpattikkhandhā honti.

Two verbal at night: If a bhikkhuni, at night in the dark without a lamp, converses with a man standing within arm's reach, a pācittiya; if she converses standing beyond arm's reach, a dukkaṭa. Two verbal in the day: If a bhikkhuni during the day in a covered place converses with a man standing within arm's reach, a pācittiya; if she converses beyond arm's reach, a dukkaṭa. For one who gives, three: If one, intending death, gives poison to a human being, and if he dies from it, a pārājika; if one gives it to spirits, and if they die, a thullaccaya; if one gives it to an animal, and if it dies, a pācittiya; for giving a robe to a non-relative bhikkhuni, a pācittiya. Thus, for one who gives, there are three offenses. Four also in receiving: In grasping the hand and grasping the stalk, a saṅghādisesa; in taking hold of the genitals with the mouth, a pārājika; in receiving a robe from a non-relative bhikkhuni, a nissaggiya pācittiya; for one who is flowing, if she receives something edible or consumable from the hand of one who is flowing, a thullaccaya; thus, in receiving, there are four categories of offenses.

(2) Desanāgāminiyādivaṇṇanā
(2) Description of Those Leading to Confession, Etc.

475.Pañca desanāgāminiyoti lahukā pañca.Cha sappaṭikammāti pārājikaṃ ṭhapetvā avasesā.Ekettha appaṭikammāti ekā pārājikāpatti.

475.Five leading to confession: Five light offenses. Six with counter-action: All except a pārājika. One here without counter-action: One pārājika offense.

Vinayagarukādve vuttāti pārājikañceva saṅghādisesañca.Kāyavācasikāni cāti sabbāneva sikkhāpadāni kāyavācasikāni, manodvāre paññattaṃ ekasikkhāpadampi natthi.Eko vikāle dhaññarasoti loṇasovīrakaṃ. Ayameva hi eko dhaññaraso vikāle vaṭṭati.Ekā ñatticatutthena sammutīti bhikkhunovādakasammuti. Ayameva hi ekā ñatticatutthakammena sammuti anuññātā.

Two serious in the Vinaya are stated: Pārājika and saṅghādisesa. And those of body and speech: All the training rules are of body and speech; there is not even one training rule established through the mind-door. One grain-flavor at the wrong time: Salted sour gruel. This one grain-flavor is allowable at the wrong time. One agreement by a motion with fourth: Agreement to give exhortation to bhikkhunis. This one agreement by a motion with fourth is allowed.

Pārājikā kāyikā dveti bhikkhūnaṃ methunapārājikaṃ bhikkhunīnañca kāyasaṃsaggapārājikaṃ.Dve saṃvāsabhūmiyoti attanā vā attānaṃ samānasaṃvāsakaṃ karoti, samaggo vā saṅgho ukkhittaṃ osāreti. Kurundiyaṃ pana ‘‘samānasaṃvāsakabhūmi ca nānāsaṃvāsakabhūmi cā’’ti evaṃ dve saṃvāsabhūmiyo vuttā.Dvinnaṃ ratticchedoti pārivāsikassa ca mānattacārikassa ca paññattā.Dvaṅgulā duveti dve dvaṅgulapaññattiyo, ‘‘dvaṅgulapabbaparamaṃ ādātabba’’nti ayamekā, ‘‘dvaṅgulaṃ vā dvemāsaṃ vā’’ti ayamekā.

Two physical pārājikas: The pārājika of sexual intercourse for bhikkhus and the pārājika of bodily contact for bhikkhunis. Two grounds for association: Either one makes oneself an associate, or the Saṅgha, being in concord, reinstates one who has been suspended. However, in the Kurundi, "ground for equal association and ground for different association" are stated as two grounds for association. Interruption of the night for two: Established for one on probation and for one practicing penance. Two 'two-finger's: Two two-finger rules, "It should be taken at most the size of two finger joints," this is one, "two fingers or two months," this is one.

Dve attānaṃ vadhitvānāti bhikkhunī attānaṃ vadhitvā dve āpattiyo āpajjati; vadhati rodati, āpatti pācittiyassa; vadhati na rodati, āpatti dukkaṭassa.Dvīhi saṅgho bhijjatīti kammena ca salākaggāhena ca.Dvetthapaṭhamāpattikāti ettha sakalepi vinaye dve paṭhamāpattikā ubhinnaṃ paññattivasena. Itarathā pana nava bhikkhūnaṃ nava bhikkhunīnanti aṭṭhārasa honti.Ñattiyā karaṇā duveti dve ñattikiccāni – kammañca kammapādakā ca. Navasu ṭhānesu kammaṃ hoti, dvīsu kammapādabhāvena tiṭṭhati.

Two having killed themselves: A bhikkhuni, having killed herself, incurs two offenses; she kills and cries, an offense of pācittiya; she kills and does not cry, an offense of dukkaṭa. The Saṅgha is split by two: By action and by ballot. Two here of first offense: Here in the entire Vinaya, there are two of first offense, according to the rule for both. Otherwise, there are nine for bhikkhus and nine for bhikkhunis, thus eighteen. Two performings of the motion: Two duties of the motion – the action and the basis of the action. In nine instances there is an action; in two it stands as the basis of the action.

Pāṇātipāte tissoti ‘‘anodissa opātaṃ khaṇati, sace manusso marati, pārājikaṃ; yakkhapetānaṃ maraṇe thullaccayaṃ; tiracchānagatassa maraṇe pācittiya’’nti imā tisso honti.Vācā pārājikā tayoti vajjapaṭicchādikāya ukkhittānuvattikāya aṭṭhavatthukāyāti. Kurundiyaṃ pana ‘‘āṇattiyā adinnādāne, manussamaraṇe, uttarimanussadhammaullapane cā’’ti evaṃ tayo vuttā.Obhāsanā tayoti vaccamaggaṃ passāvamaggaṃ ādissa vaṇṇāvaṇṇabhāsane saṅghādiseso, vaccamaggaṃ passāvamaggaṃ ṭhapetvā adhakkhakaṃ ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalaṃ ādissa vaṇṇāvaṇṇabhaṇane thullaccayaṃ, ubbhakkhakaṃ adhojāṇumaṇḍalaṃ ādissa vaṇṇāvaṇṇabhaṇane dukkaṭaṃ.Sañcarittena vā tayoti paṭiggaṇhāti vīmaṃsati paccāharati, āpatti saṅghādisesassa; paṭiggaṇhāti vīmaṃsati na paccāharati, āpatti thullaccayassa; paṭiggaṇhāti na vīmaṃsati na paccāharati, āpatti dukkaṭassāti ime sañcarittena kāraṇabhūtena tayo āpattikkhandhā honti.

Three in taking life: "If, not intending for anyone, one digs a pit, and if a human dies, a pārājika; for the death of spirits, a thullaccaya; for the death of an animal, a pācittiya." These are three. Three pārājikas by speech: For one who conceals a fault, for one who follows an expelled bhikkhu, and for one with eight grounds. However, in the Kurundi, "by command in taking what is not given, in the death of a human, in declaring a superhuman quality," thus three are stated. Three kinds of hinting: A saṅghādisesa for alluding to the path of excretion and the path of urination in praising or criticizing; a thullaccaya for mentioning what is below the lower abdomen up to the knees, omitting the path of excretion and the path of urination, in praising or criticizing; a dukkaṭa for mentioning what is above the lower abdomen down to the knees in praising or criticizing. Or three by carrying out: He receives, investigates, and brings back, an offense of saṅghādisesa; he receives, investigates, and does not bring back, an offense of thullaccaya; he receives, does not investigate, and does not bring back, an offense of dukkaṭa. These are three categories of offenses with carrying out as the cause.

Tayo puggalā na upasampādetabbāti addhānahīno aṅgahīno vatthuvipanno ca tesaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ vuttameva. Apicettha yo pattacīvarena aparipūro, paripūro ca na yācati, imepi aṅgahīneneva saṅgahitā. Mātughātakādayo ca karaṇadukkaṭakā paṇḍakaubhatobyañjanakatiracchānagatasaṅkhātena vatthuvipanneneva saṅgahitāti veditabbā. Esa nayo kurundiyaṃ vutto.Tayo kammānaṃ saṅgahāti ñattikappanā, vippakatapaccattaṃ, atītakaraṇanti. Tattha ‘‘dadeyya kareyyā’’tiādibhedā ñattikappanā; ‘‘deti karotī’’tiādibhedaṃ vippakatapaccattaṃ; ‘‘dinnaṃ kata’’ntiādibhedaṃ atītakaraṇaṃ nāmāti imehi tīhi kammāni saṅgayhanti. Aparehipi tīhi kammāni saṅgayhanti – vatthunā, ñattiyā, anussāvanāyāti. Vatthusampannañhi ñattisampannaṃ anussāvanasampannañca kammaṃ nāma hoti, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tayo kammānaṃ saṅgahā’’ti.Nāsitakā tayonāma mettiyaṃ bhikkhuniṃ nāsetha, dūsako nāsetabbo, dasahaṅgehi samannāgato sāmaṇero nāsetabbo, kaṇṭakaṃ samaṇuddesaṃ nāsethāti evaṃ liṅgasaṃvāsadaṇḍakammanāsanāvasena tayo nāsitakā veditabbā.Tiṇṇannaṃ ekavācikāti ‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave dve tayo ekānussāvane kātu’’nti vacanato tiṇṇaṃ janānaṃ ekupajjhāyena nānācariyena ekānussāvanā vaṭṭati.

Three individuals who should not be given the Going-forth: One deficient in the journey, one deficient in limbs, and one with a flawed object; the differentiation among them has already been stated. Moreover, here, one who is incomplete with bowl and robe, and complete but does not ask, these are included in one deficient in limbs. And those such as matricides are to be understood as included in one with a flawed object, numbered as eunuchs, hermaphrodites, and animals who commit improper acts. This method is stated in the Kurundi. Three kinds of gathering of actions: Announcement and proposal, disordered individuation, and past action. There, "he should give, he should do," and so on, are distinctions of announcement and proposal; "he gives, he does," and so on, are distinctions of disordered individuation; "given, done," and so on, are distinctions of past action. These three gather actions. Actions are gathered by three others as well: by object, by motion, and by announcement. An action is called an action only when it is complete in object, complete in motion, and complete in announcement; therefore it is said, "three kinds of gathering of actions." Three who are banished: Mettiya should banish a bhikkhuni; a corrupter should be banished; a novice possessing ten factors should be banished; one should banish a troublesome novice. Thus, three are to be understood in terms of banishment by way of the marks, association, and punishment. One recitation for three: "I allow, bhikkhus, two or three to perform in one announcement." Therefore, one announcement is allowable for three people with one preceptor and different teachers.

Adinnādāne tissoti pāde vā atirekapāde vā pārājikaṃ, atirekamāsake thullaccayaṃ, māsake vā ūnamāsake vā dukkaṭaṃ.Catasso methunapaccayāti akkhayite pārājikaṃ, yebhuyyena khayite thullaccayaṃ, vivaṭakate mukhe dukkaṭaṃ, jatumaṭṭhake pācittiyaṃ.Chindantassa tissoti vanappatiṃ chindantassa pārājikaṃ, bhūtagāme pācittiyaṃ, aṅgajāte thullaccayaṃ.Pañca chaḍḍitapaccayāti anodissa visaṃ chaḍḍeti, sace tena manusso marati, pārājikaṃ; yakkhapetesu thullaccayaṃ; tiracchānagate pācittiyaṃ; vissaṭṭhichaḍḍane saṅghādiseso; sekhiyesu harite uccārapassāvachaḍḍane dukkaṭaṃ – imā chaḍḍitapaccayā pañcāpattiyo honti.

Three in taking what is not given: A pārājika for a foot or more; a thullaccaya for more than a māsaka; a dukkaṭa for a māsaka or less. Four conditioned by sexual intercourse: A pārājika when not damaged; a thullaccaya when mostly damaged; a dukkaṭa with the mouth open; a pācittiya at the membrane. For one who cuts, three: A pārājika for cutting a tree, a pācittiya in the living world, a thullaccaya on the genitals. Five conditioned by throwing away: One throws away poison not intending for anyone, and if a human dies from it, a pārājika; a thullaccaya for spirits; a pācittiya for an animal; a saṅghādisesa for promiscuous throwing away; in the Sekhiya rules, a dukkaṭa for throwing away excrement and urine in a green area. These five offenses are conditioned by throwing away.

Pācittiyenadukkaṭā katāti bhikkhunovādakavaggasmiṃ dasasu sikkhāpadesu pācittiyena saddhiṃ dukkaṭā katā evāti attho.Caturettha navakā vuttāti paṭhamasikkhāpadamhiyeva adhammakamme dve, dhammakamme dveti evaṃ cattāro navakā vuttāti attho.Dvinnaṃ cīvarena cāti bhikkhūnaṃ santike upasampannāya cīvaraṃ dentassa pācittiyaṃ, bhikkhunīnaṃ santike upasampannāya dentassa dukkaṭanti evaṃ dvinnaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ cīvaraṃ dentassa cīvarena kāraṇabhūtena āpatti hotīti attho.

Dukkaṭas were done with pācittiyas: In the group of bhikkhuni-exhorters, in the ten training rules, dukkaṭas were indeed done together with pācittiyas, is the meaning. Four nines are stated here: In the first training rule itself, four nines are stated: two in an unlawful act, two in a lawful act, is the meaning. Also with robe for two: A pācittiya for one giving a robe to one ordained in the presence of bhikkhus; a dukkaṭa for one giving to one ordained in the presence of bhikkhunis. Thus, for two, when giving a robe to bhikkhunis, there is an offense due to the robe being the cause, is the meaning.

Aṭṭha pāṭidesanīyāti pāḷiyaṃ āgatā eva.Bhuñjantāmakadhaññena pācittiyena dukkaṭā katāti āmakadhaññaṃ viññāpetvā bhuñjantiyā pācittiyena saddhiṃ dukkaṭā katāyeva.

Eight requiring confession: Are just as they appear in the Pāḷi. Having eaten uncooked grain, dukkaṭas were done with pācittiyas: For one having requested and eaten uncooked grain, dukkaṭas were indeed done together with pācittiyas.

Gacchantassa catassoti bhikkhuniyā vā mātugāmena vā saddhiṃ saṃvidhāya gacchantassa dukkaṭaṃ, gāmūpacārokkamane pācittiyaṃ, yā bhikkhunī ekā gāmantaraṃ gacchati, tassā gāmūpacāraṃ okkamantiyā paṭhamapāde thullaccayaṃ, dutiyapāde saṅghādisesoti gacchantassa imā catasso āpattiyo honti.Ṭhitassa cāpi tattakāti ṭhitassapi catasso evāti attho. Kathaṃ? Bhikkhunī andhakāre vā paṭicchanne vā okāse mittasanthavavasena purisassa hatthapāse tiṭṭhati, pācittiyaṃ; hatthapāsaṃ vijahitvā tiṭṭhati, dukkaṭaṃ; aruṇuggamanakāle dutiyikāya hatthapāsaṃ vijahantī tiṭṭhati, thullaccayaṃ; vijahitvā tiṭṭhati, saṅghādisesoti nisinnassa catasso āpattiyo.Nipannassāpi tattakāti sacepi hi sā nisīdati vā nipajjati vā, etāyeva catasso āpattiyo āpajjati.

For one going, four: For a bhikkhuni or a woman going after making an agreement, a dukkaṭa; a pācittiya for overstepping the boundary of a village; for that bhikkhuni who goes alone to another village, a thullaccaya upon overstepping the village boundary at the first step, a saṅghādisesa at the second step. These four offenses occur for one going. Also four for one standing: Also four for one standing, is the meaning. How? A bhikkhuni stands in the dark or in a covered place within arm's reach of a man due to friendly intimacy, a pācittiya; she stands beyond arm's reach, a dukkaṭa; at sunrise she stands separating from a companion within arm's reach, a thullaccaya; she stands having separated, a saṅghādisesa. These four offenses for one sitting. Also four for one lying down: Even if she sits or lies down, these same four offenses are incurred.

(3) Pācittiyavaṇṇanā
(3) Description of the Pācittiya

476.Pañca pācittiyānīti pañca bhesajjāni paṭiggahetvā nānābhājanesu vā ekabhājane vā amissetvā ṭhapitāni honti, sattāhātikkame so bhikkhu pañca pācittiyāni sabbāni nānāvatthukāni ekakkhaṇe āpajjati, ‘‘imaṃ paṭhamaṃ āpanno, imaṃ pacchā’’ti na vattabbo.

476.Five pācittiyas: If one has received five medicines and kept them unmixed in different containers or in one container, if seven days pass, that bhikkhu incurs all five pācittiyas, all with different objects, in one moment; it should not be said, "He incurred this one first, this one later."

Nava pācittiyānīti yo bhikkhu nava paṇītabhojanāni viññāpetvā tehi saddhiṃ ekato ekaṃ kabaḷaṃ omadditvā mukhe pakkhipitvā paragaḷaṃ atikkāmeti, ayaṃ nava pācittiyāni sabbāni nānāvatthukāni ekakkhaṇe āpajjati ‘‘imaṃ paṭhamaṃ āpanno, imaṃ pacchā’’ti na vattabbo.Ekavācāya deseyyāti ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, pañca bhesajjāni paṭiggahetvā sattāhaṃ atikkāmetvā pañca āpattiyo āpanno, tā tumhamūle paṭidesemī’’ti evaṃ ekavācāya deseyya, desitāva honti, dvīhi tīhi vācāhi kiccaṃ nāma natthi. Dutiyavissajjanepi ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, nava paṇītabhojanāni viññāpetvā bhuñjitvā nava āpattiyo āpanno, tā tumhamūle paṭidesemī’’ti vattabbaṃ.

Nava pācittiyānīti: If a bhikkhu, having requested nine kinds of delicious food, crushes and puts a morsel of them all together into his mouth, and it passes beyond his throat, he incurs all nine pācittiya offenses, each with a different object, in a single moment. It should not be said, "He incurred this one first, this one later." Ekavācāya deseyyā: He should confess in one statement, "Venerable sir, having received five medicines and kept them beyond seven days, I have incurred five offenses; I confess them in your presence." Thus, he should confess in one statement; they are confessed by that very act. There is no need for two or three statements. In the second expiation also, it should be said, "Venerable sir, having requested and eaten nine kinds of delicious food, I have incurred nine offenses; I confess them in your presence."

Vatthuṃ kittetvā deseyyāti ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, pañca bhesajjāni paṭiggahetvā sattāhaṃ atikkāmesiṃ, yathāvatthukaṃ taṃ tumhamūle paṭidesemī’’ti evaṃ vatthuṃ kittetvā deseyya, desitāva honti āpattiyo, āpattiyā nāmaggahaṇena kiccaṃ natthi. Dutiyavissajjanepi ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, nava paṇītabhojanāni viññāpetvā bhutto, yathāvatthukaṃ taṃ tumhamūle paṭidesemī’’ti vattabbaṃ.

Vatthuṃ kittetvā deseyyā: He should confess reciting the object, "Venerable sir, having received five medicines and kept them beyond seven days, I confess it in your presence as it occurred." Thus, he should confess reciting the object; the offenses are confessed by that very act. There is no need to mention the name of the offense. In the second expiation also, it should be said, "Venerable sir, having requested and eaten nine kinds of delicious food, I confess it in your presence as it occurred."

Yāvatatiyake tissoti ukkhittānuvattikāya pārājikaṃ bhedakānuvattakānaṃ kokālikādīnaṃ saṅghādisesaṃ, pāpikāya diṭṭhiyā appaṭinissagge caṇḍakāḷikāya ca bhikkhuniyā pācittiyanti imā yāvatatiyakā tisso āpattiyo.Cha vohārapaccayāti payuttavācāpaccayā cha āpattiyo āpajjatīti attho. Kathaṃ? Ājīvahetu ājīvakāraṇā pāpiccho icchāpakato asantaṃ abhūtaṃ uttarimanussadhammaṃ ullapati, āpatti pārājikassa. Ājīvahetu ājīvakāraṇā sañcarittaṃ samāpajjati, āpatti saṅghādisesassa. Ājīvahetu ājīvakāraṇā yo te vihāre vasati so arahāti vadati, āpatti thullaccayassa. Ājīvahetu ājīvakāraṇā bhikkhu paṇītabhojanāni attano atthāya viññāpetvā bhuñjati, āpatti pācittiyassa. Ājīvahetu ājīvakāraṇā bhikkhunī paṇītabhojanāni attano atthāya viññāpetvā bhuñjati, āpatti pāṭidesanīyassa. Ājīvahetu ājīvakāraṇā sūpaṃ vā odanaṃ vā agilāno attano atthāya viññāpetvā bhuñjati, āpatti dukkaṭassāti.

Yāvatatiyake tisso: For a bhikkhuṇī who does not renounce a condemned following the third admonition, there is a pārājika; for followers of schismatics such as Kokālika, a saṅghādisesa; for one who does not relinquish wrong view, a pācittiya for the bhikkhuṇī Caṇḍakāḷī. These are the three offenses that extend to the third admonition. Cha vohārapaccayā: Meaning, he incurs six offenses due to speech. How? Out of desire for livelihood, wishing to gain, with evil intention, he speaks untruthfully about possessing superior human qualities that he does not have; he incurs a pārājika offense. Out of desire for livelihood, he engages in acting as a go-between; he incurs a saṅghādisesa offense. Out of desire for livelihood, he says, "The one who lives in that monastery is an Arahant"; he incurs a thullaccaya offense. Out of desire for livelihood, a bhikkhu requests and eats delicious food for his own sake; he incurs a pācittiya offense. Out of desire for livelihood, a bhikkhuṇī requests and eats delicious food for her own sake; she incurs a pāṭidesanīya offense. Out of desire for livelihood, one who is not ill requests and eats soup or rice for his own sake; he incurs a dukkata offense.

Khādantassa tissoti manussamaṃse thullaccayaṃ, avasesesu akappiyamaṃsesu dukkaṭaṃ, bhikkhuniyā lasuṇe pācittiyaṃ.Pañca bhojanapaccayāti avassutā avassutassa purisassa hatthato bhojanaṃ gahetvā tattheva manussamaṃsaṃ lasuṇaṃ attano atthāya viññāpetvā gahitapaṇītabhojanāni avasesañca akappiyamaṃsaṃ pakkhipitvā vomissakaṃ omadditvā ajjhoharamānā saṅghādisesaṃ, thullaccayaṃ, pācittiyaṃ, pāṭidesanīyaṃ, dukkaṭanti imā pañca āpattiyo bhojanapaccayā āpajjati.

Khādantassa tisso: For eating human flesh, a thullaccaya; for other kinds of unsuitable flesh, a dukkata; for a bhikkhuṇī eating garlic, a pācittiya. Pañca bhojanapaccayā: Taking food from the hand of an unordained man, and there mixing human flesh, garlic, requested delicious foods for one's own sake, and the remaining unsuitable flesh, crushing the mixture and consuming it, one incurs these five offenses due to food: a saṅghādisesa, a thullaccaya, a pācittiya, a pāṭidesanīya, and a dukkata.

Pañca ṭhānānīti ‘‘ukkhittānuvattikāya bhikkhuniyā yāvatatiyaṃ samanubhāsanāya appaṭinissajjantiyā ñattiyā dukkaṭaṃ, dvīhi kammavācāhi thullaccayaṃ, kammavācāpariyosāne āpatti pārājikassa, saṅghabhedāya parakkamanādīsu saṅghādiseso, pāpikāya diṭṭhiyā appaṭinissagge pācittiya’’nti evaṃ sabbā yāvatatiyakā pañca ṭhānāni gacchanti.Pañcannañceva āpattīti āpatti nāma pañcannaṃ sahadhammikānaṃ hoti, tattha dvinnaṃ nippariyāyena āpattiyeva, sikkhāmānasāmaṇerisāmaṇerānaṃ pana akappiyattā na vaṭṭati. Iminā pariyāyena tesaṃ āpatti na desāpetabbā, daṇḍakammaṃ pana tesaṃ kātabbaṃ.Pañcannaṃ adhikaraṇena cāti adhikaraṇañca pañcannamevāti attho. Etesaṃyeva hi pañcannaṃ pattacīvarādīnaṃ atthāya vinicchayavohāro adhikaraṇanti vuccati, gihīnaṃ pana aḍḍakammaṃ nāma hoti.

Pañca ṭhānānī: "For a bhikkhuṇī who does not renounce a condemned following the third admonition and repeated formal motions, a dukkata with the initial motion, a thullaccaya with the two formal statements, and a pārājika at the conclusion of the formal statement; a saṅghādisesa for attempting to create a schism," and a pācittiya for not relinquishing wrong view: thus, all the offenses extending to the third admonition go to these five states. Pañcannañceva āpattī: An offense occurs for five kinds of co-religionists. Among them, for two there is undeniably an offense; but for sikkhamānās, novices, and sāmaṇeras, it is not proper because it is not allowable for them. In this way, they should not be made to confess the offense, but disciplinary action should be taken against them. Pañcannaṃ adhikaraṇena cā: And an adhikaraṇa is only for these five. Indeed, for these five, the term adhikaraṇa is used for legal proceedings for the sake of bowls, robes, etc.; but for laypeople, it is called monetary penalty.

Pañcannaṃ vinicchayo hotīti pañcannaṃ sahadhammikānaṃyeva vinicchayo nāma hoti.Pañcannaṃ vūpasamena cāti etesaṃyeva pañcannaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vinicchitaṃ vūpasantaṃ nāma hotīti attho.Pañcannañceva anāpattīti etesaṃyeva pañcannaṃ anāpatti nāma hotīti attho.Tīhi ṭhānehi sobhatīti saṅghādīhi tīhi kāraṇehi sobhati. Katavītikkamo hi puggalo sappaṭikammaṃ āpattiṃ saṅghamajjhe gaṇamajjhe puggalasantike vā paṭikaritvā abbhuṇhasīlo pākatiko hoti, tasmā tīhi ṭhānehi sobhatīti vuccati.

Pañcannaṃ vinicchayo hotī: A judgment only occurs for the five co-religionists. Pañcannaṃ vūpasamena cā: An adhikaraṇa that is judged and settled, is settled only for these five. Pañcannañceva anāpattī: Exemption from offense only occurs for these five. Tīhi ṭhānehi sobhatī: He shines through three causes, namely, the Saṅgha, etc. For a person who has committed a transgression, having made amends for the offense in the midst of the Saṅgha, in the midst of a group, or in the presence of an individual, he becomes one of restored virtue, of his former nature. Therefore, it is said that he shines through three means.

Dve kāyikā rattinti bhikkhunī rattandhakāre purisassa hatthapāse ṭhānanisajjasayanāni kappayamānā pācittiyaṃ, hatthapāsaṃ vijahitvā ṭhānādīni kappayamānā dukkaṭanti dve kāyadvārasambhavā āpattiyo rattiṃ āpajjati.Dve kāyikā divāti eteneva upāyena divā paṭicchanne okāse dve āpattiyo āpajjati.Nijjhāyantassa ekā āpattīti ‘‘na ca, bhikkhave, sārattena mātugāmassa aṅgajātaṃ upanijjhāyitabbaṃ. Yo upanijjhāyeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pārā. 266) nijjhāyantassa ayamekā āpatti.Ekā piṇḍapātapaccayāti ‘‘na ca, bhikkhave, bhikkhādāyikāya mukhaṃ oloketabba’’nti (cūḷava. 366) ettha dukkaṭāpatti, antamaso yāguṃ vā byañjanaṃ vā dentassa sāmaṇerassāpi hi mukhaṃ ullokayato dukkaṭameva. Kurundiyaṃ pana‘‘ekā piṇḍapātapaccayāti bhikkhuniparipācitaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ bhuñjantassa pācittiya’’nti vuttaṃ.

Dve kāyikā ratti: A bhikkhuṇī incurs a pācittiya offense if she arranges places for standing, sitting, or lying down within arm's reach of a man in the darkness of night; if she arranges places for standing, etc., having moved beyond arm's reach, she incurs a dukkata. These are the two offenses originating from bodily actions at night. Dve kāyikā divā: In the same way, she incurs two offenses in a concealed place during the day. Nijjhāyantassa ekā āpattī: "Bhikkhus, the female organ of a woman should not be gazed at intently with lust. Whoever should gaze at it intently incurs an offense of wrong-doing" (pārā. 266): for one who gazes intently, this is one offense. Ekā piṇḍapātapaccayā: "Bhikkhus, the face of a giver of alms should not be looked at" (cūḷava. 366): here there is a dukkata offense. Even for a novice giving gruel or curry, there is a dukkata for looking at the face. However, in the Kurundī, it is said, "ekā piṇḍapātapaccayā: There is a pācittiya for eating alms-food prepared by a bhikkhuṇī."

Aṭṭhānisaṃse sampassanti kosambakakkhandhake vuttānisaṃse.Ukkhittakā tayo vuttāti āpattiyā adassane appaṭikamme pāpikāya ca diṭṭhiyā appaṭinissaggeti.Tecattālīsa sammāvattanāti tesaṃyeva ukkhittakānaṃ ettakesu vattesu vattanā.

Aṭṭhānisaṃse sampassa: See the advantages stated in the Kosambaka Khandhaka. Ukkhittakā tayo vuttā: Three kinds of expelled persons are stated, namely, for not seeing an offense, for not making amends, and for not relinquishing wrong view. Tecattālīsa sammāvattanā: Turning in these states for just so many of those expelled.

Pañcaṭhāne musāvādoti pārājikasaṅghādisesathullaccayapācittiyadukkaṭasaṅkhāte pañcaṭṭhāne musāvādo gacchati.Cuddasa paramanti vuccatīti dasāhaparamādinayena heṭṭhā vuttaṃ.Dvādasa pāṭidesanīyāti bhikkhūnaṃ cattāri bhikkhunīnaṃ aṭṭha.Catunnaṃ desanāya cāti catunnaṃ accayadesanāyāti attho. Katamā pana sāti? Devadattena payojitānaṃ abhimārānaṃ accayadesanā, anuruddhattherassa upaṭṭhāyikāya accayadesanā, vaḍḍhassa licchavino accayadesanā, vāsabhagāmiyattherassa ukkhepanīyakammaṃ katvā āgatānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ accayadesanāti ayaṃ catunnaṃ accayadesanā nāma.

Pañcaṭhāne musāvādo: False speech occurs in five instances, namely, pārājika, saṅghādisesa, thullaccaya, pācittiya, and dukkata. Cuddasa paramanti vuccatī: It is said that fourteen is the limit, according to the method of the ten-day limit mentioned earlier. Dvādasa pāṭidesanīyā: Four for bhikkhus, eight for bhikkhuṇīs. Catunnaṃ desanāya cā: Meaning, the confession of offenses of four. Which ones? The confession of offenses for those who were assaulted by Devadatta, the confession of offenses by Anuruddha Thera's attendant, the confession of offenses by Vaḍḍha the Licchavi, the confession of offenses of the bhikkhus who had been subject to expulsion proceedings and then returned: this is called the confession of offenses of four.

Aṭṭhaṅgiko musāvādoti ‘‘pubbevassa hoti musā bhaṇissa’’nti ādiṃ katvā ‘‘vinidhāya sañña’’nti pariyosānehi (pāci. 4-5; pari. 459) aṭṭhahi aṅgehi aṭṭhaṅgiko. Uposathaṅgānipi pāṇaṃ na hanetiādinā nayena vuttāneva.Aṭṭha dūteyyaṅgānīti ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sotā ca hoti sāvetā cā’’tiādinā (cūḷava. 347) nayena saṅghabhedake vuttāni.Aṭṭha titthiyavattānimahākhandhake vuttāni.

Aṭṭhaṅgiko musāvādo: Eight-factored false speech, beginning with "Formerly it was his habit to speak falsehood" and ending with "suppressing the perception" (pāci. 4-5; pari. 459), is eight-factored by eight factors. The eight factors of the uposatha have already been stated in the method beginning with "He does not kill living beings." Aṭṭha dūteyyaṅgānī: The eight qualities of a messenger have been stated in the context of schism in the Saṅgha, according to the method beginning with "Here, bhikkhus, a bhikkhu is both a hearer and a proclaimer" (cūḷava. 347). Aṭṭha titthiyavattāni: The eight practices of sectarians have been stated in the Mahā Khandhaka.

Aṭṭhavācikā upasampadāti bhikkhunīnaṃ upasampadaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Aṭṭhannaṃ paccuṭṭhātabbanti bhattagge aṭṭhannaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ itarāhi paccuṭṭhāya āsanaṃ dātabbaṃ.Bhikkhunovādako aṭṭhahīti aṭṭhahaṅgehi samannāgato bhikkhu bhikkhunovādako sammannitabbo.

Aṭṭhavācikā upasampadā: This is stated with reference to the ordination of bhikkhuṇīs. Aṭṭhannaṃ paccuṭṭhātabba: In the refectory, the other bhikkhuṇīs should rise to greet eight bhikkhuṇīs and offer them seats. Bhikkhunovādako aṭṭhahī: A bhikkhu possessing eight qualities should be designated as an adviser of bhikkhuṇīs.

Ekassa chejjanti gāthāya navasu janesu yo salākaṃ gāhetvā saṅghaṃ bhindati, tasseva chejjaṃ hoti, devadatto viya pārājikaṃ āpajjati. Bhedakānuvattakānaṃ catunnaṃ thullaccayaṃ kokālikādīnaṃ viya, dhammavādīnaṃ catunnaṃ anāpatti. Imā pana āpattiyo ca anāpattiyo ca sabbesaṃ ekavatthukā saṅghabhedavatthukā eva.

Ekassa chejja: In the verse, of the nine people, only the one who incites the Saṅgha to schism by taking a ballot suffers expulsion; like Devadatta, he incurs a pārājika offense. The four followers of the schismatic incur a thullaccaya, like Kokālika and others; the four who advocate Dhamma are exempt from offense. However, these offenses and exemptions from offense all have a single object: the object of schism in the Saṅgha.

Nava āghātavatthūnīti gāthāyanavahīti navahi bhikkhūhi saṅgho bhijjati.Ñattiyā karaṇā navāti ñattiyā kātabbāni kammāni navāti attho. Sesaṃ uttānameva.

Nava āghātavatthūnī: In the verse, navahī means the Sangha is split by nine bhikkhus. Ñattiyā karaṇā navā: Meaning, there are nine actions to be done by means of a motion. The rest is self-explanatory.

(4) Avandanīyapuggalādivaṇṇanā
(4) Description of Persons Not to be Saluted, Etc.

477.Dasa puggalā nābhivādetabbāti senāsanakkhandhake vuttā dasa janā.Añjali sāmīcena cāti sāmīcikammena saddhiṃ añjali ca tesaṃ na kātabbo, neva pānīyāpucchanatālavaṇṭaggahaṇādi khandhakavattaṃ tesaṃ dassetabbaṃ, na añjali paggaṇhitabboti attho.Dasannaṃ dukkaṭanti tesaṃyeva dasannaṃ evaṃ karontassa dukkaṭaṃ hoti.Dasa cīvaradhāraṇāti dasa divasāni atirekacīvarassa dhāraṇā anuññātāti attho.

477. Dasa puggalā nābhivādetabbā: The ten people who are not to be saluted have been stated in the Senāsanakkhandhaka. Añjali sāmīcena cā: An añjali should not be done to them along with proper conduct. The Khandhaka duties such as asking about drinking water, taking the fan etc., should not be shown to them, an añjali should not be extended, that is the meaning. Dasannaṃ dukkaṭa: For one who does so to those ten, there is a dukkata offense. Dasa cīvaradhāraṇā: Meaning, possession of an extra robe is allowed for ten days.

Pañcannaṃ vassaṃvuṭṭhānaṃ, dātabbaṃ idha cīvaranti pañcannaṃ sahadhammikānaṃ sammukhāva dātabbaṃ.Sattannaṃ santeti disāpakkantaummattakakhittacittavedanāṭṭānaṃ tiṇṇañca ukkhittakānanti imesaṃ sattannaṃ sante patirūpe gāhake parammukhāpi dātabbaṃ.Soḷasannaṃ na dātabbanti sesānaṃ cīvarakkhandhake vuttānaṃ paṇḍakādīnaṃ soḷasannaṃ na dātabbaṃ.

Pañcannaṃ vassaṃvuṭṭhānaṃ, dātabbaṃ idha cīvara: Here, a robe should be given in the presence of five co-religionists. Sattannaṃ sante: Even in the absence of seven (namely, one gone away to a distant place, an insane person, a deranged person, one suffering from pain, and the three expelled people), it should be given in their presence if there is a suitable receiver. Soḷasannaṃ na dātabba: It should not be given to the remaining sixteen mentioned in the Cīvarakkhandhaka, such as hermaphrodites.

Katisataṃ rattisataṃ, āpattiyo chādayitvānāti katisataṃ āpattiyo rattisataṃ chādayitvāna.Dasasataṃ rattisataṃ, āpattiyo chādayitvānāti dasasataṃ āpattiyo rattisataṃ chādayitvāna. Ayañhettha saṅkhepattho – yo divase sataṃ sataṃ saṅghādisesāpattiyo āpajjitvā dasa dasa divase paṭicchādeti, tena rattisataṃ āpattisahassaṃ paṭicchāditaṃ hoti, so sabbāva tā āpattiyo dasāhapaṭicchannāti parivāsaṃ yācitvā dasa rattiyo vasitvāna mucceyya pārivāsikoti.

Katisataṃ rattisataṃ, āpattiyo chādayitvānā: Having concealed how many hundreds of offenses for a hundred nights. Dasasataṃ rattisataṃ, āpattiyo chādayitvānā: Having concealed ten hundreds of offenses for a hundred nights. Here is the meaning in brief: One who incurs a hundred saṅghādisesa offenses each day and conceals them for ten days conceals a thousand offenses for a hundred nights; if he has concealed all those offenses for ten days and requests parivāsa, he is freed after dwelling for ten nights as a probationer.

Dvādasa kammadosā vuttāti apalokanakammaṃ adhammenavaggaṃ, adhammenasamaggaṃ, dhammenavaggaṃ, tathā ñattikammañattidutiyakammañatticatutthakammānipīti evaṃ ekekasmiṃ kamme tayo tayo katvā dvādasa kammadosā vuttā.

Dvādasa kammadosā vuttā: Twelve faults in acts have been stated: the act of approval is unlawful in a faction, unlawful in a concord, lawful in a faction, as well as the act done with a motion, a motion and one announcement, and a motion and three announcements. Thus, by making three in each action, twelve faults in acts are stated.

Catasso kammasampattiyoti apalokanakammaṃ dhammenasamaggaṃ, tathā sesānipīti evaṃ catasso kammasampattiyo vuttā.

Catasso kammasampattiyo: Four kinds of success in acts have been stated: the act of approval is lawful in a concord, as well as the remaining acts.

Cha kammānīti adhammenavaggakammaṃ, adhammenasamaggakammaṃ, dhammapatirūpakenavaggakammaṃ, dhammapatirūpakenasamaggakammaṃ, dhammenavaggakammaṃ, dhammenasamaggakammanti evaṃ cha kammāni vuttāni.Ekettha dhammikā katāti ekaṃ dhammena samaggakammamevettha dhammikaṃ katanti attho. Dutiyagāthāvissajjanepi etadeva dhammikaṃ.

Cha kammānī: Six acts have been stated: an act that is unlawful in a faction, an act that is unlawful in a concord, an act that is seemingly lawful in a faction, an act that is seemingly lawful in a concord, an act that is lawful in a faction, and an act that is lawful in a concord. Ekettha dhammikā katā: Meaning, only one act here, the act that is lawful in a concord, is made lawful. In the explanation of the second verse also, this alone is lawful.

Yaṃ desitāti yāni desitāni vuttāni pakāsitāni.Anantajinenātiādīsu pariyantaparicchedabhāvarahitattā anantaṃ vuccati nibbānaṃ, taṃ bhagavatā raññā sapattagaṇaṃ abhimadditvā rajjaṃ viya kilesagaṇaṃ abhimadditvā jitaṃ vijitaṃ adhigataṃ sampattaṃ, tasmā bhagavā ‘‘anantajino’’ti vuccati. Sveva iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu nibbikāratāya tādi, vikkhambhanatadaṅgasamucchedapaṭipassaddhinissaraṇavivekasaṅkhātaṃ vivekapañcakaṃ addasāti vivekadassī; tenaanantajinena tādinā vivekadassināyāni āpattikkhandhāni desitāni vuttāni.Ekettha sammati vinā samathehīti ayamettha padasambandho, yāni satthārā satta āpattikkhandhāni desitāni, tattha ekāpi āpatti vinā samathehi na sammati, atha kho cha samathā cattāri adhikaraṇānīti sabbepime dhammā sammukhāvinayena sammanti, samāyogaṃ gacchanti. Ettha pana eko sammukhāvinayova vinā samathehi sammati, samathabhāvaṃ gacchati. Na hi tassa aññena samathena vinā anipphatti nāma atthi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘ekettha sammati vinā samathehī’’ti. Iminā tāva adhippāyena aṭṭhakathāsu attho vutto. Mayaṃ pana ‘‘vinā’’ti nipātassa paṭisedhanamattamatthaṃ gahetvā ‘‘ekettha sammati vinā samathehī’’ti etesu sattasu āpattikkhandhesu eko pārājikāpattikkhandho vinā samathehi sammatīti etamatthaṃ roceyyāma. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘yā sā āpatti anavasesā, sā āpatti na katamena adhikaraṇena katamamhi ṭhāne na katamena samathena sammatī’’ti.

Yaṃ desitā: Those which were taught, spoken, declared. In Anantajinenā, because of being without limit, boundary or definition, Nibbāna is called Anantaṃ. That was conquered, won, attained, reached by the Blessed One, having crushed the host of defilements like a king having crushed the army of his enemies and won the kingdom, therefore the Blessed One is called "Anantajina". He himself is Tādi through being without change in desirable and undesirable things. He saw the five kinds of discernment known as vikkhambhana, tadaṅga, samuccheda, paṭipassaddhi, and nissaraṇa viveka, therefore is the Blessed One "Vivekadassi". Anantajinena tādinā vivekadassinā, those groups of offenses taught by the Blessed One. Ekettha sammati vinā samathehī: Here is the connection of words: of the seven groups of offenses taught by the Teacher, not even one offense is settled without samathas. But all these things—the six samathas and four adhikaraṇas—are settled by the face-to-face Vinaya; they come into union. But here, only one, the face-to-face Vinaya, is settled without the samathas; it attains the state of being a samatha. For indeed, there is no non-accomplishment of it without another samatha. Therefore, it was said: "Ekettha sammati vinā samathehī." Thus, the meaning has been stated in the commentaries with this intention. But we, taking the meaning of "vinā" as merely negation, would prefer this meaning: "Ekettha sammati vinā samathehī" means among these seven groups of offenses, one, the group of pārājika offenses, is settled without samathas. And this has been said: "That offense that is without remainder, that offense is not settled by which adhikaraṇa, in which place, or by which samatha?"

Chaūnadiyaḍḍhasatāti ‘‘idha, upāli, bhikkhu adhammaṃ dhammoti dīpeti, tasmiṃ adhammadiṭṭhi bhede adhammadiṭṭhi, tasmiṃ adhammadiṭṭhi bhede dhammadiṭṭhi, tasmiṃ adhammadiṭṭhi bhede vematiko, tasmiṃ dhammadiṭṭhi bhede adhammadiṭṭhi, tasmiṃ dhammadiṭṭhi bhede vematiko, tasmiṃ vematiko bhede adhammadiṭṭhi, tasmiṃ vematiko bhede dhammadiṭṭhi, tasmiṃ vematiko bhede vematiko’’ti evaṃ yāni aṭṭhārasannaṃ bhedakaravatthūnaṃ vasena aṭṭhārasa aṭṭhakāni saṅghabhedakakkhandhake vuttāni, tesaṃ vasena chaūnadiyaḍḍhasataṃ āpāyikā veditabbā.

Chaūnadiyaḍḍhasatāti: "Here, Upāli, a bhikkhu declares what is not Dhamma as Dhamma. In that division based on the view of what is not Dhamma, a view of what is not Dhamma; in that division based on the view of what is not Dhamma, a view of Dhamma; in that division based on the view of what is not Dhamma, doubt; in that division based on the view of Dhamma, a view of what is not Dhamma; in that division based on the view of Dhamma, doubt; in that division based on doubt, a view of what is not Dhamma; in that division based on doubt, a view of Dhamma; in that division based on doubt, doubt." Thus, those one hundred and fifty-six (chaūnadiyaḍḍhasataṃ) which are stated in the Saṅghabhedakakkhandhaka based on the eighteen grounds for division, each with eighteen aspects, should be understood as leading to woeful states (āpāyikā).

Aṭṭhārasa anāpāyikāti ‘‘idha, upāli, bhikkhu adhammaṃ dhammoti dīpeti, tasmiṃ dhammadiṭṭhi bhede dhammadiṭṭhi avinidhāya diṭṭhiṃ avinidhāya khantiṃ avinidhāya ruciṃ avinidhāya bhāvaṃ anussāveti, salākaṃ gāheti ‘ayaṃ dhammo, ayaṃ vinayo, idaṃ satthusāsanaṃ, imaṃ gaṇhatha, imaṃ rocethā’ti, ayampi kho, upāli, saṅghabhedako na āpāyiko na nerayiko na kappaṭṭho na atekiccho’’ti evaṃ ekekasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ ekekaṃ katvā saṅghabhedakakkhandhakāvasāne vuttā aṭṭhārasa janā. Aṭṭhārasa aṭṭhakā chaūnadiyaḍḍhasatavissajjane vuttāyeva.

Aṭṭhārasa anāpāyikāti: "Here, Upāli, a bhikkhu declares what is not Dhamma as Dhamma. In that division based on the view of Dhamma, he approves of the view of Dhamma, approves of tolerance, approves of inclination, approves of liking, and announces, taking a voting ticket: 'This is the Dhamma, this is the Vinaya, this is the Teaching of the Teacher. Accept this, prefer this.' This bhikkhu, Upāli, is not one who causes division in the Saṅgha leading to woeful states (na āpāyiko), not one who causes division leading to hell (na nerayiko), not one who causes division lasting for a kappa (na kappaṭṭho), not one who causes division that is incurable (na atekiccho)." Thus, the eighteen people stated at the end of the Saṅghabhedakakkhandhaka, making one in each ground. The eighteen aspects have already been stated in the explanation of the one hundred and fifty-six.

(5) Soḷasakammādivaṇṇanā
(5) Soḷasakammādivaṇṇanā

478.Kati kammānītiādīnaṃ sabbagāthānaṃ vissajjanaṃ uttānamevāti.

478.The explanations of all the verses beginning with Kati kammānīti are straightforward.

Aparadutiyagāthāsaṅgaṇikavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Second Group of Verses is Finished.

Sedamocanagāthā

Sedamocanagāthā

(1) Avippavāsapañhāvaṇṇanā
(1) Avippavāsapañhāvaṇṇanā

479.Sedamocanagāthāsuasaṃvāsoti uposathapavāraṇādinā saṃvāsena asaṃvāso.Sambhogo ekacco tahiṃ na labbhatīti akappiyasambhogo na labbhati, nahāpanabhojanādipaṭijagganaṃ pana mātarāyeva kātuṃ labbhati.Avippavāsena anāpattīti sahagāraseyyāya anāpatti.Pañhā mesā kusalehi cintitāti esā pañhā kusalehi paṇḍitehi cintitā. Assā vissajjanaṃ dārakamātuyā bhikkhuniyā veditabbaṃ, tassā hi puttaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttanti.

479.In the Sedamocanagāthā, asaṃvāsoti means non-association by way of common dwelling for Uposatha, Pavāraṇā, and so on. Sambhogo ekacco tahiṃ na labbhatīti: improper association is not obtained; however, tending to her with bathing, food, etc., can be done by the mother. Avippavāsena anāpattīti: there is no offense for sharing a dwelling. Pañhā mesā kusalehi cintitāti: this question was considered by the skilled, by the wise. Its explanation should be understood from the bhikkhunī who is a mother of a child; for this was said with reference to her son.

Avissajjitagāthā garubhaṇḍaṃ sandhāya vuttā, attho panassā garubhaṇḍavinicchaye vuttoyeva.

The verse that was not explained was stated with reference to a heavy object (garubhaṇḍaṃ), but its meaning has already been stated in the decision concerning heavy objects.

Dasa puggale na vadāmīti senāsanakkhandhake vutte dasa puggale na vadāmi.Ekādasa vivajjiyāti ye mahākhandhake ekādasa vivajjanīyapuggalā vuttā, tepi na vadāmi. Ayaṃ pañhā naggaṃ bhikkhuṃ sandhāya vuttā.

Dasa puggale na vadāmīti: I do not speak of the ten types of individuals stated in the Senāsanakkhandhaka. Ekādasa vivajjiyāti: I also do not speak of those eleven types of individuals to be avoided who are stated in the Mahākhandhaka. This question was stated with reference to a naked bhikkhu.

Kathaṃ nu sikkhāya asādhāraṇoti pañhā nahāpitapubbakaṃ bhikkhuṃ sandhāya vuttā. Ayañhi khurabhaṇḍaṃ pariharituṃ na labhati, aññe labhanti; tasmā sikkhāya asādhāraṇo.

Kathaṃ nu sikkhāya asādhāraṇoti: this question was stated with reference to a bhikkhu who was formerly a barber. For he is not allowed to keep barber's tools, but others are; therefore, he is not common to the training.

Taṃ puggalaṃ katamaṃ vadanti buddhāti ayaṃ pañhā nimmitabuddhaṃ sandhāya vuttā.

Taṃ puggalaṃ katamaṃ vadanti buddhāti: this question was stated with reference to an artificially created Buddha (nimmitabuddhaṃ).

Adhonābhiṃvivajjiyāti adhonābhiṃ vivajjetvā. Ayaṃ pañhā yaṃ taṃ asīsakaṃ kabandhaṃ, yassa ure akkhīni ceva mukhañca hoti, taṃ sandhāya vuttā.

Adhonābhiṃvivajjiyāti: having avoided below the navel. This question was stated with reference to that headless trunk (kabandhaṃ) without a head, which has eyes and a mouth on its chest.

Bhikkhu saññācikāya kuṭinti ayaṃ pañhā tiṇacchādanaṃ kuṭiṃ sandhāya vuttā. Dutiyapañhā sabbamattikāmayaṃ kuṭiṃ sandhāya vuttā.

Bhikkhu saññācikāya kuṭinti: this question was stated with reference to a hut covered with grass. The second question was stated with reference to a hut made entirely of clay.

Āpajjeyya garukaṃ chejjavatthunti ayaṃ pañhā vajjapaṭicchādikaṃ bhikkhuniṃ sandhāya vuttā. Dutiyapañhā paṇḍakādayo abhabbapuggale sandhāya vuttā. Ekādasapi hi te gihibhāveyeva pārājikaṃ pattā.

Āpajjeyya garukaṃ chejjavatthunti: this question was stated with reference to a bhikkhunī who conceals a fault (vajjapaṭicchādikaṃ). The second question was stated with reference to those incapable individuals such as paṇḍakas. For even in the state of householders, these eleven have already incurred a pārājika offense.

Vācāti vācāya anālapanto.Giraṃ no ca pare bhaṇeyyāti ‘‘iti ime sossantī’’ti parapuggale sandhāya saddampi na nicchāreyya. Ayaṃ pañhā ‘‘santiṃ āpattiṃ nāvikareyya, sampajānamusāvādassa hotī’’ti imaṃ musāvādaṃ sandhāya vuttā. Tassa hi bhikkhuno adhammikāya paṭiññāya tuṇhībhūtassa nisinnassa manodvāre āpatti nāma natthi. Yasmā pana āvikātabbaṃ na āvikaroti, tenassa vacīdvāre akiriyato ayaṃ āpatti samuṭṭhātīti veditabbā.

Vācāti: not speaking with the voice. Giraṃ no ca pare bhaṇeyyāti: he should not utter even a sound in reference to another person, thinking, "These will hear." This question was stated with reference to this falsehood: "He does not reveal an existing offense, it is intentional lying." For that bhikkhu who remains silent due to an improper undertaking, there is no offense in the mind-door. However, because he does not reveal what should be revealed, this offense arises from the non-action of the speech-door; it should be understood.

Saṅghādisesā caturoti ayaṃ pañhā aruṇugge gāmantarapariyāpannaṃ nadipāraṃ okkantabhikkhuniṃ sandhāya vuttā, sā hi sakagāmato paccūsasamaye nikkhamitvā aruṇuggamanakāle vuttappakāraṃ nadipāraṃ okkantamattāva rattivippavāsagāmantaranadipāragaṇamhāohīyanalakkhaṇena ekappahāreneva caturo saṅghādisese āpajjati.

Saṅghādisesā caturoti: this question was stated with reference to a bhikkhunī who, with the dawn arisen, crossed to the other side of a river that borders a village; for she, having left her own village at dawn and crossed to the other side of the river as described at the time of the arising of dawn, incurs four saṅghādisesa offenses with a single strike due to the characteristic of being deprived from the group, from being in another village during the night, and from crossing the river.

Siyā āpattiyo nānāti ayaṃ pañhā ekatoupasampannā dve bhikkhuniyo sandhāya vuttā. Tāsu hi bhikkhūnaṃ santike ekatoupasampannāya hatthato gaṇhantassa pācittiyaṃ, bhikkhunīnaṃ santike ekatoupasampannāya hatthato gaṇhantassa dukkaṭaṃ.

Siyā āpattiyo nānāti: this question was stated with reference to two bhikkhunīs who were ordained together. Among them, for one who ordains in the presence of bhikkhus and receives it from her hand, there is a pācittiya offense; for one who ordains in the presence of bhikkhunīs and receives it from her hand, there is a dukkaṭa offense.

Caturo janā saṃvidhāyāti ācariyo ca tayo ca antevāsikā chamāsakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avahariṃsu, ācariyassa sāhatthikā tayo māsakā, āṇattiyāpi tayova tasmā thullaccayaṃ āpajjati, itaresaṃ sāhatthiko ekeko, āṇattikā pañcāti tasmā pārājikaṃ āpajjiṃsu. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthāro pana adinnādānapārājike saṃvidāvahāravaṇṇanāyaṃ vutto.

Caturo janā saṃvidhāyāti: the teacher and three pupils conspired and stole an item worth six māsakas. The teacher stole three māsakas with his own hand, and three by command; therefore, he incurs a thullaccaya offense. The others stole one each with their own hand, and five by command; therefore, they incur a pārājika offense. This is the summary here. But the detailed explanation has been stated in the Adinnādānapārājika in the explanation of conspiring to steal.

(2) Pārājikādipañhāvaṇṇanā
(2) Pārājikādipañhāvaṇṇanā

480.Chiddaṃ tasmiṃ ghare natthīti ayaṃ pañhā dussakuṭiādīni santhatapeyyālañca sandhāya vuttā.

480.Chiddaṃ tasmiṃ ghare natthīti: this question was stated with reference to a double hut (dussakuṭi), etc., and to spreadings arranged in series (santhatapeyyālañca).

Telaṃ madhuṃ phāṇitanti gāthā liṅgaparivattaṃ sandhāya vuttā.

Telaṃ madhuṃ phāṇitanti: this verse was stated with reference to the changing of gender (liṅgaparivattaṃ).

Nissaggiyenāti gāthā pariṇāmanaṃ sandhāya vuttā. Yo hi saṅghassa pariṇatalābhato ekaṃ cīvaraṃ attano, ekaṃ aññassāti dve cīvarāni ‘‘ekaṃ mayhaṃ, ekaṃ tassa dehī’’ti ekapayaogena pariṇāmeti, so nissaggiyapācittiyañceva suddhikapācittiyañca ekato āpajjati.

Nissaggiyenāti: this verse was stated with reference to appropriation (pariṇāmanaṃ). For whoever appropriates two robes from the gains appropriated to the Saṅgha, saying in a single utterance, "One robe for me, and one for another; give one to me, give one to him," he incurs both a nissaggiya-pācittiya and a suddhika-pācittiya offense at the same time.

Kammañca taṃ kuppeyya vaggapaccayāti ayaṃ pañhā dvādasayojanapamāṇesu bārāṇasiādīsu nagaresu gāmasīmaṃ sandhāya vuttā.

Kammañca taṃ kuppeyya vaggapaccayāti: this question was stated with reference to the boundary of a village in cities such as Bārāṇasī, which are twelve yojanas in extent.

Padavītihāramattenāti gāthā sañcarittaṃ sandhāya vuttā, atthopi cassā sañcarittavaṇṇanāyameva vutto.

Padavītihāramattenāti: this verse was stated with reference to habitual wandering (sañcarittaṃ), and its meaning has already been stated in the explanation of habitual wandering.

Sabbāni tāni nissaggiyānīti ayaṃ pañhā aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā dhovāpanaṃ sandhāya vuttā. Sace hi tiṇṇampi cīvarānaṃ kākaūhadanaṃ vā kaddamamakkhitaṃ vā kaṇṇaṃ gahetvā bhikkhunī udakena dhovati, bhikkhussa kāyagatāneva nissaggiyāni honti.

Sabbāni tāni nissaggiyānīti: this question was stated with reference to having a robe washed by a bhikkhunī who is not a relative (aññātikāya). If the bhikkhunī takes hold of even the corner of all three robes, whether they are stained with bird droppings or smeared with mud, and washes them with water, they become only nissaggiya, pertaining to the body, for the bhikkhu.

Saraṇagamanampi na tassa atthīti saraṇagamanaupasampadāpi natthi. Ayaṃ pana pañhā mahāpajāpatiyā upasampadaṃ sandhāya vuttā.

Saraṇagamanampi na tassa atthīti: there is neither taking refuge nor ordination for that one. This question, however, was stated with reference to the ordination of Mahāpajāpatī.

Haneyyaanariyaṃ mandoti tañhi itthiṃ vā purisaṃ vā anariyaṃ haneyya. Ayaṃ pañhā liṅgaparivattena itthibhūtaṃ pitaraṃ purisabhūtañca mātaraṃ sandhāya vuttā.

Haneyyaanariyaṃ mandoti: he might kill a woman or a man who is ignoble (anariyaṃ). This question was stated with reference to a father who has changed into a woman and a mother who has changed into a man through gender transformation (liṅgaparivattena).

Na tenānantaraṃ phuseti ayaṃ pañhā migasiṅgatāpasasīhakumārādīnaṃ viya tiracchānamātāpitaro sandhāya vuttā.

Na tenānantaraṃ phuseti: this question was stated with reference to animal parents such as the deer hermit, the lion cub, etc.

Acodayitvāti gāthā dūtenupasampadaṃ sandhāya vuttā.Codayitvāti gāthā paṇḍakādīnaṃ upasampadaṃ sandhāya vuttā. Kurundiyaṃ pana ‘‘paṭhamagāthā aṭṭha asammukhākammāni, dutiyā anāpattikassa kammaṃ sandhāya vuttā’’ti āgataṃ.

Acodayitvāti: this verse was stated with reference to ordination by proxy. Codayitvāti: this verse was stated with reference to the ordination of paṇḍakas, etc. In the Kurundī, however, it is stated that "the first verse was stated with reference to eight improper acts of ordination, and the second with reference to an act of ordination for one who has no offense."

Chindantassa āpattīti vanappatiṃ chindantassa pārājikaṃ, tiṇalatādiṃ chindantassa pācittiyaṃ, aṅgajātaṃ chindantassa thullaccayaṃ.Chindantassa anāpattīti kese ca nakhe ca chindantassa anāpatti.Chādentassa āpattīti attano āpattiṃ chādentassa aññesaṃ vā āpattiṃ.Chādentassa anāpattīti gehādīni chādentassa anāpatti.

Chindantassa āpattīti: for one who cuts a forest tree, there is a pārājika offense; for one who cuts grass or creepers, there is a pācittiya offense; for one who cuts off a body part, there is a thullaccaya offense. Chindantassa anāpattīti: there is no offense for one who cuts hair or nails. Chādentassa āpattīti: for one who conceals his own offense or the offense of others. Chādentassa anāpattīti: there is no offense for one who covers houses, etc.

Saccaṃbhaṇantoti gāthāya ‘‘sikharaṇīsi ubhatobyañjanāsī’’ti saccaṃ bhaṇanto garukaṃ āpajjati, sampajānamusāvāde pana musā bhāsato lahukāpatti hoti, abhūtārocane musā bhaṇanto garukaṃ āpajjati, bhūtārocane saccaṃ bhāsato lahukāpatti hotīti.

Saccaṃbhaṇantoti: in the verse, for one who speaks the truth, saying, "She is a sikharaṇī (hermaphrodite) with both sets of organs," he incurs a grave offense; but for one who speaks falsely in intentional lying, there is a light offense. For one who speaks falsely in unfounded accusation, he incurs a grave offense; for one who speaks the truth in founded accusation, there is a light offense.

(3) Pācittiyādipañhāvaṇṇanā
(3) Pācittiyādipañhāvaṇṇanā

481.Adhiṭṭhitanti gāthā nissaggiyacīvaraṃ anissajjitvā paribhuñjantaṃ sandhāya vuttā.

481.Adhiṭṭhitanti: this verse was stated with reference to one who uses a nissaggiya robe without disendowing it.

Atthaṅgate sūriyeti gāthā romanthakaṃ sandhāya vuttā.

Atthaṅgate sūriyeti: this verse was stated with reference to romanthaka (regurgitated food).

Na rattacittoti gāthāya ayamattho – rattacitto methunadhammapārājikaṃ āpajjati. Theyyacitto adinnādānapārājikaṃ, paraṃ maraṇāya cetento manussaviggahapārājikaṃ, saṅghabhedako pana na rattacitto na ca pana theyyacitto na cāpi so paraṃ maraṇāya cetayi, salākaṃ panassa dentassa hoti chejjaṃ, pārājikaṃ hoti, salākaṃ paṭiggaṇhantassa bhedakānuvattakassa thullaccayaṃ.

Na rattacittoti: the meaning of this verse is this: one with lustful thoughts incurs a pārājika offense for sexual intercourse. One with thievish thoughts incurs a pārājika offense for theft. One intending the death of another incurs a pārājika offense for killing a human being. However, one who causes division in the Saṅgha is neither with lustful thoughts, nor with thievish thoughts, nor does he intend the death of another; but for one who gives the voting ticket, there is an offense entailing expulsion, a pārājika offense; for one who accepts the voting ticket, for one who follows the divider, there is a thullaccaya offense.

Gaccheyya aḍḍhayojananti ayaṃ pañhā suppatiṭṭhitanigrodhasadisaṃ ekakulassa rukkhamūlaṃ sandhāya vuttā.

Gaccheyya aḍḍhayojananti: this question was stated with reference to the root of a tree belonging to a single family, similar to a well-established banyan tree.

Kāyikānīti ayaṃ gāthā sambahulānaṃ itthīnaṃ kese vā aṅguliyo vā ekato gaṇhantaṃ sandhāya vuttā.

Kāyikānīti: this verse was stated with reference to one who holds the hair or fingers of many women together.

Vācasikānīti ayaṃ gāthā ‘‘sabbā tumhe sikharaṇiyo’’tiādinā nayena duṭṭhullabhāṇiṃ sandhāya vuttā.

Vācasikānīti: this verse was stated with reference to abusive speech (duṭṭhullabhāṇiṃ) in the manner of "all of you are sikharaṇīs (hermaphrodites)," etc.

Tissitthiyo methunaṃ taṃ na seveti tisso itthiyo vuttā, tāsupi yaṃ taṃ methunaṃ nāma, taṃ na sevati.Tayo puriseti tayo purisepi upagantvā methunaṃ na sevati.Tayo anariyapaṇḍaketi ubhatobyañjanasaṅkhāte tayo anariye tayo ca paṇḍaketi imepi cha jane upagantvā methunaṃ na sevati.Na cācare methunaṃ byañjanasminti anulomapārājikavasenapi methunaṃ nācarati.Chejjaṃ siyā methunadhammapaccayāti siyā methunadhammapaccayā pārājikanti. Ayaṃ pañhā aṭṭhavatthukaṃ sandhāya vuttā, tassā hi methunadhammassa pubbabhāgaṃ kāyasaṃsaggaṃ āpajjituṃ vāyamantiyā methunadhammapaccayā chejjaṃ hoti.

Tissitthiyo methunaṃ taṃ na seveti: three types of women were mentioned, but he does not engage in that which is called sexual intercourse with them. Tayo puriseti: he also does not approach three types of men and engage in sexual intercourse. Tayo anariyapaṇḍaketi: he does not approach these six people either, namely three ignoble people who are hermaphrodites and three paṇḍakas. Na cācare methunaṃ byañjanasminti: he does not engage in sexual intercourse even in the sense of the direct pārājika offense. Chejjaṃ siyā methunadhammapaccayāti: there may be an offense entailing expulsion due to the condition of sexual intercourse. This question was stated with reference to eight instances (aṭṭhavatthukaṃ); for in that case, there is an offense entailing expulsion due to the condition of sexual intercourse for one attempting to engage in bodily contact as a preliminary to sexual intercourse.

Mātaraṃ cīvaranti ayaṃ gāthā piṭṭhisamaye vassikasāṭikatthaṃ satuppādakaraṇaṃ sandhāya vuttā. Vinicchayo panassā vassikasāṭikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanāyameva vutto.

Mātaraṃ cīvaranti: this verse was stated with reference to the making of an undergarment (vassikasāṭikatthaṃ) at the time of the robe distribution (piṭṭhisamaye). However, its decision has already been stated in the explanation of the training rule on undergarments.

Kuddho ārādhako hotīti gāthā titthiyavattaṃ sandhāya vuttā. Titthiyo hi vattaṃ pūrayamāno titthiyānaṃ vaṇṇe bhaññamāne kuddho ārādhako hoti, vatthuttayassa vaṇṇe bhaññamāne kuddho gārayho hotīti tatthevassā vitthāro vutto. Dutiyagāthāpi tameva sandhāya vuttā.

Kuddho ārādhako hotīti: this verse was stated with reference to the practices of sectarians (titthiyavattaṃ). For a sectarian, being angry, is a worshipper when the virtues of sectarians are spoken; being angry, he is blameworthy when the virtues of the Triple Gem are spoken; its detailed explanation has been stated there. The second verse was also stated with reference to the same.

Saṅghādisesantiādi gāthā yā bhikkhunī avassutāva avassutassa purisassa hatthato piṇḍapātaṃ gahetvā manussamaṃsalasuṇapaṇītabhojanasesaakappiyamaṃsehi saddhiṃ omadditvā ajjhoharati, taṃ sandhāya vuttā.

The verse beginning with Saṅghādisesanti was stated with reference to a bhikkhunī who, not yet free from passion, takes almsfood from the hand of a man who is free from passion and consumes it, mixing it with the remainder of human flesh, dog meat, exquisite food, and improper meat.

Eko upasampanno eko anupasampannoti gāthā ākāsagataṃ sandhāya vuttā. Sace hi dvīsu sāmaṇeresu eko iddhiyā kesaggamattampi pathaviṃ muñcitvā nisinno hoti, so anupasampanno nāma hoti. Saṅghenāpi ākāse nisīditvā bhūmigatassa kammaṃ na kātabbaṃ. Sace karoti, kuppati.

Eko upasampanno eko anupasampannoti: this verse was stated with reference to one in the sky. If, of two novices, one is sitting in the sky by means of psychic power, not even the tip of his hair touching the earth, he is called not ordained. The Saṅgha should also not perform an act for one sitting in the sky for one on the ground. If they do, it is invalid.

Akappakatanti gāthā acchinnacīvarakaṃ bhikkhuṃ sandhāya vuttā. Tasmiṃyeva cassā sikkhāpade vitthārena vinicchayopi vutto.

Akappakatanti: this verse was stated with reference to a bhikkhu with an uncut robe. Its decision has also been stated in detail in that training rule itself.

Na deti na paṭiggaṇhātīti nāpi uyyojikā deti, na uyyojitā tassā hatthato gaṇhāti.Paṭiggaho tena na vijjatīti teneva kāraṇena uyyojikāya hatthato uyyojitāya paṭiggaho na vijjati.Āpajjati garukanti evaṃ santepi avassutassa hatthato piṇḍapātaggahaṇe uyyojentī saṅghādisesāpattiṃ āpajjati.Tañca paribhogapaccayāti tañca pana āpattiṃ āpajjamānā tassā uyyojitāya paribhogapaccayā āpajjati. Tassā hi bhojanapariyosāne uyyojikāya saṅghādiseso hotīti. Dutiyagāthā tassāyeva udakadantaponaggahaṇe uyyojanaṃ sandhāya vuttā.

Na deti na paṭiggaṇhātīti: neither does the instigator give, nor does the instigated one take from her hand. Paṭiggaho tena na vijjatīti: for that very reason, there is no receiving from the hand of the instigated one by the instigator. Āpajjati garukanti: even so, if she instigates the taking of almsfood from the hand of one who is not free from passion, she incurs a saṅghādisesa offense. Tañca paribhogapaccayāti: moreover, she incurs that offense due to the condition of consumption for that instigated one. For the instigator incurs a saṅghādisesa offense at the end of the meal. The second verse was stated with reference to instigating the taking of water and a toothpick by that same bhikkhunī.

Na bhikkhunī no ca phuseyya vajjanti sattarasakesu hi aññataraṃ āpattiṃ āpajjitvā anādariyena chādayamānāpi bhikkhunī chādanapaccayā vajjaṃ na phusati, aññaṃ navaṃ āpattiṃ nāpajjati, paṭicchannāya vā appaṭicchannāya vā āpattiyā pakkhamānattameva labhati. Ayaṃ pana bhikkhunīpi na hoti, sāvasesañca garukaṃ āpajjitvā chādetvā vajjaṃ na phusati.Pañhā mesā kusalehi cintitāti ayaṃ kira pañhā ukkhittakabhikkhuṃ sandhāya vuttā. Tena hi saddhiṃ vinayakammaṃ natthi, tasmā so saṅghādisesaṃ āpajjitvā chādento vajjaṃ na phusatīti.

Sedamocanagāthāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Pañcavaggo

Kammavaggavaṇṇanā

482.Kammavagge catunnaṃ kammānaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ samathakkhandhake vuttameva. Kiñcāpi vuttaṃ, atha kho ayaṃ kammavinicchayo nāma ādito paṭṭhāya vuccamāno pākaṭo hoti, tasmā ādito paṭṭhāyevettha vattabbaṃ vadissāma.Cattārīti kammānaṃ gaṇanaparicchedavacanametaṃ.Kammānīti paricchinnakammanidassanaṃ.Apalokanakammaṃnāma sīmaṭṭhakasaṅghaṃ sodhetvā chandārahānaṃ chandaṃ āharitvā samaggassa saṅghassa anumatiyā tikkhattuṃ sāvetvā kattabbaṃ kammaṃ.Ñattikammaṃnāma vuttanayeneva samaggassa saṅghassa anumatiyā ekāya ñattiyā kattabbaṃ kammaṃ.Ñattidutiyakammaṃnāma vuttanayeneva samaggassa saṅghassa anumatiyā ekāya ñattiyā ekāya ca anussāvanāyāti evaṃ ñattidutiyāya anussāvanāya kattabbaṃ kammaṃ.Ñatticatutthakammaṃnāma vuttanayeneva samaggassa saṅghassa anumatiyā ekāya ñattiyā tīhi ca anussāvanāhīti evaṃ ñatticatutthāhi tīhi anussāvanāhi kattabbaṃ kammaṃ.

Tattha apalokanakammaṃ apaloketvāva kātabbaṃ, ñattikammādivasena na kātabbaṃ. Ñattikammampi ekaṃ ñattiṃ ṭhapetvāva kātabbaṃ, apalokanakammādivasena na kātabbaṃ. Ñattidutiyakammaṃ pana apaloketvā kātabbampi atthi, akātabbampi atthi.

Tattha sīmāsammuti, sīmāsamūhananaṃ, kathinadānaṃ, kathinuddhāro, kuṭivatthudesanā, vihāravatthudesanāti imāni cha kammāni garukāni apaloketvā kātuṃ na vaṭṭanti, ñattidutiyakammavācaṃ sāvetvāva kātabbāni. Avasesā terasa sammutiyo senāsanaggāhakamatakacīvaradānādisammutiyo cāti etāni lahukakammāni apaloketvāpi kātuṃ vaṭṭanti, ñattikamma-ñatticatutthakammavasena pana na kātabbameva. Ñatticatutthakammavasena kayiramānaṃ daḷhataraṃ hoti, tasmā kātabbanti ekacce vadanti. Evaṃ pana sati kammasaṅkaro hoti, tasmā na kātabbanti paṭikkhittameva. Sace pana akkharaparihīnaṃ vā padaparihīnaṃ vā duruttapadaṃ vā hoti, tassa sodhanatthaṃ punappunaṃ vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Idaṃ akuppakammassa daḷhīkammaṃ hoti, kuppakamme kammaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati.

Pañcahākārehi vipajjantīti pañcahi kāraṇehi vipajjanti.

483.Sammukhākaraṇīyaṃ kammaṃ asammukhā karoti, vatthuvipannaṃ adhammakammanti ettha atthi kammaṃ sammukhākaraṇīyaṃ; atthi asammukhākaraṇīyaṃ; tattha asammukhākaraṇīyaṃ nāma dūtenupasampadā, pattanikkujjanaṃ, pattukkujjanaṃ, ummattakassa bhikkhuno ummattakasammuti, sekkhānaṃ kulānaṃ sekkhasammuti, channassa bhikkhuno brahmadaṇḍo, devadattassa pakāsanīyakammaṃ, appasādanīyaṃ dassentassa bhikkhuno bhikkhunisaṅghena kātabbaṃ avandanīyakammanti aṭṭhavidhaṃ hoti, taṃ sabbaṃ tattha tattha vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Idaṃ aṭṭhavidhampi kammaṃ asammukhā kataṃ sukataṃ hoti akuppaṃ.

Sesāni sabbakammāni sammukhā eva kātabbāni – saṅghasammukhatā, dhammasammukhatā, vinayasammukhatā, puggalasammukhatāti imaṃ catubbidhaṃ sammukhāvinayaṃ upanetvāva kātabbāni. Evaṃ katāni hi sukatāni honti. Evaṃ akatāni panetāni imaṃ sammukhāvinayasaṅkhātaṃ vatthuṃ vinā katattā vatthuvipannāni nāma honti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘sammukhākaraṇīyaṃ kammaṃ asammukhā karoti, vatthuvipannaṃ adhammakamma’’nti.

Paṭipucchā karaṇīyaṃ appaṭipucchā karotīti pucchitvā codetvā sāretvā kātabbaṃ apucchitvā acodetvā asāretvā karoti.Paṭiññāya karaṇīyaṃappaṭiññāya karotīti paṭiññaṃ āropetvā yathādinnāya paṭiññāya kātabbaṃ appaṭiññāya karontassa vippalapantassa balakkārena karoti.Sativinayārahassāti dabbamallaputtattherasadisassa khīṇāsavassa.Amūḷhavinayārahassāti gaggabhikkhusadisassa ummattakassa.Tassapāpiyasikakammārahassāti upavāḷabhikkhusadisassa ussannapāpassa. Esa nayo sabbattha.

Anuposatheuposathaṃ karotīti anuposathadivase uposathaṃ karoti. Uposathadivaso nāma ṭhapetvā kattikamāsaṃ avasesesu ekādasasu māsesu bhinnassa saṅghassa sāmaggidivaso ca yathāvuttacātuddasapannarasā ca. Etaṃ tippakārampi uposathadivasaṃ ṭhapetvā aññasmiṃ divase uposathaṃ karonto anuposathe uposathaṃ karoti nāma. Yatra hi pattacīvarādīnaṃ atthāya appamattakena kāraṇena vivadantā uposathaṃ vā pavāraṇaṃ vā ṭhapenti, tattha tasmiṃ adhikaraṇe vinicchite ‘‘samaggā jātāmhā’’ti antarā sāmaggiuposathaṃ kātuṃ na labhanti, karontehi anuposathe uposatho kato nāma hoti.

Apavāraṇāya pavāretīti apavāraṇādivase pavāreti; pavāraṇādivaso nāma ekasmiṃ kattikamāse bhinnassa saṅghassa sāmaggidivaso ca paccukkaḍḍhitvā ṭhapitadivaso ca dve ca puṇṇamāsiyo. Evaṃ catubbidhampi pavāraṇādivasaṃ ṭhapetvā aññasmiṃ divase pavārento apavāraṇāya pavāreti nāma. Idhāpi appamattakassa vivādassa vūpasame sāmaggipavāraṇaṃ kātuṃ na labhanti, karontehi apavāraṇāya pavāraṇā katā hoti. Apica ūnavīsativassaṃ vā antimavatthuṃ ajjhāpannapubbaṃ vā ekādasasu vā abhabbapuggalesu aññataraṃ upasampādentassapi vatthuvipannaṃ adhammakammaṃ hoti. Evaṃ vatthuto kammāni vipajjanti.

484.Ñattito vipattiyaṃ panavatthuṃ na parāmasatīti yassa upasampadādikammaṃ karoti, taṃ na parāmasati, tassa nāmaṃ na gaṇhāti. ‘‘Suṇātu me bhante saṅgho, ayaṃ dhammarakkhito āyasmato buddharakkhitassa upasampadāpekkho’’ti vattabbe ‘‘suṇātu me bhante saṅgho, āyasmato buddharakkhitassa upasampadāpekkho’’ti vadati; evaṃ vatthuṃ na parāmasati.

Saṅghaṃ na parāmasatīti saṅghassa nāmaṃ na gaṇhāti. ‘‘Suṇātu me bhante saṅgho, ayaṃ dhammarakkhito’’ti vattabbe ‘‘suṇātu me bhante, ayaṃ dhammarakkhito’’ti vadati; evaṃ saṅghaṃ na parāmasati.

Puggalaṃ na parāmasatīti yo upasampadāpekkhassa upajjhāyo, taṃ na parāmasati, tassa nāmaṃ na gaṇhāti. ‘‘Suṇātu me bhante saṅgho, ayaṃ dhammarakkhito āyasmato buddharakkhitassa upasampadāpekkho’’ti vattabbe ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante saṅgho, ayaṃ dhammarakkhito upasampadāpekkho’’ti vadati; evaṃ puggalaṃ na parāmasati.

Ñattiṃ na parāmasatīti sabbena sabbaṃ ñattiṃ na parāmasati. Ñattidutiyakamme ñattiṃ aṭṭhapetvā dvikkhattuṃ kammavācāya eva anussāvanakammaṃ karoti. Ñatticatutthakammepi ñattiṃ aṭṭhapetvā catukkhattuṃ kammavācāya eva anussāvanakammaṃ karoti; evaṃ ñattiṃ na parāmasati.

Pacchā vā ñattiṃ ṭhapetīti paṭhamaṃ kammavācāya anussāvanakammaṃ katvā ‘‘esā ñattī’’ti vatvā ‘‘khamati saṅghassa tasmā tuṇhī evametaṃ dhārayāmī’’ti vadati; evaṃ pacchā ñattiṃ ṭhapeti. Iti imehi pañcahākārehi ñattito kammāni vipajjanti.

485.Anussāvanato vipattiyaṃ pana vatthuādīni vuttanayeneva veditabbāni. Evaṃ pana nesaṃ aparāmasanaṃ hoti – ‘‘suṇātu me bhante saṅgho’’ti paṭhamānussāvane ‘‘dutiyampi etamatthaṃ vadāmi, tatiyampi etamatthaṃ vadāmi, suṇātu me bhante saṅgho’’ti dutiyatatiyānussāvanāsu vā ‘‘ayaṃ dhammarakkhito āyasmato buddharakkhitassa upasampadāpekkho’’ti vattabbe ‘‘suṇātu me bhante saṅgho, āyasmato buddharakkhitassā’’ti vadanto vatthuṃ na parāmasati nāma. ‘‘Suṇātu me bhante saṅgho, ayaṃ dhammarakkhito’’ti vattabbe ‘‘suṇātu me bhante, ayaṃ dhammarakkhito’’ti vadanto saṅghaṃ na parāmasati nāma. ‘‘Suṇātu me bhante saṅgho, ayaṃ dhammarakkhito āyasmato buddharakkhitassā’’ti vattabbe ‘‘suṇātu me bhante saṅgho, ayaṃ dhammarakkhito upasampadāpekkho’’ti vadanto puggalaṃ na parāmasati nāma.

Sāvanaṃ hāpetīti sabbena sabbaṃ kammavācāya anussāvanaṃ na karoti, ñattidutiyakamme dvikkhattuṃ ñattimeva ṭhapeti, ñatticatutthakamme catukkhattuṃ ñattimeva ṭhapeti; evaṃ anussāvanaṃ hāpeti. Yopi ñattidutiyakamme ekaṃ ñattiṃ ṭhapetvā ekaṃ kammavācaṃ anussāvento akkharaṃ vā chaḍḍeti, padaṃ vā duruttaṃ karoti, ayampi anussāvanaṃ hāpetiyeva. Ñatticatutthakamme pana ekaṃ ñattiṃ ṭhapetvā sakimeva vā dvikkhattuṃ vā kammavācāya anussāvanaṃ karontopi akkharaṃ vā padaṃ vā chaḍḍentopi duruttaṃ karontopi anussāvanaṃ hāpetiyevāti veditabbo.

Duruttaṃ karotīti ettha pana ayaṃ vinicchayo – yo hi aññasmiṃ akkhare vattabbe aññaṃ vadati, ayaṃ duruttaṃ karoti nāma. Tasmā kammavācaṃ karontena bhikkhunā yvāyaṃ –

‘‘Sithilaṃ dhanitañca dīgharassaṃ, garukaṃ lahukañca niggahitaṃ;

‘‘sithilaṃ’’nāma pañcasu vaggesu paṭhamatatiyaṃ.‘‘Dhanitaṃ’’nāma tesveva dutiyacatutthaṃ.‘‘Dīgha’’nti dīghena kālena vattabbaṃ ākārādi.‘‘Rassa’’nti tato upaḍḍhakālena vattabbaṃ akārādi.‘‘Garuka’’nti dīghameva. Yaṃ vā āyasmato buddharakkhitattherassa yassa nakkhamatīti evaṃ saṃyogaparaṃ katvā vuccati.‘‘Lahuka’’nti rassameva. Yaṃ vā āyasmato buddharakkhitatherassa yassa na khamatīti evaṃ asaṃyogaparaṃ katvā vuccati.‘‘Niggahita’’nti yaṃ karaṇāni niggahetvā avissajjetvā avivaṭena mukhena sānunāsikaṃ katvā vattabbaṃ.‘‘Sambandha’’nti yaṃ parapadena sambandhitvā ‘‘tuṇhissā’’ti vā ‘‘tuṇhassā’’ti vā vuccati.‘‘Vavatthita’’nti yaṃ parapadena asambandhaṃ katvā vicchinditvā ‘‘tuṇhī assā’’ti vā ‘‘tuṇha assā’’ti vā vuccati.‘‘Vimutta’’nti yaṃ karaṇāni aniggahetvā vissajjetvā vivaṭena mukhena anunāsikaṃ akatvā vuccati.

Tattha ‘‘suṇātu me’’ti vattabbe ta-kārassa tha-kāraṃ katvā ‘‘suṇāthu me’’ti vacanaṃ sithilassa dhanitakaraṇaṃ nāma. Tathā ‘‘pattakallaṃ, esā ñattī’’ti vattabbe ‘‘patthakallaṃ, esā ñatthī’’tiādivacanañca. ‘‘Bhante saṅgho’’ti vattabbe bha-kāra gha-kārānaṃ ba-kāra ga-kāre katvā ‘‘bante saṅgo’’ti vacanaṃ dhanitassa sithilakaraṇaṃ nāma. ‘‘Suṇātu me’’ti vivaṭena mukhena vattabbe pana ‘‘suṇaṃtu me’’ti vā ‘‘esā ñattī’’ti vattabbe ‘‘esaṃ ñattī’’ti vā avivaṭena mukhena anunāsikaṃ katvā vacanaṃ vimuttassa niggahitavacanaṃ nāma. ‘‘Pattakalla’’nti avivaṭena mukhena anunāsikaṃ katvā vattabbe ‘‘pattakallā’’ti vivaṭena mukhena anunāsikaṃ akatvā vacanaṃ niggahitassa vimuttavacanaṃ nāma.

Iti sithile kattabbe dhanitaṃ, dhanite kattabbe sithilaṃ, vimutte kattabbe niggahitaṃ, niggahite kattabbe vimuttanti imāni cattāri byañjanāni antokammavācāya kammaṃ dūsenti. Evaṃ vadanto hi aññasmiṃ akkhare vattabbe aññaṃ vadati, duruttaṃ karotīti vuccati. Itaresu pana dīgharassādīsu chasu byañjanesu dīghaṭṭhāne dīghameva, rassaṭṭhāne ca rassamevāti evaṃ yathāṭhāne taṃ tadeva akkharaṃ bhāsantena anukkamāgataṃ paveṇiṃ avināsentena kammavācā kātabbā. Sace pana evaṃ akatvā dīghe vattabbe rassaṃ, rasse vā vattabbe dīghaṃ vadati; tathā garuke vattabbe lahukaṃ, lahuke vā vattabbe garukaṃ vadati; sambandhe vā pana vattabbe vavatthitaṃ, vavatthite vā vattabbe sambandhaṃ vadati; evaṃ vuttepi kammavācā na kuppati. Imāni hi cha byañjanāni kammaṃ na kopenti.

Thus, making loose what should be tight, making tight what should be loose, making unrestrained what should be restrained, and making restrained what should be unrestrained—these four faults of pronunciation spoil the kammavācā. For one who speaks in this way utters a different letter from the one that should be uttered, and is said to make a wrong utterance. But in the other six faults of pronunciation, such as long and short vowels, when a long vowel should be said, it is said long, and when a short vowel should be said, it is said short. Thus, the kammavācā should be done by uttering each letter correctly in its place, without destroying the unbroken tradition that has come down. But if, without doing so, one utters a short vowel where a long one should be uttered, or a long one where a short one should be uttered; similarly, if one utters a light syllable where a heavy one should be uttered, or a heavy one where a light one should be uttered; or if one utters a connected word where a disjoined word should be uttered, or a disjoined word where a connected word should be uttered; even when uttered in this way, the kammavācā is not invalidated. For these six faults of pronunciation do not spoil the kamma.

Yaṃ pana suttantikattherā ‘‘da-kāro ta-kāramāpajjati, ta-kāro da-kāramāpajjati, ca-kāro ja-kāramāpajjati, ja-kāro ca-kāramāpajjati, ya-kāro ka-kāramāpajjati, ka-kāro ya-kāramāpajjati; tasmā da-kārādīsu vattabbesu ta-kārādivacanaṃ na virujjhatī’’ti vadanti, taṃ kammavācaṃ patvā na vaṭṭati. Tasmā vinayadharena neva da-kāro ta-kāro kātabbo…pe… na ka-kāro ya-kāro. Yathāpāḷiyā niruttiṃ sodhetvā dasavidhāya byañjananiruttiyā vuttadose pariharantena kammavācā kātabbā. Itarathā hi sāvanaṃ hāpeti nāma.

But what the Suttanta Elders say—"The letter 'da' becomes the letter 'ta,' the letter 'ta' becomes the letter 'da,' the letter 'ca' becomes the letter 'ja,' the letter 'ja' becomes the letter 'ca,' the letter 'ya' becomes the letter 'ka,' the letter 'ka' becomes the letter 'ya'; therefore, uttering 'ta' etc. when 'da' etc. should be uttered is not a fault"—is not acceptable when it comes to the kammavācā. Therefore, the Vinaya-holder should never make the letter 'da' into 'ta'...pe... nor the letter 'ka' into 'ya.' The kammavācā should be done by purifying the expression according to the text and avoiding the faults stated in the ten kinds of phonetic expressions. Otherwise, it is called destroying the recitation.

Akāle vā sāvetīti sāvanāya akāle anokāse ñattiṃ aṭṭhapetvā paṭhamaṃyeva anussāvanakammaṃ katvā pacchā ñattiṃ ṭhapeti. Iti imehi pañcahākārehi anussāvanato kammāni vipajjanti.

Or recites at the wrong time: reciting at the wrong time, in an unsuitable occasion, is establishing the ñatti and doing the anussāvanakamma first, then establishing the ñatti afterwards. Thus, through these five ways, the kamma fails due to incorrect recitation.

486.Sīmato vipattiyaṃ panaatikhuddakasīmānāma yā ekavīsati bhikkhū na gaṇhāti. Kurundiyaṃ pana ‘‘yattha ekavīsati bhikkhū nisīdituṃ na sakkontī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmā yā evarūpā sīmā, ayaṃ sammatāpi asammatā, gāmakhettasadisāva hoti, tattha kataṃ kammaṃ kuppati. Esa nayo sesasīmāsupi. Ettha panaatimahatīnāma yā kesaggamattenāpi tiyojanaṃ atikkāmetvā sammatā hoti.Khaṇḍanimittānāma aghaṭitanimittā vuccati. Puratthimāya disāya nimittaṃ kittetvā anukkameneva dakkhiṇāya pacchimāya uttarāya disāya kittetvā puna puratthimāya disāya pubbakittitaṃ nimittaṃ paṭikittetvāva ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati; evaṃ akhaṇḍanimittā hoti. Sace pana anukkamena āharitvā uttarāya disāya nimittaṃ kittetvā tattheva ṭhapeti, khaṇḍanimittā hoti. Aparāpikhaṇḍanimittānāma yā animittupagaṃ tacasārarukkhaṃ vā khāṇukaṃ vā paṃsupuñjavālikāpuñjānaṃ vā aññataraṃ antarā ekaṃ nimittaṃ katvā sammatā hoti.Chāyānimittānāma yā pabbatacchāyādīnaṃ yaṃkiñci chāyaṃ nimittaṃ katvā sammatā hoti.Animittānāma yā sabbena sabbaṃ nimittāni akittetvā sammatā hoti.

486.Regarding the failure due to boundary, too small a boundary means one that does not accommodate twenty-one bhikkhus. In the Kurundi, however, it is stated, "Where twenty-one bhikkhus cannot sit." Therefore, a boundary of this kind, even if agreed upon, is invalid, being just like a village field; a kamma done there is invalidated. This principle applies to the remaining boundaries as well. Here, too large means one that, even by a hair's breadth, exceeds three yojanas after being agreed upon. Fragmented markers means markers that are not continuous. Having marked a marker in the eastern direction, it is necessary to mark successively in the southern, western, and northern directions, and after re-marking the marker previously marked in the eastern direction, then establish it; thus, it is a non-fragmented marker. But if, having brought them successively, one marks a marker in the northern direction and establishes it there, it becomes a fragmented marker. Another fragmented marker means one that is agreed upon by making any one of a tacasararukkha (tree of mere pith), a stump, a pile of dust, or a pile of sand an intervening marker that does not conform to markers. Shadow marker means one that is agreed upon by making any kind of shadow, such as the shadow of a mountain, a marker. Without markers means one that is agreed upon without marking any markers at all.

Bahisīme ṭhito sīmaṃ sammannatināma nimittāni kittetvā nimittānaṃ bahi ṭhito sammannati.Nadiyā samudde jātassare sīmaṃ sammannatīti etesu nadiādīsu yaṃ sammannati, sā evaṃ sammatāpi ‘‘sabbā, bhikkhave, nadī asīmā, sabbo samuddo asīmo, sabbo jātassaro asīmo’’ti (mahāva. 147) vacanato asammatāva hoti.Sīmāya sīmaṃ sambhindatīti attano sīmāya paresaṃ sīmaṃ sambhindati.Ajjhottharatīti attano sīmāya paresaṃ sīmaṃ ajjhottharati. Tattha yathā sambhedo ca ajjhottharaṇañca hoti, taṃ sabbaṃ uposathakkhandhake vuttameva. Iti imā ekādasapi sīmā asīmā gāmakhettasadisā eva, tāsu nisīditvā kataṃ kammaṃ kuppati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘imehi ekādasahi ākārehi sīmato kammāni vipajjantī’’ti.

Standing outside the boundary, he agrees to the boundary means standing outside the markers after marking the markers, he agrees to the boundary. He agrees to the boundary in a river or an emerged sandbank in the sea: among these rivers etc., whatever is agreed upon, even if agreed upon in this way, is invalid, "Because, monks, every river is without boundary, every sea is without boundary, every emerged sandbank is without boundary" (Mahāva. 147). Joins boundary with boundary means joining his own boundary with another's boundary. Overlaps means overlapping another's boundary with his own boundary. There, how joining and overlapping occur has all been stated in the Uposatha Khandhaka. Thus, these eleven boundaries are invalid, just like village fields; a kamma done while sitting in them is invalidated. Therefore, it was said, "Through these eleven ways, the kamma fails due to boundary."

487-488.Parisato kammavipattiyaṃ pana kiñci anuttānaṃ nāma natthi. Yampi tattha kammappattachandārahalakkhaṇaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, tampi parato ‘‘cattāro bhikkhū pakatattā kammappattā’’tiādinā nayena vuttameva. Tatthapakatattā kammappattāti catuvaggakaraṇe kamme cattāro pakatattā anukkhittā anissāritā parisuddhasīlā cattāro bhikkhū kammappattā kammassa arahā anucchavikā sāmino. Na tehi vinā taṃ kammaṃ kayirati, na tesaṃ chando vā pārisuddhi vā eti. Avasesā pana sacepi sahassamattā honti, sace samānasaṃvāsakā, sabbe chandārahāva honti. Chandapārisuddhiṃ datvā āgacchantu vā mā vā, kammaṃ pana tiṭṭhati. Yassa pana saṅgho parivāsādikammaṃ karoti, so neva kammappatto, nāpi chandāraho. Apica yasmā taṃ puggalaṃ vatthuṃ katvā saṅgho kammaṃ karoti, tasmā ‘‘kammāraho’’ti vuccati. Sesakammesupi eseva nayo.

487-488.Regarding the failure of kamma due to the assembly, there is nothing that is not obvious. Even that which should be stated there, the characteristic of being eligible for kamma and entitled to give consent, has already been stated elsewhere in the manner of "Four bhikkhus, being normal, are eligible for kamma," etc. There, being normal, are eligible for kamma means, in a kamma done by a group of four, four bhikkhus who are normal, not suspended, not expelled, of pure morality, are eligible for kamma, suitable and entitled to the kamma. Without them, that kamma should not be done, nor does their consent or purity come. But the remaining ones, even if they are a thousand, if they share the same residence, all are entitled to give consent. Whether they come after giving consent and purity or not, the kamma stands. But the one for whom the Saṅgha does parivāsa-etc. kamma is neither eligible for kamma nor entitled to give consent. Moreover, because the Saṅgha does the kamma using that person as the object, therefore, he is called "eligible for kamma." The same principle applies to the remaining kammas.

489.Punacattāri kammānītiādiko nayo paṇḍakādīnaṃ avatthubhāvadassanatthaṃ vutto. Sesamettha uttānameva.

489.Furthermore, the method beginning with four kammas was stated to show the non-objectivity of eunuchs etc. The rest here is obvious.

Apalokanakammakathā
Apalokanakamma Discourse

495-496.Idāni tesaṃ kammānaṃ pabhedadassanatthaṃ‘‘apalokanakammaṃ kati ṭhānāni gacchatī’’tiādimāha. Tattha‘‘apalokanakammaṃ pañca ṭhānāni gacchati – osāraṇaṃ, nissāraṇaṃ, bhaṇḍukammaṃ, brahmadaṇḍaṃ, kammalakkhaṇaññeva pañcama’’nti ettha ‘‘osāraṇaṃ nissāraṇa’’nti padasiliṭṭhatāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ pana nissāraṇā hoti, pacchā osāraṇā. Tattha yā kaṇṭakasāmaṇerassa daṇḍakammanāsanā, sā ‘‘nissāraṇā’’ti veditabbā. Tasmā etarahi sacepi sāmaṇero buddhassa vā dhammassa vā saṅghassa vā avaṇṇaṃ bhaṇati, ‘‘akappiyaṃ kappiya’’nti dīpeti, micchādiṭṭhiko hoti antaggāhikāya diṭṭhiyā samannāgato, so yāvatatiyaṃ nivāretvā taṃ laddhiṃ nissajjāpetabbo. No ce vissajjeti, saṅghaṃ sannipātetvā ‘‘vissajjehī’’ti vattabbo. No ce vissajjeti, byattena bhikkhunā apalokanakammaṃ katvā nissāretabbo. Evañca pana kammaṃ kātabbaṃ –

495-496.Now, to show the divisions of those kammas, he said, "To how many instances does apalokanakamma apply?" etc. There, "Apalokanakamma applies to five instances—expulsion, removal, bhaṇḍukamma, brahmadaṇḍa, and kammalakkhaṇa itself as the fifth"—here, "expulsion, removal" is said due to the merging of words. But first, there is removal, then expulsion. There, the punishment of the kaṇṭakasāmaṇera (troublesome novice) should be understood as "removal." Therefore, nowadays, even if a novice speaks disparagingly of the Buddha, the Dhamma, or the Saṅgha, reveals "what is unsuitable is suitable," has wrong view, is endowed with a clinging view, he should be prevented up to the third time and made to renounce that belief. If he does not renounce it, having convened the Saṅgha, he should be told, "Renounce it!" If he does not renounce it, having done apalokanakamma by an experienced bhikkhu, he should be removed. And the kamma should be done like this—

‘‘Saṅghaṃ, bhante, pucchāmi – ‘ayaṃ itthannāmo sāmaṇero buddhassa dhammassa saṅghassa avaṇṇavādī micchādiṭṭhiko, yaṃ aññe sāmaṇerā labhanti, dirattatirattaṃ bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ sahaseyyaṃ, tassa alābhāya nissāraṇā ruccati saṅghassā’ti. Dutiyampi… tatiyampi, bhante, saṅghaṃ pucchāmi – ‘ayaṃ itthannāmo sāmaṇero buddhassa…pe… ruccati saṅghassā’ti cara pire vinassā’’ti.

"Venerable sirs, I ask the Saṅgha—'This novice named so-and-so is a speaker of disparaging words against the Buddha, the Dhamma, the Saṅgha, has wrong view; for the sake of his not obtaining what other novices obtain, sleeping together with bhikkhus for two or three nights, does removal please the Saṅgha?' A second time... A third time, venerable sirs, I ask the Saṅgha—'This novice named so-and-so...pe... Does it please the Saṅgha?' Go away, you wretch, perish!"

So aparena samayena ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, bālatāya aññāṇatāya alakkhikatāya evaṃ akāsiṃ, svāhaṃ saṅghaṃ khamāpemī’’ti khamāpento yāvatatiyaṃ yācāpetvā apalokanakammeneva osāretabbo. Evaṃ pana osāretabbo, saṅghamajjhe byattena bhikkhunā saṅghassa anumatiyā sāvetabbaṃ –

Then, at a later time, if he, "Venerable sirs, through foolishness, ignorance, and incompetence, I did thus; now I ask forgiveness from the Saṅgha," is asking forgiveness, having had him request up to the third time, he should be reinstated by apalokanakamma itself. And he should be reinstated thus, in the middle of the Saṅgha, it should be announced by an experienced bhikkhu with the Saṅgha's approval—

‘‘Saṅghaṃ, bhante, pucchāmi – ayaṃ itthannāmo sāmaṇero buddhassa dhammassa saṅghassa avaṇṇavādī micchādiṭṭhiko, yaṃ aññe sāmaṇerā labhanti, bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ dirattatirattaṃ sahaseyyaṃ, tassa alābhāya nissārito, svāyaṃ idāni sorato nivātavutti lajjidhammaṃ okkanto hirottappe patiṭṭhito katadaṇḍakammo accayaṃ deseti, imassa sāmaṇerassa yathā pure kāyasambhogasāmaggidānaṃ ruccati saṅghassā’’ti.

"Venerable sirs, I ask the Saṅgha—This novice named so-and-so is a speaker of disparaging words against the Buddha, the Dhamma, the Saṅgha, has wrong view; for the sake of his not obtaining what other novices obtain, sleeping together with bhikkhus for two or three nights, he was removed; now he is obedient, of humble conduct, having entered into shame, established in hiri and ottappa, having done the punishment; does giving back the association of body and possessions as before to this novice please the Saṅgha?"

Bhaṇḍukammaṃmahākhandhakavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttameva.Brahmadaṇḍopañcasatikakkhandhake vuttoyeva. Na kevalaṃ panesa channasseva paññatto, yo aññopi bhikkhu mukharo hoti, bhikkhū duruttavacanehi ghaṭṭento khuṃsento vambhento viharati, tassapi dātabbo. Evañca pana dātabbo, saṅghamajjhe byattena bhikkhunā saṅghassa anumatiyā sāvetabbaṃ –

Bhaṇḍukamma has already been stated in the commentary to the Mahākhandhaka. Brahmadaṇḍa has already been stated in the Pañcasatikakkhandhaka. But it is not only prescribed for the Chabbaggiyas; it should also be given to any bhikkhu who is talkative, who lives agitating, vexing, and deceiving bhikkhus with harsh words. And it should be given thus, in the middle of the Saṅgha, it should be announced by an experienced bhikkhu with the Saṅgha's approval—

‘‘Bhante, itthannāmo bhikkhu mukharo, bhikkhū duruttavacanehi ghaṭṭento viharati. So bhikkhu yaṃ iccheyya, taṃ vadeyya. Bhikkhūhi itthannāmo bhikkhu neva vattabbo, na ovaditabbo, na anusāsitabbo. Saṅghaṃ, bhante, pucchāmi – ‘itthannāmassa bhikkhuno brahmadaṇḍassa dānaṃ, ruccati saṅghassā’ti. Dutiyampi pucchāmi, tatiyampi pucchāmi – ‘itthannāmassa, bhante, bhikkhuno brahmadaṇḍassa dānaṃ, ruccati saṅghassā’’’ti.

"Venerable sirs, the bhikkhu named so-and-so is talkative, living agitating bhikkhus with harsh words. That bhikkhu may say whatever he wishes. The bhikkhu named so-and-so should not be spoken to by the bhikkhus, nor admonished, nor instructed. Venerable sirs, I ask the Saṅgha—'Does giving brahmadaṇḍa to the bhikkhu named so-and-so please the Saṅgha?' A second time I ask, a third time I ask—'Venerable sirs, does giving brahmadaṇḍa to the bhikkhu named so-and-so please the Saṅgha?'"

Tassa aparena samayena sammā vattitvā khamāpentassa brahmadaṇḍo paṭippassambhetabbo. Evañca pana paṭippassambhetabbo, byattena bhikkhunā saṅghamajjhe sāvetabbaṃ –

At a later time, when he is behaving properly and asking forgiveness, the brahmadaṇḍa should be revoked. And it should be revoked thus, it should be announced by an experienced bhikkhu in the middle of the Saṅgha—

‘‘Bhante, bhikkhusaṅgho asukassa bhikkhuno brahmadaṇḍaṃ adāsi, so bhikkhu sorato nivātavutti lajjidhammaṃ okkanto hirottappe patiṭṭhito, paṭisaṅkhā āyatiṃ saṃvare tiṭṭhati, saṅghaṃ, bhante, pucchāmi, tassa bhikkhuno brahmadaṇḍassa paṭippassaddhi, ruccati saṅghassā’’ti.

"Venerable sirs, the Bhikkhu Saṅgha gave brahmadaṇḍa to the bhikkhu named so-and-so; that bhikkhu is obedient, of humble conduct, having entered into shame, established in hiri and ottappa, stands in reflection, restraint for the future; Venerable sirs, I ask the Saṅgha, does the revocation of the brahmadaṇḍa of that bhikkhu please the Saṅgha?"

Evaṃ yāvatatiyaṃ vatvā apalokanakammeneva brahmadaṇḍo paṭippassambhetabboti.

Having said thus three times, the brahmadaṇḍa should be revoked by apalokanakamma itself.

Kammalakkhaṇaññeva pañcamanti yaṃ taṃ bhagavatā bhikkhunikkhandhake ‘‘tena kho pana samayena chabbaggiyā bhikkhū bhikkhuniyo kaddamodakena osiñcanti, ‘appeva nāma amhesu sārajjeyyu’nti, kāyaṃ vivaritvā bhikkhunīnaṃ dassenti, ūruṃ vivaritvā bhikkhunīnaṃ dassenti, aṅgajātaṃ vivaritvā bhikkhunīnaṃ dassenti, bhikkhuniyo obhāsenti, bhikkhunīhi saddhiṃ sampayojenti, ‘appeva nāma amhesu sārajjeyyu’nti. Imesu vatthūsu tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ dukkaṭaṃ paññapetvā ‘anujānāmi bhikkhave tassa bhikkhuno daṇḍakammaṃ kātu’nti. Atha kho bhikkhunīnaṃ etadahosi – ‘kiṃ nu kho daṇḍakammaṃ kātabba’nti. Bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesuṃ – ‘avandiyo so bhikkhave bhikkhu bhikkhunisaṅghena kātabbo’’’ti evaṃ avandiyakammaṃ anuññātaṃ, taṃ kammalakkhaṇaññeva pañcamaṃ imassa apalokanakammassa ṭhānaṃ hoti. Tassa hi kammaññeva lakkhaṇaṃ, na osāraṇādīni; tasmā ‘‘kammalakkhaṇa’’nti vuccati. Tassa karaṇaṃ tattheva vuttaṃ. Apica naṃ paṭippassaddhiyā saddhiṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ idhāpi vadāma, bhikkhunupassaye sannipatitassa bhikkhunisaṅghassa anumatiyā byattāya bhikkhuniyā sāvetabbaṃ –

Kammalakkhaṇa itself as the fifth means that which was said by the Blessed One in the Bhikkhuni Khandhaka, "Then, at that time, the Chabbaggiya bhikkhus sprinkled the bhikkhunis with mud water, thinking, 'Perhaps they will be fond of us,' opened their bodies and showed them to the bhikkhunis, opened their thighs and showed them to the bhikkhunis, opened their genitals and showed them to the bhikkhunis, flirted with the bhikkhunis, associated with the bhikkhunis, thinking, 'Perhaps they will be fond of us.' In these instances, having prescribed a dukkata offense for those bhikkhus, 'I allow, monks, to do a punishment kamma for that bhikkhu.' Then the bhikkhunis had this thought, 'What punishment kamma should be done?' They reported this matter to the Blessed One—'He should be made avandiya, monks, by the Bhikkhuni Saṅgha.'" Thus, the avandiyakamma was allowed; that kammalakkhaṇa itself is the fifth instance of this apalokanakamma. For the kamma itself is the characteristic, not expulsion etc.; therefore, it is called "kammalakkhaṇa." Its procedure has been stated there. Moreover, to show it in detail along with its revocation, we also say it here: in the bhikkhuni monastery, with the approval of the Bhikkhuni Saṅgha that has assembled, it should be announced by an experienced bhikkhuni—

‘‘Ayye asuko nāma ayyo bhikkhunīnaṃ apāsādikaṃ dasseti, etassa ayyassa avandiyakaraṇaṃ ruccatīti bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ pucchāmi, dutiyampi… tatiyampi bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ pucchāmī’’ti.

"Reverend sirs, the elder named so-and-so shows what is displeasing to the bhikkhunis; I ask the Bhikkhuni Saṅgha, does the making of this elder avandiya please the Saṅgha? A second time... a third time I ask the Bhikkhuni Saṅgha."

Evaṃ tikkhattuṃ sāvetvā apalokanakammena avandiyakammaṃ kātabbaṃ.

Having announced it three times in this way, the avandiyakamma should be done by apalokanakamma.

Tato paṭṭhāya so bhikkhu bhikkhunīhi na vanditabbo. Sace avandiyamāno hirottappaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā sammā vattati, tena bhikkhuniyo khamāpetabbā. Khamāpentena bhikkhunupassayaṃ agantvā vihāreyeva saṅghaṃ vā gaṇaṃ vā ekaṃ bhikkhuṃ vā upasaṅkamitvā ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā añjaliṃ paggahetvā ‘‘ahaṃ bhante paṭisaṅkhā āyatiṃ saṃvare tiṭṭhāmi, na puna apāsādikaṃ dassessāmi, bhikkhunisaṅgho mayhaṃ khamatū’’ti khamāpetabbaṃ. Tena saṅghena vā gaṇena vā ekaṃ bhikkhuṃ pesetvā ekabhikkhunā vā sayameva gantvā bhikkhuniyo vattabbā – ‘‘ayaṃ bhikkhu paṭisaṅkhā āyatiṃ saṃvare ṭhito, iminā accayaṃ desetvā bhikkhunisaṅgho khamāpito, bhikkhunisaṅgho imaṃ vandiyaṃ karotū’’ti. So vandiyo kātabbo. Evañca pana kātabbo, bhikkhunupassaye sannipatitassa bhikkhunisaṅghassa anumatiyā byattāya bhikkhuniyā sāvetabbaṃ –

From then on, that bhikkhu should not be venerated by the bhikkhunis. If, while not being venerated, he establishes hiri and ottappa and behaves properly, he should ask forgiveness from the bhikkhunis. While asking forgiveness, without going to the bhikkhuni monastery, having approached the Saṅgha or a group or a single bhikkhu in the monastery itself, having sat down squatting, having held out his joined palms, "Venerable sirs, I stand in reflection, restraint for the future, I will not show what is displeasing again, may the Bhikkhuni Saṅgha forgive me," he should ask forgiveness. That Saṅgha or group or a single bhikkhu, having sent a bhikkhu or having gone himself, should tell the bhikkhunis—"This bhikkhu stands in reflection, restraint for the future; having confessed the transgression with this, the Bhikkhuni Saṅgha has been asked for forgiveness; may the Bhikkhuni Saṅgha make him worthy of veneration." He should be made worthy of veneration. And it should be done thus, in the bhikkhuni monastery, with the approval of the Bhikkhuni Saṅgha that has assembled, it should be announced by an experienced bhikkhuni—

‘‘Ayaṃ ayye asuko nāma ayyo bhikkhunīnaṃ apāsādikaṃ dassetīti bhikkhunisaṅghena avandiyo kato, so lajjidhammaṃ okkamitvā paṭisaṅkhā āyatiṃ saṃvare ṭhito accayaṃ desetvā bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ khamāpesi, tassa ayyassa vandiyakaraṇaṃ ruccatīti bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ pucchāmī’’ti –

"Reverend sirs, the elder named so-and-so shows what is displeasing to the bhikkhunis; the Bhikkhuni Saṅgha made him avandiya; he, having entered into shame, standing in reflection, restraint for the future, having confessed the transgression, asked forgiveness from the Bhikkhuni Saṅgha; I ask the Bhikkhuni Saṅgha, does making that elder worthy of veneration please the Bhikkhuni Saṅgha?"—

Tikkhattuṃ vattabbaṃ evaṃ apalokanakammeneva vandiyo kātabbo.

It should be said three times; in this way, he should be made worthy of veneration by apalokanakamma itself.

Ayaṃ panettha pāḷimuttakopi kammalakkhaṇavinicchayo. Idañhi kammalakkhaṇaṃ nāma bhikkhunisaṅghamūlakaṃ paññattaṃ, bhikkhusaṅghassāpi panetaṃ labbhatiyeva. Yañhi bhikkhusaṅgho salākaggayāgaggabhattaggauposathaggesu apalokanakammaṃ karoti, etampi kammalakkhaṇameva. Acchinnacīvarajiṇṇacīvaranaṭṭhacīvarānañhi saṅghaṃ sannipātetvā byattena bhikkhunā yāvatatiyaṃ sāvetvā apalokanakammaṃ katvā cīvaraṃ dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Appamattakavissajjakena pana cīvaraṃ karontassa senāsanakkhandhakavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttappabhedāni sūciādīni anapaloketvāpi dātabbāni. Tesaṃ dāne soyeva issaro, tato atirekaṃ dentena apaloketvā dātabbaṃ. Tato hi atirekadāne saṅgho sāmī. Gilānabhesajjampi tattha vuttappakāraṃ sayameva dātabbaṃ. Atirekaṃ icchantassa apaloketvā dātabbaṃ. Yopi ca dubbalo vā chinniriyāpatho vā pacchinnabhikkhācārapatho vā mahāgilāno, tassa mahāvāsesu tatruppādato devasikaṃ nāḷi vā upaḍḍhanāḷi vā ekadivasaṃyeva vā pañca vā dasa vā taṇḍulanāḷiyo dentena apalokanakammaṃ katvāva dātabbā. Pesalassa bhikkhuno tatruppādato iṇapalibodhampi bahussutassa saṅghabhāranitthārakassa bhikkhuno anuṭṭhāpanīyasenāsanampi saṅghakiccaṃ karontānaṃ kappiyakārakādīnaṃ bhattavetanampi apalokanakammena dātuṃ vaṭṭati.

Herein, this is also a decision on the characteristics of a kamma even apart from the Pali text. This characteristic of a kamma, indeed, is established based on the bhikkhunīsaṅgha, but it can be obtained by the bhikkhusaṅgha as well. For, when the bhikkhusaṅgha performs apalokanakamma in matters of allocating lodging (salākagga), allocating porridge (yāgagga), allocating meals (bhattagga), and at the uposatha, this too is a characteristic of a kamma. For a robe that is torn, worn-out, or lost, it is proper to convene the saṅgha, announce it three times by an experienced bhikkhu, perform apalokanakamma, and then give the robe. However, for a bhikkhu who is making robes and is not extravagant, items such as needles, which are mentioned in the description of the chapter on dwellings (senāsanakkhandhaka), can be given even without apalokanakamma. He alone is the master in giving those. For giving more than that, it should be given after apalokanakamma, for the saṅgha is the owner in giving more than that. Medicine for the sick, as mentioned there, should also be given by oneself. If someone wants more, it should be given after apalokanakamma. Also, for one who is weak, or whose conduct is impaired (chinniriyāpatha), or whose alms-round is cut off (pacchinnabhikkhācārapatha), or who is very sick, when giving a nāḷi or half a nāḷi of rice daily from the resources that arise there in the large residences, or even five or ten taṇḍulanāḷi for one day, it should be given only after performing apalokanakamma. For a respectful bhikkhu, an obligation due upon arising there, and for a learned bhikkhu who fulfills the duties of the saṅgha, an unassigned dwelling (anuṭṭhāpanīyasenāsana), and for those doing the work of the saṅgha, such as kappiyakāraka, it is proper to give food-wages by apalokanakamma.

Catupaccayavasena dinnatatruppādato saṅghikaṃ āvāsaṃ jaggāpetuṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Ayaṃ bhikkhu issaravatāya vicāretī’’ti kathāpacchindanatthaṃ pana salākaggādīsu vā antarasannipāte vā saṅghaṃ pucchitvāva jaggāpetabbo. Cīvarapiṇḍapātatthāya odissadinnatatruppādatopi apaloketvā āvāso jaggāpetabbo. Anapaloketvāpi vaṭṭati. ‘‘Sūro vatāyaṃ bhikkhu cīvarapiṇḍapātatthāya dinnato āvāsaṃ jaggāpetī’’ti evaṃ uppannakathāpacchedanatthaṃ pana apalokanakammameva katvā jaggāpetabbo.

It is proper to maintain the saṅghika residence from the resources that arise from what is given due to the four requisites. However, to cut off talk that "This bhikkhu decides based on his authority," it should be maintained only after asking the saṅgha in matters of allocating lodging (salākagga) etc., or in an internal meeting. From the resources given specifically for robes and alms, the residence should be maintained after apalokanakamma. It is also proper without apalokanakamma. However, to cut off talk that arises, saying, "Indeed, this bhikkhu is brave, maintaining the residence from what is given for robes and alms," apalokanakamma itself should be performed and then maintained.

Cetiye chattaṃ vā vedikaṃ vā bodhigharaṃ vā āsanagharaṃ vā akataṃ vā karontena jiṇṇaṃ vā paṭisaṅkharontena sudhākammaṃ vā karontena manusse samādapetvā kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Sace kārako natthi, cetiyassa upanikkhepato kāretabbaṃ. Upanikkhepepi asati apalokanakammaṃ katvā tatruppādato kāretabbaṃ, saṅghikenapi. Saṅghikena hi apaloketvā cetiyakiccaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Cetiyassa santakena apaloketvāpi saṅghikakiccaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Tāvakālikaṃ pana gahetvā pākatikaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati.

When making or repairing a parasol, or a railing, or a bodhighara, or a hall with seats, or doing plaster work at a cetiya, one should encourage people and have it done. If there is no one to do it, it should be done from the deposit of the cetiya. Even if there is no deposit, it should be done from the resources arising there after performing apalokanakamma, even with what belongs to the saṅgha. For it is proper to do the work of the cetiya with what belongs to the saṅgha after apalokanakamma. It is not proper to do the work of the saṅgha with what belongs to the cetiya even after apalokanakamma. However, it is proper to take something temporary and make it natural.

Cetiye sudhākammādīni karontehi pana bhikkhācārato vā saṅghato vā yāpanamattaṃ alabhantehi cetiyasantakato yāpanamattaṃ gahetvā paribhuñjantehi vattaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati, ‘‘vattaṃ karomā’’ti macchamaṃsādīhi saṅghabhattaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Ye vihāre ropitā phalarukkhā saṅghena pariggahitā honti, jagganakammaṃ labhanti, yesaṃ phalāni ghaṇṭiṃ paharitvā bhājetvā paribhuñjanti, tesu apalokanakammaṃ na kātabbaṃ. Ye pana apariggahitā, tesu apalokanakammaṃ kātabbaṃ. Taṃ pana salākaggayāgaggabhattaggaantarasannipātesupi kātuṃ vaṭṭati, uposathagge pana vaṭṭatiyeva. Tattha hi anāgatānampi chandapārisuddhi āhariyati, tasmā taṃ suvisodhitaṃ hoti.

Those who are doing plaster work etc., at the cetiya, if they do not obtain enough for sustenance from alms-rounds or from the saṅgha, they should maintain their conduct by taking enough for sustenance from what belongs to the cetiya. It is proper to maintain conduct, but it is not proper to prepare a meal for the saṅgha with fish, meat, etc., saying, "We will maintain conduct." Those fruit trees planted in the monastery, which are taken care of by the saṅgha, receive maintenance, and whose fruits are divided and consumed after striking a bell, for those, apalokanakamma should not be done. But for those not taken care of, apalokanakamma should be done. That, indeed, is proper to do at meetings for allocating lodging (salākagga), allocating porridge (yāgagga), allocating meals (bhattagga), and at internal meetings, but it is certainly proper at the uposatha. For there, the consent and purity of those not present are also brought, therefore that is very well purified.

Evañca pana kātabbaṃ, byattena bhikkhunā bhikkhusaṅghassa anumatiyā sāvetabbaṃ –

And it should be done like this: it should be announced by an experienced bhikkhu with the agreement of the bhikkhusaṅgha

‘‘Bhante, yaṃ imasmiṃ vihāre antosīmāya saṅghasantakaṃ mūlatacapattaaṅkurapupphaphalakhādanīyādi atthi, taṃ sabbaṃ āgatāgatānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ yathāsukhaṃ paribhuñjituṃ ruccatīti saṅghaṃ pucchāmī’’ti tikkhattuṃ pucchitabbaṃ.

"Venerable sirs, do I have the approval of the saṅgha that whatever belongs to the saṅgha within the boundary of this monastery—roots, bark, leaves, sprouts, flowers, fruits, edibles, etc.—may all be enjoyed at will by the bhikkhus who come and go?" It should be asked three times.

Catūhi pañcahi bhikkhūhi kataṃ sukatameva. Yasmiṃ vihāre dve tayo janā vasanti, tehi nisīditvā katampi saṅghena katasadisameva. Yasmiṃ pana vihāre eko bhikkhu hoti, tena bhikkhunā uposathadivase pubbakaraṇapubbakiccaṃ katvā nisinnena katampi katikavattaṃ saṅghena katasadisameva hoti.

What is done by four or five bhikkhus is well done. What is done by two or three people residing in a monastery, having sat down, is just like what is done by the saṅgha. But in a monastery where there is one bhikkhu, the customary practice that is done by that bhikkhu on the uposatha day, having sat down after doing the preliminary duties, is just like what is done by the saṅgha.

Karontena pana phalavārena kātumpi cattāro māse cha māse ekasaṃvaccharanti evaṃ paricchinditvāpi aparicchinditvāpi kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Paricchinne yathāparicchedaṃ paribhuñjitvā puna kātabbaṃ. Aparicchinne yāva rukkhā dharanti tāva vaṭṭatiyeva. Yepi tesaṃ rukkhānaṃ bījehi aññe rukkhā ropitā honti, tesampi sā eva katikā.

When doing it, it is proper to do it by the season of fruits, either specifying a period of four months, six months, or one year, or without specifying a period. If a period is specified, after enjoying according to the period, it should be done again. If no period is specified, it is proper as long as the trees last. Those other trees that are planted from the seeds of those trees, that same agreement applies to them as well.

Sace pana aññasmiṃ vihāre ropitā honti, tesaṃ yattha ropitā, tasmiṃyeva vihāre saṅgho sāmī. Yepi aññato bījāni āharitvā purimavihāre pacchā ropitā, tesu aññā katikā kātabbā. Katikāya katāya puggalikaṭṭhāne tiṭṭhanti, yathāsukhaṃ phalādīni paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Sace panettha taṃ taṃ okāsaṃ parikkhipitvā pariveṇāni katvā jagganti, tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ puggalikaṭṭhāne tiṭṭhanti. Aññe paribhuñjituṃ na labhanti, tehi pana saṅghassa dasabhāgaṃ datvā paribhuñjitabbāni. Yopi majjhevihāre rukkhaṃ sākhāhi parivāretvā rakkhati, tassāpi eseva nayo.

But if they are planted in another monastery, the saṅgha in that monastery where they are planted is the owner of them. Also, if seeds are brought from elsewhere and planted later in the original monastery, a separate agreement should be made for those. Once an agreement is made, they remain in the individual's place, and it is proper to enjoy the fruits etc., at will. But if they enclose and maintain each of those locations by surrounding them with fences, they remain in the individual's place of those bhikkhus. Others cannot enjoy them; they should enjoy them after giving one-tenth to the saṅgha. Also, the same method applies to one who protects a tree in the middle of the monastery by surrounding it with branches.

Porāṇavihāraṃ gatassa sambhāvanīyabhikkhuno ‘‘thero āgato’’ti phalāphalaṃ āharanti, sace tattha mūle sabbapariyattidharo bahussutabhikkhu vihāsi, ‘‘addhā ettha dīghā katikā katā bhavissatī’’ti nikkukkuccena paribhuñjitabbaṃ. Vihāre phalāphalaṃ piṇḍapātikānampi vaṭṭati, dhutaṅgaṃ na kopeti. Sāmaṇerā attano ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ bahūni phalāni denti, aññe bhikkhū alabhantā khiyyanti, khiyyanamattameva cetaṃ hoti.

When a respectable bhikkhu who has arrived at an old monastery, they bring fruits, saying, "The elder has arrived." If a learned bhikkhu who upholds the entire teaching resides there at the root, it should be enjoyed without hesitation, thinking, "Surely, a long-term agreement has been made here." Fruits in the monastery are proper even for those who live on alms-food; it does not violate the dhutaṅga. Novices give many fruits to their preceptors and teachers; other bhikkhus are displeased because they do not receive them; this is merely a matter of displeasure.

Sace pana dubbhikkhaṃ hoti, ekaṃ panasarukkhaṃ nissāya saṭṭhipi janā jīvanti, tādise kāle sabbesaṃ saṅgahakaraṇatthāya bhājetvā khāditabbaṃ, ayaṃ sāmīci. Yāva pana katikavattaṃ na paṭippassambhati, tāva tehi khāyitaṃ sukhāyitameva. Kadā pana katikavattaṃ paṭippassambhati? Yadā samaggo saṅgho sannipatitvā ‘‘ito paṭṭhāya bhājetvā khādantū’’ti sāveti. Ekabhikkhuke pana vihāre ekena sāvitepi purimakatikā paṭippassambhatiyeva. Sace paṭippassaddhāya katikāya sāmaṇerā neva rukkhato pātenti, na bhūmito gahetvā bhikkhūnaṃ denti, patitaphalāni pādehi paharantā vicaranti, tesaṃ dasabhāgato paṭṭhāya yāva upaḍḍhaphalabhāgena phātikammaṃ kātabbaṃ. Addhā phātikammalobhena āharitvā dassanti. Puna subhikkhe jāte kappiyakārakesu āgantvā sākhāparivārādīni katvā rukkhe rakkhantesu sāmaṇerānaṃ phātikammaṃ na dātabbaṃ, bhājetvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ.

But if there is a famine, and sixty people live relying on one jackfruit tree, in such a time, to benefit everyone, it should be divided and eaten; this is proper conduct (sāmīci). As long as the customary practice has not ceased, what is eaten by them is well-eaten. When does the customary practice cease? When the united saṅgha convenes and announces, "From now on, let them eat by dividing it." But even if it is announced by one person in a monastery with one bhikkhu, the previous custom ceases. If, after the custom has ceased, novices neither drop fruits from the tree nor take them from the ground and give them to the bhikkhus, but wander about kicking the fallen fruits with their feet, punitive action should be taken against them, starting from one-tenth up to half of the fruit. Surely, out of greed for punitive action, they will bring and give them. Again, when there is abundance, and the kappiyakāraka come and protect the trees by surrounding them with branches etc., punitive action should not be given to the novices; it should be divided and enjoyed.

‘‘Vihāre phalāphalaṃ atthī’’ti sāmantagāmehi manussā gilānānaṃ vā gabbhinīnaṃ vā atthāya āgantvā ‘‘ekaṃ nāḷikeraṃ detha, ambaṃ detha, labujaṃ dethā’’ti yācanti, dātabbaṃ na dātabbanti? Dātabbaṃ. Adīyamāne hi te domanassikā honti, dentena pana saṅghaṃ sannipātetvā yāvatatiyaṃ sāvetvā apalokanakammaṃ katvāva dātabbaṃ, katikavattaṃ vā katvā ṭhapetabbaṃ, evañca pana kātabbaṃ, byattena bhikkhunā saṅghassa anumatiyā sāvetabbaṃ –

If people from neighboring villages come, saying, "There are fruits in the monastery," and ask, "Give us a coconut, give us a mango, give us a breadfruit," for the sake of the sick or pregnant women, should it be given or not? It should be given. For if it is not given, they become displeased; but when giving it, it should be given only after convening the saṅgha and announcing it three times, performing apalokanakamma, or a customary practice should be established. And it should be done like this: it should be announced by an experienced bhikkhu with the agreement of the saṅgha

‘‘Sāmantagāmehi manussā āgantvā gilānādīnaṃ atthāya phalāphalaṃ yācanti, dve nāḷikerāni, dve tālaphalāni, dve panasāni, pañca ambāni, pañca kadaliphalāni gaṇhantānaṃ anivāraṇaṃ, asukarukkhato ca asukarukkhato ca phalaṃ gaṇhantānaṃ anivāraṇaṃ ruccati bhikkhusaṅghassā’’ti tikkhattuṃ vattabbaṃ.

"People from neighboring villages come and ask for fruits for the sake of the sick etc.; is it the approval of the bhikkhusaṅgha that there be no restriction on taking two coconuts, two palmyra fruits, two jackfruits, five mangoes, five banana fruits, and no restriction on taking fruit from such and such a tree?" It should be said three times.

Tato paṭṭhāya gilānādīnaṃ nāmaṃ gahetvā yācantā ‘‘gaṇhathā’’ti na vattabbā, vattaṃ pana ācikkhitabbaṃ – ‘‘nāḷikerādīni iminā nāma paricchedena gaṇhantānaṃ asukarukkhato ca asukarukkhato ca phalaṃ gaṇhantānaṃ anivāraṇaṃ kata’’nti. Anuvicaritvā pana ‘‘ayaṃ madhuraphalo ambo, ito gaṇhathā’’tipi na vattabbā. Phalabhājanakāle pana āgatānaṃ sammatena upaḍḍhabhāgo dātabbo, asammatena apaloketvā dātabbaṃ.

From then on, when they come asking, mentioning the names of the sick etc., they should not be told, "Take it," but the practice should be explained—"There is no restriction made on taking coconuts etc., with this limit, and on taking fruit from such and such a tree." But they should not be followed around and told, "This is a sweet mango, take it from here." But when it is time to divide the fruits, half should be given to those who have been authorized, and to those not authorized, it should be given after apalokanakamma.

Khīṇaparibbayo vā maggagamiyasatthavāho vā añño vā issaro āgantvā yācati, apaloketvāva dātabbaṃ. Balakkārena gahetvā khādanto na vāretabbo. Kuddho hi so rukkhepi chindeyya, aññampi anatthaṃ kareyya. Puggalikapariveṇaṃ āgantvā gilānassa gāmena yācanto ‘‘amhehi chāyādīnaṃ atthāya ropitaṃ, sace atthi, tumhe jānāthā’’ti vattabbo. Yadi pana phalabharitāva rukkhā honti, kaṇṭake bandhitvā phalavārena khādanti, apaccāsīsantena hutvā dātabbaṃ. Balakkārena gaṇhanto na vāretabbo, pubbe vuttamevettha kāraṇaṃ.

If a mendicant with depleted requisites, or a caravan of travelers on a journey, or another wealthy person comes and asks, it should be given only after apalokanakamma. One who forcefully takes and eats should not be prevented. For if he is angry, he might even cut down the trees or do other harm. If someone from the village comes to an individual enclosure, asking for a sick person, he should be told, "We have planted this for the sake of shade etc.; if there is any, you know." If the trees are full of fruits, they tie thorns and eat by the season of fruits; it should be given without expecting anything in return. One who forcefully takes should not be prevented, the reason here is as previously stated.

Saṅghassa phalārāmo hoti, paṭijagganaṃ na labhati, sace taṃ koci vattasīsena jaggati, saṅghasseva hoti. Athāpi kassaci paṭibalassa bhikkhuno ‘‘imaṃ sappurisa jaggitvā dehī’’ti saṅgho bhāraṃ karoti, so ce vattasīsena jaggati, evampi saṅghasseva hoti. Phātikammaṃ paccāsīsantassa pana tatiyabhāgena vā upaḍḍhabhāgena vā phātikammaṃ kātabbaṃ. ‘‘Bhāriyaṃ kamma’’nti vatvā ettakena anicchanto pana sabbaṃ taveva santakaṃ katvā ‘‘mūlabhāgaṃ dasabhāgamattaṃ datvā jaggāhī’’tipi vattabbo. Garubhaṇḍattā pana mūlacchejjavasena na dātabbaṃ. So mūlabhāgaṃ datvā khādanto akatāvāsaṃ vā katvā katāvāsaṃ vā jaggitvā nissitakānaṃ ārāmaṃ niyyādeti, tehipi mūlabhāgo dātabbova. Yadā pana bhikkhū sayaṃ jaggituṃ pahonti, atha tesaṃ jaggituñca na dātabbaṃ, jaggitakāle ca na vāretabbā, jagganakāleyeva vāretabbā. ‘‘Bahuṃ tumhehi khāyitaṃ, idāni mā jaggittha, bhikkhusaṅghoyeva jaggissatī’’ti vattabbaṃ.

If the saṅgha has a fruit garden that does not receive maintenance, if someone maintains it with a labor contract, it belongs to the saṅgha. Or, if the saṅgha entrusts a capable bhikkhu, saying, "Maintain this, good sir, and give it to us," even if he maintains it with a labor contract, it belongs to the saṅgha. But for one who expects punitive action, punitive action should be taken with one-third or half. But if he is unwilling with that much, saying, "The work is burdensome," he should be told, "Make it all your own and maintain it, giving about one-tenth as the root share." Because it is heavy property, it should not be given in a way that the root is cut off. While he enjoys, giving the root share, he hands over the garden to those who depend on him, either having made a dwelling or maintaining a made dwelling; they too must give the root share. When the bhikkhus are able to maintain it themselves, then they should neither be given to maintain it nor be prevented when they maintain it; they should be prevented only at the time of maintenance. "You have eaten much; now do not maintain it; the bhikkhusaṅgha itself will maintain it," should be said.

Sace pana neva vattasīsena jagganto atthi, na phātikammena, na saṅgho jaggituṃ pahoti, eko anāpucchitvāva jaggitvā phātikammaṃ vaḍḍhetvā paccāsīsati, apalokanakammena phātikammaṃ vaḍḍhetvā dātabbaṃ. Iti imaṃ sabbampi kammalakkhaṇameva hoti. Apalokanakammaṃ imāni pañca ṭhānāni gacchati.

If there is no one maintaining it with a labor contract, nor with punitive action, nor is the saṅgha able to maintain it, and one person maintains it without asking and expects to increase the punitive action, it should be given after increasing the punitive action by apalokanakamma. Thus, all of this is a characteristic of a kamma. Apalokanakamma goes to these five places.

Ñattikammaṭṭhānabhedepana ‘‘suṇātu me bhante saṅgho, itthannāmo itthannāmassa āyasmato upasampadāpekkho, anusiṭṭho so mayā. Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, itthannāmo āgaccheyyāti, āgacchāhīti vattabbo’’ti evaṃ upasampadāpekkhassa osāraṇā osāraṇā nāma.

Regarding the difference in the location of ñattikamma, "Venerable sirs, may the saṅgha hear me. So-and-so is a candidate for ordination by so-and-so, he has been instructed by me. If it is the right time for the saṅgha, so-and-so should come, he should be told to come," thus, the leading out of one desiring ordination is called osāraṇā osāraṇā.

‘‘Suṇantu me āyasmantā, ayaṃ itthannāmo bhikkhu dhammakathiko imassa neva suttaṃ āgacchati, no suttavibhaṅgo, so atthaṃ asallakkhetvā byañjanacchāyāya atthaṃ paṭibāhati. Yadāyasmantānaṃ pattakallaṃ, itthannāmaṃ bhikkhuṃ vuṭṭhāpetvā avasesā imaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasameyyāmā’’ti evaṃ ubbāhikāvinicchaye dhammakathikassa bhikkhuno nissāraṇā nissāraṇā nāma.

"Venerable sirs, may the venerable ones hear me. This bhikkhu named so-and-so is a speaker on the Dhamma, but the sutta does not come to him, nor the suttavibhaṅga; without considering the meaning, he refutes the meaning with the shadow of the letter. If it is the right time for the venerable ones, let us remove this bhikkhu named so-and-so and settle this case with the remaining ones," thus, the expulsion of the bhikkhu who is a speaker on the Dhamma in the decision of expulsion is called nissāraṇā nissāraṇā.

‘‘Suṇātu me bhante saṅgho, ajjuposatho pannaraso. Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho uposathaṃ kareyyā’’ti evaṃ uposathakammavasena ṭhapitā ñatti uposatho nāma.

"Venerable sirs, may the saṅgha hear me. Today is the fifteenth, the uposatha. If it is the right time for the saṅgha, may the saṅgha observe the uposatha," thus, the ñatti established by way of the uposathakamma is called uposatho.

‘‘Suṇātu me bhante saṅgho, ajja pavāraṇā pannarasī. Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho pavāreyyā’’ti evaṃ pavāraṇākammavasena ṭhapitā ñatti pavāraṇā nāma.

"Venerable sirs, may the saṅgha hear me. Today is the fifteenth, the pavāraṇā. If it is the right time for the saṅgha, may the saṅgha perform pavāraṇā," thus, the ñatti established by way of the pavāraṇākamma is called pavāraṇā.[END_OF_CHUNK_22_FOR_AI_TRANSLATION]

‘‘Suṇātu me bhante saṅgho, itthannāmo itthannāmassa āyasmato upasampadāpekkho. Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, ahaṃ itthannāmaṃ anusāseyya’’nti. ‘‘Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, itthannāmo itthannāmaṃ anusāseyyā’’ti. ‘‘Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, ahaṃ itthannāmaṃ antarāyike dhamme puccheyya’’nti. ‘‘Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, itthannāmo itthannāmaṃ antarāyike dhamme puccheyyā’’ti. ‘‘Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, ahaṃ itthannāmaṃ vinayaṃ puccheyya’’nti. ‘‘Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, itthannāmo itthannāmaṃ vinayaṃ puccheyyā’’ti. ‘‘Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, ahaṃ itthannāmena vinayaṃ puṭṭho vissajjeyya’’nti. ‘‘Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, itthannāmo itthannāmena vinayaṃ puṭṭho vissajjeyyā’’ti evaṃ attānaṃ vā paraṃ vā sammannituṃ ṭhapitā ñatti sammuti nāma.

‘‘Suṇātu me bhante saṅgho, idaṃ cīvaraṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno nissaggiyaṃ saṅghassa nissaṭṭhaṃ. Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho imaṃ cīvaraṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno dadeyyā’’ti. ‘‘Yadāyasmantānaṃ pattakallaṃ, āyasmantā imaṃ cīvaraṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno dadeyyu’’nti evaṃ nissaṭṭhacīvarapattādīnaṃ dānaṃ dānaṃ nāma.

‘‘Suṇātu me bhante saṅgho, ayaṃ itthannāmo bhikkhu āpattiṃ sarati, vivarati, uttāniṃ karoti, deseti. Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, ahaṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno āpattiṃ paṭiggaṇheyyanti. Yadāyasmantānaṃ pattakallaṃ, ahaṃ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno āpattiṃ paṭiggaṇheyya’’nti. Tena vattabbo ‘‘passasī’’ti. ‘‘Āma passāmī’’ti. Āyatiṃ saṃvareyyāsīti evaṃ āpattipaṭiggaho paṭiggaho nāma.

‘‘Suṇantu me, āyasmantā āvāsikā. Yadāyasmantānaṃ pattakallaṃ, idāni uposathaṃ kareyyāma, pātimokkhaṃ uddiseyyāma, āgame kāḷe pavāreyyāmā’’ti. Te ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhū bhaṇḍanakārakā kalahakārakā vivādakārakā bhassakārakā saṅghe adhikaraṇakārakā taṃ kāḷaṃ anuvaseyyuṃ, āvāsikena bhikkhunā byattena paṭibalena āvāsikā bhikkhū ñāpetabbā – ‘‘suṇantu me, āyasmantā āvāsikā. Yadāyasmantānaṃ pattakallaṃ, idāni uposathaṃ kareyyāma, pātimokkhaṃ uddiseyyāma, āgame juṇhe pavāreyyāmā’’ti evaṃ katā pavāraṇāpaccukkaḍḍhanā paccukkaḍḍhanā nāma.

Sabbeheva ekajjhaṃ sannipatitabbaṃ, sannipatitvā byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo – ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho amhākaṃ bhaṇḍanajātānaṃ kalahajātānaṃ vivādāpannānaṃ viharataṃ bahuṃ assāmaṇakaṃ ajjhāciṇṇaṃ bhāsitaparikkantaṃ. Sace mayaṃ imāhi āpattīhi aññamaññaṃ kāressāma, siyāpi taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ kakkhaḷattāya vāḷattāya bhedāya saṃvatteyya. Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho imaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ tiṇavatthārakena vūpasameyya ṭhapetvā thullavajjaṃ, ṭhapetvā gihipaṭisayutta’’nti evaṃ tiṇavatthārakasamathena katvā sabbapaṭhamā sabbasaṅgāhikañatti kammalakkhaṇaṃ nāma.

Tathā tato parā ekekasmiṃ pakkhe ekekaṃ katvā dve ñattiyo iti yathāvuttappabhedaṃ osāraṇaṃ nissāraṇaṃ…pe… kammalakkhaṇaññeva navamanti ñattikammaṃ imāni nava ṭhānāni gacchati.

Ñattidutiyakammaṭṭhānabhedepana vaḍḍhassa licchavino pattanikkujjanavasena khandhake vuttā nissāraṇā. Tasseva pattukkujjanavasena vuttā osāraṇā ca veditabbā.

Sīmāsammuti ticīvarena avippavāsasammuti, santhatasammuti, bhattuddesaka-senāsanaggāhāpaka-bhaṇḍāgārika-cīvarapaṭiggāhaka-cīvarabhājaka-yāgubhājakaphalabhājaka-khajjabhājaka-appamattakavissajjaka-sāṭiyaggāhāpaka-pattaggāhāpaka-ārāmikapesakasāmaṇerapesakasammutīti etāsaṃ sammutīnaṃ vasena sammuti veditabbā. Kathinacīvaradānamatakacīvaradānavasena dānaṃ veditabbaṃ.

Kathinuddhāravasena uddhāro veditabbo. Kuṭivatthuvihāravatthudesanāvasena desanā veditabbā. Yā pana tiṇavatthārakasamathe sabbasaṅgāhikañattiñca ekekasmiṃ pakkhe ekekaṃ ñattiñcāti tisso ñattiyo ṭhapetvā puna ekasmiṃ pakkhe ekā, ekasmiṃ pakkhe ekāti dve ñattidutiyakammavācā vuttā, tāsaṃ vasena kammalakkhaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Iti ñattidutiyakammaṃ imāni satta ṭhānāni gacchati.

Ñatticatutthakammaṭṭhānabhedepana tajjanīyakammādīnaṃ sattannaṃ kammānaṃ vasena nissāraṇā, tesaṃyeva ca kammānaṃ paṭippassambhanavasena osāraṇā veditabbā. Bhikkhunovādakasammutivasena sammuti veditabbā. Parivāsadānamānattadānavasena dānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Mūlāyapaṭikassanakammavasena niggaho veditabbo. ‘‘Ukkhittānuvattikā aṭṭha, yāvatatiyakā ariṭṭho caṇḍakāḷī ca ime te yāvatatiyakā’’ti imāsaṃ ekādasannaṃ samanubhāsanānaṃ vasena samanubhāsanā veditabbā. Upasampadākammaabbhānakammavasena pana kammalakkhaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Iti ñatticatutthakammaṃ imāni satta ṭhānāni gacchati.

497.Iti kammāni ca kammavipattiñca vipattivirahitānaṃ kammānaṃ ṭhānapabhedagamanañca dassetvā idāni tesaṃ kammānaṃ kārakassa saṅghassa paricchedaṃ dassento puna‘‘catuvaggakaraṇe kamme’’tiādimāha. Tassattho parisato kammavipattivaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabboti.

Kammavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Atthavasavaggādivaṇṇanā

498.Idāni yāni tāni tesaṃ kammānaṃ vatthubhūtāni sikkhāpadāni, tesaṃ paññattiyaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘dve atthavase paṭiccā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthadiṭṭhadhammikānaṃ verānaṃ saṃvarāyāti pāṇātipātādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ diṭṭhadhammikaverānaṃ saṃvaratthāya pidahanatthāya.Samparāyikānaṃ verānaṃ paṭighātāyāti vipākadukkhasaṅkhātānaṃ samparāyikaverānaṃ paṭighātatthāya, samucchedanatthāya anuppajjanatthāya.Diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ vajjānaṃ saṃvarāyāti tesaṃyeva pañcannaṃ verānaṃ saṃvaratthāya.Samparāyikānaṃ vajjānanti tesaṃyeva vipākadukkhānaṃ. Vipākadukkhāneva hi idha vajjanīyabhāvato vajjānīti vuttāni.Diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ bhayānanti garahā upavādo tajjanīyādīni kammāni uposathapavāraṇānaṃ ṭhapanaṃ akittipakāsanīyakammanti etāni diṭṭhadhammikabhayāni nāma, etesaṃ saṃvaratthāya.Samparāyikabhayānipana vipākadukkhāniyeva, tesaṃ paṭighātatthāya.Diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ akusalānanti pañcaveradasaakusalakammapathappabhedānaṃ akusalānaṃ saṃvaratthāya. Vipākadukkhāneva pana akkhamaṭṭhenasamparāyikaakusalānīti vuccanti, tesaṃ paṭighātatthāya.Gihīnaṃ anukampāyāti agārikānaṃ saddhārakkhaṇavasena anukampanatthāya.Pāpicchānaṃ pakkhupacchedāyāti pāpicchapuggalānaṃ gaṇabandhabhedanatthāya gaṇabhojanasikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānameva. Yañhettha vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanāyameva vuttanti.

Sikkhāpadesu atthavasena vaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

499.Pātimokkhādīsupātimokkhuddesoti bhikkhūnaṃ pañcavidho bhikkhunīnaṃ catubbidho. Parivāsadānādīsuosāraṇīyaṃ paññattanti aṭṭhārasasu vā tecattālīsāya vā vattesu vattamānassa osāraṇīyaṃ paññattaṃ. Yena kammena osārīyati, taṃ kammaṃ paññattanti attho.Nissāraṇīyaṃ paññattanti bhaṇḍanakārakādayo yena kammena nissārīyanti, taṃ kammaṃ paññattanti attho.

500.Apaññattetiādīsuapaññatte paññattanti sattāpattikkhandhā kakusandhañca sammāsambuddhaṃ koṇāgamanañca kassapañca sammāsambuddhaṃ ṭhapetvā antarā kenaci apaññatte sikkhāpade paññattaṃ nāma. Makkaṭivatthuādivinītakathā sikkhāpade paññatte anupaññattaṃ nāma. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

Ānisaṃsavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

501.Idāni sabbasikkhāpadānaṃ ekekena ākārena navadhā saṅgahaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘nava saṅgahā’’tiādimāha. Tatthavatthusaṅgahoti vatthunā saṅgaho. Evaṃ sesesupi padattho veditabbo. Ayaṃ panettha atthayojanā – yasmā hi ekasikkhāpadampi avatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ natthi, tasmā sabbāni vatthunā saṅgahitānīti evaṃ tāva vatthusaṅgaho veditabbo.

Yasmā pana dve āpattikkhandhā sīlavipattiyā saṅgahitā, pañcāpattikkhandhā ācāravipattiyā, cha sikkhāpadāni ājīvavipattiyā saṅgahitāni, tasmā sabbānipi vipattiyā saṅgahitānīti evaṃ vipattisaṅgaho veditabbo.

Yasmā pana sattahāpattīhi muttaṃ ekasikkhāpadampi natthi, tasmā sabbāni āpattiyā saṅgahitānīti evaṃ āpattisaṅgaho veditabbo.

Sabbāni ca sattasu nagaresu paññattānīti nidānena saṅgahitānīti evaṃ nidānasaṅgaho veditabbo.

Yasmā pana ekasikkhāpadampi ajjhācārikapuggale asati paññattaṃ natthi, tasmā sabbāni puggalena saṅgahitānīti evaṃ puggalasaṅgaho veditabbo.

Sabbāni pana pañcahi ceva sattahi ca āpattikkhandhehi saṅgahitāni, sabbāni na vinā chahi samuṭṭhānehi samuṭṭhantīti samuṭṭhānena saṅgahitāni. Sabbāni ca catūsu adhikaraṇesu āpattādhikaraṇena saṅgahitāni. Sabbāni sattahi samathehi samathaṃ gacchantīti samathehi saṅgahitāni. Evamettha khandhasamuṭṭhānaadhikaraṇasamathasaṅgahāpi veditabbā. Sesaṃ pubbe vuttanayamevāti.

Samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya

Navasaṅgahitavaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Niṭṭhitā ca parivārassa anuttānatthapadavaṇṇanāti.

Nigamanakathā

Ettāvatā ca –

Ubhato vibhaṅgakhandhaka-parivāravibhattidesanaṃ nātho;

Samadhikasattavīsati-sahassamattena tassa ganthena;

Tatridaṃ samantapāsādikāya samantapāsādikattasmiṃ –

Ācariyaparamparato, nidānavatthuppabhedadīpanato;

Byañjanaparisodhanato, padatthato pāḷiyojanakkamato;

Sampassataṃ na dissati, kiñci apāsādikaṃ yato ettha;

Saṃvaṇṇanā pavattā, vinayassa vineyyadamanakusalena;

Mahāaṭṭhakathañceva, mahāpaccarimevaca;

Buddhamittoti nāmena, vissutassa yasassino;

Mahāmeghavanuyyāne, bhūmibhāge patiṭṭhito;

Yaṃ tassa dakkhiṇe bhāge, padhānagharamuttamaṃ;

Uḷārakulasambhūto, saṅghupaṭṭhāyako sadā;

Mahānigamasāmīti, vissuto tattha kārayi;

Sītacchāyatarūpetaṃ, sampannasalilāsayaṃ;

With trees providing cool shade, and endowed with abundant ponds;
Residing there in the palace, the lord of the great city.

buddhasirivhayaṃ;

Named Buddhasiri;
The Vinaya commentary, which having been undertaken, has been successfully completed.

Pālayantassa sakalaṃ, laṅkādīpaṃ nirabbudaṃ;

While protecting the entire island of Laṅkā without misfortune;
By the glorious Siripāla.

Samavīsatime kheme, jayasaṃvacchare ayaṃ;

In the safe twentieth, victorious year, this was begun;
Having been started in the twenty-first, it reached completion.

Upaddavā kule loke, nirupaddavato ayaṃ;

With misfortunes in the family and the world, yet free from misfortune;
In just one year, it came to its conclusion.

Evaṃ sabbassa lokassa, niṭṭhaṃ dhammūpasaṃhitā;

Thus, for the welfare of the whole world, with a compilation of Dhamma;
May all beginnings proceed swiftly, and all be free from misfortune.

Ciraṭṭhitatthaṃ dhammassa, karontena mayā imaṃ;

By me, making this for the long lasting of the Dhamma;
And the merit accumulated through great respect for the true Dhamma.

Sabbassa ānubhāvena, tassa sabbepi pāṇino;

By the power of all that, may all beings;
Become enjoyers of the true Dhamma, the essence of the Dhamma-king.

Ciraṃ tiṭṭhatu saddhammo, kāle vassaṃ ciraṃ pajaṃ;

May the true Dhamma last long, may the rains come in season, may the people prosper long;
May the Deva satisfy (them) with the Dhamma, may the king protect the earth.

buddhaghosoti garūhi gahitanāmadheyyena therena katā ayaṃsamantapāsādikānāma vinayasaṃvaṇṇanā –

This Vinaya commentary called Samantapāsādikā, was made by the Elder whose name is accepted by teachers as Buddhaghosa

Tāva tiṭṭhatu lokasmiṃ, lokanittharaṇesinaṃ;

So long may it stand in the world, for those seeking to cross the world;
Showing to the sons of good families, the way to purity of virtue.

Yāva buddhoti nāmampi, suddhacittassa tādino;

As long as even the name "Buddha" of the pure-minded, steadfast one;
Of the world's chief, the great sage, endures in the world.

Samantapāsādikā nāma

The Samantapāsādikā by name

Vinaya-aṭṭhakathā niṭṭhitā.

The Vinaya-aṭṭhakathā is finished.